Service Manual L550 L580 2plus2 PDF

en
Service Manual
(20
Wheel loader
(10 points)
L550 - L580 2plus2
(10
en
Service Manual
(20
Wheel loader
(10 points)
L550 - L580 2plus2
(10
Address
Address: LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH
Dr. Hans Liebherr Strae 4

A 5500 BISCHOFSHOFEN
Product ID
Manufacturer: LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH
Product group: Wheel loader
Type: L550 L556 L566 L576 L580
Production number: 456 454 460 457 459
Serial number: 16978 15653 14171 14171 14171
Document ID
Order number: 1035 3357
Author: LBH / Technical Documentation Department
Document version: 01
Manual number:
Owner:
Preface
Intended readership This service manual is addressed to anyone whose task it is to ensure that the
machines are ready for everyday use. This especially includes mechanics and
workshop staff of Liebherr dealers and branches.
Contents The first chapter contains information on safety regulations and on the
special tools needed for maintenance and repairs.
Chapter 2 gives you an overview of all the most important technical data of
the machine as a whole and its individual assemblies.
Next comes the maintenance chapter, with the maintenance and inspection
schedule, the testing and adjustment checklists, lubrication charts, description
of maintenance tasks, testing and adjustment tasks and specifications of fuel
and lubricants.
The technical description of the machine is in the following chapters,
structured according to fifteen function groups. The layout, function and
technical data of the groups, components and parts are explained.
Chapter 19 contains information on troubleshooting, the service code table
and a description of the SCULI service software.
Chapter 20 will be gradually updated with the latest options.
Instructions on use This manual describes several types and versions of machines. The
information generally applies to the types and serial numbers stated at the
bottom of the page. The exception to this is information which only applies to
specific types and serial numbers, which are stated at the beginning of the
section concerned (for example technical data of parts).
Where possible, the ID numbers of parts and components are stated in
the heading.
This manual is available in German, English, French, Spanish and Italian.
Working instructions Always follow the safety regulations whenever you work on the machine.
You will find a reference to this in the General Information section.
In order to perform these tasks you need a complete set of basic tools
andcertain special tools, all in perfect working order. All tasks require
absolute cleanliness.
Replace seals such as O-rings and surface seals during repairs.
General information 1
Product description 2
Maintenance 3
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear 4
Cooling system 5
Travel hydraulics 6
Working hydraulics 7
Steering system 8
Brake system 9
Electrical system 10
Transfer gear 11
Axles and cardan shaft 12
Machine frame and ballast weight 13
Central lubrication system 14
Coverings and access 15
Cab, heating and air-conditioning 16
Lift arms and quick-change device 17
Equipment and accessories 18
Service codes and diagnosis 19
Options 20
1 General Informations
1.0
Chapter contents
1 General Informations........................................................... 1.0-1
1.1 Safety regulations ...........................................................................1.1-1

1.1.1 Introduction...........................................................................1.1-1
1.1.2 Overview of the safety regulations .......................................1.1-2
1.2 Special tools for maintenance and repair work...............................1.2-1

1.2.1 Special tools in general ........................................................1.2-1
1.2.2 Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines..............................1.2-2
1.2.3 Special tools for hydraulic cylinders .....................................1.2-3
1.2.4 Special tools for electronics..................................................1.2-3
1.2.5 Special tools for axles...........................................................1.2-3
1.2.6 Special tools for the transmission.........................................1.2-5
1.2.7 Central lubrication system ....................................................1.2-5
1.2.8 Special tools for the air conditioning system ........................1.2-5
1.2.9 Special tools for cab windows ..............................................1.2-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 Copyright by 1.0-1 o f 2
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171 MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171
General Informations Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.0-2 o f 2 Copyright by L550 - 456 / from 16978 L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual General Informations
Safety regulations
1.1 Safety regulations

Working on the machine poses safety risks to the operator, driver or
maintenance engineers. You can prevent risks and accidents by regularly
reading and observing the various safety instructions.
This is especially important for personnel who only occasionally work on the
machine, for example, carrying out rigging or maintenance work. The safety
regulations listed below, if conscientiously followed, will ensure your own
safety and that of others, and will prevent the machine from being damaged.
Whenever tasks which could cause danger to personnel or damage to the
machine are described, the necessary safety precautions are explained in
this manual.
These are indicated by the headings Danger, Warning or Caution.
1.1.1 Introduction
1. The symbols below have the following meanings:
Danger
Risk of personal injury.
Denotes an impending dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury
or death if not avoided.
! Note the warning.
Warning
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury or
death if not avoided.
! Note the warning.
Caution
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to slight injury if
not avoided.
! Note the warning.
Caution
Risk of damage to the machine.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Denotes actions or circumstances which may result in damage to the machine.

! Note the warning.
Note
Useful information
Denotes information on correctly handling the machine and the lubricants
and fuels used.
! Observe the instructions.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Safety regulations
2. Observance of these instructions does not exempt you from following

any additional rules and guidelines that may apply
The following should also be observed:
The safety rules in force at the operating site
Legally enforceable road traffic regulations
Guidelines issued by trade associations
1.1.2 Overview of the safety regulations

A detailed description of these can be read in the relevant section of the
safety regulations chapter in the operating manual.
The following sections are included in the operating manual:
1 Introduction
2 General safety regulations
3 Proper use
4 Decals on the machine
5 Instructions on preventing crushing injuries and burns
6 Instructions on preventing fires and explosions
7 Safety instructions for start-up
8 Safety precautions during start-up
9 Instructions for safe working
10 Safety instructions for driving on slopes
11 Parking safely
12 Transporting the machine safely
13 Towing the machine safely
14 Measures for ensuring safe maintenance
15 Safety instructions for working on machines with hydro accumulators
16 Safety instructions for welding work on the machine
17 Instructions for working safely on the working attachment
18 Safety instructions for transporting the machine by crane
19 Safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines
20 Attachments and accessories
21 Protection against vibrations
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Special tools for maintenance and repair work
1.2 Special tools for maintenance and

repair work
1.2.1 Special tools in general
Description ID no. Use Remarks
For checking the acid concentration
Anti-freeze and battery tester 7408922 All wheel loaders
(battery charging state) and anti-freeze
24 volt vacuum pump 7408148 All wheel loaders For preventing oil loss
Filling and testing device
8145359 All wheel loaders For checking the hydro accumulator
with case
Manometer 0 - 40 bar 7361288 All wheel loaders For checking the hydraulic pressure
Manometer connection 7002436 All wheel loaders Connection for the manometer
High pressure hose 1500 mm 7002475 All wheel loaders High pressure hose for manometer
High pressure hose 4000 mm 7009134 All wheel loaders High pressure hose for manometer
Screw connection M 10 x 1 5005180 All wheel loaders For checking the hydraulic pressure
Draining hose 7005660 All wheel loaders For draining oil via a drain valve
Drain piece 7402657 All wheel loaders For the drain hose
For securing the valves on the variable
Safety cap 10 mm 7009315 All wheel loaders
adjustment motor
Safety cap 13 mm 7615515 All wheel loaders For securing the valves on the pumps
For securing the valves on the
Safety cap 17 mm 7622068 All wheel loaders
control block
USB dongle 10333608 L550 - L580 With SERVICE authorisation
For adjusting the travel hydraulics, and
Diagnostic data cable 10035410 L550 - L580
testing the electrical system and options
For communicating with the wheel
Adapter cable RS232<>USB 693190714 All wheel loaders loader electronics if there is an error with
the RS232 interface on the notebook.
SDCF-03 memory card adapter 10223098 L550 - L580 For writing to the compact flash card
Blank compact flash card.
Compact flash card 10223095 L550 - L580
Data medium for application software.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
1.2.2 Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines

For installing the mass equalisation
Mandrel 9078118 L550 - L556 engine
shafts (D 934)
For installing the mass equalisation
Mandrel 9078119 L550 - L556 engine
shafts (D 934)
For installing and removing the
Rotary angle device 0524062 L550 - L580 engine
cylinder head
For checking projection of the
Holder 0528464 L550 - L580 engine
cylinder bushings
For checking projection of the
Dial gauge holder 10023885 L550 - L580 engine
cylinder bushings
Compression tester 8008782 L550 - L580 engine For checking the compression
Compression tester insert 10012817 L550 - L580 engine For checking the compression
Adapter 10297211 L550 - L580 engine For checking the compression
Claw 10117612 L550 - L580 engine For checking the compression
For installing and removing the pistons
Engine turner 0524045 L550 - L580 engine
and rods
Holder 0528464 L550 - L580 engine
and rods
Piston strap 8000592 L550 - L580 engine
and rods
Rotary angle device 0524062 L550 - L580 engine
and rods
For installing and removing the piston
Piston ring tongs 7009319 L550 - L580 engine
rings
Extractor tool 0526855 L550 - L580 engine
cylinder bushing
Extractor tool 0528462 L550 - L580 engine
cylinder bushing
For installing and removing
Mounting pin 0528470 L550 - L580 engine
crankshaft attachments
For installing and removing the front
Hook and lever 7019858 L550 - L580 engine
crankshaft seal
For installing and removing the front
Inserter 10116249 L550 - L580 engine
crankshaft seal
Mounting pin 0528470 L550 - L580 engine For installing and removing the flywheel
For installing and removing the rear
Inserter 10116250 L550 - L580 engine
crankshaft seal
Special spanner 10020852 L550 - L580 engine
injection line
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007

Adapter 0524029 L550 - L580 engine
pressure pipe port and injection nozzles
Adapter 10220689 L550 - L580 engine
Hammer puller 0524072 L550 - L580 engine
For installing and removing the injection
Pusher tube 10289319 L550 - L580 engine
pump and roller tappet
For installing and removing the injection
Pusher tube 10289320 L550 - L580 engine
pump and roller tappet
Mounting pin 0528472 L550 - L580 engine
exhaust pipe
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Safety regulations
1.2.3 Special tools for hydraulic cylinders

Assembly sleeve 80 mm 9227165 L550, L556 steering cylinder For fitting the seals
L566, L576, L580
Assembly sleeve 90 mm 9227161 For fitting the seals
steering cylinder
Assembly sleeve 130 mm 9998624 L550, L556 lift cylinder For fitting the seals
L550, L556 tilt cylinder
Assembly sleeve 150 mm 9998622 For fitting the seals
L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder
Assembly sleeve 170 mm 9107931 L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder For fitting the seals
Expansion sleeve 80 mm 9227166 L550, L556 steering cylinder For fitting the seals
L566, L576, L580
Expansion sleeve 90 mm 9227162 For fitting the seals
steering cylinder
Expansion sleeve 130 mm 9110408 L550, L556 lift cylinder For fitting the seals
L550, L556 tilt cylinder
Expansion sleeve 150 mm 9110410 For fitting the seals
L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder
Expansion sleeve 170 mm 9110412 L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder For fitting the seals
Bearing head assembly
9210219 L550, L556 steering cylinder For fitting the piston rod bearing
spanner 70/8 mm
Bearing head assembly L566, L576, L580
9239572 For fitting the piston rod bearing
spanner 75/12 mm steering cylinder
1.2.4 Special tools for electronics

For measuring voltage, current,
Digital multimeter 8502956 All wheel loaders
resistance and frequency
Test probe, red 884191214 All wheel loaders For testing DEUTSCH connectors
Test probe, black 884191114 All wheel loaders For testing DEUTSCH connectors
Magnet tester 8145743 All wheel loaders For checking solenoid valves
Stripping and crimping pliers
8460263 All wheel loaders For MATE-N-LOK connectors
0.5 6.0 mm2
Crimping pliers 8503647 All wheel loaders For DEUTSCH connectors
Wedge extractor tool 7026267 All wheel loaders For DEUTSCH connectors
Extraction tool size 12 for
8145674 All wheel loaders For DEUTSCH connectors
pin and bushing
pin and bushing
pin and bushing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.2.5 Special tools for axles

For finding leaks on
Hand pump 8145835 L550 - L580 axles
disc brakes
For installing and removing the snap
Collet 7009536 L550 - L576 axles
ring in the planetary drive
For attaching and detaching the
Spring hook 8145767 L550 - L576 axles
return springs
L556 front axle
Slip bushing 260 mm 7017559 For fitting the brake piston
L556 rear axle
L566, L576 front axle
Slip bushing 315 mm 7017556 For fitting the brake piston
L566, L576 rear axle
L566 - 460 / from 14171

Slip bushing
7017558 L556 rear axle For fitting ring gear carriers
M 90 x 1.5 mm
Slip bushing L556 front axle
7017557 For fitting ring gear carriers
M 110 x 1.5 mm L566, L576 rear axle
Slip bushing
7017555 L566, L576 front axle For fitting ring gear carriers
M 130 x 1.5 mm
Handle 7017566 L550 - L576 axles Handle for mounting tool
Handle 7011518 L550 - L576 axles Handle for various mounting tools
Mounting tool 7017563 L556 rear axle For fitting cartridge seal ring
L556, L566, L576 front axle;
Mounting tool 7017560 For fitting cartridge seal ring
Centring bracket 7013775 L556 - L576 axles For groove nut spanner
Groove nut spanner 111 mm 7009537 L556 rear axle For fitting the grooved nuts
L556 front axle
Groove nut spanner 140 mm 7011251 For fitting the grooved nuts
Groove nut spanner 169 mm 7013774 L566, L576 front axle For fitting the grooved nuts
Measuring screw L556 front axle For measuring wear on the
7019556
M 16 x 1.5 L556, L566, L576 rear axle brake discs
Measuring screw L566, L576, L580 front axle; For measuring wear on the
8145771
M 16 x 1.5 L580 rear axle brake discs
Clamp fork 7011522 L556 - L580 axles For fitting the drive flange
Mounting tool 7013922 L556 - L580 axles For fitting the shaft seal ring
Slotted nut spanner For fitting the grooved nuts on the
10017840 L550 - L576 axles
81 mm axle shaft
Mounting tool For fitting the dust protection
7624271 L550 axles, MT-L 3085
(used with grip 7011518) axle insert
For fitting the shaft seal ring
Mounting tool 7624272 L550 axles, MT-L 3085
axle insert
L550 - L576 axles
Centring bracket 10008138 For detaching the output
MT-L 3085-3105
L550 MT-L 3085 axles
Socket wrench 10008139 For detaching the output
L556 rear axle
L550 MT-L 3085 front axle
Socket wrench 10218794 For detaching the output
L556 - L576 axles
For removing and fitting the
Clamp fork 10008140 L550 MT-L 3085 axles
drive pinion
Special tool kit for Contains the following items:
10286181 L580 Hercules axles
Hercules axles 10286183 - 10286198
Driver for lubrication and For fitting the lubrication and oil seal,
oil seal to be used with grip 10286788
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
3 bushing driver with guide For installing bushing,

and grip including grip 10286788
For fitting the outer lip seal, to be
Grip for seal driver and shell 10286788 L580 Hercules axles
used with appropriate driver
For fitting the inner lip seal, to be
Driver for inner lip seal 10286189 L580 Hercules axles
used with grip 10286788
Driver for wear bushing
10286190 L580 Hercules axles For installing the wear bushing
with guide
For removing and fitting the
Grooved nut socket 10286192 L580 Hercules axles
grooved nuts
Seal holder installation tool 10286193 L580 Hercules axles For fitting the seal holder
Driver for oil bearing For installing the bearing casings,
casings, bevel gear bevel gear
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Safety regulations

Driver for grease seal For fitting the grease seal and disc, to
and disc be used with grip 10286788
For testing the rolling torque of the
Rolling apparatus 10286196 L580 Hercules axles
wheel hubs
Lifting tackle 10286197 L580 Hercules axles For removing the wheel hub
Installation tool for
10286198 L580 Hercules axles For fitting the Lifetime seal
Lifetime seal
1.2.6 Special tools for the transmission

For loosening and tightening the
Fixing spanner 10016179 L550 - L580
grooved nut on the coupling 1
For loosening and tightening the
Special socket 10016180 L550 - L580
grooved nut on the coupling 1
For removing and attaching the snap
Mounting tool 10016181 L550 - L580
ring on the couplings
1.2.7 Central lubrication system

For quickly filling the BEKA Max
BEKA Max filling press 10009239 All wheel loaders
reservoir
For quickly filling the Groeneveld
Groeneveld filling press 10333342 All wheel loaders
reservoir
Filling connection 7029283 All wheel loaders For filling the reservoir
Grneveld central lubrication For inspecting the
7624289 All wheel loaders
data cable central lubrication system
Grneveld central lubrication For inspecting the
7624290 All wheel loaders
plug adapter central lubrication system
1.2.8 Special tools for the air conditioning system

For evacuating the air
Vacuum pump 7027552 All wheel loaders
conditioning system
For testing, evacuating and filling the air
4-valve test fitting 7027558 All wheel loaders
conditioning system
Filling hose, blue 1500 mm 7027553 All wheel loaders For the test fitting
Filling hose, yellow 1500 mm 7027554 All wheel loaders For the test fitting
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Filling hose, red 1500 mm 7027555 All wheel loaders For the test fitting
Car coupling 253a 7027556 All wheel loaders For the test fitting
Car coupling 254a 7027557 All wheel loaders For the test fitting
1.2.9 Special tools for cab windows

Complete tool box with
10021147 All wheel loaders For installing and removing windows
suction pads
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
2 Production description
2.0
Chapter contents
2 Production description......................................................... 2.0-1
2.1 Technical data ................................................................................2.1-1

2.1.1 Complete machine................................................................2.1-1
2.1.2 Diesel engine and pump distributor gear..............................2.1-8
2.1.3 Cooling system ...................................................................2.1-12
2.1.4 Travel hydraulics ................................................................2.1-13
2.1.5 Working hydraulics .............................................................2.1-16
2.1.6 Steering system..................................................................2.1-20
2.1.7 Brake system......................................................................2.1-22
2.1.8 Electrical system.................................................................2.1-24
2.1.9 Transmission ......................................................................2.1-25
2.1.10 Axles and cardan shaft .......................................................2.1-26
2.1.11 Machine frame and ballast weight......................................2.1-30
2.1.12 Automatic central lubrication system..................................2.1-30
2.1.13 Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................2.1-32
2.1.14 Lift arms and quick-change device.....................................2.1-33
2.1.15 Equipment and accessories ...............................................2.1-36
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Production description Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Production description
Technical data
2.1 Technical data

2.1.1 Complete machine
Wheel loader with Z lift arms

Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:
With Z lift arms (2600 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 23.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.
Description Value Unit

Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546 3.2 m
Bucket width 2700 mm
Specific material weight 1.8 t/m
A Dump height at maximum lifting height 2882 mm
and 45 tilt-out angle
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
B Dumping height 3500 mm

C Maximum bucket base height 3645 mm
D Maximum bucket pivot height 3915 mm
E Maximum bucket top edge height 5395 mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and 1095 mm
45 tilt-out angle
G Digging depth 85 mm
H Height above cab 3365 mm
I Height above exhaust 2985 mm
J Ground clearance 530 mm
K Wheel base 3280 mm
L Overall length 8220 mm
Turning radius over bucket outer edge 6420 mm
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 Copyright by 2.1-1 o f 3 8
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

Lifting force (SAE) 185 kN
Breakout force (SAE) 125 kN
Tipping load when straight 13205 kg
Tipping load articulated at 37 11865 kg
Angle of articulation (to each side) 40
Operating weight 16525 kg
Tractive force 122.6 kN
Travel speed in travel range 1, 0 - 10 km/h
forward and reverse
forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A1-2 0 - 20 km/h
(automatic), forward and reverse
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA 69 dB(A)
according to ISO 6396

Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2.1-2 o f 3 8 Copyright by L550 - 456 / from 16978 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

45 tilt-out angle
forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range 2. 0 - 20 km/h
forward and reverse
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007


Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

Bucket capacity as per DIN 7546 4.0 m
45 tilt-out angle
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Travel speed in travel range 1, forward 0 - 10 km/h
and reverse
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

and reverse

Valid for: L576 - 457 / from 14171
Tipping loads and weights include, all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

45 tilt-out angle
and reverse
and reverse

Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

45 tilt-out angle
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

and reverse
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

and reverse
2.1.2 Diesel engine and pump distributor gear
Diesel engine
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978; ID 9080542
Engine model D934 S A6
Number of cylinders 4
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Capacity 6360 cm
Cylinder bore 122 mm
Stroke 136 mm
Rated power as per ISO 9249 130 / 190 kW / PS
Rated speed 2000 min-1
Maximum torque at 1500 min-1 828 Nm
Lower idle speed 90010 min-1
Upper idle speed 206510 min-1
Start of delivery before TDC See type plate
Combustion pressure 20 - 28 bar
Injection nozzle opening pressure 315 - 340 bar
Inlet valve play (cold) 0.3 mm
Outlet valve play (cold) 0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel Anticlockwise
Number of teeth on flywheel gear 147
Control thermostat 79 C
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Longitudinal / traverse inclinability 45 / 45

Injectors UP20PLD
Control LHECU PLD
Starter operating voltage 24 V
Starter power consumption 6.6 kW
Alternator voltage output 28 V
Alternator current output 80 A
Turbocharger KKK K27
Auxiliary power take-off transmission 1 : 1.1515
Weight 800 kg
Emission thresholds comply with EU RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

Engine model D934 L A6
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Capacity 7010 cm
Stroke 150 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at Anticlockwise
flywheel
Injectors UP20PLD
Control LH-ECU-UP/CR
Weight 980 kg

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Capacity 10520 cm
Stroke 150 mm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

Direction of rotation, looking Anticlockwise
at flywheel
Injectors UP20PLD
Weight 1180 kg
Valid for: L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10116961
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Capacity 10520 cm
Stroke 150 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Combustion pressure 22 34 bar
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel Anticlockwise
Injectors UP20PLD
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

Weight 1180 kg
Fuel system
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Tank capacity, FULL 300 l
Tank capacity, RESERVE 50 l
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Tank capacity, FULL 400 l
Tank capacity, RESERVE 70 l
Fuel separator
Filter insert grade 10 m
Fuel fine filter

Filtration grade 2 m
Refuelling pump (optional)

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Flow rate 50 l/min

Current consumption 15 A
Power 360 W
Protection class IP 44
Max. duty cycle 15 minutes
Fuse 20 A
Max. suction height 4 m
Air filter vacuum switch

Air filter contamination vacuum switch 50 mbar
activation point
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Coupling
Type 466/233 NGT
Coupling
Type 345/254 NGT
Pump distributor gear

Type PVG 300 B 341
Input direction Clockwise
Output direction Anticlockwise
Transmission ratio for travel 0.7868
hydraulics pump
Transmission ratio for working and 0.7868
steering hydraulics pump
Type PVG 350 B 384
Input direction Clockwise
Output direction Anticlockwise
Transmission ratio for travel 0.808
hydraulics pump
Transmission ratio for working and 0.865
steering hydraulics pump
2.1.3 Cooling system
Gear pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Capacity 14 cm
Rotary speed at rated engine speed 3030 min-1
Gear motor
Gear motor displacement 19 cm
Gear motor direction of rotation (looking Clockwise
towards shaft)
Pressure relief valve 175 10 bar
Coil resistance 4.7 Ohm
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

Screw tightening torque 124 41 Nm
Spanner size 41 mm
Temperature sensor
Measuring range min. -30 C
max. 130 C
Resistance at 0 C 1000 Ohm
Screw thread M 14 x 1.5
Max. tightening torque 30 Nm
Plug connection Bosch Jet plug,
2-pin (Gold contacts)
2.1.4 Travel hydraulics
Variable displacement pump

Control type EZ
Maximum capacity 90 cm
Flow rate at rated speed 222 l/min
Maximum swivel angle (both sides) 20
Speed (at rated speed) 2542 min-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Power L550 111 kW

Power L556 122 kW
Replenishing pump capacity 19.6 cm
Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed) 46 l/min
Inlet restrictor 1.8 mm
Travel direction solenoid voltage 24 V
Travel direction solenoid current consumption 1.1 A
Travel direction solenoid resistance 22 Ohm
Control pressure proportional valve resistance 14 Ohm
Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed 311 bar
High pressure at 1400 min-1 35010 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

-1
High pressure at 1200 min 29010 bar
Pressure relief and replenishing valves 47010 bar
Pressure cut-off 4305 bar
Weight 60 kg
Control type EZ
Maximum swivel angle (both sides) 20
Speed (at rated speed) 2475 min-1
Power L566 160 kW
Power L576, L580 171 kW
Replenishing pump capacity 28.3 cm
Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed) 62 l/min
Inlet restrictor 2.2 mm
Travel direction solenoid voltage 24 V
Travel direction solenoid current consumption 1.1 A
Travel direction solenoid resistance 22 Ohm
Control pressure proportional valve resistance 14 Ohm
Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed 341 bar
-1
High pressure at 1400 min 33010 bar
Pressure relief and replenishing valves 47010 bar
Weight 75 kg
Variable displacement motor 1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Control type EP
Maximum displacement 80 cm
Maximum swivel angel 25
Minimum swivel angle 0
Maximum speed 5900 min-1
Torque (p 400 bar) 489 Nm
Maximum discharge valve capacity 20 l/min
Discharge valve orifice diameter 3.0 mm
Weight 34 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Control type EP
Weight 47 kg

Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
Control type EP
Weight 34 kg
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Control type EP
Weight 47 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Control type EP
Weight 60 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Motor scavenging pump

Capacity 11 cm
Speed at rated speed 3030 min-1
2.1.5 Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump

Control type LRDS
Power 70 KW
Flow regulator (delta p) 222 bar
Power controller start of regulation 18010 bar
Weight 53 kg
Control type LRDS
Capacity 130 cm
Power 87 kW
Power controller start of regulation 18010 bar
Weight 66 kg
Control block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Spool valve diameter 25 mm

Piston stroke, both sides 11 mm
Lift arm up/down control piston flow 240 / 160 l/min
Tilt out/in control piston flow 160 / 210 l/min
Primary pressure relief valve 3605 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt in 3805 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out 3805 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / lift 3805 bar
LS pressure cut-off L550 2905 bar
L556 3305 bar
Pressure relief valve pre-tension 81 bar
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data

Float position/ride control solenoid
30 Ohm
valve resistance
Weight 40 kg
Spool valve diameter 25 mm
Piston stroke, both sides 11 mm
Lift arm up/down control piston flow 300 / 170 l/min
Tilt out/in control piston flow 180 / 200 l/min
Primary pressure relief valve 3805 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt-in 4005 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out 4005 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / lift 4205 bar
LS pressure cut-off 3505 bar
Pressure relief valve pre-tension 81 bar
Float position/ride control solenoid
30 Ohm
valve resistance
Weight 40 kg
Pilot control device

Retaining solenoid voltage 12 V
Retaining solenoid current consumption 0.35 A
Retaining solenoid resistance 70 Ohm
Weight 5.7 kg
Pilot control solenoid valve

Current consumption 0.9 A
Resistance 30 Ohm
Pilot control hydro accumulator

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for: ID 7622 448

Hydro accumulator volume 320 cm
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling) 15 bar
Float position pressure switch

Switch type Normally open
Switch point, rising 231 bar
Thread M 12 x 1.5 mm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Stabilisation module
Control piston diameter 16 mm
Cut-off pressure (LFD off) 12020 bar
Safety valve 33010 bar
Restrictor check valve diameter 2.0 / 0.4 mm
Solenoid valve current consumption 0.6 A
Solenoid valve resistance 40 Ohm
Weight 13 kg
Ride control hydro accumulator

Number of hydro accumulators 2 Qty.
L550, L556
L566, L566, L576
Oil filling 350 cm
Ride control pressure switch

Switch type N/C
Switch point, rising 10 1 bar
Lift cylinder
Valid for L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 458
Piston diameter 130 mm
Rod diameter 80 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Stroke length 745 mm

Minimum installation length 1245 mm
Weight 136 kg
Lifting at rated load 5.6 seconds
Lowering empty 2.7 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque 285 Nm
(hex screws)
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171; L574 - 457 / from 14171;
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9959 881
Rod diameter 80 mm
Weight 165 kg
Lifting at rated load 5.6 seconds
Lowering empty 3.5 seconds
(hex screws)
Tilt cylinder
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9954 056
Rod diameter 80 mm
Weight 127 kg
Tilting out at rated load 2.3 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex 565 Nm
screws)
Rod diameter 90 mm
Weight 188 kg
(hex screws)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9903 394

Rod diameter 90 mm
Weight 198 kg
(hex screws)
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Return suction filter

Pre-tension valve 0.3 bar
Replenishing valve 0.04 bar
Replenishing strainer 160 m
Bypass valve 3.0 bar
Return strainer 80 m
Bleeder filter
Inlet opening pressure 0.03 bar
Outlet opening pressure 0.5 bar
Thread 3/4 inch
2.1.6 Steering system
Steering pump
Control type DFR
Swivel angle min. 0
max. 15.6
Power 39 kW
Weight 21 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 5716828

Control type DFR
Swivel angle min. 0
max. 15.6
Power 56 kW
Weight 33 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Servostat
Displacement 462 cm
Secondary pressure relief 28510 bar
Flow booster 1 : 1.6
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10113338
Displacement 588 cm
Secondary pressure relief 28510 bar
Flow booster 1 : 1.6
Steering cylinder
Rod diameter 40 mm
Weight 26.2 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9246849
Rod diameter 40 mm
Weight 29.5 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Steering damper hydro accumulator

Oil filling 180 cm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Emergency steering pump

Capacity 11 cm
Pressure relief valve 555 bar
Maximum current consumption 150 A
Weight 10 kg
Emergency steering pressure switch


Switching point 162 bar
Emergency steering check pressure switch


Switching point 162 bar
2.1.7 Brake system
Brake system gear pump

Capacity 4 cm
Flow rate at rated speed 12.1 l/min
Compact brake valve

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 1029 2360
Accumulator charge valve 1805 bar
activation pressure
deactivation pressure
Parking brake solenoid valve 0.6 A
current consumption
Parking brake solenoid valve resistance 40 Ohm
Maximum service brake pressure 955 bar
Pedal start angle 42
Pedal stop angle 15
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 1029 5965

activation pressure
deactivation pressure
Parking brake solenoid valve 0.6 A
current consumption
Parking brake solenoid valve resistance 40 Ohm
Maximum service brake pressure 705 bar
Pedal start angle 42
Pedal stop angle 15
Service brake hydro accumulator

Brake light button

Switch point, rising 50.5 bar
Accumulator charge pressure switch

Switch type N/C
Switching point, falling 120 5 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Disc brake
Gap 1.00.5 mm
Brake lining thickness, NEW 4.5 mm
Minimum brake lining thickness 1.0 mm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Parking brake hydro accumulator

Overspeed protection solenoid valve

Current consumption 0.9 A
Resistance 30 Ohm
2.1.8 Electrical system

System voltage 24 V
Battery voltage 12 V
Battery
Battery capacity 143 Ah
Acid density of charged battery 1.26-1.28 kg/l
Cold test current (at -18 C EN 60095-1) 950 A
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
ID 6132 03208
Battery capacity 170 Ah
Acid density of charged battery 1.26-1.28 kg/l
Cold test current (at -18 C EN 60095-1) 1000 A
Input / Output - module

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Protection class (with connector IP6K9K
plugged in)
Power supply (logical unit) 7.0 to 48.0 VDC
Operating temperature -40 to +85 C
Operation at ambient air pressure 500 to 1100 mbar
Weight 1.77 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Main electronics (master)

Protection class (with connector IP 65
plugged in)
Computing power 266 MHz
Power supply (logical unit) 9.0 to 60.0 VDC
Operating temperature -40 to +85 C
Operation at ambient air pressure 500 to 1100 mbar
Weight 3.5 kg
2.1.9 Transmission
Transmission
Number of gears 3
Transfer ratio in 1st gear 6.103
Transfer ratio in 2nd gear 3.033
Transfer ratio in 3rd gear 1.342
Weight (without oil) 285 kg
Drive shaft flange tightening torque 340 - 400 Nm
Tightening torque 30 - 35 Nm
Control valve block fastening screws
Gear shifting solenoid valves

Voltage 24 V
Current consumption 30050 mA
Resistance 936 Ohm
Speed sensors
Resistance 1050100 Ohm
Distance 0.30.2 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 1 60

Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 2 60
Number of teeth on power take-off speed 128
sensor
Gear pump
Capacity 16 cm
Flow rate at rated speed 40.8 l/min
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
2.1.10 Axles and cardan shaft
Front axle
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
Type MT-L 3085 -
Self-locking differential 45 %
Width 2000 mm
Differential nut tightening torque 700 Nm
Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque 2000+500 Nm
Wheel lug tightening torque 750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size 30 mm
Differential transmission 3.89
Wheel hub transmission 6.0
Overall transmission 23.33
Weight 816 kg
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Type MT-L 3095
Width 2000 mm
Weight 924 kg
Type MT-L3105
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Width 2230 mm
Weight 1174 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

Type SA 197 337 -
43 R 175
Width 2230 mm
Weight 1180 kg
Rear axle
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
Type MT-L 3085 -
Width 2000 mm
Weight 816 kg
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Type MT-L 3085
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Width 2000 mm
Weight 816 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171

Type MT-L 3095 -
Width 2230 mm
Swing angle 13
Weight 975 kg
Valid for: L576 - 473 / from 14171

Type MT-L 3105 -
Width 2230 mm
Swing angle 13
Weight 1174 kg
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

Type SA 197 478 -
37 R 118
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Width 2230 mm
Swing angle 13
Weight 1090 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Front drive shaft

Valid for: L550 - 4456 / from 16978
Min. length 1310 mm
Max. length 1500 mm
Flange tightening torque 125 Nm
Weight 38 kg
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Min. length 1430 mm
Max. length 1440 mm
Weight 72 kg
Min. length 1500 mm
Max. length 1610 mm
Weight 73 kg
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

Min. length 1545 mm
Max. length 1555 mm
Weight 75 kg
Rear drive shaft

Min. length 600 mm
Max. length 710 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Weight 16 kg
Min. length 765 mm
Max. length 875 mm
Weight 24 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
2.1.11 Machine frame and ballast weight
Ballast weight
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
Weight per ballast weight 614 kg
Material GG 10
M24 10.9 screw tightening torque 960 Nm
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Material GG 10
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171

Material GG 10
Material GG 10
2.1.12 Automatic central lubrication system
Central lubrication pump EP1

Flow per stroke 120 mm
Transfer medium Greases up to
NLGI class 2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Maximum flow pressure 280 bar

Operating temperature min. - 35 C
max. + 80 C
Power supply 24 V
Container size 4 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Progressive distributor
MX-F
Maximum operating pressure at input 300 bar
Temperature range min. -35 C
max. +100 C
Transfer medium Greases up to
NLGI class 2
MX-F 25
Flow per outlet 25 mm
Flow per element 50 mm
MX-F 45
MX-F 75
MX-F 105
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1

Default lubrication (cycles) 24 Cycles
Default cycle time 75% 40 min
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
2.1.13 Cab, heating and air-conditioning
Heating and ventilation

Rated voltage 24 V
Number of blower levels 6
Maximum fan current consumption 15.7 A
Maximum air flow 600 m/h
Heating power 11 kW
Air conditioning system

Refrigerant R134a
Refrigerant oil (PAG oil) ZXL 100 PG
Coolant quantity 1250+50 g
Cooling power 9.710% kW
Air conditioning compressor

Type SD7H15
Capacity 154.9 cm
Refrigerant oil (PAG oil) ZXL 100 PG
(SP 10)
Filling quantity 200 cm
Maximum current consumption 2.63 A
Weight without oil 6.9 kg
Condenser
Maximum air flow 4000 m/h
Heating power 9.71 kW
Test pressure 35 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Dryer collector unit

Contents 0.70 l
Leak test 30 bar
Dryer water consumption 16 g
Burst pressure 130 bar
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Pressure switch
Low pressure OFF 1.50.5 bar
Low pressure ON 3.5 bar
High pressure OFF 252 bar
High pressure ON 181.5 bar
Evaporator
Cooling power 9.7 kW
10%
Temperature sensor activation 5.5 C
temperature
Temperature sensor deactivation 4.510% C
temperature
2.1.14 Lift arms and quick-change device
Lift arm
Main dimensions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Length 1 bucket arm 2600 mm
Length 2 linkage 1267 mm
Length 3 connecting link assembly 718 mm
Weight of complete lift arms 1380 kg
(without cylinder)
Bucket arm weight 928 kg
Linkage weight 318 kg
Weight of connecting link assembly 56 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171

(without cylinder)
Valid for: L576 - 457 / from 14171

(without cylinder)
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

(without cylinder)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Quick-change device
Main dimensions
A system connection size 1000 mm
B width 1200 mm
H height 820 mm
T depth 450 mm
Weight 430 kg
A system connection size 1100 mm
B width 1370 mm
H height 1100 mm
T depth 620 mm
Weight 830 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data
2.1.15 Equipment and accessories
Standard bucket
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978

B bucket width 2700 mm
H height 1475 mm
L length with teeth 1630 mm
Bucket capacity 3.2 m
Weight 1305 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 III 8 Pc.
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

H height 1520 mm
Weight 1365 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 III 8 Pc.
Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171

H height 1610 mm
Weight 2080 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV 9 Pc.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
Valid for: L576 - 457 / from 14171

H height 1575 mm
Weight 2150 kg
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

H height 1675 mm
Weight 2340 kg
Forklift
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Prong length 1500 mm
L Length (fork carrier + prongs) 1860 mm
K Fork carrier width 2000 mm
H Height (fork carrier + prongs) 1040 mm
Weight (fork carrier + prongs) 740 kg
Prong length 1800 mm
L Length (fork carrier + prongs) 2220 mm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Technical data

K Fork carrier width 2050 mm
H Height (fork carrier + prongs) 1270 mm
Weight (fork carrier + prongs) 1160 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Maintenance
3.0
Chapter contents
3 Maintenance........................................................................ 3.0-1
3.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule ...........................................3.1-1
3.2 Testing and adjustment plan...........................................................3.2-1
3.3 Testing and adjustment checklists..................................................3.3-1
3.4 Lubrication chart and filling quantities ............................................3.4-1

3.4.1 Table of filling quantities .......................................................3.4-1
3.4.2 Lubrication charts .................................................................3.4-5
3.5 Maintenance tasks..........................................................................3.5-1

3.5.1 Preparatory tasks for maintenance ......................................3.5-1
3.5.2 Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the
machine ................................................................................3.5-5
3.5.3 Checking the machine for external damage.........................3.5-6
3.5.4 Making sure the bolted connections are tight.......................3.5-6
3.5.5 Sealing leaks ........................................................................3.5-6
3.5.6 Checking the engine oil level................................................3.5-6
3.5.7 Changing the engine oil........................................................3.5-7
3.5.8 Changing the diesel engine oil filter .....................................3.5-8
3.5.9 Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt .................................3.5-9
3.5.10 Checking / adjusting the engine valve play ..........................3.5-9
3.5.11 Checking the diesel engine heating flange ........................3.5-11
3.5.12 Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel .......3.5-12
3.5.13 Changing the engine oil separator filter insert....................3.5-12
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5.14 Checking the bearings and condition of the engine

control units ........................................................................3.5-13
3.5.15 Checking the state of sensors and cable connections .......3.5-13
3.5.16 Changing the fuel pre-filter .................................................3.5-13
3.5.17 Changing the fuel fine filter.................................................3.5-15
3.5.18 Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the
corresponding service code appears) ................................3.5-16
3.5.19 Bleeding the fuel system ....................................................3.5-16
3.5.20 Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel
tank .....................................................................................3.5-18
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance Service Manual
3.5.21 Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction
valve................................................................................... 3.5-19
3.5.22 Testing the air filter vacuum switch ................................... 3.5-19
3.5.23 Changing the air filter primary element when indicated
by the vacuum switch ........................................................ 3.5-20
3.5.24 Changing the air filter secondary element ......................... 3.5-21
3.5.25 Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting .... 3.5-22
3.5.26 Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting ........ 3.5-22
3.5.27 Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear................. 3.5-23
3.5.28 Changing the splitter box oil .............................................. 3.5-24
3.5.29 Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for
function, leaks and blockages............................................ 3.5-24
3.5.30 Checking and draining the soot particle filter
condensate separator ........................................................ 3.5-25
3.5.31 Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator ..... 3.5-26
3.5.32 Cleaning the soot particle filter .......................................... 3.5-27
3.5.33 Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor
concentration ..................................................................... 3.5-28
3.5.34 Cleaning the cooling system.............................................. 3.5-32
3.5.35 Changing the coolant......................................................... 3.5-33
3.5.36 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank........................ 3.5-35
3.5.37 Draining off condensate and sediment from the
hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-36
3.5.38 Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the
return strainer..................................................................... 3.5-36
3.5.39 Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the
hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-37
3.5.40 Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter ............... 3.5-38
3.5.41 Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter ......................... 3.5-38
3.5.42 Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal
joints and tappets............................................................... 3.5-39
3.5.43 Testing the steering ........................................................... 3.5-39
3.5.44 Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders ... 3.5-39
3.5.45 Testing the service brake and parking brake..................... 3.5-40
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5.46 Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings.. 3.5-41
3.5.47 Checking the indicator lamps and lighting ......................... 3.5-42
3.5.48 Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals ............... 3.5-43
3.5.49 Checking the transmission oil level ................................... 3.5-44
3.5.50 Changing the transmission oil............................................ 3.5-44
3.5.51 Changing the transmission oil filter.................................... 3.5-44
3.5.52 Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50,
100 and 250 h)................................................................... 3.5-45
3.5.53 Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-45
3.5.54 Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-46
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Maintenance
3.5.55 Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-46

3.5.56 Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-47
3.5.57 Lubricating the bevel gear seal ..........................................3.5-48
3.5.58 Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft ....................3.5-48
3.5.59 Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft.....................3.5-48
3.5.60 Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's
use and attachments ..........................................................3.5-49
3.5.61 Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear
oscillating bearing...............................................................3.5-49
3.5.62 Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level .....3.5-50
3.5.63 Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the
lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51
3.5.64 Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at
the bearing points (grease collars) of the central
lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51
3.5.65 Lubricating the door hinges ................................................3.5-51
3.5.66 Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter..................3.5-51
3.5.67 Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter ................3.5-53
3.5.68 Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit ....3.5-54
3.5.69 Lubricating the lift arms and attachment ............................3.5-54
3.5.70 Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing
bushings on the lift arms.....................................................3.5-55
3.5.71 Check the lift arms and bucket stops .................................3.5-57
3.5.72 Testing the quick-change device (optional)........................3.5-58
3.6 Testing and adjustment tasks .........................................................3.6-1

3.6.1 Preparing for testing and adjustment ...................................3.6-1
3.6.2 Safety precautions for testing and adjustment .....................3.6-1
3.6.3 Bringing the machine up to operating temperature ..............3.6-2
3.6.4 Checking the diesel engine speed .......................................3.6-2
3.6.5 Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief
valve .....................................................................................3.6-3
3.6.6 Calibrating the pedals...........................................................3.6-4
3.6.7 Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-5

3.6.8 Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of
the variable displacement pump...........................................3.6-5
3.6.9 Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable
displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-6
3.6.10 Calibrating the block curve ...................................................3.6-7
3.6.11 Calibrating the variable displacement motors ......................3.6-8
3.6.12 Checking the engine output..................................................3.6-9
3.6.13 Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working
hydraulics pump .................................................................3.6-10
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.6.14 Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the

working hydraulics pump ................................................... 3.6-10
3.6.15 Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the
control block....................................................................... 3.6-11
3.6.16 Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the
control block....................................................................... 3.6-12
3.6.17 Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block...... 3.6-12
3.6.18 Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators .. 3.6-13
3.6.19 Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation
module ............................................................................... 3.6-13
3.6.20 Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro
accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-13
3.6.21 Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump............... 3.6-14
3.6.22 Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering
pump .................................................................................. 3.6-14
3.6.23 Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake
valve................................................................................... 3.6-15
3.6.24 Checking the brake pressure at the axles ......................... 3.6-15
3.6.25 Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator............... 3.6-16
3.6.26 Checking the accumulator charge pressure ...................... 3.6-17
3.6.27 Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake
lights................................................................................... 3.6-17
3.6.28 Checking the transmission shift pressure.......................... 3.6-17
3.6.29 Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro
accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-18
3.7 Lubricants and fuels ....................................................................... 3.7-1

3.7.1 Diesel fuels .......................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.2 Lubricating oils for diesel engines ....................................... 3.7-3
3.7.3 Coolant for the diesel engine ............................................... 3.7-5
3.7.4 Hydraulic oils........................................................................ 3.7-8
3.7.5 Lubricating oils for the transmission .................................... 3.7-9
3.7.6 Grease for general lubrication points................................... 3.7-9
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance and inspection schedule
3.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule

The following abbreviations are used in this section:
h = service hours
Various symbols (solid or empty circles, boxes and stars) are used to
indicate the maintenance tasks, which fall into two main types.
The symbols have the following meanings:
Table with solid circle, box or star
Responsibility for carrying out the maintenance work lies with the machine
operator or his maintenance personnel.
This affects the maintenance intervals every 10 and 50 service hours (h)
and non-scheduled intervals.
The symbols have the following meanings:
Table with empty circle, box or star, or service hours (h)
The maintenance and inspection work must be performed or supervised
by authorised engineers from LIEBHERR or its authorised dealers.
This affects the maintenance intervals on delivery, every 500, 1000, 2000
service hours (h), and at unscheduled times.
You will find a list of the spare parts needed for maintenance and inspection
work in the service package of the spare parts list.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Customer: Machine type: ... Serial no.: . Service hours: .. Date: ..

Maintenance / inspection after
service hours
TASKS TO BE PERFORMED
Special intervals
By maintenance staff By authorised specialist staff
On handover
Once-only activity Once-only activity

Every 1000
Every 2000
zRepeat interval Repeat interval
Every 500
Every 10
Every 50
As necessary As necessary
7Annually before the winter
Have the driver lubricate the machine in accordance with the lubrication chart
and instruct him on proper maintenance

Instruct the driver in the operation of all functions
z z Remove loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine
z z Check the machine for external damage
Make sure the bolted connections are tight
Seal any leaks
Check the hydraulic pressure according to the testing and adjustment plan
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear
z z Check the engine oil level
Change the engine oil (at least once a year): CAUTION See the section on

lubricants and fuels for the engine oil quality and complicating factors.
Change the engine oil filter (at least once a year)
Check the V-ribbed belt and replace it if necessary
Check / adjust the engine valve play
7 Check the diesel engine heating flange
Lightly grease the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel
Change the engine oil separator filter insert
Check the bearings and and condition of the engine control units
Check the state of sensors and cable connections
Replace the fuel pre-filter (or in the event of a lack of output)
Replace the fuel fine filter (or in the event of a lack of output)
Drain off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (or if the corresponding service
z z
code appears)
Bleed air from fuel system (CAUTION: do not loosen injection lines)
z Drain off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank
z Clean the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve
Test the air filter vacuum switch
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Change the main air filter element when indicated by the vacuum switch (or

every year at the latest)
Clean or replace the air filter secondary element (after replacing the main

element 3 times or every year at the latest)
Check the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting
Check the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting
z Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear
Change the splitter box oil
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Customer: Machine type: Serial no.: .... Service hours: . Date: ..
Maintenance / inspection after

service hours
Special intervals
On handover

Every 1000
Every 2000 Repeat interval Repeat interval
Every 500
Every 10
Every 50
7 Annually before the winter
Diesel particle filter (optional)

Check the diesel particle filter pressure monitor for function, leaks and blockages
Check and drain the diesel particle filter condensate separator
Change the diesel particle filter condensate separator
Clean the diesel particle filter (at least once a year):
Cooling system
7 Check the coolant antifreeze concentration
Clean the cooling system
3000 Replace the coolant (at least every 2 years)
Working hydraulics
z z Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank
Drain off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank
Change the oil in the hydraulic tank and check the return strainer
Check the oil in the hydraulic tank (affects all environmentally compatible

hydraulic fluids)
250 Check and clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank
Change the hydraulic tank return suction filter insert
Change the hydraulic tank bleeder filter
Lubricate the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints and tappets
Steering system
z z Test the steering
z Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders
Brake system
z z Check the service brake and parking brake
Check the gap and wear on the parking brake linings
Electrical system
z z Check the indicator lamps and lighting
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/26/02/2007
Check the batteries, fluid level and terminals

Transmission
z Check the transmission oil level
Change the transmission oil
Change the transmission oil filter
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Customer: Machine type: ... Serial no.: .... Service hours: .. Date: ..
Maintenance / inspection
after service hours
Special intervals
On handover

Every 1000
Every 2000
zRepeat interval Repeat interval

Every 500
Every 10
Every 50
7Annually before the winter
Axles and tyres

Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100 and 250 h)
Checking the axle oil levels
Changing the axle oil
Lubricate the bevel gear seal on the front and rear axles (if necessary, for

example, if used in water every day) (only applies to L580 - 459)
z Check and lubricate the cardan shaft(s)
Check the tyre pressure
Machine frame and ballast weight
z Lubricate the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating bearing
Grease the rear section cover lower hinges
Lubrication system (optional)
z Check the lubrication system grease reservoir level
z Check the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the lubrication system
Check whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points (grease
z
collars) of the central lubrication system
Cab, heating and air-conditioning
Grease the cab door hinges
Clean the fresh air and recirculated air filter
Change the fresh air and recirculated air filter
Check the indicator and filling level beads in the dryer-collector unit of the

air conditioner
Lift arms and quick-change device
z Lubricate the lift arms and attachment
Check the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings on the lift arms
Check the lift arms and bucket stops
z z Lubricate and test the quick-change device
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Testing and adjustment plan
3.2 Testing and adjustment plan

The tasks in the testing and adjustment plan may only be carried out by
authorised specialist staff of LIEBHERR or its contractual agents.
You can find brief instructions on performing these tasks in the section on
testing and adjustment checklists.
Detailed instructions can be found in the section on testing and adjust-
ment tasks.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Testing and adjustment plan
Customer: Machine type: ... Serial no.: . Service hours: . Date: ..
Maintenance / inspection
after service hours
Special intervals
By authorised specialist staff
On handover
Once-only activity
Every 1000
Every 2000
Every 500
Repeat interval
Every 10
Every 50
As necessary
Diesel engine
Check the diesel engine speed
Cooling system
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve
Travel hydraulics
Synchronise pedals
Check the replenishing pressure of the variable displacement pump
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the variable displacement

pump
Check the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement pump
Calibrate the block curve
Calibrate the variable displacement motors
Check the engine output
Working hydraulics
Check the flow controller (delta p) of the working hydraulics pump
Check the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working hydraulics pump
Check the secondary pressure relief valves on the control block
Check the primary pressure relief valves on the control block
Check the LS pressure cut-off on the control block
Check the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module
Check the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator
Steering system
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump
Check the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump
Brake system
Check the opening and closing pressure of the compact brake valve
Check the brake pressure of the compact brake valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Check the capacity of the brake accumulator

Check the accumulator charge pressure
Check the brake light pressure switch and brake lights
Transmission
Check the transmission shift pressure
Check the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Testing and adjustment checklists
3.3 Testing and adjustment checklists

The testing and adjustment checklists contain all testing and adjustment
tasks. You can find detailed descriptions of each activity in the section on
testing and adjustment tasks.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Copyright by
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 3.3-1 o f 2
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Customer: L550, L556 Ser. Nr. /
Operating hours:
Type of application:
Checked by:
Job site:
Checked on date:
1000 Bh.
2000 Bh.
Adjust. Value Value
Adjust. Test
Check / Adjustment Unit values
before after
adjust. adjust. point point
Operating temperature
5
Operating temperature C 58
(Temperature sensor hydraulic oil)
Cooling system
Cooling System (fan control)
10
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / bar 110 P
Sensor unplugged
10
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / bar 220 1 P
Prop. solenoid valve current less
Diesel engine
Adjustment - pedals S
C
Gas pedal angle sensor U
L
Inching pedal angle sensor I
Diesel engine RPM

-1 10
Low idle RPM min 900
-1
High idle RPM min 2065
10
Travel hydraulic
Replenishing pressure
1
At high idle RPM bar 31 3 G
High pressure relief valves

10
Forward bar 470 2 MA
Reverse bar 470 10 4 MB
Pressure cut off

5
High pressure bar 430 1 MA (MB)
-1
Engine speed drop, max. difference min 30 Display
to high idle RPM
Block curve at 930 min

-1 S
C
Diesel engine RPM min
-1
930 930 930 U
10
L
High pressure bar 50 I MA (MB)

-1 S
C
-1
1200 1200 1200 U
10
L

-1 S
C
-1
1400 1400 1400 U
10
L
Adjustment var. displ. motor S

C
Automatically adjustment of the U
variable displacement motors L
I
Engine performance at 13 km/h
10
High pressure L550 bar 300 MA
10
High pressure L556 bar 330 MA
-1 30
Diesel engine RPM min 1980
= Blocked Machine
L550 - 456 / from 16978 copyright by 3.3

L576 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
1000 Bh.
2000 Bh.
Adjust. Value Value Adjust. Test
before after
point point
adjust. adjust.
Working hydraulic
Control valve block
5
Secondary pressure relief valve, lift bar 380 3 P
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in bar 380 5 4 P
5
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out bar 380 6 P
5
Primary pressure relief valve bar 360 5 P
Control valve block

10
LS-Pressure cut off L550 bar 290 7 P
LS-Pressure cut off L556 bar 330 10 7 P
Working hydraulic pump

10
Power regulator bar 180 1 M / M1

2
Flow regulator-Pressure difference bar 22 2 M / LS
Stabilization module
20
Shut off pressure (LFD turned off) bar 120 MX
Hydro accumulator LFD

Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling) bar 25
2
9 9
Steering system
5
Pressure cut off bar 210 2 P

2
Flow regulator Pressure difference bar 22 1 P / LS
Brake system
Compact brake valve
5
Cut in pressure bar 180 1 M3
Cut out pressure bar 210 5 1 M3
Brake pressure in axles bar 95 5 2 M4 / M5
Accumulator
After 9 braking actions bar > 50 M4 / M5
Pressure switch - brake system

5
Switching point bar 120 M3
Transfer gear
Transfer gear
3
Switching pressure bar 20 P
Transmission - hydro accumulator

2
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling) bar 12 1
Remarks: Signature:
Check and adjust only if required
3.3 copyright by L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
Customer: L566, L576, L580 Ser. Nr. /
Operating hours:
Type of application:
Checked by:
Job site:
Checked on date:
1000 Bh.
2000 Bh.
Adjust. Value Value
Adjust. Test
before after
point point
adjust. adjust.
Operating temperature
58
5
Operating temperature C
(Temperature sensor hydraulic oil)
Cooling system
Cooling System (fan control)
165
5
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / bar P
Sensor unplugged
220
10
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / bar 1 P
Prop. solenoid valve current less
Diesel engine
Adjustment - pedals S
C
Gas pedal angle sensor U
L
Inching pedal angle sensor I
Diesel engine RPM

900
-1 10
Low idle RPM min
-1 10
High idle RPM min 2065
Travel hydraulic
Replenishing pressure
34
1
At high idle RPM bar 3 G
High pressure relief valves

470
10
Forward bar 2 MA
Reverse bar 10 4 MB
470
Pressure cut off

430
5
High pressure bar 1 MA (MB)
-1
Engine speed drop, max. difference min 30 Display
to high idle RPM
-1
Block curve at 930 min S
C
-1
Diesel engine RPM min 930 930 930 U
10
L
-1
C
-1
10
L
-1
C
-1
L
330
10
High pressure bar I MA (MB)
Adjustment var. displ. motor S

C
Automatically adjustment of the U
variable displacement motors L
I
Engine performance at 13 km/h
High pressure L566 bar 340
10
MA
High pressure L576, L580 bar 350 10
MA
-1 30
Diesel engine RPM min 1980
= Blocked Machine
L566 - 460 / ab 14171 copyright by 3.3

L576 - 456 / ab 14171
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / ab 14171
1000 Bh.
2000 Bh.
Adjust. Value Value Adjust. Test
before after
point point
adjust. adjust.
Working hydraulic
Control valve block
420
5
Secondary pressure relief valve, lift bar 3 P
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in bar 5 4 P
400
400
5
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out bar 6 P
5
Primary pressure relief valve bar 380 5 P
Control valve block

350
5
LS-Pressure cut off bar 7 P

180
10
Power regulator bar 1 M / M1

22
2
Flow regulator-Pressure difference bar 2 M / LS
Stabilization module
120
20
Shut off pressure (LFD turned off) bar MX
Hydro accumulator LFD

Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling) bar 25
2
9 9
Steering system
210
5
Pressure cut off bar 2 P

22
2
Flow regulator Pressure difference bar 1 P / LS
Brake system
Compact brake valve
180
5
Cut in pressure bar 1 M3
Cut out pressure bar 5 1 M3
210
Brake pressure in axles L566, L576 bar 95 5 2 M4 / M5
Brake pressure in axles L580 bar 70
5
2 M4 / M5
Accumulator
After 9 braking actions bar > 50 M4 / M5
Pressure switch - brake system

120
5
Switching point bar M3
Transfer gear
Transfer gear
20
3
Switching pressure bar P
Transmission - hydro accumulator

12
2
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling) bar 1
Remarks: Signature:
Check and adjust only if required
3.3 copyright by L566 - 460 / ab 14171

L576 - 457 / ab 14171
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / ab 14171
Testing and adjustment checklists
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Lubrication chart and filling quantities
3.4 Lubrication chart and filling quantities

3.4.1 Table of filling quantities
Specifications in the medium column:
The standard lubricants and fuels required for central European climate
conditions are stated here.
Before you change or top up the oil in the hydraulic system (hydraulic
tank), always check if it is filled with petroleum or bio oil.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service
fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Specifications in the dosage column:
The values stated for the filling quantities in the table are only guidelines.
The dipstick and level markings are always mandatory.
Each time the oil is replaced or topped up, check the level in the unit in
question.
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description Medium Dosage Unit

Hydraulic system Engine oil 240 l
Total capacity SAE 20W - 20
Diesel engine (with filter Engine oil 31 l

change) SAE 10W - 40
Pump distributor gear Gear oil 2.5 l

SAE 90
Cooling system Coolant 45 l

Diesel engine
Hydraulic tank Engine oil 135 l

SAE 20W - 20
Transmission ATF oil 11.5 l

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Front axle Gear oil 30 l

SAE 90 LS
Rear axle Gear oil 30 l

SAE 90 LS
Fuel tank Diesel 300 l
Air conditioning system Refrigerant 1250+50 g

R 134a
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Diesel engine (with filter Engine oil 31 l


SAE 90
Cooling system Coolant 45.0 l

Diesel engine

SAE 20W - 20
Front axle Gear oil 38 l

SAE 90 LS
Rear axle Gear oil 30 l

SAE 90 LS

R 134a LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Diesel engine (with filter Engine oil 43.0 l

SAE 90 LS
Diesel engine cooling Coolant 52.0 l

system total capacity


SAE 20W - 20
Front axle Gear oil 47.0 l

SAE 90 LS
Rear axle Gear oil L566: 45.0 l

SAE 90 LS L576: 47.0 l

R 134a
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Diesel engine (with filter Engine oil 43.0 l

SAE 90 LS
Diesel engine cooling Coolant 52.0 l

system
Total capacity
L566 - 460 / from 14171


SAE 20W - 20
Front axle Gear oil 48.0 l

SAE 90 LS
Rear axle Gear oil 50.0 l

SAE 90 LS

R 134a
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
3.4.2 Lubrication charts

The lubrication chart provides an overview of the location of the mainte-
nance points on the machine and of the maintenance intervals.
You will find detailed information in the maintenance and inspection
schedule, as well as in the individual descriptions in the section on mainte-
nance tasks.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service
fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
For information about the required filling quantities, see the tables of filling
quantities.
Key:
1 = transmission
2 = front axle
3 = rear axle
1) = central lubricating rail, front section
2) = central lubricating rail, rear section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Symbol Description Symbol Description
General lubrication points Lubrication
Check the oil level Oil change
First oil change
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171
Symbol Description Symbol Description

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
General lubrication points Lubrication
Check the oil level Oil change
First oil change
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5 Maintenance tasks

On completion of servicing, the machine should be returned to the opera-
ting position.
Make sure you are wearing safe working clothing.

Certain jobs not only require a hard hat and safety boots, but also goggles
and safety gloves.
3.5.1 Preparatory tasks for maintenance

Before performing the various maintenance tasks, move the machine to
maintenance position unless otherwise explicitly specified in the description.
The various maintenance tasks include:
Lubricating the lift arms
Checking the oil level or changing the oil in the engine, gears, axles,
hydraulic tank, etc.
Replacing filters as well as adjustment and repair work on the hydrau-
lic system
Safety precautions for maintenance

Always observe the accident prevention regulations during mainte-
nance work.
Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and mainte-
nance personnel is always maintained.
Visual contact
Danger
There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel.
The presence of unauthorised persons on the machine can place the
maintenance personnel in extreme danger.
! Never enter a dangerous area of the machine without making your pre-
sence known.
Make sure you can be clearly seen before entering one of the machine's
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
danger areas.
Wheel wedges Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.
Maintenance positions
The maintenance position depends on the maintenance task to be performed.
The two basic maintenance positions 1 and 2 are described below.
They enable you to access the individual maintenance points.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Maintenance position 1 To move the machine into maintenance position 1 proceed as follows.
Maintenance position 1
Park the machine on level ground.
Lower the lift arms.
Set the bucket down flat on the ground.
Engage the parking brake.
Turn off the diesel engine.
Take out the ignition key.
Maintenance position 2 To move the machine into maintenance position 2 proceed as follows.
Maintenance position 2
Park the machine on level ground.
Engage the articulation lock.
Lower the lift arms.
Tilt the bucket out and set it down on the ground on its teeth or
cutting edge.
Engage the parking brake.
Take out the ignition key.
Opening the engine Opening the service hatches, doors and hoods
compartment hatch
Open the door if you need to access the following units or components:
Hydraulic pumps
Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic tank shut-off valve
Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Battery main switch
Engine compartment hatch

1 Engine compartment hatch 3 Gas-filled springs
2 Handle with lock
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Warning
There is a risk of injury if the engine compartment door falls shut.
! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open.
Open the lock with the ignition key.
Completely open the hatch 1 using the handle 2.
Two gas-filled springs 3 hold the opened hatch in this position.
Opening the engine When the hood is open, you can access the following units:
compartment hatch Diesel engine
Cooling system
Hydraulic tank
Engine compartment hatch and hood cable

Open the engine compartment hatch.
Warning
Engine parts which are in motion can cause injury.
Rotating or moving engine parts, such as the fan blades or V-belts, can
cause injury.
! Only open the engine compartment hood when the engine is shut down.
Pull the cable 1 for unlocking the engine compartment hood until the lock
is open.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Engine compartment hood
1 Engine compartment hood 4 Cable lock

2 Gas-filled springs 5 Hydraulic tank cover
3 Engine compartment hatch
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
The lock 4 unlocks the engine compartment hood 1.

The hood is automatically opened and held in position by two gas-filled
springs 2.
Turn the securing pipe 2 in the direction of the arrow (position shown).
The gas-filled spring 1 is now blocked.
The engine compartment hood cannot be opened.
Warning
There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.
! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open.
Check the function.
Open the hydraulic tank over 5 as required.
Unlock the cover and open it.
Opening the engine When the hood is open, you can access the cooling system.
compartment hatch Make sure that the cab door is closed.
When opening or closing the hood, climb onto the machine via the cab
access, making sure that you have secure footing.
Cooling system hood

1 Left cooling system hood 3 Gas-filled springs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
2 Right cooling system hood 4 Handle

Completely open the hood 1 and/or 2 by pulling up the handle.
The hood is held in this position by the gas-filled spring 3.
Warning
There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.
! Check that gas-filled spring holds it completely open.
Check the function.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Turning off the battery main switch

The battery main switch is located at the rear left of the engine
compartment.
For certain maintenance jobs, the battery main switch must first be
turned off.
Find out from the descriptions of the relevant maintenance tasks whether the
battery main switch must be turned on or off. See the section on mainte-
nance tasks.
Switch on the battery main switch after completing these maintenance tasks.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the electrical system.
! Do not turn off the battery main switch while the engine is running.
Battery main switch

1 Battery main switch 2 Main switch key
Danger
There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel.
If unauthorised people are on the machine it can put the maintenance
personnel in extreme danger.
! For safety reasons, it is essential that the battery main switch is turned off.
! Pull out the key for safety reasons.
Turn off the battery main switch 1 by turning the key 2 to the 0 position.
3.5.2 Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note
To ensure safe machine transport and easy maintenance: Clean the
machine after everyday work and before starting maintenance tasks.
! Remove any loose parts, coarse dirt, mud, ice, snow etc.
Be careful when cleaning the machine with a high-pressure cleaner. See
the section on cleaning the machine.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.3 Checking the machine for external damage

Procedure
Before starting up the machine, check for external damage which might
impair safe operation.
Repair any damage with safety implications immediately.
3.5.4 Making sure the bolted connections are tight

Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 2.
The service doors and hoods are open.
Procedure
Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
Tighten any loose screws or bolts with the required tightening torque.
3.5.5 Sealing leaks

Make sure that:
The service doors and hoods are open.
Procedure
Check the entire hydraulic system for leaks.
Replace any damaged hydraulic seals.
Tighten any loose hydraulic couplings.
See also the section on safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and
hose lines.
3.5.6 Checking the engine oil level

Make sure that:
The engine compartment hood is open.
The engine is level and has not been running for 2 - 3 minutes.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Diesel engine
Pull out the dipstick 1, wipe it clean, and re-insert it.
Pull out the dipstick once again and read off the oil level.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
If the oil level is too low:

Remove the sealing cap from the filler neck 2 and top up with oil.
For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Clean the sealing cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.
3.5.7 Changing the engine oil

Make sure that:
The engine is level.
The engine is warm.
A suitable receptacle, an oil drain hose and the specified engine oil are
at hand.
See the table of filling quantities for the required capacity of the receptacle.
Procedure
1 Oil drain hose 3 Oil drain valve

2 Cap
Unscrew the cap of the oil drain valve on the oil pan.
Screw the oil drain hose to the oil drain valve.
Drain off the oil into the receptacle.
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw the cap onto the oil drain valve.
When changing the engine oil and the oil filter:
Change the filter as described in the section on changing the engine oil filter.
Diesel engine
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Pour the new oil into the filler neck 2 to between the MIN and MAX
markings on the dipstick 1.
Clean the filler cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.
Start the engine and check the oil pressure.
Turn off the engine and after 1 or 2 minutes and check the oil level on
the dipstick.
Top up with oil if necessary.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.8 Changing the diesel engine oil filter

Make sure that:
The engine oil has been drained off.
A strap wrench and a suitable container are in place.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts (2 oil filter cartridges).
Procedure
Place a suitable container under the diesel engine.
Note
Protect the V-ribbed-belt against emerging oil when changing the oil
filter cartridge.
! After changing the oil filter, remove all traces of oil on the diesel engine,
also behind the vibration damper so that this is not diagnosed as a leak
in the leakage in the radial shaft seal at a later stage.
Release the filter cartridges 1 with a strap wrench and unscrew them.
Clean the seals on the filter bracket.
Lightly coat the rubber gaskets on the new oil filter cartridges with
engine oil.
Screw on the new oil filter cartridge until the sealing ring touches the
filter bracket.
When the sealing ring touches the filter bracket:
Tighten the oil filter cartridge by a half to three-quarter turn. (Do not use a
tool for tightening).
Start the diesel engine:
Check the oil pressure in the engine oil pressure display (see
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
display unit).
Shut down the diesel engine:
Check the seals on the oil filters and the oil level.
After 2 to 3 minutes, check the oil level on the dipstick.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.9 Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt

The V-ribbed belt is on the front of the engine, protected by a cover.
The engine has a tensioning device for the V-ribbed belt. This tensions itself
and requires no maintenance. Check the V-ribbed belt for wear.
Checking the V-ribbed belt

Take off the V-ribbed belt guard.
Check the V-ribbed belt for damage.
Damage to the V-ribbed belt can include:

V-ribbed belt guard
Torn belt
Tears in several ribs
Lumps of rubber on the base of the belt
Accumulations of dirt and grit
Ribs coming loose from the belt base
Cracks on the back
Replacing the V-ribbed belt

Make sure you have a DIN 3122 D 12.5 mm (1/2") ratchet wrench and a
new V-ribbed belt.
Pull back the tensioning device 5 against the spring force anticlockwise
as far as it will go and take off the belt.
With the tensioning device 5 swung back, put the new belt on the pulleys
of the crankshaft 6, air conditioning compressor 1, alternator 3 and
deflector roller 2, 4. Then return the tensioning device 5 to the tensioning
position.
Belt run
Note
When changing the belt, make sure the deflector roller 2, 4 and the tensio-
ning roller 5 move freely. If the tensioning roller or
! deflector roller is defective, replace it.
3.5.10 Checking / adjusting the engine valve play

Check the valve play with the engine cold.
Make sure that:
The engine compartment hood and door are open.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
You have the special cranking device, a feeler gauge and cylinder head
seals ready.
Valve overlap cranking device

L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Unscrew the service cap from the flywheel housing.

Remove the valve cover, attach the cranking device (ID no. 0524045) to
the flywheel housing and insert a standard ratchet.
For reasons of space, use extensions on the cranking device to the rear
towards the ratchet.
Turn the crankshaft in the direction of rotation until the valves of the
cylinder to be adjusted overlap (see the table).
Cylinder valves
A Outlet valve E Inlet valve
Engine D 934 Engine D 936

Cylinder Cylinder
Overlap Adjust Overlap Adjust
4 1 6 1
2 3 2 5
1 4 4 3
3 2 1 6
5 2
3 4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking and adjusting the inlet valve play
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Checking and adjusting the outlet valve play
Push a feeler gauge between the valve and the rocker arm and check the
valve play.
Valve play
Inlet valve (cold) 0.30 mm
Outlet valve (cold) 0.40 mm
If it is not correct:
Loosen the nut on the adjusting bolt for the rocker arm and adjust it.
Tighten the counter nut to 40 Nm.
Check the adjustment again.
After checking and adjusting all the valves, put on the cylinder head
covers with new seals.
Remove the cranking device.
3.5.11 Checking the diesel engine heating flange

Make sure that:
You have an ohmmeter or a multimeter ready.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Turn off the battery main switch.

Disconnect the electric connection cable 2 on the heating flange 1.
Connect the ohmmeter or multimeter to the terminal and check the
resistance (0.25 Ohm +/-10% at 20 C).
Disconnect the electric connection cable on the heating flange.
Turn on the battery main switch
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.12 Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel

The service cap is on the right side of the engine, on the flywheel housing.
Make sure that:
The engine is in the maintenance position.
Starter ring gear service cap

Unscrew the service cap 1 from the flywheel housing.
Only grease the starter ring gear 2; there may not be any grease on the
sensor gear ring 3.
Check the ring gear and apply a light coating of standard grease
if necessary.
Screw on the service cap again.
3.5.13 Changing the engine oil separator filter insert

The oil separator is on the flywheel side, on the right side of the engine.
Make sure that:
The engine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil separator filter insert ready.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Oil separator
Carefully clean the oil separator and the area around it.
Unscrew the oil separator cap and take it off, using a screwdriver
if necessary.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.14 Checking the bearings and condition of the engine control

units
Procedure
Check that the bearings are properly seated and undamaged.
If you find damaged bearings:
do not start the engine, replace all the bearings
3.5.15 Checking the state of sensors and cable connections

Procedure
Check that all the sensors and cable connections are properly seated
and in good condition.
Check that none of the cables and wiring harnesses are damaged, rub or
not properly fastened.
If you find any damaged cables, wiring harnesses or sensors:
Do not start the engine until you have replaced the defective parts.
3.5.16 Changing the fuel pre-filter

On the right side of the diesel engine you can find:
The fuel pre-filter with water separator and depending on the engine
type fuel pre-heater (optional)
Water level probe
Integrated fuel hand pump
Bleeding the water of the fuel prefilter must be conducted after the water
level probe activates.
Make sure that:
You have a suitable receptacle ready.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts.
(1 fuel pre-filter cartridge)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.
! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter.
Carefully clean the fuel pre-filter and the area around it.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Fuel prefilter cartridge

Disconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the
fuel preheater 7 (optional).
Drain the fuel:
Unscrew the bleeder screw 6 and drain plug 5.
Release the filter cartridge 3 with a strap wrench or similar tools and
unscrew it.
Fuel water separator container

Unscrew the water separator container 4 from the filter cartridge 3.
Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
Wash the water separator container and dry it with compressed air.
Lightly oil the O-ring 9 of the water separator container.
Screw the water separator container to the new filter cartridge until the
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
O-ring touches the filter cartridge.

Tighten the water separator container half a turn by hand.
Screw in the drain plug 5.
Check the filter head is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly
in the filter head.
If the filter head is dirty:
Clean the filter head.
Lubricate the sealing ring 10 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
Fill the filter cartridge via the holes on the outside and screw it on until the
sealing ring lies on the filter head.
Tighten the filter cartridge 3 half a turn by hand.
Reconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the
fuel preheater 7 (optional).
Close the bleeder screw 6.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Bleed the fuel system.

See the section on bleeding the fuel system.
3.5.17 Changing the fuel fine filter

Make sure that:
You have a suitable receptacle ready.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts.
(1 fuel filter cartridge)
Procedure
Danger
! Do not smoke.
Place a receptacle under the fuel fine filter.

Carefully clean the fuel fine filter and the area around it.
Unscrew the fuel fine filter 1.
(Use a suitable filter strap)
Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
Check the filter base is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly
in the filter base.
If the filter base is dirty:
Clean the filter base.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lubricate the sealing ring 2 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
Fill the filter cartridge and screw it on until the sealing ring lies on the
filter head.
Tighten the filter cartridge 1/2 a revolution by hand with a filter wrench.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.18 Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the

corresponding service code appears)
After integrated water level probe in the fuel pre-filter activates (service code
on the display), the water collector tank must be drained.
Danger
! Do not smoke.
Draining the fuel pre-filter

Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter.
If necessary attach a drainage hose.
Open the drain plug, drain the water until fuel emerges without bubbles.
When fuel emerges:
Tighten the drain plug.
3.5.19 Bleeding the fuel system

Danger
! Do not smoke.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel prefilter

Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel prefilter by 2 to
3 turns.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Operate the hand pump 2.

If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles:
Tighten the bleeder screw 1.
Continue to operate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel fine filter

Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel fine filter by 2 to
3 turns.
Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeder screw on the crankcase

Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the crankcase (if present) by 2 to
3 revolutions.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeding the fuel filter with the engine bleeding function
It is necessary when the fuel tank has run completely empty.
When the fuel tank is empty there is air in the fuel system.
You can remove some of the air from the fuel system by bleeding the
fuel filter.
You can bleed the air between the injection pump and the injection nozzle
by activating engine bleeding mode.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Danger
! Do not smoke.
Bleed the fuel filter:
See the section on bleeding the fuel filter.
Activate the engine bleeding function.
Activation sequence:
Turn the ignition on
With the engine not running, press the button for 10 seconds.
All 3 LEDs on the button light up when the engine bleeding function is
activated.
Turn the ignition key to position II and keep it in there until the
engine starts.
Do not hold the key in the starting position for more than
20 seconds at a time.
The ECU ends the engine bleeding function automatically as soon as the
engine starts again.
If the engine does not start:
Wait a minute and repeat the procedure.
In the meantime, continue to operate the hand pump until you feel
strong resistance.
3.5.20 Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Unscrew the sealing cap 1 on the drain valve 2 on the bottom of the
diesel tank.
Screw the drain hose 3 onto the drain valve 2.
Drain the condensation and sediment into a suitable receptacle until
clean fuel begins to flow.
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw the cap 1 onto the drain valve 2 and tighten it.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.21 Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve
Note
If the valve is damaged, the dust extraction function is impaired and the
filters become clogged more quickly.
! With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air
pulsating at the dust extraction valve.
Make sure that:

The engine compartment hatch is open.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key
is removed.
Cleaning the dust extraction valve
Press the rubber seal on the dust extraction valve 5 several times to
remove the dust from the service cap 3.
When working in dusty conditions, check and empty the dust extraction
valve 5 more often.
If the dust extraction valve is damaged or stays open:
Replace the dust extraction valve.
Cleaning the service cap

Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off.
Clean the service cap 3.
Put the service cap 3 back on the filter housing 6.
The dust extraction valve 5 must face down.
Make sure the cap is placed properly on the filter housing 6.
Close the fixing clips 4.
3.5.22 Testing the air filter vacuum switch

Make sure that:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
You have a big enough plate available.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Testing the vacuum switch

Take the rain cap 1 off the intake pipe 2 of the filter housing.
Start the engine.
Slowly and carefully push the plate over the opening of the intake pipe.
At the same time, check whether the indicator lamp in the cab lights up
or the warning buzzer sounds.
If you hear or see no warning signal when the intake pipe is just sealed,
check the vacuum switch and the wiring, and replace it if necessary.
3.5.23 Changing the air filter primary element when indicated by the
vacuum switch
The primary element 2 should be replaced when the air filter contamination
symbol field on the display unit lights up.
If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary
element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also
be replaced.
Make sure that:
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Air filter
1 Secondary element 4 Fixing clips
2 Primary element 5 Dust extraction valve
3 Service cap 6 Air filter housing
Remove the primary element 2. To do this pull or turn the element gently
upwards, downwards or to the side in order to release the seal.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a
new filter element.
The secondary element 1 should be replaced every third time the primary
element 2 is replaced.
Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the
primary element 2 this is on the inside, for the secondary element 1 on
the outside). Re-insert filter elements 1 and 2 and make sure that they
are correctly fitted.
Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust
extraction valve 5 facing down.
Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the
fixing clips without excessive force.
3.5.24 Changing the air filter secondary element

If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary
element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also
be replaced.
Change the secondary element:
After replacing the primary element three times
Otherwise, at least once a year
Make sure that:
The engine compartment door is open.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key
is removed.
Procedure
Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Remove the secondary element 1.
To loosen the seal: Pull or twist the element slightly up, down
or sideways.
Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a
new or cleaned filter element.
Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the
secondary element 1 this is the outside).
Re-insert the filter elements 1 make sure that it is correctly fitted.
Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust
extraction valve 5 facing down.
Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the
fixing clips without excessive force.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.25 Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting
Turbo hose 1 between the air filter and the turbocharger

You can check the air intake hose 1 for cracks from the inside after
removing the air filter. It is not possible to check the air intake hose all round
from outside.
Make sure that:
The battery main switch is turned off.
Procedure
Caution
A damaged or leaky air hose will damage the engine.
! Check the air hose for cracks or pitting.
Take the service cap off the air filter housing, then take the primary and
secondary elements out of the air filter housing.
Check the air hose all the way round for cracks and pitting. Use a torch
to light up the hose.
Check the clip fastenings on the air intake hose.
If you find cracks or pitting on the hose:
Replace the hose.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5.26 Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting
Make sure that:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Check that the fixing screws 1 and clip 3 on the exhaust pipe between
the turbocharger and the silencer are tightly fastened and do not leak.
Check that the flexible pipe 2 of the exhaust pipe is laid straight.
Check that the spacer 3 is tight.
Check that the fastening clip 6 of the tail pipe 7 is tight.
3.5.27 Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear

The dipstick 3 and the oil filling tube 2 are located in the engine compart-
ment directly beside the hydraulic tank.
Access is from above the engine on the right-hand side.
Make sure that:
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Pull out the dipstick 3, wipe it clean, and re-insert it.
Pull out the dipstick 3 once again and read off the oil level.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
Remove the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with oil.
For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Clean the sealing cap for the oil filling tube 2, put it on the oil filling tube
2 on the splitter box, and then tighten it up.
3.5.28 Changing the splitter box oil

Make sure that:
The cover plate under the engine is open.
You have a suitable oil receptacle (capacity approx. 3 l) and the drain
hose with valve connection ready.
For the oil quality and quantity, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Procedure
Pull out the dipstick 3 slightly (to read off the oil level more easily).
Unscrew the sealing cap on the oil drain valve 5 and screw the drain
hose onto the oil drain valve 5.
Drain the oil into the receptacle.
Unscrew the drain hose from the oil drain valve 5 and screw on the
sealing cap.
Unscrew the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
fresh oil.
Clean the sealing cap 2, screw it on and tighten it.
Check the oil level on the dipstick 3.
The oil level must be up to the MAX mark.
3.5.29 Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for function,
leaks and blockages
This equipment is optional.
Make sure that:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
1 Soot particle filter 3 Counterpressure line connection

2 Temperature sensor
Procedure
Unscrew the counterpressure line from the DPX particle filter at position 3
and blow air into it with a compressed air gun.
There must be sufficient distance to the entrance of the counterpressure
line, so that the counterpressure of 150 mbar or 200 mbar is only
slightly exceeded.
Caution
First adjust the air pressure down to no more than 0.5 bar, as otherwise the
electronic counterpressure monitor will be irreparably damaged.
Check the electronic counterpressure monitor while blowing in air.
3.5.30 Checking and draining the soot particle filter condensate

separator
Make sure that:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
The condensate separator is mounted on the rear left in the engine
compartment.
Main components
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
1 Filter/drain unit 5 Exhaust gas counterpressure

2 Counterpressure line display line
3 Condensate container 6 Data logger line
4 Drain plug
At regular intervals (daily or as required):
Check the filling level of the filter/drain unit.
If the condensate container is over half full with condensation water:
Drain off the accumulated condensation water.
To do this, open the drain plug 4 of the condensate container 3.
Drain the water from the condensate container.
Tighten the drain plug 4 again.
Check the filter insert (visible in the sight glass) of the filter/drain unit 1 for dirt.
If the filter insert is too dirty:
The filter insert must be replaced.
Note
The condensate separator should be completely replaced after 1000 opera-
ting hours.
! This must be done when cleaning the filter (every 1000 operating hours
as prescribed).
3.5.31 Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator

The condensate separator must be changed when cleaning the filter (every
1000 operating hours as prescribed).
Make sure that:
The condensate separator 1 is mounted on the rear left in the engine
compartment on the fuse panel.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1 Condensate separator 3 Fuse panel

2 PDL data logger
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Release the hose connections of the counterpressure line of the
condensate separator 1.
Unscrew the condensate separator 1 from the fuse panel 3.
Screw the new condensate separator 1 into the fuse panel 3 and fasten
the two hose connections back onto the condensate separator.
3.5.32 Cleaning the soot particle filter

The cleaning process removes oil residue from the filter module. This oil
residue comes from the combustion of engine oil and is visible as white ash
(metal oxide).
Before cleaning, completely regenerate the particle filter (operate the wheel
loader for at least 10 minutes at the maximum possible engine load to burn
off any soot sediment on the filter surface).
Make sure that:
You have a suitable extraction system or industrial vacuum cleaner.
Compressed air cleaning Procedure
Caution
Running at full load makes the filter housing very hot!
! When removing and cleaning it, always wear gloves, a dust mask
and goggles.
Remove the filter module by releasing the V clips.

Clean the inlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum
cleaning system.
Caution
Protect the filter module from external contamination.
- Never clean the filter module with steam or cleaning agents.
- Use non-oiled compressed air for cleaning.
Clean the outlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum
cleaning system. Aim the air jet at each channel of the outlet side, until
you cannot see any more particles.
Install the filter module again.
Note
If the machine has been idling too long to regenerate the particle filter, the
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
filter must be burned out.

! Put it in a furnace for at least 5 hours at 680 C or use a hot air blower.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.33 Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor

concentration
Coolant equalizing reservoir

1 Filler neck 3 Coolant equalizing reservoir
2 Cap 4 Coolant level sensor
All year round, the coolant must contain at least 50% by volume of concen-
trated antifreeze, but not more than 60% by volume.
This protects against freezing down to around -37 C.
Make sure that:
You have the optical density tester kit or antifreeze tester ready.
Checking the antifreeze concentration
Caution
There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure.
! Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
! Check the coolant temperature.
See the coolant temperature on the display unit.
The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display.
Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1.
Take a sample of the coolant and check the antifreeze concentration
using the test tool.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
If the antifreeze concentration is too low:

Refill with pure antifreeze until the required value is attained.
See the section on correcting the antifreeze concentration.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Correcting the antifreeze concentration
1 Cooler drain valve 2 Diesel engine drain plug

If the antifreeze concentration is too low:
Drain off the coolant and top up with pure antifreeze according to the
following diagram.
Caution
There is a risk of damage to the diesel engine.
Too much antifreeze and corrosion protection agent impairs the cooling effect.
This eventually causes damage to the diesel engine.
! Never use more than 60% antifreeze and corrosion protection agent.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Selection for antifreeze concentration

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1 Amount of pure antifreeze to be 3 Help line(s) example -15 C 5 Total capacity of cooling
added in litres 4 Measured coolant freezing point system in litres (example
2 Identified line - top-up quantity in C 25 litres)
Example procedure
Assumption:
25 litres total filling quantity of the cooling system
-15 C coolant temperature, measured in the cooling system
In the diagram, go to the line showing the overall cooling system filling
quantity 5 at 25 litres, and move vertically upwards.
Carry on along the help line 3, starting from the temperature -15 C, and
move diagonally to the bottom left.
Finally, starting from the point where the lines cross, go horizontally along
the (identified) line 2 to the far left.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
This gives you the topping up quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion
protection agent 1 (7.6 litres in this example) to be added in order to achieve
protection down to -37 C.
To restore the correct mixing ratio, you must drain off at least the pre-
viously calculated quantity (the top-up quantity) from the cooling system.
Top up with the correct quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion pro-
tection agent.
The coolant previously drained off can be used if necessary to restore the
required coolant level.
Using anti-corrosion agent without antifreeze

In exceptional cases and when outside temperatures never fall below
freezing, such as tropical zones, where it is demonstrable that no approved
antifreeze and corrosion protection agent is available, corrosion inhibitors
may be used.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
The mixing ratio must consist of 7.5% corrosion inhibitor and 92.5% water.
The Gefo 2710 refractometer is recommended for testing.
Checking the coolant and anti-corrosion concentration
Caution
Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
The coolant temperature display should be in the bottom third of
the display.
Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck.
Check the antifreeze concentration with a 2710 refractometer from the
GEFO company.
Checking the mixing ratio with a refractometer

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Gefro refractometer no. 2710

1 Refractometer 2 Eyepiece
Brix value: The measure for soluble dry substance in a liquid.
Clean the cover and the prism carefully.

Place 1 or 2 drops of test fluid on the prism.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
The fluid is distributed by closing the prism.

Look through the eyepiece 2 against a light background and focus
the scale.
The focus is set by turning the eyepiece 2.
Read off the value on the blue line in the eyepiece.
Conversion diagram from Brix to corrosion

inhibitor concentration (%vol)
Convert the Brix value using the conversion diagram to find the actual
corrosion inhibitor concentration.
3.5.34 Cleaning the cooling system
Cooling system hood

1 Left cooling system hood 3 Gas-filled springs
2 Right cooling system hood
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Clean the cooler whenever necessary in order to ensure proper cooling. In

dusty environments, check the cooler every day and clean it if necessary.
Dirty cooler units result in overheating. The consequence is an audible and
visual warning with simultaneous power reduction of the travel drive.
Dust and other contaminants can be removed from the cooling fins with
water jets, steam or compressed air. Compressed air is preferable.
Make sure that:
The left and right cooling system hoods are open.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Cooling system
Swing out the condenser 1.
Swing out the fuel cooler 2.
Caution
Risk of damage to the cooling system
Careless handling can damage the cooler fins.
! Do not use hard objects or excessive water pressure for cleaning.
Clean the cooler units with compressed air, steam or water.
Close the condenser 1 again.
Close the fuel cooler 2 again.
Close any cab doors which are open.
Close the cooling system hood(s) (left/right) again.
3.5.35 Changing the coolant

Use clean, fresh water with a Ph value between 6.5 and 8.5 and a low
sulphate / chlorine content for preparing the coolant.
The coolant must be prepared outside the cooling system.
Always dispose of any coolant which you have drained off but no longer
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
need according to the applicable regulations.

Make sure that:
A receptacle with a minimum capacity of 25 litres is available for the used
coolant, along with a drain hose.
The mixing ratio of the new coolant must be correct.
See also the section on checking the coolant antifreeze concentration.
The shut-off valves on the heating hoses are open.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Cooling system
1 Filler neck 4 Diesel engine drain plug
2 Coolant equalizing reservoir 5 Cooler drain valve
3 Coolant level sensor
Caution
Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display.
Open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1.
Unscrew the sealing cap on the cooler drain valve 5 and unscrew the
drain hose. Drain the coolant into the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose, screw the sealing cap onto the cooler drain valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
5 and tighten it.

Also drain the coolant from the diesel engine:
Open the drain plug 4 and let the coolant flow into the receptacle.
Screw the drain plug 4 back in and tighten it.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Cooling system equalizing reservoir

1 Cap 3 Filler neck
2 Coolant equalizing reservoir
Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the
coolant in the filler neck 3.
Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run at lower idling speed.
Set the heater to warm.
Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the
coolant in the filler neck 3.
If the coolant level is correct:
Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.
3.5.36 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank

Note
When using bio oil, take an oil sample every 500 hours.
! See the hydraulic oil section under lubricants and fuels.
Make sure that:

The machine is cold.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the hydraulic oil level
Hydraulic tank
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
The red maximum oil level marking shows the correct oil level.
Check the oil level in the sight glass 1.
Top up with hydraulic oil.
Topping up with hydraulic oil
Connect the plug 3 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism).
The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released.
Release the tank pre-pressure:
Unscrew the bleeder filter 2 on the hydraulic tank by two turns.
Note
The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer.
! For oil specifications, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Open the cover 1 of the return strainer.
Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 4.
Put the cover 1 on the housing and tighten it up.
Screw on the bleeder filter 2 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it
somewhere safe).
3.5.37 Draining off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank
Make sure that:
The machine has not been used for at least 3 hours.
You have a receptacle ready for water and oil.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve.

Connect the drain hose 3 and let the water and sediment flow into
the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve.
Screw in the bleeder filter 1.
3.5.38 Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the return
strainer
Make sure that:
The machine is at operating temperature.
The engine compartment hood and door are open.
You have a receptacle of around 200 l capacity for the used oil.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve.
Connect the drain hose 3 and let the oil flow into the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve.
Open the cover 4 of the return strainer.
Take the snap ring 5 off the return strainer.
Take out the return strainer 6 and check it for dirt (clean it if necessary).
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the return strainer may
indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it.
The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer.
Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 3.
Put the cover 2 on the housing and tighten it up.
Start the diesel engine and let it run briefly at low idling speed.
Turn off the diesel engine and then check the oil level in the sight glass,
topping up if necessary.
3.5.39 Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank
Make sure that:
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Unscrew the plug 2.
The oil level sinks.
Release the bolts on the lid and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod 1.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments on the magnetic rod may
indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
Carefully clean the magnetic rod 1.
After cleaning:
Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing.
Tighten the screws on the cover.
Screw in the plug 2.
Screw on the bleeder filter 4 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it
somewhere safe).
3.5.40 Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter

Make sure that:
Procedure
Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the
hydraulic tank by two turns.
Unscrew the plug 2 (the oil level sinks).
Release the bolts on the lid 3 and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod.
Take out the filter element 4.
Put in a new filter element.
Carefully clean the magnetic rod.
Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing and
tighten the screws on the cover.
Screw in the plug 2.
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the filter element or on
the magnetic rod may indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
3.5.41 Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that:

Procedure
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
You cannot clean the bleeder filter. The bleeder filter 1 and its plastic
housing must be changed at the intervals in the maintenance schedule.
Unscrew the old bleeder filter.
Screw in the new bleeder filter and remove the connector 2 (keep it
somewhere safe).
3.5.42 Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints

and tappets
Procedure
Take the rubber sleeve 5 of the control lever off the retaining plate 4.
Move the control lever in the appropriate direction for better access.
Clean the retaining solenoids 1 with a brush.
Lubricate the universal joints 2 and the discs 3 with a brush.
Start the machine and check the retaining function of the solenoids.
Fit the rubber sleeve of the control lever on the retaining plate.
3.5.43 Testing the steering

Make sure that:
The working attachment is in the transport position.
The articulation lock is open.
There is enough space to test the steering.
Procedure
Warning
Beware of accidents
! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are
being conducted.
! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Start the engine.

Without moving the machine, turn the steering in both directions and
check that it is functioning properly.
3.5.44 Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders

Make sure that:
The articulation lock is engaged if possible.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
1 Lubrication point at base of right- 3 Lubrication point on the piston rod

hand steering cylinder end of left-hand steering cylinder
2 Lubrication point at base of left- 4 Lubrication point on the piston rod
hand steering cylinder end of right-hand steering cylinder
Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders.
3.5.45 Testing the service brake and parking brake

Make sure that there is enough room to check the service brake and
parking brake.
Warning
Beware of running over bystanders or obstacles.
! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are
being conducted.
! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.
Checking the service brake
1 Inch/brake pedal 3 Braking range

2 Inching range
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 8 km/h.

Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down. The machine must come to
an abrupt stop.
Checking the parking brake

Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 5 km/h.
Press the parking brake button while travelling.
The machine must come to an abrupt halt.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.46 Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings
Friction can change the gap X1 and X2 and the thickness of the brake lining.
Procedure
Warning
There is a risk of injuries due to machine rolling away.
! Make sure that the machine is secured against rolling away when carry-
ing out work on the parking brake.
Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.
Disc brake (shown in open position)

1 Lock nut 6 Counter nut
2 Plug 7 Hex bolt
3 Adjusting screw 8 X1 Gap
4 Brake disc 9 X2 Gap
5 Brake lining
Start the diesel engine and press the button to release the parking brake.
Test the brake lining thickness:
If the brake linings are thinner than 1.0 mm, they must be replaced.
Check the gap X1 and X2:
If the gap X1 + X2 is more than 1.5 mm:
Adjust the gap.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Loosen the counter nut 6 and adjust the gap X1 to 0.3 mm using an allen
key 7.
Tighten the counter nut 6.
Unscrew the sealing cap 2 and loosen the lock nut 1.
Use the adjusting screw 3 to set the gap X2 to 0.3 mm.
Tighten the lock nut 1.
Engage the parking brake several times and test it again.
Screw on the sealing cap 2 and tighten it.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.47 Checking the indicator lamps and lighting

Make sure that:
The machine's electrical system is switched on.
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting
When you switch on the ignition, the lamps on the display unit are tested.
All symbol fields light up for three seconds.
Switch on the ignition.

Check that the symbol fields on the display unit light up.
Check that all lights are working.
Adjusting the working floodlights
Note: The front working floodlights cannot be adjusted.
The rear working floodlights are optional.
Adjust the rear working floodlights as required:
Either for close range lighting
or for long range lighting.
Rear working floodlights

1 Floodlight 4 Bracket
2 Fixing screw 5 Adjusting screw
3 Fixing screws
Horizontal Y axis adjustment:
Loosen the screw 2.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Move the left and right floodlights as required.

Tighten the screw again.
Vertical X axis adjustment:
Loosen the screw 5.
Move the left and right floodlights as required.
Tighten the screw again.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.48 Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals
The batteries are housed in the right ballast weight and can be accessed by
opening the covers.
The batteries must always be in perfect condition in order for the machine to
work reliably.
Make sure that:
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key is
taken out.
The covers on the ballast are bolted on.
Warning
Batteries give off explosive gases. Battery acid is highly corrosive.
! Do not smoke. Avoid naked flames when handling, servicing or rechar-
ging batteries.
Caution
Beware of sparks and explosions!
! Use a special terminal brush.
Wipe the battery with a clean cloth.
Clean the terminals and the connectors.
To guarantee a good connection, check that the connectors are tight on
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
the terminals, and tighten them if necessary.

Smear the terminals and connectors with acid-proof grease such
as vaseline.
At very high temperatures, the acid level in the individual cells can drop due
to different rates of evaporation.
Open the plugs on each cell and check the acid level.
Check the charge using an acid density tester.
If the charge is too low (acid density below 1.26 kg/l):
Recharge the batteries.
If there is a risk of frost, it is important that the batteries are not discharged.
Otherwise the electrolyte can freeze and irreparably damage the battery.
If the acid level is too low:
Top up with distilled water to around 10 mm above the plates.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.49 Checking the transmission oil level

Make sure that:
The articulation lock is engaged.
Procedure
Check the oil level with the engine running and at a gear oil temperature of
2010 C.
Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Check the oil level in the sight glasses 3 and 4.
The oil level must be within the bottom sight glass 4.
Switch off the engine and top up with the required amount of gear oil. For
the oil quality, see the section gear lubricants in the lubricants and
fuels section.
Repeat the check.
If the oil level is too high:
Have LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE identify the problem and
rectify it.
3.5.50 Changing the transmission oil

Make sure that:
You have a sufficient quantity of the gear oil prescribed in the section on
lubricants and fuels.
The oil in the gearbox is warm.
You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal.
Procedure
Open the cap on the filler neck.
Open the plug 1 on the gearbox and drain the oil into a suita-
ble receptacle.
Then screw the plug 1 in again.
Top up gear oil the filler neck of the plug 2.
Replace the gear oil filter as described in the separate instructions.
Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the
section on checking the oil level in the transmission).
3.5.51 Changing the transmission oil filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that:

You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil cartridge ready.
Procedure
Start the engine. Turn and steer the machine to the left as far as it
will go.
Release the filter cartridge with a strap wrench and unscrew it.
Clean the seals on the filter bracket.
Lightly coat the rubber seal ring on the new oil filter cartridge with
gear oil.
Screw the new filter cartridge onto the filter bracket and tighten it
by hand.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the
section on checking the oil level in the transmission).
Check the oil filter for leaks.
3.5.52 Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100
and 250 h)
Make sure that:
A torque wrench with a measuring range of over 650 Nm is available.
Procedure
Note
Check the tightness of the wheels according to the specified intervals.
! This one-off maintenance task scheduled for 50, 100 and 250 service
hours must be performed every time the wheels are changed.
Check that the nuts on all four wheels have been tightened with the
required torque of 750 Nm.
3.5.53 Checking the axle oil level

L576 - 457 / from 14171
The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Open the plug 4 and check the oil level in the axle.
Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.54 Checking the axle oil level

Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171
The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system.
Procedure
Open the plug 1 and check the oil level in the axle.
Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.
3.5.55 Changing the axle oil

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Make sure that:
You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on
Draining oil
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution
Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot!
! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.
Open the plugs 2 and 4.
Open the plugs 1 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into
a receptacle.
Close the plugs 1 and 3 again.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Topping up oil
The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means
the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs.
Top up oil at the filling inlet 2 up to the plug 4.
Check the oil level at the plug 4 and top up if necessary.
3.5.56 Changing the axle oil

Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171
Make sure that:
You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on
Draining oil
Caution
Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot!
! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Open the plug 1.

Open the plugs 2 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into
a receptacle.
Topping up oil
The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means
the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs.
Top up oil at the filling inlet 1.
Check the oil level at the filling inlet 1 and top up if necessary.
Close the plug 1 again.
3.5.57 Lubricating the bevel gear seal

Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171
Make sure that:
Procedure
Lubricate at the grease fitting 1 on the front and rear axles.
If necessary, such as when operating the machine in water, lubricate
every day.
3.5.58 Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft

Procedure
Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints.
Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.
Check the rubber sleeve for leaks and damage.
3.5.59 Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints.
Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.60 Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's use
and attachments
Make sure the air pressure in the tyres on both axles is correct for the tyre
type, the way the machine is used and the working attachments fitted.
The reference values can be found in the operating manual, in the technical
data section.
Procedure
The air pressure in the tyres has a significant influence on the overall
operating performance of the machine.
Warning
Exploding tyres can cause serious injury.
If the tyre inflation equipment is incorrectly or carelessly used or if the tyre
pressure is too high, the tyres may burst or the rims may come off, causing
severe, or possibly even fatal injuries.
! Use a sufficiently long hose with a self-locking adapter for pumping
the tyres.
! Always keep outside the danger zone when tyres are being pumped up.
Check the air pressure in all the tyres and correct it if necessary.
3.5.61 Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating

bearing
Make sure that:
The articulation lock is engaged.
Lubricating the articulation bearing

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Articulation bearing lubrication points

1 Top articulation bearing 2 Bottom articulation bearing
Lubricate the articulation bearing lubrication points.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Lubricating the rear oscillating bearing
Lubricating points on the rear oscillating bearing, right central lubrication rail
1 Rear axle oscillating bearing 2 Front axle oscillating bearing
Lubricate the lubricating points on the rear axle oscillating bearing.
3.5.62 Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level

Procedure
Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir.

Stay within the minimum and maximum lubricant levels.
The reservoir has a sight glass where the rubber stripper on the agitator can
be seen.
Look through the sight glass to check the level in the grease reservoir.
It the grease in the reservoir container is too low, all 3 LEDs on the central
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
lubrication system button light up.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the system.
! Pay attention to cleanliness when filling.
If necessary, fill the reservoir via the filling coupling 1 (fast filling) or the
grease fitting 2.
Grease specifications: See the lubricants and fuels listed in chapter 5.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.63 Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the

lubrication system
Procedure
Visually examine the hose lines for defects.
In case of any defects, locate and rectify the problem.
3.5.64 Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at the

bearing points (grease collars) of the central lubrication
system
Procedure
Visually examine whether metered quantities are adequate at the
bearing points.
If the bearing points are not sufficiently lubricated, locate the problem and
rectify it.
Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir.
See the section on checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level,
3.5.65 Lubricating the door hinges

Procedure
Lubricate the door hinges with a grease gun.
3.5.66 Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter

Cleaning the fresh air filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Fresh air filter

1 Door 3 Ventilation lint filter
2 Fresh air filter
Open the door 1.
Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Fresh air filter

Clean (blow out) or replace the fresh air filter 2.
Remove the lint filter 3.
Clean (blow out or wash) the lint filter or change it if necessary.
Fresh air filter

Insert the cleaned or new filters, making sure they are correctly fitted (the
arrows moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in).
Close the door again.
Cleaning the recirculated air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Recirculation filter
1 Door 3 Recirculation filter
2 Pin
Remove the pin 2.
Open the door 1.
Take out the recirculated air filter 3 and clean it (blow it out) or replace it.
Put in a clean or new filter.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
3.5.67 Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter

Changing the fresh air filter
Fresh air filter

1 Door 3 Ventilation lint filter
2 Fresh air filter
Open the door 1.
Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.
Fresh air filter

Insert the new filter 1, making sure it is correctly fitted (the arrows
moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in).
Changing the recirculated air filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Recirculation filter
1 Door 3 Recirculation filter
2 Pin
Remove the pin 2.
Open the door 1.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Take out the recirculated air filter 3.

Put in a new filter.
3.5.68 Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit

The dryer-collector unit is located on the right under the cooling sys-
tem hood.
Sight glass in the dryer-collector unit

Check the orange bead 2 (moisture indicator).
If the orange bead 2 has turned transparent:
There is moisture in the refrigerant circuit. You must replace the dryer-
collector and the compressor oil and refill the system.
The white bead 1 shows the filling level of R134a refrigerant in the circuit
and acts as an indicator during initial filling. The white bead 1 must be at
the top of the sight glass.
The filling level can vary due to temperature fluctuations. It also sinks in time
due to natural leakage. This does not impair operation.
If the cooling performance deteriorates, one of the causes can be a low
refrigerant level.
In normal circumstances, one filling lasts for three to five years.
3.5.69 Lubricating the lift arms and attachment

This also applies to optional equipment, for example:
High dump bucket, timber grabber etc.
Lubricating standard lift arms and attachment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms

Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.

Grease all the bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms.
If fitted, lubricate the quick-change device.
If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the attachment.
The lower bucket bearings should be lubricated daily if necessary.
Lubricating the tilt cylinder support for timber transfer
Tilt cylinder support

1 Grease fitting 3 Lubricating line
2 Distributor block
Grease the lubrication points via the grease fitting 1.
The lubricant is pumped via the distributor block 2 and the lubricating lines 3
to the lubricating points.
If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the timber grabber. For detailed
information on maintenance for the attachment, see the manufac-
turer's instructions.
3.5.70 Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings
on the lift arms
Checking the bucket bearing seal
The bucket bearing seal 3 prevents dirt from entering the bearing, thus
increasing the lifetime of the bearing bushings.
Depending on the type of application, wear occurs on the sealing lips 5 and
on the dirt guard 6. If the bucket bearing seal 3 is in any way damaged or
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
worn, it must be replaced.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Checking the bucket bearing seal
1 Bucket bearing plate 3 Bucket bearing seal 5 Sealing lips

2 Bucket arm 4 Bearing bushing 6 Dirt guard
Clean the bucket bearing seals 3 using a steam jet.
Visually check whether the sealing lips 5 touch the sides of the lift arms
and the bucket.
If there is a gap between the sealing lips 5 and the bucket arm 2 or the
bucket bearing plate 1, or if the bucket bearing seal is damaged:
Replace the bucket bearing seal as described in section 17.2.5.
Checking the bearing bushings for wear

Dirt or insufficient lubrication can cause wear on the bearing bushings. The
increased play between the pin and bearing bushing causes noises.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Replace the bearing bushings in good time to prevent damage to the

material of the bucket arm.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Gently and rapidly tilt the bucket in and out, and check the bearing points
for noise and play.
If there is significant play at the bearing points or loud noise:
Replace the bearing bushings as described in section 17.2.4.
3.5.71 Check the lift arms and bucket stops

There are two ways to attach the equipment to the lift arms: directly or using
the quick-change device.
It is important that the limits stops and the sequence of stops are as
specified. Failure to comply can reduce the lifetime of the equipment and the
lift arms.
Checking the bucket stops without a quick-change device

This is how to check the bucket stops properly:
Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or
wheel wedges).
Retract the tilt cylinders until the bucket stops 1 touch the bucket arm.
Check the dimension 2 according to the following table.
Dimensions
Description Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Unit
Dimensions L550 - L580 0 32 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer
service about corrective action.
Checking the bucket stops with a quick-change device

This is how to check the bucket stops properly:
Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or
wheel wedges).
Move the lift arms and the quick-change device to the position shown.
Retract the tilt cylinders until the linkage stop touches the cross tube stop.
Check the dimension 1 according to the following table.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks
Dimensions
Description Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Unit

3
Dimensions L550 - L580 5 0 mm
If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer
service about corrective action.
3.5.72 Testing the quick-change device (optional)

Make sure that:
The lift arms have been lowered.
The working attachment is tilted in.
Procedure
The operation of the quick-change device can vary according to the version
or the type of machine.
To check that it is working properly:
Unlock the quick-change device and lock it again.
This prevents the locking pins from jamming and preventing the quick-
change device from being released.
To make sure, check:
That the quick-change device is properly locked again.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6 Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.1 Preparing for testing and adjustment
During the warranty period, only trained and authorised specialist staff may
carry out adjustments on the machine.
Make sure that:
The machine is at operating temperature (except when testing the air
conditioning).
The adjustment data for the machine is available or known.
Seals and safety caps are at hand.
The following special tools are available.
Special tools
Number Description ID no.
1 USB dongle for SCULI 1033 3608
1 Data lead for SCULI 1003 5410
2 Manometer, 0 - 40 bar, class 1.0 7361 288
2 Manometer, 0 - 600 bar, class 1.0 5002 866
2 4000 mm test leads 7009 134
2 1500 mm test leads 7002 475
3.6.2 Safety precautions for testing and adjustment

Always observe the accident prevention regulations during mainte-
nance work.
See the safety regulations section for measures to ensure safe maintenance.
Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and
maintenance personnel is always maintained.
Only carry out adjustments on valves etc. with the machine not running.
Visual contact
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.6.3 Bringing the machine up to operating temperature

During testing and adjustment, the machine must be at an operating tempe-
rature of 585 C. The temperature is measured by the hydraulic oil sensor
and can be seen in SCULI.
Procedure
Insert a piece of card or similar material between the fuel cooler 1 and the
hydraulic oil cooler 2.
Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Block Curve folder.
The cooling system - temperature hydraulic oil variable shows the
hydraulic oil temperature during the adjustment.
58.1
Bring the machine up to operating temperature as follows:

Run the engine at around 2000 rpm.
Activate the tilt-in function as far as it will go and hold the control lever in
this position.
At the same time, move the lift arms up and down with the lever half-
way out.
Operate the travel hydraulics in fixed gear 1.
Bring the machine up to operating temperature until the hydraulic oil
temperature is 585 C.
When working on the hydraulic system, the hydraulic oil temperature
must be within the prescribed range.
After finishing the adjustment, take the piece of card out of the oil cooler.
3.6.4 Checking the diesel engine speed

You can read the engine speed from the RPM segment indicator in the
display unit or use a standard engine speed tester.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The engine speed cannot be mechanically adjusted; it is determined directly

by the engine control unit.
Cab display unit
Procedure
Start up the engine.
Check that the top and bottom engine speeds are correct.
Calibrate the gas pedal using the SCULI program and service the engine.
Check the top and bottom idle speeds again.

L580 - 459 / from 14171
3.6.5 Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve
Make the following checks on the fan motor:
These tests must be performed at upper engine speed.
Test the fan according to the temperature (temperature sensor 1 or
2 disconnected).
Test the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (with the plug on the
proportional valve disconnected).
Fan drive components
1 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 4 Fan gear pump 7 Fan proportional valve
2 Coolant temperature sensor 5 Fan gear motor 8 Fan proportional solenoid
3 Fan pressure test connection 6 Fan proportional valve cap 9 Proportional solenoid connector
You can check the fan using the system pressure, measured at the test
connection 3 of the gear pump 4.
Make sure that:
The hydraulic oil temperature is less than 88 C.
The coolant temperature is below 97 C.
If the hydraulic temperature is over 88 C or the coolant temperature is
above 97 C, the fan speeds up. This makes it impossible to test the
fan control.
Checking the fan according to the temperature

The fan speed (system pressure) is tested here in the stated tempera-
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
ture range.
Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear
pump 4.
Disconnect the hydraulic oil temperature sensor 1 or coolant temperature
sensor 2.
Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed.
Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed.
Fan pressure 11010 bar
Fan speed 1650 min-1
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Fan speed 1400 min-1
Check the fan motor pressure relief valve.
Checking the fan motor pressure relief valve

Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear
pump 4.
Pull out the plug 9 on the proportional solenoid 8.
Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed.
Adjust the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (using the adjusting
screw and a 5 mm open-end spanner - the lock nut is a round nut).
Turn clockwise to increase the pressure and anticlockwise to reduce it.
Remove the cap 6.
Adjust the screw on the proportional valve.
Fan speed approx. 2050 min-1
Fan speed approx. 1600 min-1
Plug in the disconnected plug again.
3.6.6 Calibrating the pedals

The pedals can only be calibrated using the SCULI software.
During calibration, the MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal and inch
pedal are stored in the master electronics.
Procedure
Connect your laptop, turn on the start switch and run the SCULI program.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19/03/2007

Pedals folder.
Set Throttle - start adjustment to 1.
Push the gas pedal all the way down.
The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds
the value automatically returns to 0 and calibration is finished.
Check that Throttle - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not pressed
and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Set Inch pedal - start adjustment to 1.

Push the inch pedal all the way down.
The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds
the value automatically returns to 0 and calibration is finished.
Check that Inch pedal - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not
pressed and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.
3.6.7 Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable

displacement pump
Measure the replenishing pressure at the test connection G.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection G.
Start the machine and let the engine run at top idling speed.
Check that the replenishing pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the replenishing pressure relief valve 1 until
the replenishing pressure is correct.
Replenishing pressure 311 bar
Replenishing pressure 341 bar
3.6.8 Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the

variable displacement pump
The pressure relief and replenishing valves protect the variable displacement
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
pump from pressure peaks. These can occur when braking the machine.
When a pressure peak occurs, oil flows from the high pressure side via
the pressure relief and replenishing valve to the low pressure side in a
closed circuit.
Procedure
To attain the set value for the pressure relief and replenishing valves, the
pressure cut-off must be set to a higher value.
Screw in the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections MA and MB.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the
inching function is disabled.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 2 for forward travel on the
manometer MA.
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 3 for reverse travel on the
manometer MB.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward or reverse travel, and hold the machine in
the blocked condition using the service brake.
Caution
Heat is quickly generated when you test the pressure relief and replenish-
ing valves.
Excessive heat can irreparably damage the pump.
! Only test the pressure relief and replenishing valves for a short time.
In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum.
Check that the high pressure at the two pressure relief and replenishing
valves is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure relief and replenishing valve
until the high pressure is correct.
Loosen the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn and
check the pressure cut-off.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0
the inching function is enabled.

High pressure 47010 bar
3.6.9 Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement

pump
The pressure cut-off limits the maximum pressure of the variable
displacement pump.
When this pressure is reached, the pump flow is automatically reduced in
order to maintain the maximum permitted pressure.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the
inching function is disabled.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the
blocked condition using the service brake.
In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Check that the high pressure on the manometer MA is correct.

Check that the engine suppression is below the threshold.
Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off 1 until the manometer
MA reaches the correct value.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0
the inching function is enabled.
Maximum engine suppression at top idle 30 min-1
speed
L580 - 459 / from 14171
3.6.10 Calibrating the block curve

The block curve can only be calibrated using the SCULI software.
During calibration, the current to the proportional valve on the variable
displacement pump is adjusted so that the pump reaches a set pressure at a
set engine speed.
Procedure
Block Curve folder.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the inching function is
disabled.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the
blocked condition using the service brake.
Increase the engine speed to the levels shown in the table (930 min-1,
1200 min-1, 1400 min-1) and test the high pressure.
Adjust the parameter Travel pump - current at 930, 1200, 1400 rpm
until the set value is reached.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 the inching
function is enabled.
-1
High pressure at 930 min engine speed 5010 bar
High pressure at 1200 min-1 engine speed 29010 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

-1
High pressure at 930 min engine speed 5010 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.6.11 Calibrating the variable displacement motors

The variable displacement motors are calibrated automatically by the
master electronics.
Automatically calibrating the variable displacement motors

Travel motor folder.
Set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment to 1.
The engine speed is automatically increased to 1000 min-1. After this the
motors are successively calibrated across the entire speed range.
After calibration, set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment
back to 0.
Note: Once the automatic calibration of the motors is complete, a service

code appears in the display.
This can happen if the variable displacement motor current is too high or
low. In this case, the variable displacement motors must be manually
checked and adjusted to 60030 mA.
Setting VG max manually

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections M1 and M2.
Travel motor folder.
disabled.
Select fixed gear 1 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the blocked
condition using the service brake.
Adjusting variable displacement motor 1:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the
manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar.
Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current until the
manometer at M1 shows 155 bar less than manometer MA.
When the manometers MA and M1 show the correct levels, increase the
current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current by 10 mA.
Adjusting variable displacement motor 2:
In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the
manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar.
Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current until the
manometer at M1 shows 155 bar less than manometer MA.
When the manometers MA and M2 show the correct levels, increase the
current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current by 10 mA.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Note: The current for both motors must be in the range of 60030 mA. If there
is any deviation, correct it using the adjusting screws 1 or 2.
Repeat the automatically calibration of the variable displacement motors.
3.6.12 Checking the engine output

Before you check the power of the engine, you must carry out the following
tasks:
Tasks in maintenance schedule (air filter, fuel filter etc.)
Check the operating pressures according to the adjustment checklist
The machine must be at operating temperature.
At maximum engine power consumption, the variable displacement motor
power limiting control is activated. It regulates the pivot angle of the motors
so that the engine runs at rated speed. This results in a set high pressure in
the closed circuit.
If the high pressure is is above the set value, the engine power is good.
If the high pressure is is below the set value, the engine power is poor.
If the engine speed reaches the set value, power limiting control is
working correctly.
Procedure
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Check
Dieselengine folder.
disabled.
Start the machine, select fixed gear 2 and forward travel direction.
Hold the machine with the service brake and run it at full throttle.
Slowly release the service brake until the machine moves at 13 km/h.
Check that the set values are reached.
If they are not correct:
Troubleshoot the engine: air filters, fuel filters etc.
Troubleshoot the travel hydraulics: check the operating pressure etc.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978
Diesel engine speed 198030 min-1
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171

3.6.13 Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working

hydraulics pump
Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors
for the range up to 600 bar.
Procedure
Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS.
You can measure the differential pressure, for example by slowly raising the
lift arms.
Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS.
Slowly raise the lift arms and check whether the differential pressure
is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential
pressure is correct.
Differential pressure 222 bar
3.6.14 Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working

hydraulics pump
The flow controller determines the maximum output of the variable dis-
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
placement pump. At the start of delivers, the indicator on the manometer M1

moves away from 0 bar. The set value on the manometer P should
be reached.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the variable displacement pump at
test connections M1 and P.
Start the engine, tilt the bucket all the way out and move the lift arms to
the bottom position.
At idle speed, raise the lift arms all the way and check that the start of
delivery shown on the manometer M1 is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the power controller 1 until the pressure
is correct.
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Start of regulation 18010 bar
3.6.15 Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the control

block
Procedure
To check the secondary pressure relief valve, you must increase the setting
of the LS pressure cut-off 5 and the primary pressure relief valve 3.
Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control
block by two turns.
Tighten the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 by
two turns.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P on the
control block.
Caution
The pump can be irreparably damaged if you lower the lift arms. This
function has no secondary pressure relief valve.
! Do not lower the lift arms.
Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed.
Raise the lift arms, tilt out the bucket and tilt in the bucket, each to the limit.
Check that the pressure at each secondary pressure relief valve is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the secondary pressure relief valve until it
is correct.
Adjust the primary pressure relief valve 3 and the LS pressure cut off 5
back to the set value. See the sections on testing the primary pressure
relief valve and LS pressure cut-off.
Tilt-in function (2) 3805 bar
Tilt-out function (4) 3805 bar
Lifting function (1) 3805 bar
Tilt-in function (2) 4005 bar
Tilt-out function (4) 4005 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lifting function (1) 4205 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.6.16 Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the control

block
Procedure
To check the primary pressure relief valve 3, you must increase the setting
of the LS pressure cut-off 5.
Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control
block by two turns.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P.
Raise the lift arms to the limit.
Check that the pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 until the
Return the LS pressure cut-off 5 to its normal value. See the section on
testing the LS pressure cut-off.
Primary valve (3) 3605 bar
Primary valve (3) 3805 bar
3.6.17 Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block

Procedure
Raise the lift arms to the limit.
Check that the pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 until the pressure
is correct.
Valid for: L550 - 456 / from 16978

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
LS pressure cut-off (5) 2905 bar
Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653

L580 - 459 / from 14171
3.6.18 Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators

You must depressurise the system before checking and filling the hydro
accumulators or making repairs to the ride control system.
This is how to depressurise the ride control system:
Procedure
Caution: Perform the following actions in the correct sequence.
Put the machine and the lift arms in maintenance position 2.
The working attachment and lift arms must lie on the ground under their
own weight.
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection M4 on the
front axle.
Connect the same test line to the test connection MX.
The pressure can then be relieved through this line to the tank. This takes
around 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes, take the test line off test connection M4 and drain the
remaining fluid into a suitable receptacle.
Leave the test line connected during the testing and repair work.
After servicing, remove the test line from test connection MX.
3.6.19 Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module

The cut-off function limits the pressure in the hydro accumulators when ride
control is deactivated. This is how to check and correct the cut-off pressure:
The cut-off pressure is fixed by the spring force. This means the cut-off
pressure cannot be adjusted.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MX on the stabili-
sation module.
Start the diesel engine (with ride control deactivated).
With the engine idling, raise the lift arms to their full height and accu-
mulate pressure.
Check that the high pressure on the manometer is correct (reading the
highest value).
Find the cause and rectify the fault.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6.20 Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator

Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a
nitrogen bottle.
The hydro accumulators can only be tested or filled when they
are depressurised.
Note: The nitrogen chamber of the hydro accumulator has around 350 cm
of oil in it to protect the membrane.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Procedure
Depressurise the ride control system as described in the section on
depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators.
Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator
using a 6 mm allen key.
Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator you
want to test.
Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct.
Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the pressure
is correct.
You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve
valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air.

Hydro accumulator temperature 0 10 20 30 C
2 2 2 2
Nitrogen for filling the hydro accumulator 25 26 27 28 bar
2 2 2 2
Minimum hydro accumulator nitrogen filling 23 24 25 26 bar
3.6.21 Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump

Procedure
Turn the steering fully to the left or right.
Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure controller 2 until the pressure
is correct.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6.22 Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump

Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors
for the range up to 600 bar.
Procedure
Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS.
You can only measure the differential pressure when the flow controller is
activated. This is best done when slowly steering.
Fit a test connection between the hose line and the connection LS.
Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS.
Slowly steer the machine to the left or right and check whether the
differential pressure on the measuring device is correct.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential
Differential pressure 22 2 bar
3.6.23 Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake valve

The compact brake valve fills the brake accumulator until the shut-off
pressure is reached.
When you repeatedly press the inch-brake pedal, the pressure in the brake
accumulators falls until the opening pressure is reached. The brake
accumulator charging function then begins.
Procedure
You can check the cut-off pressure of the brake accumulator charging
function using the test connection M3 on the compact brake valve.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test
connection MA.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times.
Look at the manometer M3 to check that the correct opening pressure
is reached.
When the opening pressure is reached, the pressure on the manometer
begins to rise. The pressure then increases to the closing pressure.
Check the test connection M3 to see if the closing pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the compact brake valve until the closing
Opening pressure 1805 bar
Closing pressure 2105 bar
3.6.24 Checking the brake pressure at the axles

You can check the brake pressure on the wet disk brakes in the wheel hubs
at the test connection M4 on the front axle 1 and M5 on the cut-in block 2.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5.

Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down.
Check that the pressure on both manometers is correct.
Adjust the pedal stop screw 3 so that the brake pressure is correct when
L566 - 460 / from 14171
the pedal is all the way down. Remove the seal 4, loosen the counter nut
and adjust the bottom screw.
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Brake pressure with the pedal fully 95 5 bar
pressed
Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171

Brake pressure with the pedal fully 70 5 bar
pressed
3.6.25 Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator

Test the capacity of the brake accumulators 1 and 2 for the front and rear
axles respectively by pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times. Before the
test, the pressure in the brake accumulators must be 180 bar.
After pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times, the pressure should not be
below the correct level.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection M3 on the

compact brake valve.
Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5 on the
cut-in block 2.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times to lower the
brake accumulator pressure to 180 bar.
Slowly press the inch/brake all the way down nine times, keeping it down
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
the final time.

Check that the correct pressure is reached on the manometers M4
and M5.
If the brake pressure on either manometer falls below the correct level:
Replace the brake accumulator if necessary.

Lower brake pressure tolerance 50 bar
L580 - 459 / from 14171
3.6.26 Checking the accumulator charge pressure

The pressure switch generates a warning if the brake accumulator pressure
is too low. When the pressure in the brake accumulators is reached, the
symbol field 2 goes out and the brake system is ready for operation.
Procedure
You can check the switching point of the pressure switch 1 using the test
connection M3 on the compact brake valve and the symbol field 2 on the
display unit.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test con-
nection MA.
Turn on the starter switch.
Gently push the inch/brake pedal to slowly lower the pressure in the
brake accumulators.
Check that the symbol field 2 lights up when the correct pressure is
shown on the manometer M3.
Replace the brake accumulator pressure switch 1.
Pressure switch activation point 1205 bar
3.6.27 Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake lights
This check tests the brake lights.
Procedure
Turn on the starter switch.
Slowly and gently press the inch/brake pedal and watch the brake lights
light up.
If the brake lights do not light up:
Check the brake lights; replace the brake light pressure switch 1
if necessary.
3.6.28 Checking the transmission shift pressure

Procedure
Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The shift pressure relief valve is inside the control valve block. You can
only adjust the shift pressure by adding or removing shims. For a
sectional view view of the control valve block, see section on electrohy-
draulic pressure modulation.
Shift pressure 20 3 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.6.29 Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator

Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a nitrogen bottle.
Procedure
Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator
using a 6 mm allen key.
Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator.
Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct.
Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the nitrogen pres-
sure is correct.
You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve
valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air.

Nitrogen filling 122 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Lubricants and fuels
3.7 Lubricants and fuels

Conscientious observance of the regulations for handling lubricants and
fuels will increase the reliability and service life of the machine.
It is especially important that the specified lubricant qualities are observed.
You can find the various specifications about the prescribed intervals in the
maintenance and inspection schedule and the lubrication chart.
You can find details on lubrication, checking the oil level and changing
operating fluids in the maintenance section under maintenance tasks.
Follow the rules on handling lubricants and fuels, especially the environ-
mental regulations.
Filling quantities and specifications:
The filling quantities listed in the tables are only guidelines. The dipstick
and level markings are always mandatory.
Each time the lubricant or fuel is replaced or topped up, check the level in
the unit in question.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants, fuels and
filling quantities, see the filling quantities in the lubrication chart and the
section on lubricants and fuels.
Environmental protection
Always implement and observe environmental protection measures.
Observe national regulations.
Ensure that liquids can be properly disposed of before draining them.
Disposing of used materials

This applies to the following types of used materials and hazardous waste:
Oils, lubricants, brake fluids, etc.
Coolant
Fuels
Filters, oil cartridges etc.
Rubber, tyres, insulating materials etc.
Batteries
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note
Environmental and health hazard
! Observe the local regulations for protecting the environment when dis-
posing of used materials!
Always collect and store used materials separately in suitable containers.
Dispose of used materials properly at the official collection points.
Copyright by
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 3.7-1 o f 1 0
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Converting the hydraulic system from petroleum to

environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids
For the operation of LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally
compatible hydraulic fluids we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46.
Machines filled at factory with environmentally compatible hydraulic
fluids have an appropriate sign (CAUTION) attached to the driver's cab
and hydraulic tank.
Procedure for conversion:
Caution
Beware of damaging the machine's hydraulic system.
Mixing environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oils produces a
vigorous reaction that can damage the hydraulic system.
! Do not mix environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oil.
If you intend to convert the machine to environmentally-compatible
hydraulic fluid, you must first consult LIEBHERR CUSTOMER
SERVICE.
Ask LIEBHERR for the instruction sheet and conversion guidelines and
be sure to follow them.
3.7.1 Diesel fuels

Specification The diesel fuels must comply with the minimum requirements of the fuel
specifications prescribed as follows.
Authorised fuel specifications:
DIN EN 590
ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D
Further fuel specifications only upon consultation with the Diesel Engine
Development Department, LIEBHERR Machines Bulle S.A.
Sulphur content in For worldwide markets except the USA:

the diesel fuel In DIN EN 590 the maximum sulphur content is 50 mg/kg = max. 0.005 %
by weight.
For the USA:
In ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D, the maximum sulphur content is 10 ppm.
Low-sulphur diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content of below / less than
0.05 weight% are only applicable if lubricity can be ensured with the
admixture of additives.
The diesel fuel lubricating proficiency must be a max. 460 m in accordance
with the HFRR (60) test.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
For diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than

0.5 weight%, the oil-change intervals are to be halved.
Diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than 1 weight%
are not permissible.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Note
In some cases, approval may be given, depending on the quality of the
diesel engine lubricating oil.
! Fuel standard ASTM D 975 does not stipulate that fuels must pass a fuel-
lubricity test. A written confirmation of the fuel supplier must be reques-
ted. The additives should be added by the supplier in his capacity as
agent responsible for fuel quality. The addition of secondary-lubricity-ad-
ditives by the customer is not recommended.
A cetane number of at least 45 is required for fuels in accordance with
ASTM D975. A cetane number above 50 is preferable, especially with
temperatures below 0C.
Diesel fuel at low temperatures Diesel fuel precipitates paraffin crystals as the temperature drops. This
(winter operation) increases flow-resistance in the fuel filter to such an extent that a sufficient
supply of fuel to the diesel engine can no longer be guaranteed.
In temperate climates, cold flow is guaranteed up to:
0 C from 15/04. to 30/09
-10 C from 01/10. to 14/11 / 1.3. - 14.04.
-20 C from 16/11 to 29/02
according to DIN EN 590.
If the cold-flow properties of the diesel fuel are insufficient or with lower
ambient temperatures than -20C, we recommend using a fuel filter heater.
Other approved diesel fuels:
Diesel fuel complying with DIN EN 590 with up to 5% vol. FAME.
3.7.2 Lubricating oils for diesel engines

Lube oil specifications Only high-alloy lube-oils are used nowadays for modern diesel engines.
They are comprised of base oils which feature combined admixtures (additives).
The lubricating oil regulation for LIEBHERR diesel engines is based on the
following specifications and regulations.
Description Specification
ACEA classification (Association des E4, E5, E6, E7
Constructeurs Europens de Caution: particle filter operation is
l'Automobile) only possible with E6
API classification (American CH-4, CI-4, CJ-4 observe special oil-
Petroleum Institute) change interval
Caution: observe the reduced oil-
change interval
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lube-oil viscosity Selection of lube-oil viscosity in accordance with the SAE-classification

(Society of Automotive Engineers).
The ambient temperature is definitive for the correct selection of
the SAE-class.
Selection of the SAE-classification gives no indication of the quality of
a lube-oil.
Too high a viscosity can lead to starting difficulties, and too low a viscosity
could jeopardise the lubricating efficiency.
The temperature ranges specified in the diagram are guidelines and can be
briefly exceeded or fallen short of.
Copyright by
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 3.7-3 o f 1 0
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class

The following engine oil is recommended (for outside temperatures of -20C
to +45C):
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40
Specification ACEA E4
Liebherr Motoroil low ash
Specification ACEA E6
Lube-oil change intervals Changing intervals:

Oil change and filter replacement: see the maintenance and inspec-
tion schedule
Oil-change respective of climatic zone, sulphur content in the fuel and oil
quality in accordance with the following table.
If the prescribed operating hours (h) have not expired within one year, the
diesel engine oil and filter must be replaced at least once a year.
Difficulty factors Various difficulty factors or more difficult operating conditions reduce mainte-
nance intervals.
Difficulty factors or difficult conditions include for example.:
frequent cold-starts
sulphur content in the fuel over 0.5%
Outside operating temperatures below -10 C
Should difficulty factors or tougher operating conditions arise, oil-change and
filter replacement must be carried out in accordance with the specifications
in the following table.
Difficulty factor Oil quality

CH-4
CI-4
CJ-4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
E4
E5
E6
E7
Outside Sulphur content
Interval
temperature in the fuel
Normal climate, up to 0.5% 250 h 500 h
up to -10 C over 0.5% 125 h 250 h
up to 0.5% 125 h 250 h
Below -10 C over 0.5% not 125 h
permissible
Oil-change intervals in operating hours (h)
L580 - 459 / from 14171
3.7.3 Coolant for the diesel engine

General recommendations The cooling system will only function reliably if it is working under pressure. It
is therefore imperative that it is kept clean and watertight, that the radiator
cap valve and working valves are functioning correctly and the necessary
coolant level is maintained.
The corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze authorised by LIEBHERR guarantees
sufficient protection against cold, corrosion and cavitation, do not corrode
seals and hoses and do not foam up.
Coolants which contain inadequate or ill-prepared corrosion inhibitor/
antifreeze could cause a malfunctioning of aggregates or parts in the cooling
circuit as a result of cavitational or corrosive damage. Furthermore, heat-
insulating sedimentation can result at heat-exchanging parts, leading to
overheating, and then to malfunctioning, of the engine.
Note
Emulsifiable corrosion inhibition oils may are impermissible.
! In special cases, it is permissible to use corrosion inhibitors.
Water (fresh water) Suitable water is colourless, clear, free of mechanical contamination,
drinkable tap water featuring the following restricted analysis values.
Sea water, brackish water, salt water and industrial waste water is
not suitable.
Fresh water quality
Description Value and unit
Total of alkaline earths (water hardness) 0.6 to 3.6 mmol/l (3 to 20d)
pH value at 20 C 6.5 to 8.0
Chloride-ion content max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate-ion content max. 100 mg/l
Fresh water quality when using DCA 4

Description Value and unit
Total of alkaline earths (water hardness) 0.6 to 2.7 mmol/l (3 to 15d)
pH value at 20 C 6.5 to 8.0
Chloride-ion content max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate-ion content max. 80 mg/l
Water analyses can be applied for from the communal authorities responsible.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
All year roundto C F Water % Corrosion inhibitor /

antifreeze %
Outside -37 -34 50 50
temperature
Outside -50 -58 40 60
temperature
Copyright by
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 3.7-5 o f 1 0
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Temperature-dependent selection of mix ratio for corrosion

inhibitor/antifreeze
A = ratio of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze in the coolant as a percentage
Corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze
Product designation Manufacturer Country
permitted for diesel engine
cooling syst Liebherr Antifreeze
Liebherr D
Concentrate
Addinol Lube Oil GmbH,
Addinol Antifreeze Super D
Leuna
Aral AG, BochumEni S.p.A.,
Agip Antifreeze Plus I
Rome
Agip Langzeit-Frostschutz Eni S.p.A., Wrzburg D
Antigel DB 486 Sotragal SA, St-Priest F
Aral Antifreeze Extra Aral AG, Hamburg D
Avia Antifreeze APN G48 Avia Minerall AG, Munich D
BP Isocool BP p.l.c. London GB
Caltex Extended Life
Chevron Texaco *
Coolant
Castrol Antifreeze NF Castrol, London GB
Chevron Extended Life
Chevron Texaco *
Coolant
DEUTZ Khlerschutz- DEUTZ Service International
D
mittel 0101 1490 GmbH, Cologne
ESA Frostschutz G48 ESA Burgdorf CH
Fuchs Fricofin Fuchs Petrolub AG,
D
Khlerfrostschutz Mannheim
Glacelf Auto Supra
Total, Paris F
(antifreeze)
Shell International Petroleum
GlycoShell Longlife GB
Company, London
Shell International Petroleum
GlycoShell N GB
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Company, London
BASF AG,
Glysantin G48 D
Ludwigshafen/Germany
Havoline Extendend Life
Chevron Texaco *
Antifreeze / Coolant
Havoline XLC Arteco B
Motorex Antifreeze
Bucher AG, Langenthal CH
Protect G48
Motul Inugel Optimal Ultra Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex F
OMV Khlerfrostschutz / OMV Refining & Marketing
A
Coolant Plus GmbH, Vienna
Do not mix products with one another!
* = global / worldwide
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze Product designation Manufacturer Country

premixes (50% water: 50%
corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze) Liebherr Antifreeze Mix Liebherr D
permitted for diesel engine Caltex Extended Life Coolant
cooling systems Pre-Mixed 50/50 (ready-to- Chevron Texaco *
use version)
Chevron DEX-COOL
Extended Life Pre-Diluted Chevron Texaco *
50/50 Antifreeze Coolant
Coolelf Auto Supra -37 C Total, Paris F
Havoline XLC, 50/50 Arteco B
Havoline DEX-COOL
Extended Life Pre-Diluted
50/50 Antifreeze Chevron Texaco *
Coolant
Corrosion inhibitors In exceptional cases and if outside temperatures constantly remain

without antifreeze above freezing, for example in the tropics, where it can be proven that no
approved corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze is available, the following may
be used as coolant:
Product DC4 (Diesel Coolant Additives 4)
Product Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total
When carrying out maintenance tasks, the concentration must be tested and
rectified as necessary.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
Note
The entire amount of coolant must be drained.
! When changing from corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze to pure corrosion
inhibitor, or vice versa.
Approved water-soluble
Product designation Manufacturer Countr
corrosion inhibitors
y
(concentrates) for diesel engine
cooling systems DCA 4 Diesel Coolant Additives Fleetguard / Cummins *
Filtration
Caltex XL Corrosion Inhibitor Chevron Texaco *
Concentrate
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Chevron Heavy Duty Extended Chevron Texaco *

Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite
Free (ELC)
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Chevron Texaco *
Inhibitor (XLI)
Total WT Supra Total, Paris F
Copyright by
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 3.7-7 o f 1 0
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.7.4 Hydraulic oils
Specification Only engine oils (mineral oils) meeting the following specifications and
regulations are permitted.
Description Specification
API classification (American
CF-4, CG-4, CH-4
Petroleum Institute)
ACEA classification (Association des
Constructeurs Europens de E2 , E3 , E4
l'Automobile)
Specifications and regulations for hydraulic oil
Viscosity The viscosity is selected according to the SAE (Society of Automotive

Engineers) classification.
The decisive factor for the selection of the correct SAE class is the am-
bient temperature.
The selection of the SAE classification has no bearing on the quality of a
hydraulic oil.
The temperature ranges presented in the diagram are merely guidelines.
Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class
Warming up For temperatures up to 10 C below the specified limit:

Adjust the diesel engine to roughly half speed after starting.
Activate the hydraulic cylinders and engines and briefly move the cyliners
to their stops.
Warming up takes roughly 10 minutes.
At even lower temperatures:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Before starting the engine, prewarm the oil tank.

Environmentally compatible When operating LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally
hydraulic fluids compatible hydraulic fluids, we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46 with
the viscosity specified by LIEBHERR.
Converting the hydraulic system to environmentally harmless
hydraulic fluid:
See the section on conversion from mineral oils to environmentally
harmless hydraulic fluids.
Note
Environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluids must be checked every 500
operating hours at regular intervals.
! LIEBHERR recommends that oil analysis is carried out by WEAR-CHECK.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Oil change:
At the interval stated in the maintenance and inspection schedule.
At the interval specified by WEAR-CHECK.
Note
Do not mix environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluid from different manu-
facturers or with mineral oils.
! See also the customer service information.
Monitoring hydraulic oil - changing according to oil samples - analysis

and laboratory report:
Oil change intervals according to sample analysis and laboratory report

1 Service hours 3 Second oil sample
2 First oil sample 4 Further oil samples every 500 operating hours
3.7.5 Lubricating oils for the transmission
Pump distributor gear and axles Gear oils must comply with the API GL-5 and MIL-L 2105 B, C or D specifi-
cations and the viscosity class SAE 90 LS *.
* = Gear oil with limited slip additives for disc brakes and self-locking
differentials.
LS = limited slip additive:
Not required for pump distributor gears
Required for axles
For the viscosity class SAE 90 LS, an oil of the viscosity class SAE 80 W 90
LS can also be used.
Transmission An ATF oil compliant with the DEXTRON II D specification should be used
as lubrication oil for the transmission.
Factory filling:
ATF 86 AVIA-FLUID DEXRON II D
Description ID no. Quantity

ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D 861012601 210 l
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D 10009964 20 l
3.7.6 Grease for general lubrication points

This grease must meet the KP2k specification consistency 2 of the NL
GI class according to DIN 51818 and DIN 51825 or EP 2 according to
NF-T-60 132.
The grease must be made of a lithium complex with a four ball tester (VKA)
value of at least 2300 N according to DIN 51350 or ASTM D 2596.
Application:
Grease for all lubrication points (according to the lubrication schedule)
Lubricant grease for bolt fitting
Lubricant grease for automatic central lubrication systems
Copyright by
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 457 / from 14171 3.7-9 o f 1 0
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Approved greases LIEBHERR 9610 special grease is a milling-resistant, ageing-resistant lithium

grease, providing protection against corrosion with excellent lubricity over a
wide temperature range.
Its molecular composition yields high degrees of shearing and milling stabili-
ty and good flow properties in long pipes.
Description ID no. Quantity

LH 9610 special grease 861302908 400 g (cartridge)
LH 9610 special grease 861301308 10 kg (drum)
LH 9610 special grease 861304508 25 kg (drum)
Lubricant grease for automatic Greases with high-pressure additives (EP greases) are recommended.
central lubrication systems
Only use greases with the same type of saponification.
Note
Greases with solid lubricant particles such as graphite are not suitable.
! Do not use this type of grease.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Diesel engine, Splitter box
4.0
Chapter contents
4 Diesel engine, Splitter box................................................... 4.1-1
4.1 Diesel engine ..................................................................................4.1-1

4.1.1 Electrical engine components ..............................................4.1-6
4.1.2 Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors B711/B712................4.1-7
4.1.3 Camshaft speed sensor B713 ...........................................4.1-8
4.1.4 Coolant temperature sensor B708 Fuel temperature
sensor B709 ......................................................................4.1-9
4.1.5 Charge air temperature sensor B707 ..............................4.1-10
4.1.6 Charge air pressure sensor B703 ...................................4.1-11
4.1.7 Oil pressure sensor B701................................................4.1-12
4.2 Fuel system.....................................................................................4.2-1

4.2.1 Fuel level sensor ..................................................................4.2-2
4.2.2 Fuel pre-filter ........................................................................4.2-3
4.2.3 Fuel fine filter ........................................................................4.2-4
4.2.4 Refuelling pump (optional) ...................................................4.2-5
4.3 Air filter system ...............................................................................4.3-1

4.3.1 Air filter .................................................................................4.3-1
4.3.2 Vacuum switch .....................................................................4.3-2
4.4 Coupling..........................................................................................4.4-1
4.5 Splitter box ......................................................................................4.5-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine, Splitter box Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual Diesel engine, Splitter box
Diesel engine
4.1 Diesel engine

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The diesel engine is a water-cooled, four-stroke in-line engine with pump-
line-nozzle (PLD) direct injection, turbocharging and charge air cooling.
The engine is fitted lengthways in the rear section and elastically supported
on rubber elements. The flywheel end faces to the rear.
Diesel engine components / right view

1 Flywheel housing 14 Flame glow plug
2 Flywheel 15 Engine electronics
3 Opening for cranking device (LH-ECU)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
4 Auxiliary drives 16 Air conditioning compressor

5 Fuel pre-filter 17 Alternator
6 Crankcase bleeder 18 Fuel line connections
7 Bleeder filter with oil separator 19 Auxiliary drive
8 Hand pump 20 Engine block
9 Cylinder head 21 Dipstick
10 Fuel fine filter 22 Oil separator return line
11 Charge air pipe 23 Oil pan
12 Lube oil filler neck 24 Fuel pump
13 Air intake pipe
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / left view

1 Water pump 8 Turbocharger turbine
2 Belt drive cover 9 Starter
3 Thermostat housing 10 Oil cooler
4 Oil filter 11 Cooling water supply to cooler
5 Charge air pipe 12 Cooling water return from cooler
6 Housing bleeder 13 Crankshaft / vibration damper
7 Turbocharger compressor
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / right view

1 Flywheel 13 Alternator
2 Flywheel housing 14 Engine electronics (LH-ECU)
3 Opening for cranking device 15 Auxiliary drive
4 Auxiliary drives 16 Hand pump
5 Crankcase bleeder 17 Fuel pre-filter
6 Bleeder filter with oil separator 18 Fuel line connections
7 Cylinder head 19 Fuel fine filter
8 Lube oil filler neck 20 Engine bearing
9 Combustion air intake manifold 21 Oil pan
10 Flame glow plug 22 Engine block
11 Air conditioning compressor 23 Fuel pump
12 Pump element with magnetic coil
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / left view

1 Water pump 8 Turbocharger turbine
2 Tension pulley apparatus 9 Crankcase
3 Oil filter 10 Exhaust pipe
4 Air intake pipe 11 Cooling water supply to cooler
5 Housing bleeder 12 Cooling water return from cooler
6 Charge air pipe 13 Thermostat housing
7 Turbocharger compressor 14 Crankshaft / vibration damper
Design features of the diesel engine:
Water-cooled four-stroke diesel engine with pump-line-nozzle (PLD)
direct injection
Turbocharger and charge air cooling
Maintenance-free gear drive for camshaft, fuel pump, lubricant pump on
flywheel end and coolant pump on motor end, as well as power take-off for
gear pumps
Individual cylinder heads with cast integral vortex intake duct
Replaceable wet bushings
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Small number of parts due to lubricant and coolant lines integrated in crankcase
Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of light alloy (D934S)
Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of monotherm steel (D934L/D936L)
Engine oil cooler
Double lube oil filter
Large, tilt-proof oil pan
5-bearing (4-cylinder) or 7-bearing (6-cylinder) steel crankshaft with forged
counterweights and diagonal cracked piston rods. Lead bronze triple
composite bearings.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Diesel engine
Function description
Basic function
The diesel engine converts the chemical energy in the fuel into kinetic
energy, which it provides to the flywheel via the torsion absorber and the
pump distributor gear to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics and
steering hydraulics pumps.
A small portion of the power is taken off at the accessory drive side of the
diesel engine to drive the gear pumps.
These are the single gear pump for the transmission shift pressure, and the
triple gear pump for the hydrostatically driven fan, the accumulator pressure
brake system and the leak oil scavenging in the variable displacement motor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.1 Electrical engine components
Design
L576 - 453 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
Electrical engine components

1 Heating flange R701 7 Alternator G700 12 Crankshaft 2 flywheel speed
2 Starter M700 8 Engine electronics (LH-ECU) sensor B712
3 Coolant temperature indicator + A700 13 Camshaft speed sensor
thermostat B708 9 Pump element magnetic coil B713
4 Charge air pressure sensor B703 Y711 Y716 14 Crankshaft 1 flywheel speed
5 Charge air temperature sensor B707 10 Water sensor on fuel pre-filter sensor B711
6 Air conditioning compressor magnetic B710
coupling M710 11 Oil pressure sensor B701
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.2 Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors B711/B712

For safety reasons, two identical speed sensors are used on the crankshaft.
The two speed sensors, B711 and B712, are attached to the engine flywheel
housing and their job is to record the speed and position of the crankshaft.
The first sensor (B711) is the working sensor; if it fails, the system
automatically switches to the second backup sensor (B712).
The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used
for:
Controlling the fan drive
Starting the emergency steering pump check
Controlling the diesel engine
Indicating the engine speed
Power limiting control
Overspeed protection
0-inching control
Design
The speed sensors are Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electro-
magnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC).
The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed.
Distance a = 0.5 - 2 mm
Speed sensor location Basic function

If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a
magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates
proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to
the engine electronics as a frequency signal.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.
! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.
Plug assignment
1 Weight
2 Frequency signal (output voltage)
3 12 V power supply
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.3 Camshaft speed sensor B713

The speed sensor B713 is attached to the crankshaft housing of the engine;
its job is to detect the phase of the engine while starting.
If the camshaft sensor fails while the engine is running, the engine
continues turning.
When the engine is turned off and started again, its running is restricted.
The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used
for:
Controlling the diesel engine
Design
The speed sensor is a Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electro-
magnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC).
The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed.
Distance a = 0.5 - 2 mm
Speed sensor location Basic function

If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a
magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates
proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to
the engine electronics as a frequency signal.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.
Plug assignment
1 Weight
2 Frequency signal (output voltage)
3 12 V power supply
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.4 Coolant temperature sensor B708

Fuel temperature sensor B709
The coolant temperature sensor B708 is attached to the thermostat housing of
the engine, while the fuel temperature sensor B709 is fitted in the fuel supply
line. Both have the task of signalling the temperature to the engine control unit
(ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU uses this signal for:
Coolant temperature:
Indicating the coolant temperature in the cab
Preglow control
Engine power limiting control
Coolant temperature [C] -100 -15 100 101 120 150
Power reduction [%] 10 0 0 4 50 50
Controlling the engine to increase the idling speed
Coolant temperature [C] -100 -90 -40 -10 20
Idling speed increase [rpm] 0 200 200 100 0
Fuel temperature:
Fuel temperature [C] -100 -5 0 75 80 85 100
Power reduction
10 3 0 0 3 10 30
[%]
Design
The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an
NTC characteristic (semiconductor).
Basic function
The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not
a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of -100 C is assumed.
Coolant resistance characteristic B708

Coolant and fuel
105
temperature sensor 100
95
90
85
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
80
75
Temperature (C)
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60
Resistance (kOhm )
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.5 Charge air temperature sensor B707

The charge air temperature sensor B707 is attached to the air intake pipe of
the engine and has the task of signalling the charge air temperature to the
engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU
uses this signal for:
Preglow control
Charge air
-100 -15 75 80 85 100
temperature [C]
Power reduction [%] 10 0 0 0 10 30
Design
The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an
NTC characteristic (semiconductor).
Basic function
The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not
Charge air temperature sensor a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of 100 C is assumed.
Charge air resistance characteristic B707

105
100
95
90
85
80
75
Temperature (C)
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Resistance (kOhm ) LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.6 Charge air pressure sensor B703

The charge air pressure sensor B703 is attached to the air intake pipe of the
engine and has the task of signalling the charge air pressure to the engine control
unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for:
Power reduction (%) Speed (rpm)
1000 1300 1600 1900 2100
Atmospheric 550 23.1 24.1 24.4 24.4 23.3

pressure 4850*
(mbar)
Height above sea 620 19.5 19.6 19.1 19.1 18.0
level* 3950*
(m)
690 14.2 14.8 13.9 13.6 12.6
3100*
770 10.0 10.1 8.9 8.4 7.2

2250*
840 0.0 0.0 0.0

1550*
Design
The charge air pressure sensor is an absolute pressure sensor with a
membrane and an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, an absolute
pressure sensor is subject to approximately 1 bar (at sea level 1030 mbar).
1 Electrical connections
2 Evaluation circuit
3 Membrane with sensor element
4 Pressure port
5 Fixing thread
Basic function
Cross section of speed sensor The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as
they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system
pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage
of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.
This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is
amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Attention
Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
4.1.7 Oil pressure sensor B701

The oil pressure sensor B701 is attached to the crankcase of the engine and
has the task of signalling the oil pressure to the engine control unit (ECU) in
the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for:
Indication in the cab
Controlling the engine as a function of the safety curve:
300 1000 1400 1800 2100
Design
The oil pressure sensor is a relative pressure sensor with a membrane and
an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, a relative pressure sensor is
subject to 0 bar.
1 Electrical connections
2 Evaluation circuit
3 Membrane with sensor element
4 Pressure port
5 Fixing thread
Basic function
Cross section of speed sensor
The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as
they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system
pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage
of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.
This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is
amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Fuel system
4.2 Fuel system

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The fuel tank is located behind the right cab access.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Fuel system
1 Tank cap 5 Intake line 8 Fuel cooler
2 Filler strainer 6 Return line 9 Drain valve
3 Fuel level sensor 7 Diesel engine 10 Fuel tank
4 Distributor port
The fuel is drawn up by the fuel pump via the intake line and fuel pre-filter (water
and dirt separator) and is delivered to the injection elements via a fine filter.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Fuel system
4.2.1 Fuel level sensor
Design
The fuel level sensor is fitted vertically in the tank.
It is connected via a lead and plugs to the display unit.
The sensor tube contains two electrodes to transmit the fuel level in the tank.
The fuel level sensor tube 2 contains electrodes 3 which measure the fuel
level using a capacitive resistor.
The electronics in the head of the fuel level sensor 1 transmit a corresponding
voltage signal of 1 V 4 V to input module 1 A16a pin 23.
Input module 1 converts the signal to a digital signal and forwards it via the
master electronics to the fuel level display in the display unit A13.
The fuel level sensor is earthed via input module 1 pin 65.
Fuel level display

The lower the fuel level the higher the voltage and thus the level shown on
the fuel level display.
The reserve fuel level is shown by the fuel level symbol field flashing.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Fuel system
4.2.2 Fuel pre-filter

The fuel pre-filter protects the engine's fuel system (pump, pump elements,
injection valves, valves and pistons) from dirt and water penetration.
Design
The fuel pre-filter acts as both a water separator and a filter. It is fitted in the
fuel intake line between the engine control unit and the fuel pump.
The intake line is connected via the engine control unit (cooler) to the fuel
tank. The outlet line is connected to the fuel pump.
The water probe in the water collector monitors the condensate in the fuel
pre-filter; if the water level is too high, it generates a service code via the
engine control unit to the display unit.
Fuel pre-filter
1 Hand pump 4 Water collector
2 Filter head 5 Drain cock
3 Filter cartridge 6 Water sensor
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Fuel system
4.2.3 Fuel fine filter
Technical data
See section 2.1
The filter can be serviced without any tools. The filter can be removed and
replaced by hand during a service.
Design
The fuel filter is a fine filter with a water drain valve and is fitted between the
fuel pump and the injection pump.
It has a disposable filter cartridge which must be replaced each time it
is serviced.
Fuel fine filter

1 Filter head 2 Filter cartridge
The fuel fine filter protects the fuel system from contamination.
The diesel fuel is pumped under pressure from the fuel pump through the
filter intake into the filter insert.
The pressure of the fuel pump forces the fuel through the filter membrane.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The filtered fuel then flows through the outlet in the filter head via the fuel
line to the injection pump.
The water in the fuel system is separated by the impregnation of the filter
insert, and then settles in the filter at the bottom.
The filter can be emptied during maintenance by opening the drain valve.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Fuel system
4.2.4 Refuelling pump (optional)
Technical data
See section 2.1
The refuelling pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.
The refuelling pump is only suitable for diesel fuel.
The refuelling system is designed to assist filling the diesel fuel from the
container to the fuel tank.
Design
Main components of the refuelling pump

1 Intake connection 4 DC motor
2 Pressure port 5 Electrical connection
3 Supply pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Components of the refuelling pump

1 Snap ring 5 Seal 9 Electrical connection
2 Check valve 6 Discharge housing 10 Carbon brush
3 Intake housing 7 Feather key
4 Impeller 8 DC motor
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Fuel system
Refuelling system
Refuelling pump
The refuelling pump 5 is a rotary vane pump which draws in fuel via the
intake line 6 and the intake line extension 7 with suction strainer 8, from the
container 9 and pumps it through the discharge line 4 to the fuel tank 3 of
the machine.
The refuelling pump 5 can be switched on and off using the removable key 2.
The refuelling pump 5 is filled with fuel via the discharge line before it is first
used. This means it is self-priming. The diesel fuel also lubricates the
mechanical seals in the pump.
A check valve in the intake port prevents the refuelling pump 5 from running
empty. This means the pump remains self-priming.
The DC motor does not have internal thermal protection; it is designed to run
for a maximum of 15 minutes.
The external 20 amp fuse F05 (fitted in the instrument panel) protects the
pump from short-circuits and overload.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Air filter system
4.3 Air filter system

Design
Air filter system

1 Rain cap 4 Vacuum switch
2 Fixing clips 5 Filtered air intake manifold
3 Air filter 6 Fixing clips
The engine takes in fresh air via the rain cap 3 and the air filter 5. The
filtered air is provided to the engine via the turbocharger.
4.3.1 Air filter
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Air filter
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Air filter system
Air filter unit
The primary element 2 and the secondary element 1 of the dry air filter
are designed to ensure maximum protection for the engine at very long
service intervals.
The primary element 2 with radial sealing at the filtered air connection in the
filter housing 6 is subject to scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance.
The secondary element 1 acts as a back-up if the primary element 2 is damaged.
The secondary element 1 is not a service filter. It must be replaced if necessary.
The dust extraction valve 5 automatically removes dust from the service cap 3.
The tangential arrangement of the intake port sets the air into fast rotation,
so that large dust particles are thrown by centrifugal force against the
housing and accumulate in the service cap 3 due to the air flow.
At idle speed, the accumulated dust particles in the service cap 3 are carried
outside via the dust extraction valve 5 by the vibrations in the intake air.
The service cap 3 must be fitted so that the dust extraction valve 5 points down.
With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air
pulsating at the dust extraction valve 5.
4.3.2 Vacuum switch

(ID 6906001)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Vacuum switch arrangement

1 Vacuum switch 2 Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The vacuum switch 1 monitors the pressure ratio between the turbocharger
and the air filter 2.
If the filters are dirty (excessive vacuum) it activates the air contamination
symbol field on the display unit.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Coupling
4.4 Coupling
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The coupling is an elastic torsion and vibration absorber between the
flywheel on the engine and the splitter box.
Position of the coupling

1 Torsion absorber 2 Flywheel
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Coupling
Main components of the torsion absorber

1 Torsion absorber assembly 5 Disc
2 Hub 6 Fixing screw
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
3 Pressure springs 7 Flywheel housing

4 Disc 8 Flywheel
The disc 5 is bolted to the flywheel 8 of the engine. The hub 2 is axially guided
by circular discs riveted to the hub. The hub 2 can move radially on the disc 4.
The springs 3 are arranged in a ring and form an elastic connection which
transfers the torque between the disc 5 and the hub 2. The drive shaft of the
splitter box is connected to the hub 2 by a spline shaft gearing.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Coupling
Basic function
The coupling is an elastic connection which also absorbs torque peaks
between the engine and the driven splitter box.
The coupling transmits the engine torque to the splitter box.
Power transmission
The following components transmit the engine torque to the splitter box:
Flywheel 8
Fixing screws 6
Discs 4 and 5
Pressure springs 3
Hub 2
Damping
The springs 3 absorb load fluctuations and torque peaks on the engine
crankshaft. The vibrations of the crankshaft are greatly reduced as torque is
transmitted to the splitter box.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Coupling
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Splitter box
4.5 Splitter box

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The splitter box is a single-stage spur gear transmission attached to the
flywheel housing of the diesel engine.
Location of the splitter box

1 Working hydraulics pump 3 Travel hydraulics pump
2 Steering hydraulics pump 4 Pump distributor gear
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Splitter box, rear view

1 Housing 5 Pump connection for travel
2 Dipstick hydraulics
3 Oil filler tube 6 Oil drain valve
4 Pump connection for working and
steering hydraulics
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Splitter box
Splitter box, front view

1 Housing 5 Oil drain valve
2 Dipstick 6 Pump connection for travel
3 Oil filler tube hydraulics
4 Pump connection for working and
steering hydraulics
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Splitter box
Cross section of the splitter box

1 Housing 14 Ball bearing
2 Stud screw 15 O-ring
3 Disc 16 Stud screw
4 Hex nut 17 Hex nut
5 O-ring 18 Disc
6 Ball bearing 19 Ball bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
7 Spur gear for working and 20 Cylindrical roller bearing

steering pump 21 Drive shaft
8 Bearing flange 22 Shaft seal ring
9 O-ring 23 Bearing flange
10 Cylindrical roller bearing 24 O-ring
11 Bearing flange 25 Ball bearing
12 O-ring
13 Spur gear for travel pump
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Splitter box
Power transmission
The splitter box transfers and distributes the engine torque to the hydraulic
pumps for:
Travel hydraulics
Working hydraulics
Steering hydraulics
Input
The splitter box is directly driven by the flywheel of the engine via the
elastic coupling.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Cooling system
5.0
5 Cooling system.................................................................... 5.0-1
5.1 Gear pump ......................................................................................5.1-1
5.2 Gear motor......................................................................................5.2-1
5.3 Temperature sensor .......................................................................5.3-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cooling system Service manual
Cooling system
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual Cooling system
Cooling system
Design
The cooling system is fitted on the rear section between the diesel engine
and the driver's cab.
Cooler unit components

1 Air conditioning condenser 6 Intercooler
2 Diesel fuel cooler 7 Cooler support, cooler unit frame
3 Hydraulic oil cooler 8 Fan motor with proportional
4 Gear oil cooler pressure relief valve
5 Water cooler 9 Fan blade
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cooling system
Cooling system components

1 Gear motor with proportional 4 Fan motor pressure line 9 Suction and return filter
pressure relief valve 5 Fan pump intake line 10 Fan motor leak oil line / variable
2 Fan motor in-line filter 6 Fan pump displacement motor bearing
3 Fan motor shaft seal leak oil 7 Hydraulic tank lubrication
line relief 8 Fan blade 11 Variable displacement motor 2
12 Cooler unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Cooling system
Basic function
The fan takes in air from the outside of the cooler units, and blows it over the
cooling fins of the cooler units, through the engine and out again.
The cooler system cools:
The engine coolant
The hydraulic oil
The engine charge air
The air conditioning condenser
The gear oil
The diesel fuel
Hydraulic fan speed control
Hydraulic plan of fan drive

1 Cooler unit 5 Triple pump 10 Bearing lubrication orifice
2 Fan 6 Return strainer 11 Variable displacement motor 2
3 Gear motor 7 Ventilation and bleeder filter 12 Bearing lubrication orifice
4 Proportional pressure relief 8 Suction and return filter 13 Variable displacement motor 1
valve assembly 9 Hydraulic tank 14 Collector pipe with safety valve
The speed of the hydrostatically driven fan depends on the engine
speed (pump flow) and the fluid temperatures or the status of the air
conditioning system.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cooling system
Electric fan speed control
Block diagram of cooling system

1 Engine electronics (LH-ECU) 8 Proportional pressure relief 12 Diesel engine
2 Input module 1 valve Y13 13 Charge air temperature
3 Main electronics (master) 9 Gear motor sensor (B707)
4 Output module 1 10 Coolant temperature sensor 14 Hydraulic oil temperature
5 Cooler unit (B708) sensor (B8)
6 Gear motor in-line filter 11 Gear pump 15 Hydraulic tank
7 Fan
The fan speed is controlled by:
The charge air temperature sensor B707 in the intake pipe
The coolant temperature sensor B708 in the cooling water circuit
The hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8 in the hydraulic oil circuit
The proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear motor
The status of the air conditioning system
The main electronics (master) A15
The main electronics (master) A15 process the following parameters:
The values of the hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The values of the coolant temperature sensor B708

The values of the charge air temperature sensor B707
The signals are provided by the engine controller (LH-ECU) and input
module 1 of the main electronics (master) A15 via CAN bus.
The main electronics (master) A15 calculate the current for the proportional
pressure relief valve Y13 and generate a signal via output module 1.
When the air conditioning system is on, the main electronics (master) A15
regulate the fan current to the value set using SCULI.
This current controls the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear
motor and therefore the fan speed.
A high temperature means a low current at the proportional pressure relief
valve Y13.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Cooling system
If the hydraulic oil sensor B8 records overheating, the following functions

are activated:
Above 88 C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is
reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed.
Above 90 C the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone
sounds every 10 seconds and the hydraulic oil overheating warning lamp
H23 is activated.
From 90 C to 100 C the current to the control pressure proportional
valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction).
If the coolant sensor B708 records overheating, the following functions
are activated:
Above 97 C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is
reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed. In addition,
the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone sounds every
10 seconds and the coolant overheating symbol field (H13) is activated.
From 100 C to 105 C the current to the control pressure proportional
valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction).
If the charge air sensor B707 records overheating, the following
functions are activated:
Above 75 C the service code E6001 appears in the display unit, accompanied
by a warning tone. The engine power is reduced in increments.
Diagram of electric current and fan speed

1 Fan speed 5 Fan speed with no current to
2 Current to proportional valve (mA) proportional pressure relief
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
3 Engine speed valve Y13

4 Fan speed (rated speed) 6 Fan speed at low temperature
(minimum speed)
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cooling system
Tables of system pressure, electric current and fan speed

Fan control System pressure Current Fan speed
At upper engine speed
30 bar 900 mA 500 rpm
Hydraulic oil up to 55 C, coolant up to 88 C
30 - 110 bar 900 - 580 mA 500 - 1650 rpm
Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 C, coolant 88 - 93 C
Hydraulic oil 73 - 88 C, coolant 93 - 97 C 110 10 bar 580 mA 1650 rpm
Temperature sensor unplugged
At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 C, coolant
above 97 C, proportional solenoid de-energised. 220 10 bar De-energised 2050 rpm
Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve
When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor
coupling is on, the current is reduced from 900 mA to 750 mA.
Fan control System pressure Current Fan speed
40 bar 850 mA 250 rpm
Hydraulic oil up to 55 C, coolant up to 88 C
40 - 175 bar 850 - 360 mA 250 - 1400 rpm
Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 C, coolant 88 - 93 C
Hydraulic oil 73 - 88 C, coolant 93 - 97 C 175 10 bar 360 mA 1400 rpm
Temperature sensor unplugged
At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 C, coolant
above 97 C, proportional solenoid de-energised. 220 10 bar De-energised 1600 rpm
Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve
When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor
coupling is on, the current is reduced from 850 mA to 650 mA.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19.03.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Gear pump
5.1 Gear pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Gear pump arrangement

1 Fan circuit test connection 3 Brake system gear pump
2 Cooling system gear pump 4 Motor scavenging pump
The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven
by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.
The pumps are connected to each other on the shaft via actuator rings. The
pumps are sealed against each other. The intake side of the cooler gear
pump 2 is connected to the hydraulic tank, and the discharge side is
connected to the gear motor on the fan housing.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Gear pump components

1 Shaft seal ring 5 Gears
2 Flange 6 Housing
3 Seals 7 Housing cover
4 Bearing bushings
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Gear pump
Basic function
The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing.
One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the
other driven by the gear teeth (driven gear).
The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped
outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.
Pressure cut-off
The cooling system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure
relief valve on the gear motor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Gear motor
5.2 Gear motor

Technical data
See section 2.1
The gear motor is fitted to the fan housing. The gear motor drives the fan
blades via a shaft.
The proportional pressure relief valve attached to the gear motor controls the
fan speed.
Design
Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve

1 Gear motor 3 Proportional pressure relief
2 Fan drive shaft valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve

1 Bearing cover 7 Seal kit 11 O-ring
2 Seal kit 8 Proportional pressure relief valve 12 Shaft
3 Bearing bushing connecting housing 13 Roller bearing
4 Gears 9 Proportional pressure relief valve 14 Shaft seal ring
5 Bearing bushing 10 O-ring 15 Bearing cover
6 Motor housing
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Gear motor
Proportional pressure relief valve

1 Pressure relief adjusting screw 6 Secondary spring 10 Housing
2 Counter nut 7 Housing 11 Primary spring
3 Cap 8 Secondary piston 12 Main piston
4 Electromagnet 9 Secondary restrictor 13 Primary restrictor
5 Electromagnet connection
Basic function
The gear motor 1 is powered by the current from the gear pump.
The gear motor 1 has a proportional pressure relief valve 3, which controls
the speed of the gear motor and therefore the fan speed.
Diagram of fan motor

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 Gear motor P Pump intake

2 Proportional pressure relief T1 Return line to variable
valve assembly displacement motors
3 Proportional pressure relief valve (bearing flushing)
4 Main piston T2 Relief seal (return to tank)
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Gear motor
Pressure regulation by the proportional pressure relief

valve
How the proportional pressure relief valve works

When the solenoid 1 is not energised, the proportional pressure relief valve
acts like a pilot-controlled pressure relief valve.
The pressure acting at P passes through the primary restrictor 8 to the
spring chamber of the main piston 7 and acts via the secondary restrictor 5
on the secondary piston 4. The pressure equalisation on the main piston 7
causes the primary spring 6 to close it.
If the pressure on the secondary piston 4 becomes so high that the set force
of the secondary spring 2 is exceeded, the secondary piston 4 opens,
allowing oil to flow into the tank chamber. This gives rise to a difference in
pressure in front of and behind the main piston 7, causing it to open.
If the solenoid 1 is energised, a magnetic force is generated depending on
the current.
The magnetic force acts on the iron core 3, pulling it back according to the
current strength.
This magnetic force reduces the set spring force of the secondary spring 2
accordingly. This causes the proportional valve to open at a lower
system pressure.
Fan speed regulation

The proportional pressure relief valve acts as a bypass on the gear motor.
At low temperature the bypass is almost fully open. Most of the pump flow
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
goes through the bypass valve to the tank. The fan turns at low speed
(minimum speed = dragging speed).
As the temperature rises, the bypass valve closes proportionally. The gear
motor turns the fan faster.
Failsafe function
The failsafe function is as follows: if the power supply to the proportionally
controlled pressure relief valve fails, the bypass closes. The full flow of the
gear pump drives the gear motor. The fan turns at maximum speed.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Gear motor
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Temperature sensor
5.3 Temperature sensor

(ID 10043264)
Technical data
See section 2.1
The temperature sensor is used for measuring the temperature of the
hydraulic oil.
Design
The sensor element of the temperature sensor consists of an encapsulated
thin-layer nickel resistor.
Temperature sensor
Temperature measurement
Temperature/resistance curve
The sensor is a temperature sensor with an NTC characteristic.
This means, the resistance in the sensor rises along with the temperature.
The resistance curve of the temperature sensor is almost linear.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
For the coolant and charge air temperature sensors, see the section on
the ENGINE.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Temperature sensor
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 Travel Hydraulics
6.0
Chapter contents
6 Travel Hydraulics ................................................................ 6.0-1
6.0.1 Travel hydraulics L550, L556 ............................................6.0-1
6.0.2 Travel hydraulics L566, L576, L580 ..................................6.0-9
6.1 Variable displacement pump ..........................................................6.1-1
6.2 Variable displacement motors ........................................................6.2-1

6.2.1 Variable adjustment motor ...................................................6.2-3
6.2.2 Motor scavenging pump .......................................................6.2-8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Travel Hydraulics Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Travel Hydraulics
6.0.1 Travel hydraulics L550, L556

Design
Main components of the travel hydraulics

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Hydraulic tank 5 Oil cooler 8 Scavenging pump

2 Variable displacement pump 6 Variable displacement motor 1 9 Fan pump
3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 7 Variable displacement motor 2 10 Fan motor
4 Collector pipe
L550 - 456 / from 16978 Copyright by 6.0-1 o f 1 6

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
PowerPoint Function description
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics
6.0-2 o f 1 6 Copyright by L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
1 Hydraulic tank 23 Servo cylinder 46 Pressure relief valve

2 Bleeder filter 24 Restrictor 1.8 mm with orifice
3 Return strainer 25 Pressure relief and replenishing 47 Orifice 4.2 mm
4 Bypass valve valve A 50 Fan motor assembly
5 Return suction filter 26 Pressure relief and replenishing 51 Main piston
6 Pre-tension valve valve B 52 Pressure relief and
7 Replenishing valve with strainer 27 Replenishing pressure relief valve proportional valve
8 Working hydraulics pump 28 Pressure cut-off 53 Gear motor
leak oil 29 Control pressure proportional valve 54 Fan blade
9 Solenoid valve block return oil 30 Replenishing pump 55 Oil cooler
10 Compact brake pump leak oil 31 To working hydraulics pilot control 56 Bypass valve
11 Control block return oil 32 Bypass valve 57 Collector pipe
12 Shut-off valve 33 Variable displacement motor 1 58 Return oil from servostat
13 Working hydraulics pump assembly
intake port 34 Axial piston drive unit Test connections:
14 Steering pump intake port 35 Check valves PST Control pressure / variable
15 Emergency steering pump 36 Proportional valve and piston rod displacement pump
intake port 37 Servo piston G Replenishing pressure
16 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 40 Variable displacement motor 2 MA High pressure / forward
17 Gear pump fan assembly travel direction
18 Brake system gear pump 41 Axial piston drive unit MB High pressure / reverse
19 Motor scavenging pump 42 Check valves travel direction
20 Variable displacement pump 43 Proportional valve and piston rod M1 Servo pressure / variable
assembly 44 Servo piston displacement motor 1
21 Axial piston pump 45 Discharge valve M2 Servo pressure / variable
22 Travel direction valve displacement motor 2
P High pressure / fan
The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable
displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement
motors 33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is
pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump.
1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide
angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If
the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards.
2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed.
3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel
speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15.

The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil
directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump.

The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated by
the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and
therefore the pump flow.
At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction
forces from the high pressure.
The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the
displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect
the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks.

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displace-

ment pump.
Variable displacement pump regulation

The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump.
The following parameters affect the control of the pump:
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Tractive force control
Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Gas pedal position When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure propor-
tional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out.
The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine
speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value
according to the engine speed.
Inching function When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master)
reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic
braking takes place.
At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is
gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This
prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill.
If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated
within 20 seconds.
Tractive force adjustment If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the
maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the
tractive force to the set level.
The following parameters are required for tractive force control:
The tractive force control button must be switched on
The machine must be moving forward
The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown)
You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a
range of 100% to 70%.
Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3
to 4 km/h.
Overheating If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 C) or the coolant (90 - 100 C) overheats, the
main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure propor-
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
tional valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level.
The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when
the temperature falls back below the threshold.
Engine overspeed or excessive Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts
road speed gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to
200 mA.
At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed
protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing
pressure from the variable displacement pump.

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
Variable displacement motors

The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or
lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.
The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement
motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons
which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque.
The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the
operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable
displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the
pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition.
The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motor 2 is employed in
the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is discharged
from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank.
The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil.
Variable displacement motor regulation

The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors.
The following parameters affect the control of the motors:
Road speed
Gas pedal position
Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive
engine suppression)
Inching function
Tempomat
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Road speed The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed.
The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the
pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.
Gas pedal position The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This
accelerates the machine.

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
Variable displacement motor Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively
power limiting control suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally
operating the working hydraulics or steering.
The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve
of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors
then pivot out again.
increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking
takes place.
Vmax function With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which
corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the
road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced.
The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second
fixed gear.
The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine
then reaches this speed at full throttle.
Engine overspeed or excessive If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller
road speed angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is
activated. The rear axle is braked.
Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement
motors overrev.
Variable displacement motor bearing flushing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller
bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot
oil is pumped out.
The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors.
The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable
displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil
cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel
hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via
the connection 1.
A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of
the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is
better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in
the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive
performance is achieved.
The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler.
The oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction
filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the
hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

L556 - 454 / from 15653
MJFCIFSS
6.0.2 Travel hydraulics L566, L576, L580

Design
Main components of the travel hydraulics

1 Hydraulic tank 5 Oil cooler 8 Scavenging pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
2 Variable displacement pump 6 Variable displacement motor 1 9 Fan pump

3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 7 Variable displacement motor 2 10 Fan motor
4 Collector pipe

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics

L580 - 459 / from 14171
1 Hydraulic tank 24 Restrictor 1.8 mm 45 Discharge valve

2 Bleeder filter 25 Pressure relief and replenishing 46 Pressure relief valve
3 Return strainer valve A with orifice
4 Bypass valve 26 Pressure relief and replenishing 47 Orifice 4.2 mm
5 Return suction filter valve B 50 Fan motor assembly
6 Pre-tension valve 27 Replenishing pressure relief 51 Main piston
7 Replenishing valve with strainer valve 52 Pressure relief and
8 Working hydraulics pump 28 Pressure cut-off proportional valve
leak oil 29 Control pressure proportio- 53 Gear motor
9 Solenoid valve block return oil nal valve 54 Fan blade
10 Compact brake pump leak oil 30 Replenishing pump 55 Oil cooler
11 Control block return oil 31 To working hydraulics pilot control 56 Bypass valve
12 Shut-off valve 32 Bypass valve 57 Collector pipe
13 Working hydraulics pump 33 Variable displacement motor 1 58 Return oil from servostat
intake port assembly
14 Steering pump intake port 34 Axial piston drive unit Test connections:
15 Emergency steering pump 35 Check valves PST Control pressure / variable
intake port 36 Proportional valve and piston rod displacement pump
16 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 37 Servo piston G Replenishing pressure
17 Gear pump fan 38 Discharge valve MA High pressure / forward
18 Brake system gear pump 39 Pressure relief valve with orifice travel direction
19 Motor scavenging pump 40 Variable displacement motor 2 MB High pressure / reverse
20 Variable displacement assembly travel direction
pump assembly 41 Axial piston drive unit M1 Servo pressure / variable
21 Axial piston pump 42 Check valves displacement motor 1
22 Travel direction valve 43 Proportional valve and piston rod M2 Servo pressure / variable
23 Servo cylinder 44 Servo piston displacement motor 2
P High pressure / fan
The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable dis-
placement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement motors
33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is
pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump.
1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide
angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If
the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards.
2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed.
3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel
speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil
directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the
motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump.
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated
by the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control
pressure and therefore the pump flow.
The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the displace-
ment pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect
the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks.
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.
Variable displacement pump regulation

The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump.
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Gas pedal position When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure pro-
portional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out.
The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine
speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value
according to the engine speed.
reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic
braking takes place.
At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is
gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This
prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill.
If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated
within 20 seconds.
Tractive force adjustment If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the
maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the
tractive force to the set level.
The following parameters are required for tractive force control:
The tractive force control button must be switched on
The machine must be moving forward
The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown)
You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a
range of 100% to 70%.
Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3
to 4 km/h.
Overheating If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 C) or the coolant (90 - 100 C) overheats, the main
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional

valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level.
The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when
the temperature falls back below the threshold.
Engine overspeed or excessive Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts
road speed gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to
200 mA.
At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed
protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing
pressure from the variable displacement pump.

L580 - 459 / from 14171

The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or lower
torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque.
The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motors 1 and 2 is
employed in the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is
discharged from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the
hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil.
Variable displacement motor regulation

The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors.
The following parameters affect the control of the motors:
Road speed
Gas pedal position
Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive engine
suppression)
Inching function
Tempomat
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Road speed The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed.
The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the
pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.
Gas pedal position The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This
accelerates the machine.

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Variable displacement motor Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively
power limiting control suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally
operating the working hydraulics or steering.
The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve
of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors
then pivot out again.
increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking
takes place.
Vmax function With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which
corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the
road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced.
The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second
fixed gear.
then reaches this speed at full throttle.
Engine overspeed or excessive If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller
road speed angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is
activated. The rear axle is braked.
Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement
motors overrev.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
oil is pumped out.

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel
hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via
the connection 1.
A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of
the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is
better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in
the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive
performance is achieved.
The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler. The
oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter
3 to the hydraulic tank.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
6.1 Variable displacement pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the variable displacement pump

1 Drive shaft 4 Travel direction valve
2 Pump housing 5 Connection housing
3 Servo cylinder
The variable displacement pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is
driven by the diesel engine via this unit.
The variable displacement pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate
design. The variable displacement pump contains proportional valves for the
control pressure and pressure cut-off, as well as a replenishing pressure
valve, pressure relief and replenishing valve, and a replenishing pump.
The following diagrams illustrate the design of the variable displacement pump:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171 MJFCIFSS
Components of the variable displacement pump, side view

1 Drive shaft 13 Bearing bushing 24 Piston
2 Shaft seal ring 14 Internal gear 25 Return ball
3 Snap ring 15 External gear 26 Return plate
4 Pump housing 16 Bearing bushing 27 Glide shoe
5 Servo piston 17 Bearing bushing 28 Disc springs
6 Travel direction valve 18 Bushing 29 Swash plate
7 Control pressure proportional valve 19 Control lens 30 Guide pin
8 Pressure cut-off 20 Snap ring 31 Pin
9 Connection housing 21 Pressure spring 32 Swash plate bearing
10 Disc 22 Bushing 33 Roller bearing
11 Replenishing pump housing 23 Cylinder 34 Snap ring
12 Coupling hub
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Components of the variable displacement pump, servo cylinder and servo valve view
1 Servo piston 9 Pressure cut-off 17 Receptacle ring
2 Pump housing 10 Travel direction valve 18 Adjusting screw for the
3 Spring cup 11 Control pressure proportional valve pump zero position
4 Pressure spring 12 Connection housing 19 Counter nut
5 Pressure spring 13 Pressure relief and replenishing valve 20 Spring cup
6 Turcon-Glyd seal 14 Replenishing pressure relief valve 21 Snap ring
7 Guide ring 15 Twist screw 22 Cover
8 Solenoid 16 Solenoid
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Components of the variable displacement pump, front view

1 Pressure cut-off 4 Restrictor 7 Pressure relief and
2 Connection housing 5 Plug replenishing valve
3 Pressure relief and 6 Replenishing pressure
replenishing valve relief valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump

1 Variable displacement pump 7 Replenishing pressure relief valve
2 Servo cylinder 8 Pressure cut-off
3 Travel direction valve 9 Control pressure proportional
4 Restrictor valve
5 Pressure relief and 10 Replenishing pump
replenishing valve A 11 Suction line from replenishing
6 Pressure relief and pump
replenishing valve B 12 To working hydraulics pilot control
13 To the oil cooler
The variable displacement pump is designed for hydrostatic drives in a closed
circuit. The pump delivers directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil
flowing back from the motors is fed back to the opposite side of the pump.
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 9 is activated
by the main electronics (master). The proportional valve regulates the
control pressure and therefore the pump flow.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the displacement
pump operates and the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure relief and replenishing valves A and B protect the travel drive
from excessive pressure peaks. At the same time, the valves act as
replenishing valves for the closed circuit.
The pressure cut-off limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Control of the pump

state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve is activated by
the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure
and therefore the pump flow.
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Control pressure proportional valve

Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure
proportional valve is activated by the main electronics (master). The valve
reduces the pressure in the PST channel in proportion to the magnet
current. It operates largely independently of the PSP control pressure.
In the de-energised state, the PST control pressure duct is connected to the
tank T. The more the current increases, the higher the control pressure. The
maximum level is limited by the replenishing pressure.
Depending on the current to the proportional valve 3, the control piston 2 is
moved closer to or further from the regulating springs 1. This adjusts the
pressure in the PST duct.
Servo piston and swash plate

The servo piston 3 turns the swash plate 2 mounted on roller bearings and
thus changes the pump flow rate of the pump.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Servo piston and swash plate
L580 - 459 / from 14171
1 Swash plate bearing 3 Servo piston

2 Swash plate 4 Cylinder with piston
As the swivel angle increases, the pump flow is increased. The drive torque
is increased.
When the swivel angle is reduced, the flow rate of the pump is also reduced.
The drive torque is reduced.
When in the zero position, the pump flow is also zero. The strong spring
centring in the servo cylinder keeps the swash plate in the zero position if no
control signals are present. The zero position can be mechanically adjusted.
Sectional view of the servo cylinder

1 Pump housing 5 Reverse travel direction servo
2 Pressure spring oil supply
3 Servo cylinder 6 Pressure spring
4 Forward travel direction servo 7 Zero position adjusting screw
oil supply
On traversing the zero position, the flow direction of the hydraulic oil is
smoothly reversed.
Travel direction valve

The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the pump
swivels out.
The travel direction valve directs the control pressure into one of the two
servo chambers in the servo cylinder. The opposite chamber remains
connected to the drain.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Sectional view of the travel direction valve

1 Forward travel direction solenoid 5 Reverse travel direction servo
2 Servo oil supply oil supply
3 Reverse travel direction solenoid 6 Servo piston
4 Forward travel direction servo
oil supply
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Replenishing pump
The replenishing pump is an internal gear pump. The replenishing pump
draws up oil from the hydraulic tank. The delivery volume of the pump is
proportional to the drive speed.
Front view of the replenishing pump

1 Internal gear pump 2 Suction side of the
replenishing pump
The replenishing pump supplies the closed circuit with fresh, cooled oil. The
replenishing pump also provides oil for the control circuit (control pressure).
The maximum replenishing pressure is limited by the replenishing pressure
relief valve.
Replenishing pressure relief valve

This directly actuated pressure relief valve protects the replenishing pump
against excess pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Cross section of the replenishing pressure relief valve

1 Tank outlet 4 Oil to the pressure relief and
2 Oil from the replenishing pump replenishing valve
3 Adjusting screw 5 Valve piston
Excess oil that is not fed into the closed circuit flows via the replenishing
pressure relief valve to the pump housing. At the same time, this oil cools
the rotary group of the variable displacement pump.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Pressure cut-off
The pressure cut-off valve limits the operating pressure in the closed circuit.
When the maximum operating pressure is reached, the flow of the variable
displacement pump is reduced so that the maximum operating pressure is
just maintained.
Hydraulic diagram of active/inactive pressure cut-off

1 Variable displacement pump 4 Pressure cut-off
2 Travel direction valve 5 Nozzle
3 Control pressure proportional 6 Replenishing pump
valve
Pressure cut-off active: when the maximum operating pressure is reached in
the closed circuit, the pressure cut-off is activated. Control oil flows into the
tank duct.
Sufficient oil from the replenishing pump 6 can no longer flow through the
nozzle 5. Up to the nozzle 5 the replenishing pressure acts; after it, only the
reduced control pressure.
Pressure cut-off inactive: the control pressure acts in the duct up to the
control pressure proportional valve 3 and the pressure cut-off 4.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Sectional view of the pressure cut-off

1 Pressure spring 5 Tank outlet 8 Check valve
2 Valve piston 6 Tappet 9 Bore hole
3 Servo oil supply 7 Low pressure / closed circuit 10 High pressure / closed circuit
4 Control edge
The operating pressure controls the valve. When the maximum operating
pressure has been reached, the tappet 6 and the valve piston 2 are pushed
against the pressure spring 1. The control pressure channel 3 is linked to the
tank outlet 5, and servo oil drains off. The control pressure drops and the varia-
ble displacement pump swivels to a smaller flow rate. The variable displacement
pump then delivers just enough oil to attain the maximum pressure.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Pressure relief and replenishing valve

The pilot-controlled pressure relief and replenishing valves prevent excess
pressure from forming in the closed circuit.
The high pressure from the system acts via the nozzle 6 on the pilot control
piston 2. It the set value is exceeded, the pilot control piston opens. The rear
piston chamber 3 is opened via the relief duct 8 to the low pressure side.
The main piston 4 then opens and the high pressure oil can flow to the low
pressure side 5.
Pressure relief and replenishing valve at high pressure

1 Pressure spring 5 Low pressure side
2 Pilot control piston 6 Nozzle
3 Rear piston chamber 7 High pressure
4 Main piston 8 Relief duct
At the same time, the valves act as replenishing valves for the closed circuit.
Oil leaks in the closed circuit reduce the pressure on the low pressure side.
This opens the main piston and oil from the replenishing pump can flow into
the closed circuit.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Pressure relief and replenishing valve during replenishment

1 Main piston 4 Replenishing oil intake
2 Pressure spring 5 Closed circuit replenishment
3 Main piston control edge
L580 - 459 / from 14171
6.2 Variable displacement motors

Basic function
Variable displacement motor arrangement

1 Variable displacement motor 2 3 Proportional valve
2 Variable displacement motor 1 4 Discharge valve
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or
lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Regulation of the variable displacement motors during acceleration

1st gear: At low speed, both motors pivot to a 25 angle. The greatest torque
is transferred to the transmission.
If the travel speed is increased, the motors simultaneously pivot inwards.
The shift range is reached at around 6 km/h. Motor 1 moves back towards 0
and motor 2 towards 23. Motor 1 reduces its torque and motor 2 increases
its torque.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Once motor 1 reaches an angle of 0, the coupling 1 opens in a load-

free condition.
2nd gear: In 2nd gear, only variable displacement motor 2 is active. Motor 1
is uncoupled and at an angle of 0.
As the speed is increased, motor 2 gradually reduces its angle. The next
shift range is reached at around 17 km/h.
Motor 1 is coupled again and moves to a wide angle. At the same time,
motor 2 moves to 0. Motor 2 is then uncoupled.
3rd gear: In 3rd gear, only variable displacement motor 1 is active. Initially,
motor 1 is at an angle of 25. In this range, the variable displacement pump
takes control. At speeds higher than 23 km/h, motor 1 moves towards a
smaller angle.

oil is pumped out.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
6.2.1 Variable adjustment motor
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the variable displacement motor

1 Drive shaft 4 Control unit
2 Housing 5 Regulating unit
3 Discharge valve 6 Proportional valve
The variable displacement motor is flange-mounted on the transfer gear.
The inclined axial tapered piston rotary group and the variable displacement
are all integrated in the variable displacement motor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Components of the variable displacement motor

1 Drive shaft 14 Orifice 27 Control piston
2 Snap ring 15 Valve piston 28 Proportional magnet
3 Shaft seal ring 16 Socket-head screw 29 Regulation adjusting screw
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
4 U-connection 17 Servo piston seal 30 Installation pin

5 Motor housing 18 Servo piston 31 O-ring
6 Piston 19 Threaded pin 32 Q max adjusting screw
7 Cylinder 20 Control pin 33 Adjusting washer
8 Control lens 21 Regulating spring 1 34 Pressure spring
9 Q min adjusting screw 22 Connecting plate 35 Centre pin
10 Bolt connection 23 Spring cup 36 Drive shaft bearing
11 Pressure spring 24 Spring cup 37 Check valve
12 Pressure relief valve 25 Regulating spring 2 38 Valve insert
13 Discharge valve 26 Control bushing
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007 Variable displacement motors
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement motor

1 Variable adjustment motor 7 Orifice
2 Check valves 8 Pressure relief valve
3 Proportional valve 9 Bearing lubrication oil
4 Control piston 10 Return oil from discharge valve
5 Servo piston 11 Housing scavenging connection
6 Discharge valve M1 Servo pressure test connection
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque. The
torque at the drive shaft depends on the swivel angle and on the operating
pressure in the closed circuit. The speed of the drive shaft depends on the
pump flow and on the swivel angle of the variable displacement motor.
As the swivel angle decreases, the speed increases and the potential
torque is reduced.
As the swivel angle increases, the torque increases and the potential
speed is reduced.
The regulation and control unit installed in the connecting housing adjusts
the swivel angle of the motor. The main electronics (master) control the
position of the motor. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Electro-proportional control (EP)

Depending on the energisation of the proportional magnet 7, the variable
displacement motor is moved to the required angle.
When the proportional magnet not energized, the motor is held at the 0
angle by the high pressure acting on the small servo piston face 2.
When the proportional magnet is energised, above a certain current the
control piston 6 is pushed up against the regulating springs 5 and 4. High-
pressure oil flows via the control piston 6 to the large piston face 1 and the
variable displacement motor moves out to a wider angle.
During regulation, the control piston 3 is pushed down, increasing the
tension in the regulating spring 4. This stops the regulation process if the
current at the proportional magnet is not further increased.
If the current is increased, the force of the two regulating springs is
overcome and the motor continues moving to a wider angle.
The maximum pivot angle is reached at a current of around 600 mA. The
force of the proportional magnet is go great that it overcomes the spring
force even at a wide pivot angle.
The adjusting screw 8 is used for adjusting the regulating springs 5 (basic
setting). Adjust the regulating springs 5 so that the motor is moved to a 25
angle at 600 mA on the proportional magnet.
The main electronics (master) control the speed with which the variable
displacement motor is moved. This means no swivel restrictors are required.
Cooling by the discharge valve

The discharge valve is used in the closed circuit to avoid excessive heat
build-up. In the process, oil is discharged from the low pressure side of the
closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces
this oil with cooled oil.
When the machine is at rest, the pressure is the same on both faces of the
valve piston 4. The two return springs 5 push the valve piston 4 to the centre
position. No oil is discharged in this position.
When the machine moves, the pressure in the duct 6 or 7 increases and
moves the valve piston 4 towards one of the return springs 5. The low
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
pressure side is opened and a defined quantity of oil flows via the orifice 1
and the pressure relief valve 2 to the hydraulic tank.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
6.2.2 Motor scavenging pump
Design
Scavenging pump arrangement

1 Motor scavenging pump 2 Brake system gear pump
3 Cooling system gear pump
The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven
Motor scavenging pump components

1 Flight 5 Bearing bushings
2 O-ring 6 Gears
3 Flange 7 Housing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
Scavenging from the variable displacement motor housing

The pump actively draws up hot oil from the housing of the variable displace-
ment motors and pumps it through the oil cooler to the hydraulic tank.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7 Working hydraulics
7.0
Chapter contents
7 Working hydraulics.............................................................. 7.0-1
7.0.1 Working hydraulics - L550, L556..........................................7.0-1
7.0.2 Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580................................7.0-7
7.1 Working hydraulics pump ...............................................................7.1-1
7.2 Control block ...................................................................................7.2-1
7.3 Pilot control unit ..............................................................................7.3-1

7.3.1 Pilot control unit ....................................................................7.3-5
7.3.2 Pilot control solenoid valve ...................................................7.3-9
7.3.3 Pilot control hydro accumulator ..........................................7.3-10
7.3.4 Float position pressure switch ............................................7.3-11
7.4 Ride control.....................................................................................7.4-1

7.4.1 Ride control L550, L556 ....................................................7.4-1
7.4.2 Ride control L566, L576, L580 ..........................................7.4-7
7.4.3 Stabilisation module ...........................................................7.4-13
7.4.4 Hydro accumulator unit.......................................................7.4-15
7.4.5 Ride control pressure switch ..............................................7.4-17
7.5 Lift and tilt cylinders ........................................................................7.5-1

7.5.1 Lift cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-1
7.5.2 Tilt cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-3
7.6 Hydraulic tank .................................................................................7.6-1

7.6.1 Filter unit...............................................................................7.6-3
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.6.2 Bleeder filter .........................................................................7.6-8
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Working hydraulics Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Working hydraulics
7.0.1 Working hydraulics - L550, L556

Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Main components of the working hydraulics

1 Lift cylinder 5 Working hydraulics pump 8 Pilot control hydro accumulator
2 Tilt cylinder 6 Travel hydraulics variable displace- 9 Compact brake valve
3 Pilot control unit ment pump with replenishing pump 10 Hydro accumulator unit
4 Hydraulic tank 7 Pilot control solenoid valve 11 Stabilisation module
12 Control block

Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics

1 Hydraulic tank 32 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid 60 Lifting pressure relief valve

2 Bleeder filter 33 Tilt-in valve 61 Restrictor check valve
3 Return strainer 34 Lifting valve 62 Float position / ride control sole-
4 Bypass valve 35 Lift kick-out solenoid noid valve
5 Return suction filter 36 Lowering valve 63 Check valve
6 Pre-tension valve 37 Float position solenoid 64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
7 Replenishing valve with strainer 38 Float position pressure switch, 65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
8 Travel pump return line 26 bar 66 Orifice 1 mm
9 Fan motor leak oil 39 Ride control pressure switch, 67 Lift cylinder
10 Compact brake pump leak oil 10 bar 68 Tilt cylinder
11 Return line from oil cooler 40 Stabilisation module 69 Oil from compact brake valve
12 Shut-off valve 41 Ride control spool valve (housing preheating)
13 Emergency steering pump in- 42 Restrictor check valve 70 Cut-in block
take port 43 Ride control solenoid valve 71 Overspeed protection sole-
14 Replenishing pump 44 Safety valve noid valve
15 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 45 Hydro accumulator unit 72 Pilot control solenoid valve
16 Steering pump intake port 46 Check valve 73 Check valve
20 Working hydraulics pump 50 Control block assembly 74 Pilot control hydro accumulator
21 Axial piston pump 51 Pre-tension valve
22 Return cylinder 52 Primary pressure relief valve Test connections:
23 Restrictor 53 LS pressure cut-off P Working hydraulics pump
24 Servo cylinder 54 Flow control valve high pressure
25 Power regulator 55 Tilt cylinder pressure balance M1 Working hydraulics pump ser-
26 Restrictor 56 Tilt cylinder spool valve vo pressure
27 Flow controller 57 Lift cylinder pressure balance LS LS signal pressure
28 Steering pump return line 58 Lift cylinder spool valve MX Ride control accumulator pres-
30 Pilot control unit 59 Load valve sure
31 Tilt-out valve
The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions:
Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders
Ride control
Float position
Automatic bucket return-to-dig function
Lift kick-out
The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working
hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to
the control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction
filter 5 back to the hydraulic tank 1.
The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control
block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in
the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to
the consumer units independently of load.
The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.

Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The
working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off
connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and
the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic
tank by providing appropriate ventilation.

The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps
it to the control block.
The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics pump
only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics
currently need.
The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the
variable displacement pump is never exceeded.
See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.
Control block
The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 3 and the tilt
cylinder 4.
The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working
hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the
maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump.
The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against
pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control
solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
Pilot control unit

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool
valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2.
The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydrau-
lics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control
solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.

Ride control
The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3
and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of
the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride
control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.
See the detailed description in the section on ride control.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

7.0.2 Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580

Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Main components of the working hydraulics

1 Lift cylinder 5 Working hydraulics pump 8 Pilot control hydro accumulator
2 Tilt cylinder 6 Travel hydraulics variable displace- 9 Compact brake valve
3 Pilot control unit ment pump with replenishing pump 10 Hydro accumulator unit
4 Hydraulic tank 7 Pilot control solenoid valve 11 Stabilisation module
12 Control block

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
PowerPoint
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics

L576 - 457 / from 14171
1 Hydraulic tank 32 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid 60 Lifting pressure relief valve

2 Bleeder filter 33 Tilt-in valve 61 Restrictor check valve
3 Return strainer 34 Lifting valve 62 Float position / ride control sole-
4 Bypass valve 35 Lift kick-out solenoid noid valve
5 Return suction filter 36 Lowering valve 63 Check valve
6 Pre-tension valve 37 Float position solenoid 64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
7 Replenishing valve with strainer 38 Float position pressure switch, 65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
8 Travel pump return line 26 bar 66 Orifice 1 mm
9 Fan motor leak oil 39 Ride control pressure switch, 67 Lift cylinder
10 Compact brake pump leak oil 10 bar 68 Tilt cylinder
11 Return line from oil cooler 40 Stabilisation module 69 Oil from compact brake valve
12 Shut-off valve 41 Ride control spool valve (housing preheating)
13 Emergency steering pump in- 42 Restrictor check valve 70 Cut-in block
take port 43 Ride control solenoid valve 71 Overspeed protection sole-
14 Replenishing pump 44 Safety valve noid valve
15 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 45 Hydro accumulator unit 72 Pilot control solenoid valve
16 Steering pump intake port 46 Check valve 73 Check valve
20 Working hydraulics pump 50 Control block assembly 74 Pilot control hydro accumulator
21 Axial piston pump 51 Pre-tension valve
22 Return cylinder 52 Primary pressure relief valve Test connections:
23 Restrictor 53 LS pressure cut-off P Working hydraulics pump
24 Servo cylinder 54 Flow control valve high pressure
25 Power regulator 55 Tilt cylinder pressure balance M1 Working hydraulics pump ser-
26 Restrictor 56 Tilt cylinder spool valve vo pressure
27 Flow controller 57 Lift cylinder pressure balance LS LS signal pressure
28 Steering pump return line 58 Lift cylinder spool valve MX Ride control accumulator pres-
30 Pilot control unit 59 Load valve sure
31 Tilt-out valve
The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions:
Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders
Ride control
Float position
Automatic bucket return-to-dig function
Lift kick-out
The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working
hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to the
control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction filter 5
back to the hydraulic tank 1.
The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control
block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in
the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to
the consumer units independently of load.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The
working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off
connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and
the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic
tank by providing appropriate ventilation.

The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps
it to the control block.
The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics
pump only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working
hydraulics currently need.
The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the
variable displacement pump is never exceeded.
See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.
Control block
cylinder 4.
The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working
hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the
maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump.
The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against
pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control
solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control.
Pilot control unit

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2.
The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydrau-
lics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control
solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2.

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Ride control
The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3
and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of
the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride
control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.
See the detailed description in the section on ride control.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

L576 - 457 / from 14171
7.1 Working hydraulics pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics pump

1 Drive shaft 4 Power regulator
2 Pump housing 5 Flow controller
3 Connection housing
The working hydraulics pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is
The working hydraulics pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design.
The rotary group cylinder contains seven pistons in a circular arrangement
which can move back and forward.
Two power regulator and a flow controller are attached to the pump housing.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Components of the working hydraulics pump

1 Drive shaft 14 Control lever 27 O-ring
2 Shaft seal ring 15 Restrictor 28 Cylinder
3 Snap ring 16 Piston with roller 29 Q max adjusting screw
4 Cover 17 Control bushing 30 Bushing
5 Pump housing 18 Sleeve 31 Return plate
6 Swash plate 19 Servo piston 32 Disc springs
7 Glide shoe 20 Cylindrical roller bearing 33 Return ball
8 Piston 21 Control plate 34 Swash plate bearing
9 Adjusting pin 22 Restrictor 35 Guide pin
10 Q min adjusting screw 23 Connection housing 36 Snap ring
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
11 Pressure spring 24 Pressure spring 37 Cylindrical roller bearing

12 O-ring 25 Return piston
13 Valve housing 26 Return pin
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Components of the regulator unit

1 Valve piston 10 LS connection 19 Pin
2 Plug 11 Valve piston 20 Valve piston
3 Valve insert 12 Regulator housing 21 Spring cup
4 Adjusting screw 13 Adjusting screw 22 Pressure spring
5 Counter nut 14 Counter nut 23 Spring cup
6 Spring cup 15 Spring cup 24 O-ring
7 O-ring 16 Regulating spring 25 Brace
8 Regulating springs 17 Spring cup 26 Valve insert
9 Spring cup 18 Control lever
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics pump

1 Rotary group 8 Connection to hydraulic tank
2 Return cylinder 9 Oil to control valve block
3 Restrictor 10 LS signal from control valve block
4 Servo cylinder 11 Intake connection
5 Restrictor M1 Servo pressure test connection
6 Power regulator LS LS signal pressure
7 Flow controller P Working hydraulics pump
high pressure
The working hydraulics pump operates in an open circuit. It draws up oil
directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it to the control block. The flow of
the of the working hydraulics pump is determined by the angle and speed of
the pump.
The governors fitted to the working hydraulics pump determine the angle of
the pump and therefore the pump flow.
Pump control
The swash plate 1 of the working hydraulics pump is moved out by the control
piston 2. The operating pressure constantly acts in the piston chamber 3. This
causes the pump to swivel out.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics pump with control unit
L580 - 459 / from 14171
The swash plate is returned to its initial position by the return piston 5.
Pressure oil is pumped into the piston chamber 4. The return piston is
controlled by the governors fitted on the working hydraulics pump.
The working hydraulics pump flow is controlled by the following governors:
Flow controller
Power regulator
The operating state of the working hydraulics system governs which
governor is currently activated.
If the working hydraulics demand only a small amount of oil or none at all, the
flow regulator restricts the working hydraulics pump to the required amount.
If the set power limit is reached at a certain flow and increasing pressure, the
flow regulator reduces the working hydraulics pump flow.
Flow regulation
The load sensing system ensures that the working hydraulics pump only
delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics
currently need.
When the working hydraulics are not in use, the oil flow is blocked by the
spool valves in the control block and the working hydraulics pump is reduced
to minimum flow (leak flow). Connection 2 is depressurised. The high
pressure pushes the piston 3 against the pressure springs 1 which
determine the standby pressure in the system. The control piston 3 opens
the high pressure duct 4 to the duct 5 and the return cylinder reduces the
pump to leak flow.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Flow controller when the working hydraulics do not need oil

1 Pressure springs 4 High pressure duct
2 LS connection X 5 Duct to return cylinder
3 Control piston 6 Flow controller
If the working hydraulics need oil, the pressure at the connection 2 increases.
The pressure and force of the springs 1 move the control piston 3 against the
high pressure. The duct 5 opens to the tank connection 7. The open duct
relieves the return cylinder and the pump delivers the required oil quantity.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Flow controller when the working hydraulics need oil

1 Pressure springs 5 Duct to return cylinder
2 LS connection X 6 Flow controller
3 Control piston 7 To the pump housing
4 High pressure duct
Pump pressure limitation

The maximum operating pressure in the system is limited by the LS
pressure cut-off valve 1 in the control block. The LS pressure, which affects
the flow regulator 2, is set to a particular value.
LS pressure cut-off in the control block
Pump output regulation

The power regulator controls the displacement of the working hydraulics
pump according to the operating pressure, so that a specific drive power is
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
never exceeded.
The power regulator works on the principle of hyperbolic control. It regulates
the pump exactly along the preset power curve 1 (flow x high pressure).
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Pump output diagram

The operating pressure acts via the ring face 8 of piston on the control lever 11.
This produces a variable levering force depending on the position of the control
cylinder (flow) and acts on the externally adjustable spring 6. If the force on the
lever 11 generated by the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the
valve piston 5 is moved. Pressure oil flows through the duct 3 to the return
cylinder and the working hydraulics pump displacement is reduced.
Power regulator in the control phase

1 Power regulator 7 Tank connection
2 Pressure spring 8 Piston ring face
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
3 Duct to return cylinder 9 Servo piston

4 High pressure duct 10 Piston with roller
5 Valve piston 11 Control lever
6 Regulating spring
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7.2 Control block

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the control block

1 Closing element 7 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
2 Lifting pressure relief valve 8 Tilt cylinder spool valve
3 Tilt-in pressure relief valve 9 Lift cylinder spool valve
4 Pressure balances 10 Float position / ride control sole-
5 Main block housing noid valve
6 Primary pressure relief valve 11 LS pressure cut-off
The control block is mounted in the front section. It consists of the main block
housing 5 and the closing element 1. Additional segments for a 3rd and 4th
control circuit can be installed if needed between the main block housing and
the closing element.
The control block contains all the pressure cut-off valves and the valves for
the float position and ride control.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Components of the control block

1 Main block housing 6 Closing plate 11 Cover
2 Pre-tension valve 7 Lift cylinder spool valve 12 Pressure spring
3 Primary pressure relief valve 8 Counter nut 13 Spring cup
4 Tilt-out replenishing valve 9 Cap nut 14 Tilt cylinder spool valve
5 Lowering replenishing valve 10 Spool valve stroke adjusting screw
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Components of the control block
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Cross section A-A of control block with spool valves for lift cylinder
Cross section B-B of control block with spool valves for tilt cylinder
1 Main block housing 7 Counter nut 13 Lifting pressure relief valve
2 Pressure spring 8 Float position / ride control sole- 14 Spring cup
3 Cover noid valve 15 Lift cylinder spool valve
4 Restrictor check valve 9 Control piston 16 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
5 Spool valve stroke adjust- 10 Valve insert 17 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
ing screw 11 Main piston 18 Tilt cylinder spool valve
6 Cap nut 12 Pressure balance
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the control valve block

1 Primary pressure relief valve 14 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
2 LS pressure cut-off 15 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
3 Flow control valve 16 Pre-tension valve
4 Tilt cylinder load valve 17 Orifice 1.0 mm
5 Tilt cylinder pressure balance 18 Lift cylinder connection
6 Tilt cylinder spool valve 19 Housing preheating connection
7 Restrictor check valve 20 Tank connection from stabiliza-
8 Lift cylinder load valve tion module
9 Lift cylinder pressure balance 21 Hydraulic tank connection
10 Lift cylinder spool valve 22 LS connection
11 Lifting pressure relief valve 23 Working hydraulics pump con-
12 Float position / ride control sole- nection
noid valve 24 Tilt cylinder connection
13 Replenishing valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
cylinder 6.
The spool valves are supplied with oil by the pilot control unit. The restrictor
check valves 7 in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the
individual functions.
The LS control and the pressure balances 5 and 9 divide the oil among the
individual consumer units.
The float position or ride control function is activated by the solenoid valve 12.
Secondary pressure relief valves for each function protect the working
attachment, cylinders, hose lines and the control block from overload. At the
same time, the secondary pressure relief valves act as replenishing valves.
The LS pressure cut-off 2 protects the working hydraulics pump from
excess pressure.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Working hydraulics in active state

The spool valves in the control block are hydraulically actuated by the pilot
control unit.
Control block in active state

When the tilt-in function is actuated, oil flows from the pilot control unit to the
connection a1. This pushes the spool valve 2 to the left.
The spool valve 2 opens the pump duct P to the pressure balance 3 via the
control notches 1. If the pump pressure exceeds the pressure at the tilt
cylinder, the pressure balance in the load valve opens and oil flows through
the connection A1 to the tilt cylinder.
The oil returning from the tilt cylinder flows through the connection B1 and
the spool valve to the tank channel T.
Working hydraulics in float position

In the float position, the working attachment lies on the ground under its own
weight. The lift arms can move up and down freely to compensate for
uneven ground.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Control block in float position
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
At the maximum deflection of the LH control lever for lowering the lift arms,
there is maximum control pressure at the connection b2. This pushes the
spool valve 1 all the way to the right against the regulating spring 3 and the
limit screw 2.
When the spool valve 1 is in this position, the base end B2 of the lift cylinder
is connected to the tank channel T.
The float position solenoid valve 4 is also energised. The rod ends of the lift
cylinder A2 is also connected to the tank duct T. The lift arms can now move
up and down freely.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7.3 Pilot control unit

Design
Main components of the pilot control unit

1 Float position pressure switch, 3 Pilot control unit 6 Pilot control solenoid valve
26 bar 4 Variable displacement pump with 7 Solenoid valve block
2 Ride control pressure switch, replenishing pump 8 Pilot control hydro accumulator
10 bar 5 Overspeed protection sole- 9 Control block
noid valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit

1 Hydraulic tank 8 Float position pressure switch, 14 Lifting valve
2 Replenishing pump 26 bar 15 Lift kick-out solenoid
3 Solenoid valve block 9 Ride control pressure switch, 16 Lowering valve
4 Overspeed protection sole- 10 bar 17 Float position solenoid
noid valve 10 Pilot control unit 18 Control block assembly
5 Pilot control solenoid valve 11 Tilt-in valve 19 Lift cylinder spool valve
6 Check valve 12 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid 20 Tilt cylinder spool valve
7 Pilot control hydro accumulator 13 Tilt-out valve 21 Restrictor valve
valves are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 10. The required
control oil is taken from the replenishing pump 2 of the travel hydraulics. The
replenishing pressure relief valve limits the pilot control pressure to the
specified level.
The pilot control solenoid valve 5 is installed for the safety of the machine.
The working hydraulics lockout button must be activated to prevent
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
accidental movements of the working attachment during maintenance, road

travel and when the driver leaves the machine. The operation of the working
hydraulics is disabled.
The pilot control hydro accumulator 7 with check valve 6 on the solenoid
valve block 3 allows the lift arms to be lowered or the bucket to be tilted out,
even when the engine is not running.
The bucket return-to-dig, lift kick-out and float position functions are controlled
via retaining solenoids in the pilot control unit and proximity switches.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Pilot control unit

The pilot control unit controls the spool valves in the control block. The
control pressure increases smoothly according to the deflection of the lever.
The pilot control unit contains retaining solenoids for the bucket return-to-dig,
lift kick-out and float position functions. These solenoids hold the control
lever in the maximum position until the solenoid current is switched off.
Variable displacement pump with replenishing pump

The replenishing pump 1 is part of the variable displacement pump 2 of the
travel hydraulics. The replenishing pump delivers oil for the following com-
ponents and functions:
Travel hydraulics control circuit
Replenishing oil in the closed circuit
Pilot control of the working hydraulics
Overspeed protection (rear axle braking function)
The maximum pressure of the replenishing pump is limited by the replenish-
ing pressure relief valve.
The design and functions are described in the sections on the travel
hydraulics and the variable displacement pump.
Solenoid valve block

The solenoid valve block 4 contains the pilot control solenoid valve 2 and
the pilot control hydro accumulator 1.
When the machine is started or when the starter switch is in position 1, the
pilot control solenoid valve is activated automatically. Control oil flows to the
pilot control unit and the working hydraulics can be operated.
The hydro accumulator 1 and check valve (starter switch in position 1) allow
the lift arms to be lowered and the working attachment to be tilted out, even
when the engine is not running.
The working hydraulics lockout button deactivates the pilot control solenoid
valve. The P connection in the pilot control unit is relieved towards the
hydraulic tank and the working hydraulics cannot be used.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit sole-
noid valve.
Control block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The control block contains the spool valves for the tilt cylinder 1 and the lift
cylinder 2.
The spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders are supplied with oil by the pilot
control unit.
The restrictors in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the
individual functions.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve relieves the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7.3.1 Pilot control unit
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the pilot control device

1 Housing 4 Control plate
2 Control valve 5 Control lever
3 Electromagnetic locking
The pilot control device is fitted in the operating panel to the right of the
driver's seat.
An additional pilot control unit for special functions (3rd control circuit) can
be fitted on the side of the existing pilot control unit.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Components of the pilot control device

1 Pressure spring 21 Shim
2 Spring sleeve 22 Adjusting bushing
3 O-ring 23 Nut
4 Brass bushing 24 Counter nut
5 Sealing ring 25 Adjusting screw
6 O-ring 26 Snap ring
7 Plastic bushing 27 Tappet
8 O-ring 28 Guide bushing
9 Tappet guide 29 Tappet
10 Retaining ring 30 Retaining plates
11 Electromagnet with sockets 31 Spring cup
12 Threaded rod with universal joint 32 Return spring
13 Ring 33 Regulating spring
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
14 Tappet with universal joint 34 Regulating piston

15 Disc 35 Plug
16 Lock nut 36 Bore hole
17 Connector piece 37 Housing
18 Counter nut 38 Connection 2
19 Control lever 39 Connection 4
20 Control plate
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit

1 Lowering valve 5 Float position solenoid
2 Lifting valve 6 Lift kick-out solenoid
3 Tilt-out valve 7 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid
4 Tilt-in valve
The pilot control device activates the pistons in the control block hydraulically.
It works on the basis of directly controlled pressure relief valves. When the
control lever is moved, it supplies oil to the appropriate connection.
The pressure regulation of the valves in the pilot control device depends on:
The position of the control lever
The properties of the individual regulating springs
The retaining solenoids allow each function to be electromagnetically locked.
Its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
Idle state In the idle state, the control lever is held in the zero position by the return spring
2. The connection 6 is connected via the hole 5 to the tank connection T.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Control valve in idle state / Control valve in active state

Regulating phase When the control lever is moved, the tappet 7 pushes against the return
spring 8 and the regulating spring 9. The regulating spring 9 pushes down
the regulating piston 10 and closes the connection of the port 12 and the
tank connection T. At the same time, the connection 12 is connected via the
hole 11 to the connection P.
The control phase begins as soon as the force of the regulating spring 9 and
the force of the hydraulic pressure at the connection 12 are equal. The
regulating piston 10 is in equilibrium.
The interaction of the regulating piston 10 and the regulating spring 9 means
that the pressure at the connection 12 is proportional to the stroke of the
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
tappet 7 and therefore to the position of the control lever. The pressure
regulation which is proportional to the position of the control lever allows the
spool valves in the control block to be moved proportionally to the pressure.
Electromagnetic locking
The following functions have electromagnetic locking:
Lift kick-out
Bucket return-to-dig
Float position
The pressure spring 1 is attached under the tappet 3 and the spring sleeve
2. Just before the end of the stroke of the tappet and the control lever, the
operator must apply additional force to tension the pressure spring 1.
This shows the operator that the control lever is at its end position / maxi-
mum deflection.
At the end position (maximum deflection) of the control lever, the ring 5
comes into contact with the anchor magnet 4. When the solenoid is
activated, its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
Unlocking takes place automatically by switching off the solenoid current
using the proximity switch or by pulling back the control lever.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7.3.2 Pilot control solenoid valve
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Solenoid valves in the cut-in block

1 Pilot control hydro accumulator 3 Overspeed protection solenoid
2 Pilot control solenoid valve valve
4 Solenoid valve block assembly
The cut-in block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
Basic function
The cut-in block includes the following components in a single housing:
Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)
Pilot control solenoid valve

When the engine is running or when the starter switch is in position 1, the
pilot control solenoid valve 5 is activated automatically. Control oil flows to
the pilot control unit 1 and the working hydraulics can be operated.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic plan of the solenoid valve block

1 Pilot control unit 5 Pilot control solenoid valve
2 Pilot control hydro accumulator 6 Overspeed protection solenoid
3 Solenoid valve block assembly valve
4 Check valve 7 Replenishing pump
The on-road travel button deactivates the pilot control solenoid valve 5. The
P connection in the pilot control unit 1 is relieved towards the hydraulic tank
and the working hydraulics cannot be used.
The pilot control hydro accumulator 3 with check valve 4 allows the working
hydraulics to be used even when the engine is not running (starter switch in
position 1). The lift arms can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
7.3.3 Pilot control hydro accumulator

(ID 7622 448)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator

1 Plug 3 Closing head
2 Membrane 4 Accumulator
The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2,
which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the
membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro
accumulator is completely empty.
The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the
filling and testing device.
Basic function
The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and
supply it when needed.
It has the following applications:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride
control system or steering attenuation.
As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the
brake system.
Storing pressure for the pilot control

The hydro accumulator 1 allows the working hydraulics to be used even
when the engine is not running (starter switch in position 1). The lift arms
can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7.3.4 Float position pressure switch

(ID 6905 869)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch

1 Connection contact 4 Switch contact
2 Adjusting screw 5 Membrane
3 Pressure spring 6 Housing
The float position pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in
the control line for lowering the lift arms.
Basic function
The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a
set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally open.
Activating the float position function

The float position pressure switch activates the float position function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Layout of pressure switches and solenoid valve

1 Float position / ride control sole- 3 Ride control pressure switch
noid valve 4 Float position retaining sole-
2 Float position pressure switch noid
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
When the float position pressure switch 2 reaches a set pilot control
pressure, its electrical contact closes. If the float position/ride control button
is switched on, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control
valve block) and the float position retaining solenoid 4 (in the pilot control
unit) are activated.
When float position retaining solenoid 4 is activated, its magnetic force holds
the control lever in its end position.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control valve block)
relieves the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank. The working attachment
lies on the ground under its own weight.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control
7.4 Ride control

7.4.1 Ride control L550, L556
Design
Main components of the ride control system

1 Lift cylinder 3 Float position / ride control sole- 4 Stabilisation module
2 Control block noid valve 5 Hydro accumulator
The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2
are installed in the front section.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends

towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable
for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety.
The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift
arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.

Ride control
Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system

6 Stabilisation module 14 Lowering valve 19 Control block assembly
7 Ride control spool valve 15 Lifting valve 20 Lift cylinder spool valve
8 Restrictor check valve 16 Float position pressure switch, 21 Float position / ride control so-
9 Ride control solenoid valve 26 bar lenoid valve
10 Safety valve 17 Ride control pressure switch, 22 Lifting pressure relief valve
11 Hydro accumulator unit 10 bar 23 Replenishing valve
12 Check valve 18 Lift cylinder 24 Tilt cylinder spool valve
13 Pilot control unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base
end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with
nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders.
The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This
allows the lift arms to move up freely.

Ride control
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the
hydro accumulators.
The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high.
This protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.
Hydro accumulator unit

The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload.
hydro accumulators.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations.
The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the
hydro accumulators.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.
Control valve block

cylinder 1.
The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the
stabilisation module.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod
end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.

The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated
at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the
contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride
control can be activated.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Ride control
Ride control deactivated

When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position.
Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro
accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load
pressure of the working attachment.
If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro
accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position.
The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is
interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the
working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated

1 Stabilisation module 4 Ride control solenoid valve 8 Lift cylinder
2 Ride control spool valve 5 Safety valve 9 Float position / ride control sole-
3 Restrictor check valve 6 Hydro accumulator unit noid valve
7 Check valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Ride control
Ride control activated

Ride control can only be activated when:
The ride control button is activated
The travel speed is above 9.1 km/h (adjustable)
The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed
When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9
and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank.
The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator
to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right, fully
opening the connection to the hydro accumulators.
The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess
pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank.
If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off
again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.
The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated

7 Check valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve

Ride control
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

Ride control
7.4.2 Ride control L566, L576, L580

Design
Main components of the ride control system

1 Lift cylinder 3 Float position / ride control sole- 4 Stabilisation module
2 Control block noid valve 5 Hydro accumulator
The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2
are installed in the front section.
Basic function
The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable

for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety.
The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift
arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Ride control
Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system

1 Stabilisation module 9 Lowering valve 20 Control block assembly
2 Ride control spool valve 10 Lifting valve 21 Lift cylinder spool valve
3 Restrictor check valve 11 Float position pressure switch, 22 Float position / ride control so-
4 Ride control solenoid valve 26 bar lenoid valve
5 Safety valve 12 Ride control pressure switch, 23 Lifting pressure relief valve
6 Hydro accumulator unit 10 bar 24 Replenishing valve
7 Check valve 13 Lift cylinder 25 Tilt cylinder spool valve
8 Pilot control unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base
end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with
nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders.
The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This
allows the lift arms to move up freely.

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
hydro accumulators.
The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high.
This protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.

The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload.
hydro accumulators.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations.
The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the
hydro accumulators.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.
Control valve block

cylinder 1.
The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the
stabilisation module.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod
end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.

The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated
at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Ride control
Ride control deactivated

When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position.
Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro
accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load
pressure of the working attachment.
If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro
accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position.
The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is
interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the
working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated

7 Check valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control
Ride control activated

Ride control can only be activated when:
The ride control button is activated
At a travel speed above 9.1 km/h (adjustable)
The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed
When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9
and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank.
The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumu-
lator to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right,
fully opening the connection to the hydro accumulators.
The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess
pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank.
If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off
again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.
The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated

1 Stabilisation module 5 Safety valve 9 Float position / ride control sole-
2 Ride control spool valve 6 Hydro accumulator unit noid valve
3 Restrictor check valve 7 Check valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve
4 Ride control solenoid valve 8 Lift cylinder

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Ride control
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control
7.4.3 Stabilisation module
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the stabilisation module

1 Housing 5 Hydro accumulator connection
2 Safety valve 6 Tank connection
3 Ride control piston 7 Ride control solenoid valve
4 Lift cylinder connection
The stabilisation module is mounted under the steering cylinder in the
front section.
It consists of the housing 1, which contains the safety valve 2 and the ride
control piston 3. The ride control solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deacti-
vating ride control.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Ride control
Components of the stabilisation module

1 Plug 6 Regulating spring 10 Outer restrictor screw
2 Socket-head screw 7 Ride control spool valve 11 Restrictor check valve
3 Spacer bushing 8 Regulating piston 12 Inner restrictor screw
4 Spring cup 9 Ride control solenoid valve 13 Housing
5 Regulating spring
Basic function
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from excessive
pressure peaks. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the stabilisation module
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control
7.4.4 Hydro accumulator unit
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator unit

1 Housing 3 Hydro accumulator
2 Stabilisation module connection
The hydro accumulator unit is mounted in the front section. The hydro
accumulators are mounted on the housing.
The housing is connected to the stabilisation module.
L550, L556 L566, L576, L580

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Function
The hydro accumulator unit is connected via the stabilisation module to the
base end of the lift cylinders. If the maximum pressure is reached, the
stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. This
protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations. The vibration
damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the hydro accumulators.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Ride control
Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator
Cross section of the hydro accumulator

1 Plug 4 Membrane
2 Nitrogen filling 5 Closing head
3 Oil filling 6 Accumulator
The hydro accumulators have a small amount of oil in them to protect the
membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such
as when driving over rough ground, the oil prevents the membrane from
hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control
7.4.5 Ride control pressure switch

(ID 6905 893)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

The ride control pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in the
control line for lowering the lift arms.
Basic function
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as "normally closed".
Deactivating the ride control function

The ride control pressure switch prevents ride control from being activated at
the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
contact in the ride control pressure switch is closed. This means that ride
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007

When the float position or lift arm lowering function is activated, the pressure
on the ride control pressure switch increases and the electrical contact in the
switch opens. This prevents ride control from being activated at the same time.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Ride control
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Lift and tilt cylinders
7.5 Lift and tilt cylinders

7.5.1 Lift cylinder
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the lift cylinder

1 Rod-end cylinder bearing 4 Piston rod 7 Hex screw
2 Piston rod bearing 5 Piston
3 Cylinder tube 6 Base-end cylinder bearing
The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3.
The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 is forked.
The base-end cylinder bearing 6 is a lug with a bearing bushing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3.
The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal
and Stepseal sealing rings.
The O rings are equipped with support rings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Extension and retraction

The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end.
The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating
pressure and the active surfaces.
When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring
face is active.
This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting.
The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when
retracting than extending.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Piston rod guide

The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston
rod bearing.
Sealing
The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the
piston rod.
The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the
pressure chambers inside and out.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
7.5.2 Tilt cylinder
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the tilt cylinder

1 Rod-end cylinder bearing 4 Piston rod 7 Hex screw
3 Cylinder tube 6 Base-end cylinder bearing
The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 6 form a
lug with a bearing bushing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3.
The O rings are equipped with support rings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

face is active.
Piston rod guide

rod bearing.
Sealing
piston rod.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
7.6 Hydraulic tank

Design
Main components of the hydraulic tank

1 Shut-off valve 6 Steel container
2 Working hydraulics pump in- 7 Gear pump intake connection
take port 8 Oil level sight glass
3 Emergency steering pump in- 9 Return and suction filter
take port 10 Return strainer
4 Steering pump intake port 11 Bleeder filter
5 Suction line from replenish- 12 Fixing panels for air filter and ex-
ing pump haust system
The hydraulic tank is fitted on the rear section. The fittings for fastening the
exhaust and air filter are on the steel part of the hydraulic tank.
Basic function
The hydraulic tank contains the oil required by the hydraulic system. It
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
supplies oil to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics, brake system and
steering system.
When the machine moves, a plate inside the hydraulic tank calms the
hydraulic oil. This moderating plate divides the hydraulic tank into a return
chamber and an intake chamber.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
Filter unit
The filter unit consists of the following components:
1 Return suction filter
2 Return strainer
3 Bleeder filter
4 Suction line from replenishing pump
The return suction filter 1 filters the oil flowing back from the working and
travel hydraulics. The oil flows from the inside outwards through the filter.
At the same time the filter acts as a suction filter for the replenishing pump of
the hydrostatic travel drive. The replenishing pump draws up the filtered oil
via the connection 4.
To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must
be exchanged with the atmosphere outside. The bleeder filter 2 provides the
connection to the outside.
To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through a
fine filter. A valve with a spring provides a slight pressure inside the
hydraulic tank.
The return strainer 3 filters some of the oil returning from the entire hydraulic
system. The filtered oil then flows back to the hydraulic tank.
See the detailed description in the section on the filter unit and bleeder filter.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
7.6.1 Filter unit
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components and connections of the filter unit

13 Return and suction filter 16 Return strainer
14 Integrated bypass valve 17 Filter housing
15 Bleeder filter 18 Suction line from replenish-
ing pump
The filter unit is contained in the hydraulic tank.
The steel vessel is sealed with an O-ring.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
Components of the filter unit

1 Filter housing 6 Bypass valve 11 Return pipe
2 Return suction filter cover 7 Pre-tension valve 12 Replenishing valve
3 Return strainer cover 8 Suction line from replenishing pump 13 Filter element
4 Duct to bypass valve 9 Replenishing strainer 14 Magnetic rod
5 Bleeder filter 10 Return strainer 15 Filter casing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
Basic function
The return suction filter 1 acts as a return filter for oil flowing back from the
working and travel hydraulics, and as a suction filter for the replenishing
pump of the hydrostatic travel drive.
Some of oil flowing back from the various consumer units is pumped through
the return suction filter 3 back to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 2 prevents inadmissible pressure changes inside the hydrau-
lic tank. This means air can be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.
Connections on the filter unit:
4 Compact brake pump leak oil
5 Fan motor leak oil
7 Working hydraulics pump leak oil
8 Solenoid valve block return line
9 Working hydraulics pump leak oil
10 Return line from control block
11 Return line from oil cooler
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function of the filter unit

1 Control block oil cooler connection 6 Replenishing strainer
2 Magnetic rod 7 Pre-tension valve
3 Return and suction filter 8 Return strainer
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
4 Lower chamber 9 Return pipe

The oil flowing back from the working and travel hydraulics is pumped
through the connection 1 to the return suction filter 3. The oil flows from the
inside outwards through the return suction filter 3 and is cleaned.
The magnetic rod 2 attracts larger metal particles from the oil flowing past.
This also increases the lifetime of the filter.
The outside of the filter is connected to intake connection 5 of the replenish-
ing pump.
More oil flows from the working and travel hydraulics to the return and
suction filter than is drawn up by the replenishing pump. The excess oil flows
through the pre-tension valve 7 to the hydraulic tank.
Oil supply to the replenishing pump

The returning oil flows from the inside outwards through the return suction
filter 1.
The replenishing pump of the travel hydraulics draws up some of the oil from
the lower chamber 2 via the intake connection 4.
The pre-tension valve 3 preloads the intake connection 4 of the replenishing
pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The excess oil flows through the pre-
tension valve 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The pressure of the intake connection 4 allows the replenishing to draw up oil
more easily for cold starts. This increases the pressure in the hydrostatic con-
trol circuit increases more quickly and a better drive performance is achieved.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Replenishing pump oil supply Replenishing function

1 Return and suction filter 4 Suction line from replenish-
2 Lower chamber ing pump
3 Pre-tension valve 5 Replenishing strainer
6 Replenishing valve
If there is insufficient oil to supply the replenishing pump, it can draw up oil
from the hydraulic tank. Oil flows through the replenishing strainer 5 and the
replenishing valve 6 to the intake connection 4 of the replenishing pump.
There may be too little oil in the filter element, for instance after it is changed.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
Bypass valve for pressure relief

The bypass valve 4 prevents excess pressure in the return system.
Excess pressure can arise if the filter element 1 is dirty or if the oil is not suf-
ficiently viscous.
If a certain pressure is reached, the bypass valve 4 opens. The oil then flows
through the duct 3, the bypass valve 4 and the return strainer 5 to the
hydraulic tank.
Return suction filter with bypass valve and return strainer

1 Return and suction filter 4 Bypass valve
2 Connections to the filter unit: 5 Return strainer
3 Duct to bypass valve
The return strainer 5 catches dirt particles. This prevents soiling of the
hydraulic tank.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
7.6.2 Bleeder filter
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the bleeder filter

1 Filter housing 6 O-ring
2 Inlet valve 7 Fine filter
3 Pressure spring 8 O-ring
4 Outlet valve 9 Inner housing
5 Pressure spring
The bleeder filter consists of an oil-resistant, corrosion-proof plastic housing
in which a filter element folded in a star shape is inserted. The bleeder filter
contains an inlet and outlet valve.
Function
To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must
be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through the
fine filter.
The spring-loaded outlet valve 2 and inlet valve 3 reduce the exchange of
air. This minimises the oil contamination and increases the service life of the
fine filter element.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank

Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by increased oil
temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders retracting.
At a certain excess pressure, the outlet valve 2 opens. This allows air to
escape through the fine filter 1 and the opening 3.
Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank

Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by decreasing oil
temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders extending.
At a certain low pressure, the inlet valve 4 opens. This allows air to flow in
through the opening 3 and the fine filter 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
8 Steering System
8.0
Chapter contents
8 Steering System.................................................................. 8.0-1
8.0 Steering system ..............................................................................8.0-1
8.1 Steering pump ................................................................................8.1-1
8.2 Servostat.........................................................................................8.2-1
8.3 Steering cylinder .............................................................................8.3-1

8.3.1 Steering damper hydro accumulator ....................................8.3-3
8.4 Emergency steering........................................................................8.4-1

8.4.1 Emergency steering pump ...................................................8.4-5
8.4.2 Emergency steering pressure switch ...................................8.4-7
8.4.3 Emergency steering check pressure switch .........................8.4-8
8.4.4 Valve block ...........................................................................8.4-9
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Steering System Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Steering System
8.0 Steering system

Design
Main components of the steering system

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Servostat 5 Variable displacement pump 9 Steering damper hydro

2 Oil cooler 6 Valve block accumulator
3 Collector pipe 7 Emergency steering pump 10 Right steering cylinder
4 Hydraulic tank 8 Left steering cylinder
The machine has articulated steering. Two steering cylinders move the front
section and the rear section to each other using the articulated joint.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the steering system
L580 - 459 / from 14171
1 Hydraulic tank 18 Left steering cylinder 36 Valve slider

2 Bleeder filter 19 Left steering damper 40 Valve block
3 Return strainer hydro accumulator 41 Check valve
4 Bypass valve 20 Variable displacement pump 42 Check valve
5 Return suction filter 21 Axial piston pump 43 Variable displacement pump
6 Pre-tension valve 22 Servo cylinder pressure switch B3
7 Replenishing valve with strainer 23 Return cylinder 44 Emergency steering pump
8 Travel pump return line 24 Restrictor pressure switch B3a
9 Fan motor leak oil 25 Restrictor 45 Emergency steering pump
10 Compact brake pump leak oil 26 Pressure cut-off 46 Electric motor
11 Solenoid valve block leak oil 27 Flow controller 47 Gear pump
12 Return line from oil cooler 28 Working hydraulics pump 48 Pressure relief valve
13 Shut-off valve return line 50 Oil cooler
14 Working hydraulics pump 30 Servostat 51 Collector pipe
intake port 31 Left replenishing valve 52 Bypass valve
15 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 32 Left pressure relief valve
Test connections:
16 Right steering cylinder 33 Right replenishing valve
P High pressure / steering pump
17 Right steering damper hydro 34 Right pressure relief valve
M High pressure / steering pump
accumulator 35 Metering pump
or emergency steering pump
The steering system operates in an open circuit. The variable displacement
pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it through the
valve block 40 to the servostat 30. The servostat supplies oil to the two
steering cylinders when the steering wheel is moved.
The load sensing system ensures that the pump 20 only pumps as much oil
as is actually required.
The emergency steering system allows steering movement if the variable
displacement pump fails. The emergency steering pump 45 delivers oil via
the valve block 40 to the servostat 30.
The hydro accumulators 17 and 18 on the steering cylinders absorb steering
movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front
and rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the steering system. The variable
displacement pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1.
The returning oil from the servostat is pumped back through the oil cooler
and the connection 3 via the return suction filter 4 to the hydraulic tank. Leak
oil from the variable displacement pump is directed through the connection 2
via the return strainer 5 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 6 compen-
sates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing
appropriate ventilation.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The pump draws up oil directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it through
the valve block to the servostat.
The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump only
provides as much oil as the steering system currently needs.
The pressure cut-off valve 2 limits the maximum pressure of the pump.
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Valve block
The valve block directs the oil from the variable displacement pump or the
emergency steering pump to the servostat.
The emergency steering pressure switch 1 monitors the pressure of the
variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the emergency steering
pressure switch 1 is too low, the emergency steering pump is automatically
activated. This can happen if the diesel engine shuts down or if the variable
displacement pump fails.
The check valves 2 and 3 prevent the oil from flowing back to the pumps.
See the detailed description in the section on the valve block.
Servostat
The servostat is connected to the steering column. The steering wheel
actuates the metering pump and valve slider in the servostat, causing the
steering system to move.
If the steering wheel is moved quickly, the flow booster system pumps some
of the oil via the spool directly to the steering cylinders. This facilitates fast
steering on rough terrain.
When the steering wheel is moved slowly, the flow booster is not activated.
All the oil is pumped through the spool and the metering pump to the steer-
ing cylinders. This facilitates sensitive steering on roads.
Two pressure relief valves protect the steering cylinder and servostat from
excessive pressure peaks.
See the detailed description in the section on the servostat.
Steering cylinder
The steering cylinders are connected to the front and rear sections.
The servostat supplies oil to the steering cylinders during steering.
The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering move-
ments. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front and
rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.
See the detailed description in the section on the steering cylinder.
Emergency steering function

The emergency steering function allows the steering system to be operated
if the engine or the variable displacement pump fails. The emergency
steering pump is activated by the main electronics (master).
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description in the section on emergency steering.
Emergency steering pump

The gear pump 4 of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric
motor 2. The electric motor is switched on when necessary via the relay 1.
In emergency steering mode the emergency steering pump draws up oil from
the hydraulic tank and pumps it through the valve block to the servostat.
The pressure relief valve 3 protects the pump from excess pressure.
See the detailed description in the section on the emergency steering pump.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Steering pump
8.1 Steering pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the steering pump

1 Drive shaft 4 Pressure cut-off
2 Pump housing 5 Connection housing
3 Flow controller
The steering pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design. The
steering pump is flange-mounted to the working hydraulics pump and is
The pressure and flow controller attached to pump housing affect the control
unit of the pump.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Steering pump
Components of the steering pump

1 Drive shaft 9 Cylinder 17 Intake connection
2 Snap ring 10 Control plate 18 Snap ring
3 Shaft seal ring 11 O-ring 19 Support ring
4 Pump housing 12 P connection 20 Pressure spring
5 Bearing casing 13 Valve housing 21 Support ring
6 Swash plate 14 Shim 22 Glide shoe
7 Return plate 15 Tapered roller bearing 23 Return ball
8 Piston 16 Shim 24 Tapered roller bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Steering pump
Components of the steering pump

1 Ball journal 6 Test connection P 11 Guide piston
2 Glide shoe 7 Plug 12 Return cylinder
3 Servo piston 8 Pressure cut-off 13 Glide shoe
4 Regulating spring 9 Flow controller 14 Ball journal
5 Piston guide 10 LS connection
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Steering pump
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump

1 Rotary group 7 Flow controller
2 Servo cylinder 8 High pressure test connection
3 Return cylinder 9 Oil to servostat
4 Restrictor 10 LS signal from servostat
5 Restrictor 11 Return line to hydraulic tank
6 Pressure cut-off 12 Intake connection
The steering pump operates in an open circuit. During operation, the pump
delivers oil from the hydraulic tank through the valve block to the steering.
The displacement of the steering pump is proportional to the input speed
and the variable cylinder volume.
The pressure cut-off valve 6 and flow controller 7 attached to pump housing
affect the control unit of the pump. The pump control unit pivots the swash
plate out of the zero position. When the swash plate pivots out, the piston
stroke in the rotary group 1 increases and the pump starts delivering oil.
Control unit
The control unit continuously regulates the steering pump flow. The angle of
the swash plate 3 is changed from 0 towards 15 and vice versa. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Control unit with return cylinder and actuating cylinder
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Steering pump
The system pressure constantly acts on the actuating cylinder 1. The

actuating cylinder 1 pushes the swash plate 3 towards a wider angle and
pump delivers oil.
The return cylinder 2 moves the swash plate 3 against the actuating cylinder
1 to a smaller angle. The effective piston face of the return cylinder 2 is
larger than that of the actuating cylinder 1.
The oil pressure acting on the return cylinder 2 is controlled by the flow
controller or pressure cut-off valve. In the pump control range, the oil
pressure on the return cylinder is just enough to keep the forces of the
actuating and return cylinders in equilibrium. This means the pump can
maintain a specific pivot angle and pump a corresponding amount of oil.
Flow controller (load sensing)

The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump
only provides as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the steering system
currently needs.
If the steering system needs oil, the load pressure at the connection 4 increases.
The pressure and the force of the springs 5 push the piston 2 against the pump
pressure. The duct A opens to the tank connection T. The open duct A relieves
the return cylinder 3 and the pump delivers the required quantity of oil.
Flow controller during steering (pump delivers oil)

1 Flow controller 6 Adjusting screw
2 Valve piston 7 Pressure cut-off
3 Plug T Pump housing return line
4 Connection X A To the return cylinder
5 Pressure springs P High pressure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Steering pump
If the steering wheel is not moved, the load pressure at the connection 4
decreases. The pump pressure moves the piston 2 against the springs 5.
The piston 2 opens the pump pressure duct P to the duct A and the return
cylinder regulates the pump to the minimum flow.
Flow controller with no steering movement (pump does not deliver oil)
Pressure cut-off
When the maximum operating pressure in the system has been reached, the
pump moves back to the smallest angle and only delivers leak oil. The
maximum operating pressure remains constant.
When the pump reaches its maximum operating pressure, the piston 3 in the
pressure cut-off valve 1 moves against the spring 4. This opens the duct A
and pressure oil flows to the return cylinder.
The return cylinder moves the swash plate and regulates the pump to the
smallest angle.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Pressure cut-off valve at maximum system pressure

1 Pressure cut-off 5 Adjusting screw
2 Effective face P High pressure
3 Valve piston A To the return cylinder
4 Pressure spring T Pump housing return line
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Servostat
8.2 Servostat
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the servostat

1 Left pressure relief valve 3 Right pressure relief valve
2 Inner rotary slide valve with teeth 4 Housing with spool valve
5 Metering pump
The servostat is fastened on rubber fittings at the front under the cab. The
rubber fittings prevent noise from the hydraulics from being transferred to the
steel cab frame.
The steering column meshes with the teeth of the internal rotary slider 2.
The internal rotary slider in the servostat is actuated by the steering wheel
and the steering column.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Servostat
Components of the servostat

1 Closing plate 7 Internal rotary slider 13 Shaft seal ring
2 Metering pump 8 Flight 14 Right pressure relief valve
3 Internal gear 9 Actuator journal 15 Leaf springs
4 O-ring 10 Housing 16 Left pressure relief valve
5 Intermediate flange 11 Needle bearing 17 Replenishing valve
6 Outer valve sleeve 12 Guide ring
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Servostat
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the servostat

1 Left replenishing valve 7 Return line to hydraulic tank
2 Left pressure relief valve 8 Steering cylinder connection
3 Right replenishing valve 9 Steering cylinder connection
4 Right pressure relief valve 10 Oil from valve block
5 Metering pump 11 Load sensing signal
6 Valve slider
When it is actuated, the servostat directs oil from the variable displacement
pump to the steering cylinders. The oil supply to the steering cylinders is
precisely metered according to the speed of the steering wheel.
When the steering wheel is turned, the position of the internal rotary slider is
turned in relation to the outer valve sleeve. This opens the valve, allowing a
certain amount of oil to flow through the metering pump to the steering cylinder.
Flow booster
The flow booster allows the small servostat to supply oil from two cylinders.
A specific portion of the flow is directed through the metering pump, and
another portion is pumped through the spool directly to the cylinders.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Diagram of flow booster

1 Boost ratio 3 Oil via the metering pump
2 Turns of steering wheel 4 Oil via the spool
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Servostat
If the steering wheel is moved slowly, the entire flow is directed through the
metering pump 3. The oil flowing to the steering system depends on the size of
the metering pump. This allows very sensitive steering for travelling on roads.
At faster steering speeds of more than 10 turns of the steering wheel per
minute, additional holes in the spool open. Some of the oil flows through the
metering pump 3, and more oil flows the spool 4 directly to the cylinders. The
volumetric flow ration is 1:1.6. This allows very fast steering for rough terrain.
Flow regulation (load sensing)

Load sensing ensures that the variable displacement pump only supplies the
amount of oil currently needed by the steering system. The servostat reports the
required amount of oil via the LS connection to the variable displacement pump.
Steering system in inactive state When the steering is not actuated, the duct P on the variable displacement
pump 3 is blocked. The LS connection for controlling the pump is relieved
via the spool to the tank connection T. The LS depressurised connection ad-
justs the variable displacement pump minimum flow.
Steering system in active state When the steering is actuated, the spool 2 is moved. The connection P is
connected to the connection LS and to the steering cylinder. The increase
pressure at the LS connection causes the flow controller 4 to regulate the
variable displacement pump 3 to the required oil quantity.
The variable displacement pump 3 is adjusted until there is a specific
pressure difference between the connection P and the connection LS.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Pressure cut-off
The pressure relief valves prevent excessive pressure peaks in the steering
system. Pressure peaks can be caused by sudden loads while driving.
Depending on the direction of the load, either the pressure relief valve 1 on the
left steering cylinder or the pressure relief valve 2 for the right cylinder opens.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Servostat
When the set pressure is reached, the valve cone 6 opens against the pres-
sure spring 4. Oil flows from the consumer unit 7 to the tank connection 5.
The opening pressure of the pressure relief valve can be set using the
adjusting screw 3.
Replenishing function
The servostat has two replenishing valves: one for steering to the left and
one for steering to the right.
The replenishing valves prevent vacuums from forming in the steering
cylinder under certain operating conditions. Oil flows through the check valve
2 from the tank duct 1 to the steering cylinder (duct 3). The pin 4 prevents
the check valve 2 from moving too far from the valve insert.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Servostat
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Steering cylinder
8.3 Steering cylinder

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the steering cylinder

1 Rod-end cylinder bearing 4 Piston rod 7 Base-end cylinder bearing
3 Cylinder tube 6 Damper bushing
The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 7 form a
lug with a swivel bearing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is screwed into the cylinder tube 3.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

face is active.
Piston rod guide

rod bearing.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Steering cylinder
Sealing
piston rod.
Stroke end shock absorber
Stroke end shock absorber

1 Piston rod 3 Damper bushing
2 Piston 4 Damper notch
The piston rod is slowed down before it is fully retracted.
Just before the piston 2 hits the cylinder base, it enters the damper bushing
3 in the cylinder base.
The oil can only flow through the damper notch 4. This decreases the flow
diameter for the displaced oil and the speed of the piston is reduced.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Steering cylinder
8.3.1 Steering damper hydro accumulator
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

1 Plug for test and filling valve 3 Closing head
accumulator is completely empty.
The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the
filling and testing device.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the
brake system.
Steering damper
The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering move-
ments when changing direction quickly. Also, the damping effect absorbs
external influences on the machine, for example if the working attachment is
driven against an obstacle.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Steering cylinder
Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator
Cross section of the hydro accumulator

1 Plug for test and filling valve 4 Membrane
2 Nitrogen filling 5 Closing head
3 Oil filling 6 Accumulator
The hydro accumulator has a small amount of oil in it to protect the mem-
brane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such as
when driving on rough terrain or suddenly moving the steering wheel, the oil
prevents the membrane from hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Emergency steering
8.4 Emergency steering

Design
Main components of the emergency steering

1 Emergency steering button 7 Valve block
2 Emergency steering check 8 Emergency steering check
symbol field pressure switch B3a
3 Emergency steering symbol field 9 Emergency steering pump
4 Main electronics (master) 10 Emergency steering pump relay
5 Input module 1 11 Output module 2
6 Emergency steering pressure
switch B3
The emergency steering pump 9, the emergency steering pump relay 10 and
the emergency steering check pressure switch 8 are mounted on the right of
the rear section.
The valve block 7 and the emergency steering pressure switch 6 are
mounted on the left of the rear section.
The main electronics (master) 4 are located in the cab behind the driver's seat.
The input module 1 and the output module 2 are fitted in the right cab access.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Emergency steering
Basic function
Functional diagram of the emergency steering

1 Emergency steering button 7 Valve block
symbol field pressure switch B3a
4 Main electronics (master) 10 Emergency steering pump relay
5 Input module 1 11 Output module 2
6 Emergency steering pressure
switch B3
The emergency steering system allows continued steering if the variable
displacement pump or the diesel engine fails. The emergency steering pump
9 delivers oil via the valve block 7 to the servostat.
The emergency steering pump is regulated by the main electronics (master)
4. The emergency steering check pressure switch 8, and the emergency
steering pressure switch 5 provide the main electronics with the necessary
signals. The emergency steering button 1 is for restarting the emergency
steering pump.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Emergency steering
Pressure switch test

When you switch on the ignition, the pressure switches are tested. The pressure
switch is powered (24 V) via the fuse F11. When the system is OK, no signal is
returned to the input module 1. This tells the main electronics (master) 2 that the
pressure switch is working properly. The symbol fields 3 and 4 do not light up.
If the pressure switch is defective or if there is moisture in the plug or cable,
a positive signal is sent to the input module 1.
If the emergency steering pressure switch 5 is defective, the emergency
steering symbol field 4 lights up. If the emergency steering pressure check
switch 6 is defective, the emergency steering check symbol field 3 lights up.
Function diagram of the emergency steering

when the pressure switch is defective
(ignition on, engine off, both pressure switches
closed in the depressurised state)
1 Input module 1 5 Emergency steering pressure
2 Main electronics (master) switch
symbol field pressure switch
Emergency steering check

Every time the machine is started up the system performs a brief safety test.
This safety test is not performed until the engine is running. This is to
prevent the high current consumption of the emergency steering pump from
impairing the starting procedure.
During the safety test, the emergency steering pump is activated. The pump
runs for 2 to 3 seconds. A pressure of 16 bar must be reached within this
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
time. The contact on the emergency steering check pressure switch 6

closes. During the safety test, the emergency steering check symbol field 3
lights up. The emergency steering system is then operational and the
emergency steering check symbol field goes out.
If the pressure at the emergency steering check pressure switch 6 does not
reach 16 bar, the check symbol field stays lit until the ignition is switched off.
The safety test is interrupted after 3 seconds. The emergency steering field
check symbol field indicates to the driver that the emergency steering
system is defective.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Emergency steering
Activated emergency steering system
Functional diagram of the emergency steering

1 Input module 1 6 Valve block
2 Output module 2 7 Oil from the steering pump
3 Emergency steering check 8 To servostat
pressure switch 9 Emergency steering button
4 Emergency steering 10 Main electronics (master)
pressure switch
5 Electric motor
If the diesel engine or the steering pump 7 fails, the emergency steering function
is started automatically. If the pressure drops, the emergency steering pressure
switch 4 sends a signal via the input module 1 to the main electronics (master)
10. The main electronics give the start command to the output module 2 and the
emergency steering pump starts pumping oil. At the same time the emergency
steering symbol field lights up, accompanied by an audible signal. The
emergency steering function is provided for 40 seconds. The electric motor 5 of
the emergency steering pump is automatically switched off.
The emergency steering pump can only started manually using the emer-
gency steering button 9. This function is only available for 10 seconds if the
ignition is on.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Emergency steering
8.4.1 Emergency steering pump
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the emergency steering pump

1 Relay 3 Pressure relief valve
2 Electric motor 4 Gear pump
The emergency steering pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Components of the emergency steering pump

1 Relay 5 Flange 9 Housing
2 Electric motor 6 Seals 10 Valve housing
3 Connector piece 7 Bushing 11 Pressure relief valve
4 Sealing ring 8 Gears
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Emergency steering
Basic function
The gear pump of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric
motor. The electric motor is switched on and off via a relay.
The gear pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank as needed. The oil is
pumped via the valve block to the servostat. A pressure relief valve protects
the pump from excess pressure.
Gear pump with pressure relief valve

The gear pump 1 of the emergency steering pump is protected by a pressure
relief valve. By restricting the maximum pressure, this also prevents the
electric motor from consuming too much current.
The system pressure pushes the valve piston 2 against the spring 3.
If the maximum pressure is reached, the valve piston 2 opens. This allows
hydraulic oil to flow out to the intake side of the gear pump.
The maximum pressure is determined by the pressure spring 3 and the
adjusting disc 4.
Emergency steering pump relay

The electric motor 5 of the emergency steering pump is switched on and off
via the relay 1. The relay 1 is activated by the main electronics (master) and
the output module 2. The relay is designed to switch large currents.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Emergency steering pump with electric diagram

1 Relay 4 Output module 2
2 Positive current supply 5 Electric motor
3 Relay activation 6 Main earth connection
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Emergency steering
8.4.2 Emergency steering pressure switch

ID 1029 4440
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

The emergency steering pressure switch 1 is mounted on the valve block 2.
Basic function
Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When

a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed.
Activating the emergency steering function

The emergency steering pressure switch monitors the steering system
pressure.
If the diesel engine or the steering fails, the pressure at the emergency
steering pressure switch drops. If the pressure drops, the switch contact
opens. This interrupts the positive signal to the input module 1 and the
emergency steering system is activated.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Emergency steering
8.4.3 Emergency steering check pressure switch

ID 1029 4440
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

The emergency steering pressure switch 2 is mounted on the emergency
steering pump 1.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Activating the emergency steering function

The job of the emergency steering check pressure switch is to test the emer-
gency steering system.
When the diesel engine is started, the emergency steering pump begins to
pump oil. If the pressure rises to the set level, the switch contact closes. A
positive signal to the input module 1 is activated and the emergency steering
check is successfully completed.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Emergency steering
8.4.4 Valve block
Design
Components and connections on the valve block

1 Oil from the emergency 5 To servostat
steering pump 6 Housing
2 Oil from the variable 7 Steering test connection
displacement pump 8 Emergency steering pump
3 Emergency steering check valve
pressure switch
4 Variable displacement pump
check valve
The valve block is fitted on left of the rear section.
Basic function
The valve block connects the oil from the variable displacement pump or the
emergency steering pump to the servostat.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic plan of the valve block

1 Oil from the variable displace- 5 Variable displacement pump
ment pump check valve
2 Emergency steering pressure switch 6 To servostat
3 Oil from the emergency 7 Steering pressure test
steering pump connection
4 Emergency steering pump
check valve
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Emergency steering
The emergency steering pressure switch 2 monitors the pressure of the

variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the switch 2 is too low, the
emergency steering pump is automatically activated. This can happen if the
diesel engine fails or if the variable displacement pump pressure drops.
The check valves 4 and 5 prevent oil from flowing back to the pump.
Valve block during normal
steering function
Valve block during normal steering function

When the steering is activated, the variable displacement pump delivers oil
to the connection 2 and via the check valve 4 to the servostat. The check
valve 8 prevents oil from flowing back to the emergency steering pump.
Valve block during emergency

steering function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Valve block during emergency steering function

The emergency steering pump delivers oil to the connection 1 and via the
check valve 8 to the servostat. The check valve 4 prevents oil from flowing
back to the variable displacement pump.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
9 Brake system
9.0
Chapter contents
9 Brake system ...................................................................... 9.0-1
9.0.1 Brake system........................................................................9.0-1
9.1 Service brake ..................................................................................9.1-1

9.1.1 Brake system gear pump......................................................9.1-1
9.1.2 Compact brake valve............................................................9.1-3
9.1.3 Service brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.1-7
9.1.4 Brake light pressure switch ..................................................9.1-9
9.1.5 Accumulator charge pressure switch .................................9.1-10
9.2 Parking brake..................................................................................9.2-1

9.2.1 Disc brake.............................................................................9.2-2
9.2.2 Parking brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.2-4
9.3 Overspeed protection .....................................................................9.3-1

9.3.1 Overspeed protection solenoid valve ...................................9.3-3
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Brake system Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Brake system
9.0.1 Brake system
Design
Main components of the brake system

1 Compact brake valve 7 Rear axle 13 Front axle
2 Front axle service brake 8 Pilot control solenoid valve
Test connections:
hydro accumulator 9 Overspeed protection
M3 Accumulator charge
3 Rear axle service brake solenoid valve
pressure
hydro accumulator 10 Pilot control hydro accumulator
M4 Front axle brake pressure
4 Parking brake hydro accumulator 11 Oil from the replenishing pump
M5 Rear axle brake pressure
5 Brake system gear pump 12 Transmission with parking brake
M6 Parking brake pressure
6 Hydraulic tank
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The gear pump 5 is flange-mounted on the engine. Together with the compact
brake valve 1, its job is to charge the hydro accumulators of the brake system.
The hydro accumulators for the service brake are fitted outside on the cab floor.
The hydro accumulator for the parking brake mounted directly on the compact
brake valve.
The service brake is a wet disc brake mounted in the wheel hubs of both axles.
The parking brake is a disc brake attached to the transmission 12.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the brake system

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Hydraulic tank 13 Check valve 24 Transfer gear

2 Return strainer 14 Inverted shuttle valve 25 Parking brake
3 Brake system gear pump 15 Check valve 26 Brake light pressure switch
4 Replenishing pump 16 Parking brake solenoid valve 27 Rear axle disc brakes
5 Solenoid valve block 17 Inching angle sensor 28 Rear axle hydro accumulator
6 Overspeed protection 18 Pressure control piston for 29 Control valve block
st
solenoid valve 1 circuit (housing spreheating)
7 Pilot control solenoid valve 19 Pressure control piston for
Test connections:
8 Check valve 2nd circuit
M3 Accumulator charge pressure
9 Pilot control hydro accumulator 20 Accumulator charge
M4 Front axle brake pressure
10 Compact brake valve assembly pressure switch
11 Accumulator charge valve 21 Front axle disc brakes
M6 Parking brake pressure
12 Pressure balance pilot valve 22 Front axle hydro accumulator
23 Parking brake hydro accumulator
L580 - 459 / from 14171
The service brake is a hydraulic 2-circuit brake system. It acts on the wet
discs in the front and rear axles.
The brake system gear pump 3 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and
pumps it to the compact brake valve 10. The accumulator charge valve 11 in the
compact brake valve fills the hydro accumulators to a specified oil pressure.
When the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed (up to 2/3 of the way down),
only the hydraulic inching function is activated via the inching angle sensor 17.
When the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed (in the last third), oil flows from the
hydro accumulators 22 and 28 via the pressure control pistons 18 and 19 to the
brake pistons in the front and rear axles. This activates the wet disc brakes. At
the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows into the hydraulic tank.
The parking brake 25 is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force. When
the parking brake solenoid valve 16 is energised, oil flows from the parking brake
hydro accumulator 23 to the parking brake and opens the callipers.
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the brake system. The gear pump
draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. The returning oil is
pumped back through the return strainer 3 to the hydraulic tank.
Brake system gear pump

The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and
pumps it through the connection 4 to the compact brake valve.
The cooling system gear pump 3 and the brake system gear pump 2 have a
shared intake port.
See the detailed description in the section on the brake system gear pump.
Compact brake valve with hydro accumulator

The compact brake valve performs the following tasks:
Charging the hydro accumulator
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Inching function when the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed

Braking function when the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed
Activating the parking brake via the parking brake solenoid valve
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
The accumulator charge valve fills the hydro accumulators 2, 3 and 4 to a

specified oil pressure. The accumulator charge pressure switch 5 monitors
the pressure in the hydro accumulators.
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, oil flows from the service brake hydro
accumulators 3 and 4 to the wet disk brake. The contact on the brake light
pressure switch 6 closes and the brake lights light up.
See the detailed description in the section on the compact brake valve.
Service brake
The service brake is a wet disc brake 1 mounted in the front and rear axles.
The oil pressure pushes the brake discs together. The number of brake
discs and the brake pressure determine the braking force.
See the detailed description of the wet disc brake in the section on the axles.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L550, L556, L566, L576 Brake discs in the axle L580

1 Brake piston 3 Wheel hub (Multitrac axle) 4 Differential (Hercules axle)
2 Brake discs
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Parking brake
The parking brake is attached to the output shaft of the transmission 4 and
thus acts on all four wheels.
The parking brake is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force.
When you start the engine and press the parking brake button, the solenoid
valve 2 in the compact brake valve 1 is activated. Oil flows from the hydro
accumulator 3 to the parking brake 5, where it acts on the brake cylinder and
opens the callipers.
When you press the parking brake button again or turn off the engine, the
force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating
the required braking torque on the brake disc.
When the parking brake is closed, the LED in the parking brake button and
the parking brake symbol field in the display light up.
See the detailed description in the section on the parking brake.
The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement
motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.
When a set limit speed is exceeded, the overspeed protection solenoid

valve 3 is activated. Oil flows from the replenishing pump 2 to the rear axle
disc brake 5, causing the machine to slow down.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description in the section on overspeed protection.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service brake
9.1 Service brake

9.1.1 Brake system gear pump
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Scavenging pump arrangement

1 Motor scavenging pump 2 Brake system gear pump
3 Cooling system gear pump
The gear pumps are fitted on the accessory drive of the engine and is driven
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Brake system gear pump components

1 Driver 6 Gears
2 O-ring 7 Housing
3 Flange 8 Housing cover
4 Seals 9 Shaft seal ring
5 Bearing bushings
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service brake
Basic function
The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing.
One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the
other driven by the gear teeth.
The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped
outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.
Oil supply for the brake system
The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 4 via the
internal intake duct of the cooling system gear pump 3. The oil is pumped via
the discharge port to the compact brake valve 1.
Pressure cut-off
The brake system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure
relief valve in the compact brake valve.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service brake
9.1.2 Compact brake valve
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
This compact brake valve is attached to the cab floor. It is activated using
the inch/brake pedal.
Main components of the compact brake valve

1 Actuation pedal 6 Accumulator charge valve
2 Inching angle sensor R1 7 Parking brake solenoid valve
3 Brake pressure adjusting screw 8 Accumulator charge
4 Brake light pressure switch pressure switch
5 Compact brake valve housing 9 Base plate
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service brake
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
Cross section of the compact brake valve

1 Pedal idle position adjusting screw 10 Opening/closing pressure 17 Pressure control spring
2 Base plate adjusting screw 18 Brake pressure
3 Parking brake check valve 11 Inverted shuttle valve adjusting screw
4 Pressure balance check valve 12 Return spring for 2nd brake circuit 19 Seal rings
5 Accumulator pressure test piston 13 Pressure control piston for 20 Pressure control springs
6 Valve insert 2nd brake circuit 21 Spring sleeve
7 Compact brake valve housing 14 Return spring for 1st brake circuit 22 Actuating piston
8 Pilot valve actuating piston 15 Pressure control piston for 1st 23 Actuation pedal
9 Pressure relief valve brake circuit
16 Spring cup
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service brake
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the compact brake valve

1 Parking brake solenoid valve 9 Accumulator charge valve 16 Parking brake connection
2 Inching angle sensor 10 Flow control nozzle 17 Front axle connection
3 Pressure control piston for 11 Gear pump P connection 18 To the overspeed protection
1st circuit 12 To the control valve block solenoid valve
4 Pressure control piston for (housing preheating) 19 Brake light pressure switch
2nd circuit 13 Accumulator charge 20 Rear axle hydro accumulator
5 Inverted shuttle valve pressure switch 21 Hydraulic tank connections
6 Check valve 14 Front axle hydro accumulator M3 Accumulator charge pressure
7 Pressure balance pilot valve 15 Parking brake hydro accumulator test connection
8 Check valve
The compact brake valve is supplied with oil by a gear pump. The integrated
accumulator charge valve 9 and the pilot valve 7 fill the hydro accumulator
with pressure oil.
If the accumulator charge cut-off pressure is reached, the accumulator
charge valve 9 switches the pump flow to circulate to the connection N.
If braking causes the accumulator pressure to fall to the accumulator charge cut-
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
in pressure, the accumulator charge valve 9 switches to accumulator charging.

The brake circuits of the front and rear axles are separated by the inverted
shuttle valve 5.
The parking brake solenoid valve 1 provides pressure oil to the disc brake.
Service brake
When the pedal is depressed in the first two thirds of its range, the hydraulic
inching function is activated. This function is triggered by the angle sensor
on the compact brake valve.
If the pedal is depressed further, the pressure control pistons of the 2nd circuit
control the pressure in the brake pistons in proportion to the pedal force.
At the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows back to the hydraulic tank.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service brake
If one brake circuit fails, the second remains operational due to the mechanical
contact between the two pressure control pistons in the compact brake valve.
The actuation force remains the same.
Parking brake
When you press the parking brake button, the parking brake solenoid valve
1 is opened. The accumulator pressure acts on the cylinders of the disc
brake and opens the brake.
Inching angle sensor

The angle sensor attached to the compact brake valve consists of two
redundant sensors. The angle sensor 1 sends an electrical signal to input
module 1 and the angle sensor 2 sends a signal to the input module 2.
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the current to the control pressure
proportional valve (travel hydraulics pump) is reduced. The variable
displacement pump reduces its flow. This hydrostatically brakes the machine.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service brake
9.1.3 Service brake hydro accumulator
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be
checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Basic function
To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for
the brake system.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service brake
Storing pressure for the service brake
Hydro accumulator arrangement

1 Compact brake valve 5 Accumulator charge
2 Parking brake hydro accumulator pressure switch
3 Front axle hydro accumulator 6 Brake light pressure switch
4 Rear axle hydro accumulator
The service brake hydro accumulators allow the brake to be applied a
certain number of times if the service brake pump fails. Oil flows from the
hydro accumulators through the compact brake valve 1 to the disc brake.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service brake
9.1.4 Brake light pressure switch
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

The brake light pressure switch 1 is mounted on the compact brake valve 3.
Basic function
Brake light switching function

The job of the brake light pressure switch is to switch on the brake lights.
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the pressure on the parking brake
pressure switch rises. When a set level is reached, the contact closes and
the brake lights are switched on.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service brake
9.1.5 Accumulator charge pressure switch
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

The accumulator charge pressure switch 2 is mounted on the compact brake
valve 3.
Basic function
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally closed.
Accumulator charge pressure monitoring function

The job of the accumulator charge pressure switch is to monitor the
accumulator charge pressure.
If the pressure in one of the brake accumulators falls below the level set for
the pressure switch, the contact closes and the accumulator charge
pressure symbol field lights up. In addition, an audible signal sounds.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Parking brake
9.2 Parking brake

Basic function of the parking brake
Components of the parking brake

1 Compact brake valve 4 Transfer gear
2 Parking brake solenoid valve 5 Disc brake
The parking brake is a spring accumulator brake. The parking brake is
opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force.
The parking brake is supplied with oil by the compact brake valve 1. The
accumulator charge valve of the compact brake valve 1 fills the parking
brake hydro accumulator 3 to a specified oil pressure.
The parking brake hydro accumulator 3 provides oil pressure via the
solenoid valve 2 to open the parking brake. The solenoid valve 2 is actuated
using the parking brake button.
When the parking brake is opened, oil flows from the hydro accumulator 3
via the solenoid valve 2 to the disc brake 5.
Function of the parking brake switch

The parking brake can only be released when the engine is running.
When you start the engine and press the parking brake button 2, the parking
brake solenoid valve is activated. The brake pressure then acts via the open
parking brake solenoid valve on the brake cylinder, and opens the parking
brake against the force of the brake callipers. The parking brake symbol field
3 on the display goes out.
When you press the parking brake button 2 again or turn off the engine, the
force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating
the required braking torque on the brake disc. The parking brake symbol
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
field 3 and the LED 1 in the parking brake button light up.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Parking brake
9.2.1 Disc brake
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Disc brake components

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Counter nut 8 Brake disc 15 Brake piston

2 Plug 9 Guide pin 16 Cup springs
3 Adjusting screw 10 Lock nut 17 Housing
4 Anti-twist locking pin 11 Counter nut 18 Brake oil connection
5 Brake callipers 12 Brake pad 19 Rubber centring element
6 Dust seal 13 Adjusting screw 20 Bleeder screw
7 Pressure pin 14 Piston seal
The parking brake is a spring-loaded sliding saddle brake which acts on the
brake disc 8 attached outside on the output shaft of the transmission.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Parking brake
Basic function of the disc brake
Disc brake in open position

The two identical brake pads 5 and the brake calliper 1 slide freely on the
guide pins 4, which are fastened in the transmission housing.
When the brake is applied, it clamps the brake pads 5, creating a braking
torque on the brake disk 3.
The clamping force is generated by the cup springs 9. The piston 8 is
pushed together with the pressure pin 2 and the front brake pad 5 towards
the brake disc 3.
When the front brake pad 5 comes into contact with the brake disc 3, the
reactive force pushes the brake callipers 1 along the guide pin 4 until the
rear brake pad 5 is also pressed against the brake disc 3.
The parking brake is released by tensioning the entire cup spring set 9. Oil in
the pressure chamber 7 pushes the piston 8 all the way back against the
force of the cup springs 9.
Rubber fittings on the guide pin 4 push the entire brake calliper to the right
until the adjusting screw 6 touches the transmission housing. This moves the
rear brake pad 5 away from the brake disc 3.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Parking brake
9.2.2 Parking brake hydro accumulator
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be
checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Basic function
To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for
the brake system.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Parking brake
Storing pressure for the parking brake
Components of the parking brake

1 Compact brake valve 3 Transmission with disc brake
The parking brake is closed by spring force and opened by the brake oil from
the hydro accumulator 2.
When the parking brake button is pressed, brake oil flows from the hydro
accumulator and releases the parking brake. The parking brake can only be
safely released when the parking brake symbol field is not lit.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Parking brake
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
9.3 Overspeed protection

Design
Main components of the overspeed protection

1 Compact brake valve 4 Solenoid valve block
2 Oil from the replenishing pump 5 Rear axle
3 Overspeed protection
solenoid valve
The solenoid valve block 4 is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the overspeed protection system

1 Compact brake valve 4 Replenishing pump 7 Rear axle disc brake
2 Pressure control piston for 5 Solenoid valve block
Test connection:
2nd circuit 6 Overspeed protection
3 Brake light pressure switch solenoid valve
The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement
motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.
When the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit
speed, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 6 is activated. Oil flows from
the replenishing pump 4 to the rear axle disc brake 7, causing the machine
to slow down.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Overspeed service code

If the engine or the variable displacement motors overspeed, the machine
reacts as follows:
The overspeed protection solenoid valve is energised
A service code appears in the display:
E 5030 Overspeed on one of the variable displacement motors
E 5032 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 1
E 5031 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 2
E 600B Overspeed on diesel engine
The warning buzzer sounds for one second.
Additionally, after 3 seconds of overspeed protection being active, the
service code E 5029 appears.
The brake is activated according to the intensity of overspeed. The following

situations may occur:
Situation A: In the event of serious overspeed, for example on a steep
slope, the brake activated constantly for more than 3 seconds. The service
code E 5029 appears with a short warning tone.
Situation B: Once the limit speed is exceeded, the machine is automatically
braked until the speed falls back below the threshold. After a short time, the
limit speed is exceeded again and the brake is activated again. If the brake
is activated for longer than 3 seconds, the service code E 5029 appears
with a short warning tone. This also happens if the brake intervention is
briefly interrupted.
Situation C: The machine is briefly braked. The speed then returns to the
normal range.
Caution: Brake interventions with the service code E 5029 do not occur
during normal operation. This service code is only generated when the
machine is not operated properly.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The service code E 5029 only appears during reckless driving, for example
at full speed down steep slopes. If the service code E 5029 is found several
times in the memory, it may affect the warranty on the machine, especially if
any damage was caused by overspeed.
The service codes are stored in the main electronics A15.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
9.3.1 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the solenoid valve block

1 Pilot control hydro accumulator 3 Overspeed protection
2 Pilot control solenoid valve solenoid valve
4 Solenoid valve block assembly
The solenoid valve block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
Basic function
The solenoid valve block includes the following components in a single housing:
Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve

1 Compact brake valve 4 Solenoid valve block
2 Oil from the replenishing pump 5 Rear axle disc brake
3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
During normal operation, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is not

energised. Oil can flow freely from the compact brake valve 1 through the
overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 to the rear axle disc brake 5.
If the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit speed, the
overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is energised. Oil flows from the
connection 2 (from the replenishing pump) to the rear axle disc brake 5,
causing the machine to slow down.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
10 Electrical system
10.0
Chapter contents
10 Electrical system ............................................................... 10.0-1
10.0.1 Electrical system with circuit diagrams...............................10.0-3
10.1 Electrical components...................................................................10.1-1

10.1.1 Electrical components in the cab........................................10.1-1
10.1.2 Fuse and relay board A4 ....................................................10.1-2
10.1.3 Main electronics (master) A15............................................10.1-6
10.1.4 Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c) ..................................10.1-10
10.1.5 Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c)................................10.1-15
10.1.6 Electrical components in the rear section.........................10.1-20
10.2 Battery installation ........................................................................10.2-1

10.2.1 Batteries .............................................................................10.2-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Electrical system Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Electrical system
10.0.1 Electrical system with circuit diagrams
Design
The operating voltage of the machine is 24 volts. The batteries (2 x 12 V) are
connected in series.
The two batteries are installed in the right ballast weight.
Components of the The table below lists all the components of the electrical system. The entry
electrical system in the step column helps you locate the component in the circuit diagrams.
Abbreviations:
- WH = Wiring harness
- LFD = Liebherr ride control
- SV = Solenoid valve
- PSV = Proportional solenoid valve
- LED = Light-emitting diode
- SH = Service hours
- * Options
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Machine view 1, left
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Machine view 2, right
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Machine view 3, above
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Circuit diagrams
The circuit diagrams are on pages 1 to 75. The following list contains the
pages and their main functions.
Overview of pages for the electrical system:
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW L550 - L580
2
3
The circuit diagrams of the electrical system show the function sequences
for the entire machine, including optional equipment. All components and
connections are marked and shown with the appropriate switching code so
that they are clearly identifiable. The keys also list the designations of
the components.
The circuit diagrams are divided into pages. The pages are also divided into
individual sections.
Click the links in the online documentation to skip to the relevant information.
Component designation - The designations of the components and connectors are always shown with
-XX..:
- -XX = Component designation, e.g.
-P1 = Mechanical service hours indicator (optional)
Location code + Location codes are shown with +XX. The location codes show where the
components are fitted on the machine.
The following location codes are shown:
- +B Ballast weight, general
- +B1 Left ballast weight
- +B2 Rear ballast weight
- +F Travel drive, general
- +F1 Front axle
- +F2 Rear axle
- +F3 Transmission
- +H Rear section
- +H1 Rear section hatch
- +H2 Rear section below cab, right
- +H3 Rear section below cab, left
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
- +H4 Right rear section

- +H5 Left rear section
- +K Cab, general
- +K1 Cab front instruments
- +K2 Cab rear wall
- +K3 Cab roof
- +K4 Cab instruments in side cover, rear right
- +K5 Cab instruments in side cover, rear left
- +K6 Cab floor
- +M Engine
- +V Front section
L566 - 460 / from 14171
- +V1 Front section

- +V2 Lift arm
- +V3 Tilt cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CANBUS3
A A
HEAT/AIRCON
CONTROL
CC01
91/92 MOTORCONTROLLHECU
106
B B
CAN 93 CAN 97
AIRCONDITIONINGKEYPAD MAINKEYPAD 112 DISPLAYUNIT SENSORS
PROJ: 8920980_003
(SWITCH,
SENSOR)
2xCFCard CANBUS1
MACHINE
45 INPUTMODULE1
CANBUS2
C C
4x CANBUS3 ACTUATORS
Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
CAN (MAGNETICS,
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
1x SOLENOIDVALVES)
LAN CANBUS4
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
4XRS232
OPTIONS(e.g.
WEIGHING EQUIPMENT 22 OUTPUTMODULE1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
CENTRALGREASING, Ethernet/RS232/CAN
D etc.) D
forbidden.
FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
ELECTRIC LOAD
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
(LIGHTING,
WINDSCREENWIPER,
REAR
E E
REARWINDOWHEATER 46 INPUTMODULE2 21 OUTPUTMODULE2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
ELECTRICKEYPAD
FUSEANDRELAY BOARD SENSORS MACHINE ACTUATORS
F F
Ersteller DonningerJ. Anlage

0 Datum 26.03.200716:16 OVERVIEWDIAGRAM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
SPL Ausgabe lbhhae0 1
Zustand nderung Datum Name Datum 27.03.2007 09:42
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ELECTRICALSYSTEMELECTRONICSGG6TIER3WHEELLOADER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TABLEOFCONTENTS SHEET TABLEOFCONTENTS SHEET

CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER 61 TRAVELDIRECTIONSHYDRAULICPUMPBUZZERPRESSUREHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP 54
A A
STARTER 105 FUNCTIONWORKINGBASKET 59
DISPLAYUNITCANBUS3 35 FUNCTIOND+PROFILELIGHTPARKINGLIGHT 20
DISPLAYUNITCANBUS3 36 FOOTFLAPVMC3MIDDLEFLAPVMC4 66
WORKINGPROJECTORREARREAR 31 FANMOTORANDSENSORICEUPPROTECTION 64
WORKINGPROJECTORREARCABIN 32 JOYSTICKSTEERING 72
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTCABINXENONWORKINGPROJECTOR 30 JOYSTICKSTEERING 74
B BMKINDEX 5 AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR 62 B
BMKINDEX 6 AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR 63
PROJ: 8920980_003
BMKINDEX 7 HEADFLAPVMC5TEMPERATURESENSORAUTOMATICAIRCONDITIONING 67
BMKINDEX 8 FUELTEMPERATURESENSORACTIVEOSCILLATING 107
BMKINDEX 9 CHARGEAIRCOOLEROILPRESSURESWITCH 106
BMKINDEX 10 COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTION 26
BMKINDEX 11 KEYHANDOUTCONTAININGTYPECOUNTINGNUMBERSYSTEMANDPLACE 4
C
BMKINDEX 12 STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCHSTOPLIGHTLOWBEAMHIGHBEAM 25 C
BMKINDEX 13 LHCONTROLLEVERSWITCHCOMFORTCONTROL3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT 51
BMKINDEX 14 GENERATOR 105
BMKINDEX 15 VENTILATORCONDENSERINTEGRATED 68
BMKINDEX 16 VENTILATORCONDENSERRETROFITKIT 69
BMKINDEX 17 MOTORCONTROLAUTOMATICRUNOUT 47
BMKINDEX 18 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATIONRIDECONTROL 23
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BRAKEACCUMULATOR 21 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATIONRIDECONTROL 24
D D
BRAKEACCUMULATOR 22 OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARMANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF 45
CANBUS1 37 OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARMANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF 46
forbidden.
CANBUS2 38 PARKINGBRAKESPEEDSENSORCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD 78
DIAGNOSTICPLUGMOTORCONTROLANDAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM 70 PHASESENSOR 108
DIESELPREHEATINGCOLDWEATHERKIT40 82 REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORGROENEVELD 75
ANGLESENSORINCH/GASPEDAL 52 REARAREAMONITORINGVIAMONITORANDCAMERA 76
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 108 BACKUPALARMGEROTORSTEERINGDIESELPREHEATING 55
E E
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 108 WARNINGBEACONMIRRORANDREARWINDOWHEATER 33
INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER13 109 FLOATPOSITIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGLIFTKICKOUT 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER46 110 WINDSCREENWASHERFRONTANDREARHOOTER 28

ELECTRONICIMMOBILISER 79 WINDSCREENWASHERFRONTANDREARHOOTER 29
ELECTRICALDIAGRAMDIESELENGINE4AND6CYLINDER 101 STANDBYAM4CYLINDERENGINE 111
EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT 60 STANDBYAM6CYLINDERENGINE 102
F
TRAVELRANGESSWIVELANGLEHYDROMOTORSOVERSPEEDPROTECTION 53 TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATUREVENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL 21 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 TABLEOFCONTENTS Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 2
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TABLEOFCONTENTS SHEET TABLEOFCONTENTS SHEET

TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATUREVENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL 22 WATERDETECTOR 106
A A
GENERALOUTLAYMASTER 85 WATERVALVEVMC1RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAPVMC2 65
GENERALOUTLAYELECTRICKEYPAD 94 KEYOFSYMBOLSDINEN613461DINEN613462DINEN60617 114
GENERALOUTLAYMAINKEYPAD 95 CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMLIEBHERR 77
GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM 96 CIGARETTELIGHTERELECTRICALSOCKET12VRADIOLOUDSPEAKER 34
GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMSYSTEMSIDE 97 INGITIONLOCKBATTERIESGENERATORMAINFUSES 19
GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE1 86 ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT12QUICKCHANGEDEVICE 58
B GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE2 87 ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT123AND4QUICKCHANGEDEVICE 57 B
GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE3 88 AUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010 80
PROJ: 8920980_003
GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE4 89 AUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90 81
GENERALOUTLAYAIRCONDITIONINGKEYPADFLAPCONTROL 99
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL4CYLINDER 113
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL6CYLINDER 104
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE 93
C
GENERALOUTLAYOPTIONKEYPAD 98 C
GENERALOUTLAYOUTPUTMODULE1 90
GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS 103
GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS 112
GENERALOUTLAYPROTECTIVEFOIL 100
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OVERVIEWDIAGRAMELECTRICALSYSTEMELECTRONICSGG6TIER3WHEELLOADER 1
D D
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 83
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 84
forbidden.
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1AND2 41
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING 71
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING 73
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE4EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT 50
SUPPLYMASTERSUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG 40
E E
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1 42
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1AND2 43
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN 49
SUPPLYKEYPADS 39
F
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS 27 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 TABLEOFCONTENTS Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 3
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
TYPE/COUNTINGNUMBER,SYSTEM,LOCATIONCODE A
TYPE/COUNTINGNUMBER
CIRCUITSTWISTED
B
M1STARTERMOTOROPERATINGSUPPLYCODE B
=K
PROJ: 8920980_003
=KSYSTEM(CABIN)
=SYSTEM +K6 +K6LOCATIONCODE(CABFLOOR)
52
X1.S1 X1.SPLUGNAMEANDPINCONTACT
X1.B1 X1.BPLUGNAMEANDSOCKETCONTACT
52
=BBALLAST +K6
52PINAMPLUG
=FTRAVELDRIVE =K
=HHINDCARRIAGE
=KCABIN
C =MENGINE CABLEGREENOPTION C
=VFRONTSECTION
/7.E4 CROSSREFERENCEUPSHEET7E4
+LOCATIONCODE OPENLINEEND
+BBALLAST LETZTEMODIFICATION
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+B1BALLASTLEFT +KCABIN
D +B2BALLASTRIGHT +K1CABINFITTINGS D
+K2CABINREARPANEL
+FTRAVELDRIVE +K2.RHCABINREARPANELRELAYRACK
forbidden.
+F1FRONTAXLE +K3CABROOF
+F2REARAXLE +K4CABINFITTINGSSIDECOVERRIGHTREAR
+F3TRANSMISSION +K5CABINFITTINGSSIDECOVERLEFTREAR
+K6CABFLOOR
+HHINDCARRIAGE
E +H1HINDCARRIAGEREARHATCH +MENGINE E
+H2HINDCARRIAGEUNTERCABINRIGHT
+H3HINDCARRIAGEUNTERCABINLEFT +VFRONTSECTION
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+H4HINDCARRIAGERIGHT +V1FRONTSECTION
+H5HINDCARRIAGELEFT +V2LIFTARM
+V3TILTCYLINDER
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 KEYHANDOUTCONTAINING Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 4
WerkBischofshofenGmbH TYPECOUNTINGNUMBERSYSTEMANDPLACE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BMK FUNCTION SHEET SYSTEM PLACE BMK FUNCTION SHEET SYSTEM PLACE
A3 RADIO /34.D7 =K +K3 A13.X2 PLUGDISPLAYUNITLCD /35.A3 =K +K1

A A
A3.X1 PLUGRADIO /34.D7 =K +K3 A13a.X DISPLAYUNIT /35.D3 =K +K1
A3.X2 PLUGRADIO /34.D7 =K +K3 A15 MAINELECTRONICSMASTER /85.B1 =K +K2
A4.46.4* PLUGRELAYBOARD /30.D5 =K +K2 A15.CAN.X PLUGMASTER8POLIG /35.B7 =K +K2
A4.46.8* PLUGRELAYBOARD /30.D8 =K +K2 A15.COM4.X PLUGMASTERRSUBD /40.B6 =K +K2
A4.Kl.15.a* Kl.15INPUTMODULE4 /50.A1 =K +K2 A15.X PLUGMASTER6POLIG /40.E1 =K +K2
A4.X40 PLUGRELAYBOARD /40.A4 =K +K2 A16a INPUTMODULE1 /86.B1 =H +H3
B A4.X40.3a* CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD /47.A4 =K +K2 A16a.X1 PLUGINPUTMODULE1 /51.C1 =H +H3 B

A4.X41 PLUGRELAYBOARD /80.E2 =K +K2 A16a.X1.44* CANCONNECTION.INPUTMODULE1 /37.E6 =H +H3
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X42 PLUGRELAYBOARD /40.C4 =K +K2 A16b INPUTMODULE2 /87.B1 =K +K2
A4.X43 PLUGRELAYBOARD /43.B2 =K +K2 A16b.X1 PLUGINPUTMODULE2 /27.A8 =K +K2
A4.X44 PLUGRELAYBOARD /25.D3 =K +K2 A16b.X1.10a* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.D8 =K +K2
A4.X44a:4* CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD /79.F8 =K +K2 A16b.X1.9a* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.D7 =K +K2
A4.X45 PLUGRELAYBOARD /35.E2 =K +K2 A16b.X2.9+10b* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.D7 =K +K2
A4.X46 PLUGRELAYBOARD /30.D4 =K +K2 A16c INPUTMODULE3 /88.B1 =H +H3

C C
A4.X47 PLUGRELAYBOARD /33.B7 =K +K2 A16c.X1 PLUGINPUTMODULE3 /71.E1 =H +H3
A4.X48 PLUGRELAYBOARD /49.C8 =K +K A16d INPUTMODULE4 /89.B1 =H +H3

A4.X48.* PLUGRELAYBOARD /69.B7 =K +K2 A16d.X1 PLUGINPUTMODULE4 /60.B1 =H +H3

A4.X49 PLUGRELAYBOARD /25.B7 =K +K2 A17.aX1a* PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.B2 =H +H3
A4.X50 PLUGRELAYBOARD /27.B5 =K +K2 A17.X2* PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.D8 =H +H
A4.X50.12a* CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD /33.B3 =K +K2 A17a OUTPUTMODULE1 /90.B1 =H +H3

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4.X51 PLUGRELAYBOARD /20.B4 =K +K2 A17a.X1 PLUGOUTPUTMODULE1 /42.E7 =H +H3

D D
A4.X52 PLUGRELAYBOARD /80.C3 =K +K2 A17a.X1.43.57* PLUGCANCONNECTIONINPUTMODULE1 /37.B6 =H +H3
A4.X53 PLUGRELAYBOARD /20.D3 =K +K2 A17a.X1.48a* OPTIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH

/56.E6 =H +H3
forbidden.
A4.X55 PLUGRELAYBOARD /19.C8 =K +K2 A17a.X1.6a* OPTIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH /56.B6 =H +H3
A4.X56 PLUGRELAYBOARD /19.B2 =K +K2 A17b OUTPUTMODULE2 /91.B1 =H +H3
A4.X56a* CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD /69.B2 =K +K2 A17b..X1.43.57* PLUGCANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2 /38.C1 =K +K

A4.X56a:4* CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD /79.B4 =K +K2 A17b.X1 PLUGOUTPUTMODULE2 /43.C1 =H +H3
A4.X57 PLUGRELAYBOARD /19.B3 =K +K2 A17b.X1.44* CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2 /38.F1 =K +K

E E
A4.X58 PLUGRELAYBOARD /27.B8 =K +K2 A17b.X1.58* CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2 /38.F2 =K +K
A9* IMMOBILISER /79.D4 =K +K2 A17b.X143a* CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2 /38.D7 =H +H3

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A9.X* PLUGIMMOBILISER /79.D4 =K +K2 A17c OUTPUTMODULE3 /92.B1 =H +H3
A11 MAINKEYPAD /95.C3 =K +K4 A17c.X1 PLUGOUTPUTMODULE3 /48.E2 =H +H3
A11.X1 PLUGMAINKEYPAD /35.B4 =K +K4 A18 ELECTRICKEYPAD /94.B2 =K +K4
A13 DISPLAYUNITLCD /35.B1 =K +K1 A18.X1 PLUGELECTRICKEYPAD /27.A2 =K +K4
A13.X1 PLUGDISPLAYUNITLCD /35.B1 =K +K1 A18.X1.1a* AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN /49.D6 =K +K4

F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 BMKINDEX Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 5
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A18.X1.1b* AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN /49.D6 =K +K4 B10 HOOTER /28.C2 =H +H

A A
A18.X2 PLUGELECTRIESKEYBOARD /25.C2 =K +K4 B10.X1 PLUGHOOTER /28.C2 =H +H
A19 OPTIONKEYPAD /98.B3 =K +K4 B10.X2 PLUGHOOTER /28.C2 =H +H
A19.X1 PLUGOPTIONKEYPAD /35.E7 =K +K4 B10a* PLUGHOOTEROPTION /28.C2 =H +H
A19.X2 PLUGCANBUS3 /35.F7 =K +K4 B10a.X2* PLUGHOOTEROPTION /28.C1 =H +H
A21 AIRCONELECTRONICSCC0129POLIG /96.A2 =K +K4 B11l LOUDSPEAKERLEFT /34.E7 =K +K3
A21.X1 PLUGAIRCONELECTRONICSCC01 /62.B3 =K +K4 B11l.X1 PLUGLOUDSPEAKERLEFT /34.E7 =K +K3
B A21.XB DIAGNOSTICPLUGAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS /70.E6 =K +K4 B11l.X2 PLUGLOUDSPEAKERLEFT /34.F7 =K +K3 B

A21a AIRCONELECTRONICSCC0142POLIG /97.B1 =K +K4 B11r LOUDSPEAKERRIGHT /34.E8 =K +K3
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2 PLUGAIRCONELECTRONICSCC01 /64.B1 =K +K4 B11r.X1 PLUGLOUDSPEAKERRIGHT /34.E8 =K +K3
A22 KEYPADHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM /99.B2 =K +K4 B11r.X2 PLUGLOUDSPEAKERRIGHT /34.F8 =K +K3
A22.X1 PLUGKEYBOARDHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM /39.E6 =K +K4 B12 PRESSURESWITCHBRAKELIGHT /25.E1 =H +H3
A204 CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.C5 =K +K4 B12.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /25.E1 =H +H3
A204.X* PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.C4 =K +K4 B13 COOLINGWATERLEVEL /21.C4 =H +H
A205* CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.D3 =H +H3 B13.X PLUGCOOLINGWATERLEVEL /21.C4 =H +H

C C
A205.X* PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.D3 =H +H3 B14 TRANSMISSIONTEMPERATURE /21.C5 =F +F3
A700C.6 MOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE6CYLINDER /104.A1 =M +M B14.X PLUGTRANSMISSIONTEMPERATURE /21.C5 =F +F3

A700C.6.X1 PLUGENGINESIDE /105.E2 =M +M B15 INDUCTIVESWITCHBUCKETRETURNTODIG /56.C2 =V +V3

A700C4 MOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE4CYLINDER /113.A1 =M +M B15.X PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH /56.C2 =V +V3
A700D MOTORCONTROLVEHICLESIDE /93.B1 =M +M B16 BACKUPALARM /45.C5 =H +H5
A700D.X2 PLUGVEHICLESIDE /47.E1 =M +M B16.X PLUGBACKUPALARM /45.D5 =H +H5

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A.X1* PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDBW2010 /80.E6 =B +B2 B16a.X1* PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORCANBESWITCHEDOFF /45.D5 =H +H5

D D
B1 SPEEDSENSORTRANSMISSION /78.C6 =F +F3 B16b.X* PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORCANBESWITCHEDOFF /45.C7 =H +H5
B1.X PLUGSPEEDSENSOR /78.C6 =F +F3 B16c.X1* PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM /45.C5 =H +H1

forbidden.
B2 SPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR1 /78.C7 =F +F3 B17 INDUCTIVESWITCHLIFTKICKOUT /56.C4 =V +V
B2.X PLUGSPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR1 /78.C7 =F +F3 B17.B PLUGLIFTKICKOUT /56.B4 =V +V
B2a SPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR2 /78.C8 =F +F3 B17.X PLUGLIFTKICKOUT /56.B4 =V +V

B2a.X PLUGSPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR2 /78.C8 =F +F3 B17.X_1 PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH /56.C4 =V +V
B3 PRESSURESWITCHEMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP /23.C5 =H +H5 B19 PRESSURESWITCHBRAKEACCUMULATOR /21.C3 =K +K6

E E
B3.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /23.C5 =H +H5 B19.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /21.C3 =K +K6
B3a PRESSURESWITCHCHECKEMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP /23.C4 =H +H4 B25 TANKPIPESENSOR /21.C1 =H +H2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B3a.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /23.C4 =H +H4 B25.X PLUGTANKPIPESENSOR /21.C1 =H +H2
B4 AIRFILTERCONTAMINATION /23.C6 =H +H B26 TEMPERATURESENSORICEUPPROTECTION /64.D5 =K +K4
B4.X_1 PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /23.C6 =H +H B26a TEMPERATURESENSORICEUPPROTECTION /64.D7 =K +K4
B8 HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURESENSOR /21.C6 =H +H1 B27 PRESSURESWITCHAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM /62.C4 =H +H
B8.X PLUGHYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURESENSOR /21.C6 =H +H1 B27.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /62.C4 =H +H

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 6
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B27.X.2* PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /69.D8 =H +H B711 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 /108.B2 =M +M

A A
B28 PRESSURESWITCHRIDECONTROL /23.C6 =K +K B711.X PLUGENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 /108.B2 =M +M
B28.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /23.C6 =K +K B712 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 /108.B4 =M +M
B32 PRESSURESWITCHFLOATPOSITION /56.C1 =K +K4 B712.X PLUGENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 /108.B5 =M +M
B32.X PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /56.C1 =K +K4 B713 PHASESENSOR /108.B7 =M +M
B39 AIRCONAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR /62.D5 =K +K6 B713.X PLUGPHASESENSOR /108.B7 =M +M
B39.X PLUGAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR /62.D6 =K +K6 B.X6* PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010 /80.D5 =B +B2
B B40 INTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR /67.E6 =K +K4 C.X1* PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDBW2010 /80.E6 =B +B2 B

B42 SUNSENSORAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM /62.D7 =K +K1 E1 REARLAMPLEFT /25.E2 =B +B1
PROJ: 8920980_003
B42.X PLUGSUNSENSORAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM /62.D7 =K +K1 E2 INDOORLIGHTING /19.E7 =K +K3
B43 INDUCTIVESWITCHDISTRIBUTORLH /77.C7 =H +H5 E2.X1 PLUGINDOORLIGHTING /19.E7 =K +K3
B44 INDUCTIVESWITCHLEVELLH /77.C4 =H +H5 E2.X2 PLUGINDOORLIGHTING /19.E7 =K +K3
B45 PRESSURESENSORHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP /54.C7 =H +H4 E2.X3 PLUGINDOORLIGHTING /19.E7 =K +K3
B45.X PLUGPRESSURESENSORHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP /54.C7 =H +H4 E3 DRIVINGHEADLIGHTLEFT /25.E4 =V +V1
B200* INDUCTIVESWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING /72.C4 =K +K4 E3.X PLUGDRIVINGHEADLIGHTLEFT /25.E4 =V +V1

C C
B200.X* PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH /72.C4 =K +K4 E3.Xa* PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT /26.E3 =V +V
B201* PRESSURESWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING /72.C2 =H +H3 E3.Xb* PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT /26.F3 =V +V

B201.X* PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /72.C2 =H +H3 E4 DRIVINGHEADLIGHTRIGHT /25.E5 =V +V1

B202* SIGNALTRANSMITTERJOYSTICKSTEERING /71.C6 =K +K4 E4.X PLUGDRIVINGHEADLIGHTRIGHT /25.E5 =V +V1
B202.X* PLUGSIGNALTRANSMITTERJOYSTICKSTEERING /71.C6 =K +K4 E4.Xa* PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT /26.E6 =V +V
B203* PRESSURESWITCHCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM /78.D5 =V +V1 E4.Xb* PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT /26.F6 =V +V

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B203.X* PLUGPRESSURESWITCH /78.E5 =V +V1 E5 REARLIGHTRIGHT /25.E7 =B +B2

D D
B213* INDUCTIVESWITCHCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.C7 =V +V2 E6 REARLIGHTLEFT24V5W /25.E2 =B +B1
B213.X* PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH /61.C7 =V +V2 E7 REARLIGHTRIGHT24V5W /25.E6 =B +B2

forbidden.
B701 OILPRESSURE /106.B5 =M +M E8 CONTEURLIGHTLEFT24V4W /25.E3 =K +K3
B701.X PLUGOILPRESSURE /106.B5 =M +M E9 CONTEURLIGHTRIGHT24V4W /25.E6 =K +K3
B703 CHARGEAIRPRESSURE /106.B2 =M +M E10 WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT24V70W /30.E4 =K +K3

B703.X PLUGCHARGEAIRPRESSURE /106.B2 =M +M E10.X PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT /30.E4 =K +K3
B707 PLUGCHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE /107.C7 =M +M E10a WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT24V70W /30.E5 =K +K3

E E
B707.X PLUGCHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE /107.C7 =M +M E10a..X PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT /30.E5 =K +K3
B708 COOLANTTEMPERATURE /107.C5 =M +M E10b* XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR /30.E5 =K +K3

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B708.X PLUGCOOLANTTEMPERATURE /107.C5 =M +M E10b.X* PLUGXENON /30.E5 =K +K3
B709 FUELTEMPERATURE /107.C3 =M +M E11 WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT /30.E7 =K +K3
B709.X PLUGFUELTEMPERATURE /107.C3 =M +M E11.X PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT /30.E7 =K +K3
B710 WATERDETECTOR /106.C7 =M +M E11a WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT /30.E7 =K +K3
B710.X PLUGWATERDETECTOR /106.C7 =M +M E11a.X PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT /30.E7 =K +K3

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 7
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E11b* XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR /30.E8 =K +K3 F02* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.C7 =H +H

A A
E11b.X* PLUGXENON /30.E8 =K +K3 F03 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP /19.D4 =H +H5
E12* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT /32.E3 =K +K3 F03** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.C6 =H +H5.
E12.b* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT /32.E4 =K +K3 F03* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.C6 =H +H5
E12.b.X* PLUGE12b /32.D4 =K +K3 F07 Kl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS /19.D5 =H +H5
E12.X* PLUGE12 /32.E3 =K +K3 F07* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.D7 =H +H5
E12a* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT /32.E4 =K +K3 F07** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.D7 =H +H5.
B E12a.X* PLUGE12a /32.D4 =K +K3 F07*.X1* OPTIONBATTERYKS40 /83.D7 =H +H5. B

E13* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT /32.E6 =K +K3 F07*.X1 VERSIONBATTERYKSL586 /84.D7 =H +H5
PROJ: 8920980_003
E13.b* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT /32.E7 =K +K3 F07.X1 PLUGKl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS /19.D5 =H +H5
E13.b.X* PLUGE13b /32.D7 =K +K3 F07.X2 PLUGKl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS /19.E5 =H +H5
E13.X* PLUGE13 /32.D6 =K +K3 F07B HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSKl.15 /27.C1 =K +K2
E13a* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT /32.E7 =K +K3 F10 DISPLAYUNIT /35.D2 =K +K2
E13a.X* PLUGE13a /32.D7 =K +K3 F11 PRESSURESWITCHB28B32 /56.E1 =K +K2
E14l LICENCEPLATELIGHTLEFT24V10W /25.D8 =H +H1 F12* CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.B3 =K +K2

C C
E14r LICENCEPLATELIGHTRIGHT24V10W /25.D8 =H +H1 F13 CONDENSERFAN /68.B2 =K +K2
E16 WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT /31.E4 =H +H1 F14* DIESELPREHEATING /55.A8 =K +K2

E16.X PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT /31.E4 =H +H1 F15 LHCONTROLLEVER /51.A5 =K +K2

E17 WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT /31.E7 =H +H1 F18 WINDSCREENWIPERREAR /28.C8 =K +K2
E17.X PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT /31.E7 =H +H1 F19 Kl.15AIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS /62.B2 =K +K2
E200 RESERVELIGHTING /45.D8 =K +K4 F19A Kl.30AIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS /62.B1 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
E200.X PLUGRESERVELIGHTING /45.D8 =K +K4 F20 WINDSCREENWASHER,HOOTER /28.C3 =K +K2

D D
F2 HIGHBEAMLEFT /25.B5 =K +K2 F21 LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT /25.B3 =K +K2
F3 HIGHBEAMHIGHBEAM /25.B6 =K +K2 F22 STOPLIGHTLIGHTING /45.A8 =K +K2

forbidden.
F4 DRIVINGLIGHTLEFT /25.B3 =K +K2 F23* REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORPARTICLEFILTER /75.A3 =K +K2
F5 DRIVINGLIGHTRIGHT /25.B4 =K +K2 F24 IGNITIONONMOTORCONTROL /47.B4 =K +K2
F6 PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTLEFT /20.C6 =K +K2 F25 WARNINGBEACON /33.C2 =K +K2

F7 PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTRIGHT /20.C6 =K +K2 F26 DIAGNOSTICPLUGIMMOBILISER /40.C6 =K +K2
F8 DRIVER'SSEATRADIOKl.58 /19.B8 =K +K2 F27 PROFILELIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEURLIGHT /20.C8 =K +K2

E E
F8A INDOORLIGHTINGAUXILIARYHEATER /19.B7 =K +K2 F29 IGNITIONSTARTERSWITCHBYPASS /19.B3 =K +K2
F9 LHCONTROLLEVEROPTIONS /51.A6 =K +K2 F30 VOLTAGECONVERTER(RADIO) /34.B2 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F01 MAINFUSES /19.D2 =H +H5 F31A WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT /30.B3 =K +K2
F01** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.C3 =H +H5. F31B WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT /30.B5 =K +K2
F01* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.C3 =H +H5 F32A WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT /31.B2 =K +K2
F02 HEATINGFLANGE /19.D4 =H +H F32B WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT /31.B5 =K +K2
F02** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.C7 =H +H. F33A WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT /32.B2 =K +K2

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 8
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F33B WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT /32.B4 =K +K2 F010.X1 PLUGACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATINGFLANGE /19.C5 =H +H5

A A
F34* REFUELLINGPUMP /55.A6 =K +K2 F010.X2 PLUGACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATERFLANGE /19.D5 =H +H5
F35 MASTER /40.B4 =K +K2 F208* DIESELPREHEATING40 /82.C4 =K +K2
F36 MOTORCONTROL /47.B3 =K +K2 F209* INPUTMODULE4LOGIC /50.B1 =K +K2
F38 MOTORCONTROLLOGIC /47.B5 =K +K2 F210* Kl:15INPUTMODULE4 /50.B3 =K +K2
F39* PRESELECTIONDIALAUXILIARYHEATER /81.A5 =K +K2 F213* CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.C2 =K +K2
F40* AUXILIARYHEATER /81.A8 =K +K2 F216* AUTOMATICRUNOUT /47.B8 =K +K2
B F42* AUXILIARYHEATERNOZZLESTICKPREHEATER /80.D2 =K +K2 G1 BATTERY /19.E2 =B +B B

F43 MODULESLOGIC /41.B2 =K +K2 G1* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.D3 =B +B1
PROJ: 8920980_003
F44 INPUTMODULE1 /41.B7 =K +K2 G1** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.D3 =B +B1.
F45 INPUTMODULE2 /41.B3 =K +K2 G2 BATTERY /19.E3 =B +B1
F46* INPUTMODULE3 /71.A3 =K +K2 G2* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.D4 =B +B1
F47 OUTPUTMODULE1BK1 /42.B4 =K +K2 G2** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.D4 =B +B1.
F48 OUTPUTMODULE1BK1 /42.B7 =K +K2 G3 ALTERNATOR /19.E4 =M +M
F49* OUTPUTMODULE1 /55.E2 =K +K2 G3* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.E6 =M +M

C C
F50* WORKINGBASKET /59.B1 =K +K2 G3** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.E6 =M +M.
F51 OUTPUTMODULE2BK4 /43.A6 =K +K2 G700* GENERATOROPTION /105.B4 =M +M

F52 OUTPUTMODULE2BK3 /43.A7 =K +K2 G700 GENERATOR /105.B3 =M +M

F53 OUTPUTMODULE1DO3 /77.B2 =K +K2 H15 BLINKERLEFT24V21WORANGE /25.E4 =V +V1
F54 MASTERLOGIC /40.B5 =K +K2 H16 BLINKERRIGHT24V21W /25.E5 =V +V1
F55 OUTPUTMODULE2BK1 /44.A4 =K +K2 H17 BLINKERBACKLEFT24V21W /25.E2 =B +B1

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F56 OUTPUTMODULE2BK2 /44.A7 =K +K2 H18 BLINKERRIGHTREAR24V21W /25.E7 =B +B2

D D
F59 OUTPUTMODULE1BK4 /43.A2 =K +K2 H20 BRAKELIGHTLEFT24V21W /25.E2 =B +B1
F60 OUTPUTMODULE1BK3 /43.A3 =K +K2 H21 STOPLIGHTRIGHT24V21W /25.E7 =B +B2

forbidden.
F61 OUTPUTMODULE2DO3 /45.A1 =K +K2 H22 WARNINGBEACON /33.E3 =K +K3
F62 OUTPUTMODULE2DO4 /45.A2 =K +K2 H22.X PLUGWARNINGBEACON /33.E3 =K +K3
F63* OUTPUTMODULE3BK1 /48.A4 =K +K2 H22a OPTIONBACKUPALARM /45.C3 =H +H1

F64* OUTPUTMODULE3BK2 /48.A6 =K +K2 H22a.X1* PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM /45.C3 =H +H1
F65* OUTPUTMODULE3BK3 /49.A1 =K +K2 H22a.X2* PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM /45.D3 =H +H1

E E
F66* OUTPUTMODULE3BK4 /49.A3 =K +K2 H40 BUZZER /54.C8 =K +K2
F71 KEYPADS /39.B2 =K +K2 H40.X1 PLUGBUZZER /54.C8 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F73* REARAREAMONITORING /76.A5 =K +K2 H40.X2 PLUGBUZZER /54.C8 =K +K2
F74 MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER /33.B6 =K +K2 H50 PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTLEFTFRONT24V4W /25.E4 =V +V1
F75 RADIOKl.58ELECTRICALSOCKET12V /34.B5 =K +K2 H51 PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHT24V4W /25.E5 =V +V1
F76 RADIO /34.B5 =K +K2 H52 REVERSINGLAMPLEFT /25.E3 =B +B1
F010 FEEDBACKHEATINGFLANGE /19.C5 =H +H5 H53 REVERSINGLAMPRIGHT24V21W /25.E6 =B +B2

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 9
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H54 LOWBEAM24V70WH7 /25.E4 =V +V1 K33B WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT /32.B6 =K +K2

A A
H55 LOWBEAM24V70WH7 /25.E5 =V +V1 K208* WORKINGBASKET /59.B6 =K +K2.
H56 HIGHBEAM24V70WH3 /25.E4 =V +V1 K213* CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.C6 =K +K2
H57 HIGHBEAM24V70WH3 /25.E5 =V +V1 K216* AUTOMATICRUNOUT /47.D8 =K +K2
H58* REVERSEWARNINGLIGHTREDFLASHING /55.C3 =B +B1 K227* DIESELPREHEATING40 /82.C5 =K +K2
H59* REVERSEWARNINGLIGHTREDFLASHING /55.C4 =B +B1 K228* DIESELPREHEATING40 /82.C6 =K +K2
K1 FLASHERUNIT /27.C8 =K +K2 K240 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS /27.A4 =K +K2
B K2 PROFILELIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEURLIGHT /20.C7 =K +K2 K243* AUXILIARYHEATERNOZZLESTICKPREHEATER /80.D3 =K +K2 B

K3 LOWBEAM /25.B5 =K +K2 K244 CONDENSERFAN /68.B4 =K +K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
K3A HIGHBEAM /25.B7 =K +K2 K245 CONDENSERFAN /69.B7 =K +K
K5 SIMULATIOND+ /20.C4 =K +K2 K245 CONDENSERFAN /68.B7 =K +K2
K5a INTERVALWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT /28.B4 =K +K1 K246* AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN /49.D7 =K +K2
K5a.X PLUGINTERVALWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT /28.C5 =K +K1 K248* CONDENSERFAN /69.B4 =K +K2.
K8 WINDSCREENWIPERREAR /28.C7 =K +K2 Kl.15* Kl.15CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.B2 =K +K2
K9 WARNINGBEACON /33.C3 =K +K2 Kl.15.X CONNECTIONKl.15A4 /19.B2 =K +K2

C C
K01 IGNITIONSTARTERSWITCHBYPASS /19.C2 =K +K2 Kl.30.X CONNECTIONKl.30A4 /19.D2 =K +K2
K04 HEATINGFLANGE /19.D6 =H +H5 Kl.30.Xa* Kl.30DIESELPREHEATING40 /82.B3 =K +K2

K04** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.B7 =H +H5. Kl.30a* Kl.30AUTOMATICRUNOUT /47.A8 =K +K2

K04* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.B7 =H +H5 L2 LEDF2 /25.C6 =K +K2
K10 MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER /33.B7 =K +K2 L3 LEDF3 /25.C6 =K +K2
K11 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP /23.C2 =H +H4 L4 LEDF4 /25.C4 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
K11* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.B6 =H +H4 L5 LEDF5 /25.C4 =K +K2

D D
K11** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.B6 =H +H4. L6 LEDF6 /20.C6 =K +K2
K11*.X3* OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.B6 =H +H4. L7 LEDF7 /20.C7 =K +K2

forbidden.
K11*.X4* OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.B6 =H +H4. L8 LEDF8 /19.B8 =K +K2
K12 RADIOELECTRICALSOCKET12V /34.B4 =K +K2 L8A LEDF8A /19.B7 =K +K2
K22 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTKl.15 /27.C2 =K +K2 L9 LEDF9 /51.B6 =K +K2

K22a HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSMG /27.C3 =K +K2 L07B LEDF07B /27.D1 =K +K2
K22b HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSMG /27.C4 =K +K2 L10 LEDF10 /35.E2 =K +K2

E E
K25* HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA /27.C5 =K +K2 L11 LEDF11 /56.E1 =K +K2
K26* HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA /27.C7 =K +K2 L12* LEDF12 /78.B3 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
K31A WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT /30.B4 =K +K2 L13 LEDF13 /68.B3 =K +K2
K31B WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT /30.B7 =K +K2 L14* LEDF14 /55.B8 =K +K2
K32A WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT /31.B4 =K +K2 L15 LEDF15 /51.B5 =K +K2
K32B WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT /31.B7 =K +K2 L18 LEDF18 /28.C8 =K +K2
K33A WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT /32.B3 =K +K2 L19 LEDF19 /62.B2 =K +K2

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 10
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L19A LEDF19A /62.B1 =K +K2 L55 LEDF55 /44.B5 =K +K2

A A
L20 LEDF20 /28.C3 =K +K2 L56 LEDF56 /44.B7 =K +K2
L21 LEDF21 /25.C3 =K +K2 L59 LEDF59 /43.B2 =K +K2
L22 LEDF22 /45.B8 =K +K2 L60 LEDF60 /43.B3 =K +K2
L23* LEDF23 /75.B3 =K +K2 L61 LEDF61 /45.B2 =K +K2
L25 LEDF25 /33.C2 =K +K2 L63* LEDF63 /48.B4 =K +K2
B L26 LEDF26 /40.D6 =K +K2 L64* LEDF64 /48.B6 =K +K2 B

PROJ: 8920980_003
L31A LEDF31A /30.C3 =K +K2 L73* LEDF73 /76.B5 =K +K2
L31B LEDF31B /30.C6 =K +K2 L74 LEDF74 /33.C6 =K +K2
L32A LEDF32A /31.B3 =K +K2 L75 LEDF75 /34.B5 =K +K2
L32B LEDF32B /31.B6 =K +K2 L76 LEDF76 /34.B6 =K +K2

C C
L33A LEDF33A /32.B2 =K +K2 L77 LEDD+ /20.C4 =K +K2
L33B LEDF33B /32.B5 =K +K2 M1 STARTERMOTOR /19.E3 =M +M

L34* LEDF34 /55.B6 =K +K2 M1* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.E5 =M +M

L35 LEDF35 /40.C4 =K +K2 M1** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.E5 =M +M.
L36 LEDF36 /47.B3 =K +K2 M2 WINDSCREENWIPERFRONT /28.D4 =K +K1
L38 LEDF38 /47.B5 =K +K2 M2.X1 PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT /28.D4 =K +K1

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L39* LEDF39 /81.B5 =K +K2 M2.X2* PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERFRONTRESERVE /28.D5 =K +K1

D D
L40* LEDF40 /81.B8 =K +K2 M3 WINDSCREENWIPERREAR /28.D7 =K +K2
L42* LEDF42 /80.D2 =K +K2 M3.X PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERREAR /28.D7 =K +K2

forbidden.
L43 LEDF43 /41.B2 =K +K2 M4 WASHINGPUMPFRONT /28.D6 =K +K1
L44 LEDF44 /41.B7 =K +K2 M4.X PLUGWASHINGPUMPFRONT /28.E6 =K +K1
L45 LEDF45 /41.B4 =K +K2 M5 FANMOTOR /64.E3 =K +K4

L46* LEDF46 /71.B3 =K +K2 M5.X PLUGFANMOTOR /64.D2 =K +K4
L47 LEDF47 /42.B4 =K +K2 M6 LIEBHERRCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM /77.C3 =H +H5

E E
L48 LEDF48 /42.B7 =K +K2 M6.X PLUGLIEBHERRCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM /77.D3 =H +H5
L49* LEDF49 /55.E2 =K +K2 M7 COMPRESSORSEAT /19.E8 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L50* LEDF50 /59.B2 =K +K2 M7.X PLUGCOMPRESSORSEAT /19.E8 =K +K2
L51 LEDF51 /43.B6 =K +K2 M8 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP /23.D2 =H +H4
L52 LEDF52 /43.B7 =K +K2 M8* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.B5 =H +H4
L53 LEDF53 /77.B2 =K +K2 M8** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.B5 =H +H4.
L54 LEDF54 /40.C5 =K +K2 M9 WASHINGPUMPREAR /28.D8 =K +K4

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 11
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M9.X PLUGWASHINGPUMPREAR /28.D8 =K +K4 OLE17* CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER /80.D8 =K +K2

A A
M10* REFUELLINGPUMP /55.E6 =H +H1 OLE18* PLUGRELAYBOARD /80.E2 =K +K2
M11 WATERVALVE /65.E3 =K +K4 OLE19* LIGHTINGS210 /59.E3 =K +K2
M11.X PLUGWATERVALVE /65.E2 =K +K4 OLE20* LIGHTINGS210 /59.E4 =K +K2
M13* CONDENSERFAN /69.D6 =H +H3a OLE21* CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90 /81.D3 =B +B2
M13 CONDENSERFAN /68.D7 =H +H3 OLE22* CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER /80.E7 =B +B2
M13.X PLUGCONDENSERFAN /68.D7 =H +H3 OLE23* REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR /75.C1 =H +H3
B M13.X* PLUGCONDENSERFAN /69.D6 =H +H3a OLE23* QUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.E7 =K +K4 B

M14 RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAP /65.E7 =K +K4 P1 WORKINGHOURMETER /20.A3 =K +K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
M14.X PLUGRECIRCULATEDAIRFLAP /65.E6 =K +K4 P1.X1 PLUGWORKINGHOURMETER /20.A3 =K +K4
M15* CIRCULATINGPUMPDWB2010 /80.D7 =H +H1 P1.X2 PLUGWORKINGHOURMETER /20.B3 =K +K4
M15 FOOTFLAP /66.E3 =K +K4 R1 ANGLESENSORINCHPEDAL /52.C3 =K +K6
M15.X* PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDWB2010 /80.D7 =H +H1 R1.X PLUGANGLESENSOR /52.C3 =K +K6
M15.X PLUGFOOTFLAP /66.E2 =K +K4 R2 DROPRESISTORL2 /25.C6 =K +K2
M16 MIDDLEFLAP /66.E7 =K +K4 R3 DROPRESISTORL3 /25.C6 =K +K2

C C
M16.X PLUGMIDDLEFLAP /66.E6 =K +K4 R4 DROPRESISTORL4 /25.C4 =K +K2
M17 HEADFLAP /67.E3 =K +K4 R5 ANGLESENSORGASPEDAL /52.C7 =K +K6

M17.X PLUGHEADFLAP /67.E3 =K +K4 R5 DROPRESISTORL5 /25.C4 =K +K2

M700 STARTERMOTOR /105.B6 =M +M R5.X PLUGANGLESENSOR /52.C6 =K +K6
MO1 MVMODULATION /53.C2 =F +F3 R6 DROPRESISTORL6 /20.C6 =K +K2
OLE1 SPARELINEKl.W /19.C4 =K +K2 R6a* MIRRORHEATING /33.E6 =K +K3

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OLE2* CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER /19.D7 =K +K2 R6a.X* PLUGMIRRORHEATING /33.E6 =K +K3

D D
OLE3* WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREAR /31.A8 =K +K2 R6b* MIRRORHEATING /33.E6 =K +K3
OLE4* LIGHTINGRFWEOAOPTIONAL /33.E5 =K +K2 R6b.X* PLUGMIRRORHEATING /33.E6 =K +K3

forbidden.
OLE5* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.F8 =K +K2 R7 DROPRESISTORL7 /20.C7 =K +K2
OLE6* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.F8 =K +K2 R8 DROPRESISTORL8 /19.B8 =K +K2
OLE7* LOGICOUTPUTMODULE3 /41.D1 =K +K2 R8A DROPRESISTORL8A /19.B7 =K +K2

OLE8* LOGICINPUTMODULE3 /42.D1 =K +K2 R9 DROPRESISTORL9 /51.B6 =K +K2
OLE9* PLUGRELAYBOARD /45.C8 =K +K2 R9A* EXCITATIONRESERVE /20.C2 =K +K2

E E
OLE10* AUTOMATICRUNOUT /47.B7 =K +K2 R9B EXCITATIONGG6 /20.C2 =K +K2
OLE11* CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER /79.A4 =K +K2 R07B DROPRESISTORL07B /27.D1 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OLE12* CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER /79.A8 =K +K2 R10 DROPRESISTORL10 /35.E2 =K +K2
OLE13* CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER /79.F7 =K +K2 R10* DIESELPREHEATING /82.E5 =M +M
OLE14* PLUGRELAYBOARD /80.B3 =K +K2 R10.X* PLUGDIESELPREHEATING /82.E5 =M +M
OLE15* PLUGRELAYBOARD /80.B6 =K +K2 R11 DROPRESISTORL11 /56.E1 =K +K2
OLE16* PLUGRELAYBOARD /80.C7 =K +K2 R12 REARWINDOWHEATER /33.E7 =K +K2

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 12
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R12.X1 PLUGREARWINDOWHEATER /33.E7 =K +K2 R45 DROPRESISTORL45 /41.B4 =K +K2

A A
R12.X2 PLUGREARWINDOWHEATER /33.E7 =K +K2 R46* DROPRESISTORL46 /71.B3 =K +K2
R12:* DROPRESISTORL12 /78.B3 =K +K2 R47 DROPRESISTORL47 /42.B4 =K +K2
R13 DROPRESISTORL13 /68.B3 =K +K2 R48 DROPRESISTORL48 /42.B7 =K +K2
R13* DIESELPREHEATING /55.E8 =M +M R49* DROPRESISTORL49 /55.E2 =K +K2
R13.X* PLUGDIESELPREHEATING /55.E8 =M +M R50* DROPRESISTORL50 /59.B2 =K +K2
R14* DROPRESISTORL14 /55.B8 =K +K2 R51 DROPRESISTORL51 /43.B6 =K +K2
B R15 DROPRESISTORL15 /51.B5 =K +K2 R52 DROPRESISTORL52 /43.B7 =K +K2 B

R18 DROPRESISTORL18 /28.C8 =K +K2 R53 DROPRESISTORF53 /77.B2 =K +K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
R19 DROPRESISTORL19 /62.B2 =K +K2 R54 DROPRESISTORL54 /40.C5 =K +K2
R19A DROPRESISTORL19A /62.B1 =K +K2 R55 DROPRESISTORL55 /44.B5 =K +K2
R20 DROPRESISTORL20 /28.C3 =K +K2 R56 DROPRESISTORL56 /44.B7 =K +K2
R21 DROPRESISTORL21 /25.C3 =K +K2 R59 DROPRESISTORL59 /43.B2 =K +K2
R23* DROPRESISTORL23 /75.B3 =K +K2 R61 DROPRESISTORL61 /45.B2 =K +K2

C C
R25 DROPRESISTORL25 /33.C2 =K +K2 R63* DROPRESISTORL63 /48.B4 =K +K2

R26 DROPRESISTORL26 /40.D6 =K +K2 R64* DROPRESISTORL64 /48.B6 =K +K2


LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R31A DROPRESISTORL31A /30.C3 =K +K2 R73* DROPRESISTORL73 /76.B5 =K +K2

D D
R31B DROPRESISTORL31B /30.C6 =K +K2 R74 DROPRESISTORL74 /33.C6 =K +K2
R32A DROPRESISTORL32A /31.B3 =K +K2 R75 DROPRESISTORL75 /34.B5 =K +K2

forbidden.
R32B DROPRESISTORL32B /31.B6 =K +K2 R76 DROPRESISTORL75 /34.B6 =K +K2
R33A DROPRESISTORL33A /32.B2 =K +K2 R77 DROPRESISTORL77 /20.C4 =K +K2
R33B DROPRESISTORL33B /32.B5 =K +K2 R701 HEATERFLANGE /19.F6 =M +M

R34* DROPRESISTORL34 /55.B6 =K +K2 S1 IGNITIONSWITCH /19.A3 =K +K4
R35 DROPRESISTORL35 /40.C4 =K +K2 S1.X1 PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH /19.A3 =K +K4

E E
R36 DROPRESISTORL36 /47.B3 =K +K2 S1.X1.8a* CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER /79.A6 =K +K4
R38 DROPRESISTORL38 /47.B5 =K +K2 S1.X2 PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH /19.B4 =K +K4

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R39* DROPRESISTORL39 /81.B5 =K +K2 S1.X3 PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH /19.B4 =K +K4
R40* DROPRESISTORL40 /81.B8 =K +K2 S2 LHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS /51.E4 =K +K4
R42* DROPRESISTORL42 /80.D2 =K +K2 S2.1 FORWARDNEUTRALBACKWARDS /51.F4 =K +K4
R43 DROPRESISTORL43 /41.B2 =K +K2 S2.2 KICKDOWN /51.F5 =K +K4
R44 DROPRESISTORL44 /41.B7 =K +K2 S2.3 PUSHBUTTONSWITCHOPTION1 /51.F5 =K +K4

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 13
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S2.4 PUSHBUTTONSWITCHOPTION2 /51.F6 =K +K4 SPLICE.X7 REVERSINGLAMP /25.D7 =H +H4

A A
S2.X PLUGLHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS /51.E5 =K +K4 SPLICE.X8 BRAKELIGHT /25.F1 =H +H4
S2a* LHCONTROLLEVERWITHANALOGUESENSOR+GRIPSENSOR /60.D4 =K +K4 SPLICE.X10* CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.B2 =H +H3
S2a.X2* PLUGLHCONTROLLEVER /60.D5 =K +K4 SPLICE.X30* WORKINGBASKET /59.D4 =K +K6
S3 STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH /25.B1 =K +K1 SPLICE.X70* LHCONTROLLEVERWITHANALOGUESENSORGRIPSENSOR /60.C5 =K +K
S3.X1 PLUGSTEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH /28.E2 =K +K1 Splice.X1 LOGICMODULES /41.D2 =K +K
S3.X2 PLUGSTEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH /25.A2 =K +K1 Splice.X3 OPTIONSLHCONTROLLEVER /51.D5 =K +K
B S15 BATTERYMAINSWITCH /19.E1 =H +H5 Splice.X4* CONDENSERFAN /69.D4 =K +K B

S15* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.E2 =H +H5 Splice.X9 WINDSCREENWIPERFRONT /28.A5 =K +K
PROJ: 8920980_003
S15** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.E2 =H +H5. Splice.X11* MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER /33.D6 =K +K3
S23* QUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.C7 =K +K4 Splice.X12* MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER /33.F6 =K +K3
S23.X1* PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.C7 =K +K4 T1 VOLTAGECONVERTER /34.B7 =K +K2
S23.X2* PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.D7 =K +K4 T1.X PLUGVOLTAGECONVERTER /34.A7 =K +K2
S23a* QUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.C6 =K +K4 V1 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK01 /19.C2 =K +K2
S43* BACKUPALARMCANBESWITCHEDOFF /45.A7 =K +K4 V2* BLOCKINGDIODE /28.C1 =H +H

C C
S43.X1* PLUGBACKUPALARM /45.A7 =K +K4 V2 FREEWHEELINGDIODEk01.30 /19.C3 =K +K2
S43.X2* PLUGBACKUPALARM /45.A7 =K +K4 V2.X1* PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE /28.B1 =H +H

S202* PUSHBUTTONSWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING /72.C3 =K +K4 V2.X2* PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE /28.C1 =H +H

S204* REFUELLINGPUMP /55.C6 =H +H2 V3 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK12 /34.B4 =K +K2
S210* WORKINGBASKET /59.D3 =K +K4 V8 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK5 /20.C3 =K +K2
S210.X1* PLUGWORKINGBASKET /59.D3 =K +K4 V9 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK3 /25.C5 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
S210.X2* PLUGWORKINGBASKET /59.D3 =K +K4 V10 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK2 /20.C7 =K +K2

D D
S212* RFWEOAOPTIONAL /33.C4 =K +K4 V11 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22 /27.C3 =K +K2
S212.X1* PLUGRFWEOAOPTIONAL /33.B4 =K +K4 V12 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22a /27.C4 =K +K2

forbidden.
S212.X2* PLUGRFWEOAOPTIONAL /33.C5 =K +K4 V13 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22b /27.C4 =K +K2
S212a* SYMBOLRFWEOAOPTIONAL /33.B4 =K +K4 V14* FREEWHEELINGDIODEK25 /27.C6 =K +K2
S213* EMERGENCYOFF1WORKINGBASKET /59.D7 =K +K4 V15* FREEWHEELINGDIODEK26 /27.C7 =K +K2

S213* CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.C4 =V +V1 V16 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK31A /30.B5 =K +K2
S213.X1* PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.C4 =V +V1 V17 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK31B /30.B7 =K +K2

E E
S213.X2* PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.C4 =V +V1 V18 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK32A /31.B4 =K +K2
S214* EMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET /59.D8 =K +K4 V19 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK32B /31.B7 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
S216* EMERGENCYOFFAUTOMATICRUNOUT /47.C8 =K +K3 V20 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK33A /32.B4 =K +K2
S222 COMFORTCONTROL3.+4.COMFORTCONTROL /51.E7 =K +K4 V21 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK33B /32.B6 =K +K2
S222.X1* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.E7 =K +K4 V32 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK244 /68.B4 =K +K2
S222.X2* PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT /51.E8 =K +K4 V32C BLOCKINGDIODE /31.B7 =K +K2
SPLICE.X2 SPLICELOGICMODULES /42.C2 =K +K2 V33 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK244 /68.B4 =K +K2

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 14
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V33C BLOCKINGDIODE /32.B6 =K +K2 X2.B.50* PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.50 /69.D6 =K +K6

A A
V34 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK245 /68.B7 =K +K2 X2.B.51* PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.51 /69.D7 =K +K6
V35 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK245 /68.B7 =K +K2 X2.B.52* PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.52 /69.E7 =K +K6
V36 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK246 /49.D7 =K +K X2.J HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSEU /27.C6 =K +K2
V37 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK246 /49.D7 =K +K X2.S PLUGCABFLOOR /62.C5 =K +K6
V46* FREEWHEELINGDIODEK243 /80.D2 =K +K2 X2.S** PLUGCABFLOOROPTION /69.E8 =K +K6
V48* FREEWHEELINGDIODEK246 /49.D8 =K +K2 X2.S.50* PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.50 /69.D6 =K +K6
B V49 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK245 /68.B7 =K +K2 X2.S.51* PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.51 /69.D7 =K +K6 B

V50 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK244 /68.B5 =K +K2 X2.S.52* PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.52 /69.E7 =K +K6
PROJ: 8920980_003
V53 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK240 /27.A3 =K +K2 X3* PLUGPRESELECTIONDIALTHERMO90 /81.B1 =K +K4
V57 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK10 /33.C8 =K +K2 X3.J HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA /27.C8 =K +K2
V58 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK9 /33.C3 =K +K2 X4* PLUGPRESELECTIONDIALDBW2010 /80.B1 =K +K4
V59 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK8 /28.C6 =K +K2 X4.J* JUMPERRESERVE /20.C1 =K +K2
V60 FREEWHEELINGDIODEK3A /25.C7 =K +K2 X5* PLUGNOZZLESTICKPREHEATERDBW2010 /80.E3 =B +B2
V80 BLOCKINGDIODE /20.B2 =K +K2 X5.J* JUMPERRESERVE /20.C2 =K +K2

C C
V81 BLOCKINGDIODE /20.C3 =K +K2 X6.J JUMPERGG6 /20.C2 =K +K2
V82 BLOCKINGDIODE /20.D3 =K +K2 X11.ST1* PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90 /81.D5 =B +B2

V83* BLOCKINGDIODE /27.D2 =K +K2 X12.ST2* PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90 /81.C6 =B +B2

V84* BLOCKINGDIODE /27.D2 =K +K2 X13.ST3* PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90 /81.D7 =B +B2
V85 BLOCKINGDIODE /27.D3 =K +K2 X16.B PLUGLIGHTINGREARHATCH /31.D4 =H +H
V86 BLOCKINGDIODE /27.D4 =K +K2 X16.S PLUGLIGHTINGREARHATCH /31.D4 =H +H

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
V87 BLOCKINGDIODE /27.D8 =K +K2 X22a.B PLUGCABIN /30.D4 =K +K4

D D
V88* BLOCKINGDIODE /27.D8 =K +K2 X22a.S PLUGCABIN /30.D4 =K +K4
V89 BLOCKINGDIODE /27.C8 =K +K2 X22b.B PLUGWIRINGHARNESSCABIN /19.D7 =K +K4

forbidden.
V100* BLOCKINGDIODE /57.B7 =K +K2 X22b.S PLUGWIRINGHARNESSCAB /19.D7 =K +K4
V100.X1* PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE /57.B7 =K +K2 X26.B PLUGE12 /32.D3 =K +K3
V100.X2* PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE /57.B7 =K +K2 X26.S* PLUGE12 /32.E3 =K +K3

W1 ANTENNA /34.D8 =K +K3 X26a.S* PLUGE12b /32.E4 =K +K3
X1.B PLUGCABFLOOR /20.E3 =K +K6 X27.B PLUGE12a /32.D4 =K +K3

E E
X1.B.64* PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.B8 =H +H X27.S* PLUGE12a /32.D4 =K +K3
X1.B.65* PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.E8 =H +H X28.B PLUGFANMOTOR /21.B7 =H +H

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1.J HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSEU /27.C5 =K +K2 X28.B PLUGE13 /32.D6 =K +K3
X1.S PLUGCABFLOOR /20.D3 =K +K6 X28.S PLUGFANMOTOR /21.B7 =H +H
X1.S.61a* PLUGCABFLOORX1.S.61 /69.C8 =K +K X28.S* PLUGE13 /32.D6 =K +K3
X2.B PLUGCABFLOOR /62.C5 =K +K6 X28a.S* PLUGE13b /32.E7 =K +K3
X2.B** PLUGCABFLOOROPTION /69.E8 =K +K6 X29.B PLUGE13a /32.D7 =K +K3

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 15
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X29.S* PLUGE13a /32.D7 =K +K3 X.RS232.B PLUGDIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS /70.B7 =K +K

A A
X31 PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH /77.C5 =H +H5 XA16a.X1.58* CANCONNECTION.INPUTMODULE1 /37.E7 =H +H3
X33 PLUGMAGNETICSPILOTCONTROLUNIT /56.C7 =K +K4 XB39 PLUGAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR /62.D6 =K +K6
X33.X PLUGMAGNETICSPILOTCONTROLUNIT /56.C7 =K +K4 XE14l.a* PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION /25.D7 =H +H1
X37a* PLUGRFWEOOPTIONAL /25.C8 =H +H3 XE14l.a.* PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION /25.E7 =H +H1
X37b* PLUGRFWEOOPTIONAL /25.C8 =H +H3 XE14l.b* PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION /25.D7 =H +H1
X43 PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH /77.C7 =V +V1 XE14r.a* PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION /25.D8 =H +H1
B X44* PLUGRELAYBOARDDIESELPREHEATING /82.B5 =K +K2 XE14r.a.* PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION /25.E8 =H +H1 B

X45.B* PLUGCONNECTORLINTFILTER /69.B5 =K +K2 XE14r.b* PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION /25.E8 =H +H1
PROJ: 8920980_003
X45.S* PLUGCONNECTORLINTFILTER /69.B5 =K +K2 XMSP1 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /19.D3 =H +H2
X48.B* PLUGEMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET /59.C8 =H +H XMSP1.e* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /59.F4 =H +H2
X48.S* PLUGEMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET /59.C8 =H +H XMSP1a MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /31.F4 =K +H2
X50.B* PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.C2 =H +H3 XMSP1b MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /43.D2 =H +H2
X50.S* PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD /78.C2 =H +H3 XMSP1c MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /25.F6 =H +H2
X51.B* PLUGEMERGENCYOFF /59.A7 =K +K XMSP1d* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /48.D3 =H +H2

C C
X51.S* PLUGEMERGENCYOFF /59.A7 =K +K XMSP4.1 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEREARLEFT /19.E1 =H +H
X52.B* PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR /75.D4 =K +K2 XMSP4.1* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.D2 =H +H

X60 DIAGNOSTICPLUG /40.F6 =K +K2 XMSP4.1** OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40 /83.D2 =H +H.

X60a DIAGNOSTICPLUGENGINECONTROLUNIT /70.E2 =M +M XMSP4.2 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEBACKLEFT /19.D3 =H +H5
X70 12VELECTRICALSOCKET /34.E4 =K +K5 XMSP4.3 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEBACKLEFT /19.F3 =H +H5
X70.X1 PLUG12VELECTRICALSOCKET /34.E4 =K +K5 XMSP6.1 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /19.D2 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X70.X2 PLUG12VELECTRICALSOCKET /34.E4 =K +K5 XMSP6.10* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /71.C2 =K +K2

D D
X71 ELECTRICALSOCKETCIGARETTELIGHTER /34.E3 =K +K4 XMSP6.11* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /71.C4 =K +K2
X71.X PLUGCIGARETTELIGHTER /34.E3 =K +K4 XMSP6.12* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /57.E8 =K +K2

forbidden.
X73 CIGARETTELIGHTER /34.F3 =K +K4 XMSP6.13* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /33.F7 =K +K2
X75.B* PLUGINTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR /67.C6 =K +K4 XMSP6.14* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /55.C8 =K +K2
X75.S PLUGINTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR /67.C6 =K +K4 XMSP6.15* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /81.C6 =K +K2

X223.B* PLUGDIESELPREHEATING40 /80.F3 =K +K2 XMSP6.16* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /80.F1 =K +K2
X223.S* PLUGDIESELPREHEATING40 /82.B6 =K +K2 XMSP6.18* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /30.F5 =K +K2

E E
X321a* COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT /26.E2 =V +V XMSP6.19* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /82.F6 =K +K6
X321b* COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT /26.E8 =V +V XMSP6.2 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /19.D2 =K +K2

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X700.B PLUGMOTORCONTROL /105.D7 =M +M XMSP6.20* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /82.F6 =K +K6
X700.S PLUGMOTORCONTROL /105.D7 =M +M XMSP6.21* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /76.C5 =K +K2
X701.B PLUGMOTORCONTROL /105.D8 =M +M XMSP6.22* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /75.D4 =K +K2
X701.S PLUGMOTORCONTROL /105.D8 =M +M XMSP6a MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /28.F8 =K +K2
X.M7a.S PLUGDIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS /70.B6 =K +K2 XMSP6b MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /39.B4 =K +K2

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 16
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
XMSP6c MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /33.F7 =K +K2 Y11a.JPT* PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT3 /57.C3 =V +V

A A
XMSP6d* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /45.B7 =K +K2 Y11b* EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C7 =V +V1
XMSP6e* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /33.B5 =K +K2 Y11b.JPT* PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C7 =V +V1
XMSP7a MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABROOF /32.F6 =K +K3 Y12 OPTIONALEQUIPMENT2 /57.C2 =V +V
XMSP7b MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABROOF /25.F6 =K +K3 Y12.JPT PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT2 /57.C2 =V +V
XMSP10* VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586 /84.F4 =M +M Y12a* EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C6 =V +V1
XMSP12 MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4 /19.D2 =K +K2 Y12a* OPTIONALEQUIPMENT4 /57.C4 =V +V
B XMSP12.1* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4 /47.E8 =K +K2 Y12a.JPT* PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C6 =V +V1 B

XMSP12.2* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4 /79.C6 =K +K2 Y12a.JPT* PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT4 /57.C4 =V +V
PROJ: 8920980_003
XMSP63* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /78.D4 =K +K2 Y12b* EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C8 =V +V1
XMSP200* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /50.C2 =K +K2 Y12b.JPT* PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C8 =V +V1
XMSP201* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT /61.D4 =K +K2 Y13 FANMOTORINTERCOOLER /21.C7 =H +H
XMSP.20* MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL /69.F7 =K +K2 Y13.X PLUGFANMOTOR /21.C7 =H +H
Y2 TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD /54.C1 =H +H Y14 WORKINGHYDRAULICSLOCKOUT /57.C5 =H +H
Y2.DT PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD /54.C1 =H +H Y14.JPT PLUGWORKINGHYDRAULICSLOCKOUT /57.C5 =H +H

C C
Y2a TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD /54.C3 =H +H Y15 PWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP /54.C5 =H +H
Y2a.DT PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD /54.C3 =H +H Y15.JPT PLUGPWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP /54.C5 =H +H

Y3 TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS /54.C2 =H +H Y15a PWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP /54.C6 =H +H

Y3.DT PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS /54.C2 =H +H Y15a.JPT PLUGPWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP /54.C6 =H +H
Y3a TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS /54.C4 =H +H Y16 OVERSPEEDPROTECTION /53.C5 =H +H
Y3a.DT PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS /54.C4 =H +H Y16.JPT PLUGOVERSPEEDPROTECTION /53.C5 =H +H

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Y6 TRAVELRANGES,MODULATION /53.C2 =F +F3 Y17 LIFTKICKOUT /56.C7 =K +K4

D D
Y6.1 TRAVELRANGE1 /53.C4 =F +F3 Y18 FLOATPOSITION /56.C7 =K +K4
Y6.2 TRAVELRANGE2 /53.C2 =F +F3 Y20 RIDECONTROL /23.C7 =V +V1

forbidden.
Y6.3 TRAVELRANGE3 /53.C3 =F +F3 Y20.JPT PLUGRIDECONTROL /23.C7 =V +V1
Y6.X PLUGTRAVELRANGES,MODULATION /53.C2 =F +F3 Y21 RIDECONTROL /23.C8 =V +V1
Y9 BUCKETRETURNTODIG /56.C7 =K +K4 Y21.JPT PLUGRIDECONTROL /23.C8 =V +V1

Y9a BUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH /56.C6 =V +V1 Y22 AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR /62.E5 =M +M
Y9a.JPT* PLUGBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH /56.C6 =V +V1 Y22.X PLUGAIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR /62.E5 =M +M

E E
Y10 PARKINGBRAKE /78.C1 =H +K6 Y50 FANREVERSAL /21.C8 =H +H3
Y10.JPT PLUGPARKINGBRAKE /78.C1 =H +K6 Y50.AF2 PLUGFANREVERSAL /21.C8 =H +H3

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Y11 OPTIONALEQUIPMENT1 /57.C1 =V +V Y51* JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT /72.C6 =H +H3
Y11.JPT PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT1 /57.C1 =V +V Y51.AF2* PLUGJOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT /72.C6 =H +H3
Y11a* EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C5 =V +V1 Y52* JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT /72.C7 =H +H3
Y11a* OPTIONALEQUIPMENT3 /57.C3 =V +V Y52.AF2* PLUGJOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT /72.C7 =H +H3
Y11a.JPT* PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT /50.C5 =V +V1 Y53 QUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.C8 =V +V1

F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 17
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BMK FUNCTION SHEET SYSTEM PLACE
Y53.JPT PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE /57.D8 =V +V1

A A
Y57 HYDROMOTORSWIVELANGLE1 /53.C8 =F +F3
Y57.DT PLUGHYDROMOTORSWIVELANGLE1 /53.C8 =F +F3
Y63* GEROTORSTEERING /55.C4 =H +H3
Y63.JPT* PLUGGEROTORSTEERING /55.C4 =H +H3
Y64* SAFETYJOYSTICKSTEERING /72.C8 =H +H3
Y64.JPT* PLUGSAFETYJOYSTICKSTEERING /72.C8 =H +H3
B Y65* WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT /59.E4 =V +V1 B

Y65.JPT* PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT /59.E4 =V +V1
PROJ: 8920980_003
Y66* WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT /59.E5 =V +V1
Y66.JPT* PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT /59.E5 =V +V1
Y67* WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERFINECONTROL /59.E6 =V +V1
Y67.JPT* PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERFINECONTROL /59.E6 =V +V1
Y68* CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.E6 =V +V1
Y68.JPT* PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER /61.E6 =V +V1

C C
Y711 INJECTIONPUMP1 /109.B3 =M +M



LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
YEP1 HYDRAULICMOTOR1 /53.C6 =F +F3

D D
YEP1.DT PLUGHYDRAULICMOTOR1 /53.C6 =F +F3
YEP2 HYDROMOTORS2 /53.C7 =F +F3

forbidden.
YEP2.DT PLUGHYDRAULICMOTOR2 /53.C7 =F +F3

E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 18
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q +K6
1
X1.S
A9Kl.15
X1.B
1
10
A S1.X1 A
8
10 5 6 8 9
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
A4.X57
1
58 15 15 50a 50a T.1
/79.C6
+K4 P 0 12
S1 A4
=K
24
A16a.X1
0 +K2
30 30 X1 24 E E
1 2 A16a.UI15
A9IMMOBILISERKl.15
S1.X2 S1.X3 +H3 A
1
Kl50a F8A 10A F8 15A
RD 2.5Q A16a RD BU
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input15
B A4.X56 A4.X57 CAN: B
3
S.4 T.3
OLE1
INPUTMODULE1 A A
R8A R8
A4 ENGINEECU ENGINEECU
PROJ: 8920980_003
Kl.15.X
Verb.
=K 1 /93.E2
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
/93.E2
SELECTION L8A L8 ELECTRICALSOCKET
HEATERFLANGE HEATERFLANGE RADIO
+K2 E A700D A700D
F8
+M +M
1
/34.B3
A700D.DI2 A700D.DO2 GND GND
Kl.15
F29 25A X2 64 X2 39
30 86 WH A700D.X2 A700D.X2
=K+K6X1.S:65
64
39
/23.B2
V1 A4.X57 A4.X55
5
K01 A T.4 R.5
R29
Kl.30.F08
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
C C
OLE2
87 85
L29 1
Kl.30 +H5
Verb.
F010
GND
5A
WH 2Q
RD 25Q
+K6 HBR 2
65
1
Kl.30.X 1 V2 X1.S *
1
XMSP12 GND
X1.B
65
1
=K +K6 RD 25Q =H +K4
=K+K4X3:1
MP
1
X22b.S
WH 2Q
2 2 30.2 50 X22b.B
RD 25Q
BK 25Q
1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
RD 6Q
200A 100A
BK,BK 25Q,25Q
+H5
F03 F02 K04
WH 6Q
WH 2Q
D +H5 +H D
BK 25Q
BK 25Q
WH 2Q
1 1
+K2 +K2 +H2 * +H5 30.1 31
1
XMSP6.2 1 1 XMSP6.1 XMSP1 1 XMSP4.2 1 WH 1.5Q * 1
forbidden.
1 +H5
+H5 F07 =K
F01 10A
100A RD 2 * E2.X1 M7.X
1
RD 25Q
2 1 1
1
BK 1.5Q
1 XMSP4.1 RD 25Q
RD 25Q
+K3
RD 1.5Q
+H RD 25Q +K2
E2
M7 M
BK 70Q
E RD 70Q RD 25Q 0 E
28
+ *
+ z X1.B 2 3
X
+B +B1 X1.S E2.X2 E2.X3
1
28
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
G1 G2 Kl.30.F07 RD 1.5Q 2
WH 1Q
* 30
ENGINESIDE/105.B6
1 W B+ D+ =K =K
BK 2Q M7.X
2
+H5 +H2
BK 2Q
S15 +M 3 XMSP1b

M +M 3
BK 2Q
M1 1
X
50 G3
2
/D+
+M
/81.B6
BK 70Q 31 R701
RD 70Q +K3 +K2
+H5 +H2 0 XMSP7a XMSP6b
/20.E3
/27.A5
BK 70Q B 9 7
F XMSP4.3 1 XMSP1c 6 BK 2.5Q F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 IGNITION LOCKBATTERIESGENERATOR Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 19
WerkBischofshofenGmbH MAINFUSES ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P1.X1
1
ELECTRICKEYPAD
A 1 CAN: A
/94.D3 OUTLETA6
+K4 A18 PARKINGLIGHT
P1 +K4 A
h
WH 1Q
=K A18.PWM6
X2 3
INFO A18.X2
3
JUMPERX4RESERVE0OHMEXCITATION 2
P1.X2
WH 1Q
JUMPERX5RESERVE
BK 1Q
JUMPERX6220Ohm/5WattL550L586
B +K2 =K B
XMSP6b 5 +K2 OLDM.4
10
A4.X51 A4.X49
9
M.9 K.10
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4 A4
/51.A4
Kl.15
=K /51.A4 LEDGREEN =K
F15.1 PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHT
V80
+K2 +K2
Kl.30
L77 R77
F15.2
Kl.15
E E E
86 30
R9A R9B
C
220 V81 F6 3A F7 3A K2 F27 10A
C
VT VT RD
86 30 V10
A A A
K5 A A 85 87 87a A
V8 R6 R7 R27
X4.J X5.J X6.J

10A 10A 10A L6 L7 GND L27
E E E 85 87 87a
V82
GND GND GND

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
T.5 T.6 T.7 T.8

A4.X53 A4.X57 A4.X57 A4.X57 A4.X57
1
O.1
8
D D
* * *
WH 1Q
forbidden.
+K6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
2
X1.S
X1.B
2
+K6
19
6
/D+ WH 1Q
X1.S
X1.B
19
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
E E
/19.F5
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Kl.58aR
Kl.58aR
Kl.58aR
Kl.58aR
Kl.58aL
Kl.58aL
Kl.58aL
D+
3
/25.D3
/25.D6
/25.D6
/25.C8
/25.E4
/25.D2
/25.E5
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 FUNCTIOND+ Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 20
WerkBischofshofenGmbH PROFILELIGHTPARKINGLIGHT ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 ENGINEECU INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2

CAN: CAN: CAN: VCC CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
/93.D2
/86.F2 SUPPLY24V /86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input 14 /86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input 4 coolant level signal /86.C5 resistor input 1 /90.D1 PWMOutput 6(Bank2) /91.D2 PWMOutput6(Bank
A700D
A16a 24VTANKSENSOR A16a TANKSENSOR A16a PRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE /86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input13 A16a hydraulics oil temperature A17a VENTILATOR A17b FANREVERSAL
+M
A +H3 +H3 A +H3 A A700D.AI11.1 A16a transmisson overtemperature+H3 D +H3 A +H3 A A
A16a.24V A16a.UI14 A16a.UI4 X2 63 +H3 A16a.UI13 A16a.RI1 A17a.PWM6 A17b.PWM6
X1 37 X1 23 X1 7 A700D.X2 X1 22 X1 46 X1 19 X1 19
63
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1
19
19
22
37
23
46
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
B B
WH 1.5Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
WH 1Q
RD 1Q
+H
X28.B
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
1 2 X28.S
1
WH 1.5Q
B25.X
3
1
1 3 Y50.AF2
1
C C
B19.X B13.X B14.X B8.X Y13.X
1
gn vi 1
+H2 C 1 1 1 +H 1 +H3
B25 s +H +F3 Y13
+K6 +H1 Y50
Q UP
B13 B14 T C
0 B19 B8 0
0 0 0
0 + 0
2 2
sw ge B A 2 2 Y13.X Y50.AF2
2
2 4 B19.X B13.X B8.X
2
B25.X
2
BK 1.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
BK 1.5Q
+H
2
X28.S
BU 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
X28.B
2
forbidden.
1 2
BK 1.5Q
E E
65
32
62
47
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A700D.X2 A16a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1
61
61
61
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 65 X1 61 X1 32 X2 62 X1 47 X1 61 X1 61
A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.24V A700D.AI11.2 A16a.RI1 A17a.GND_PWM6 A17b.GND_PWM6
+M D
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
EARTHTANKSENSOR GND PRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE VccPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE A700D COOLANT LEVEL hydraulics oil temperature EARTHVENTILATOR EARTHFANREVERSAL
A16a A16a
A16a /93.D2 A16a A17a A17b
/86.E5 EARTH /86.D5 EARTH /86.E2 SUPPLY24V SIGNAL /86.C5 resistor input 2 /90.D5 EARTH /91.D5 EARTH
CAN: CAN: CAN: ENGINEECU CAN: CAN: CAN:
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURE Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 21
WerkBischofshofenGmbH VENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL,BRAKEACCUMULATOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODULE1 MOTORECU INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODUL1 OUTPUTMODUL1 OUTPUTMODUL2

CAN: CAN: CAN: VCC CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
=M+M/34.D2
/35.E2 Versorgung24V analogerUniversaleingang14 /35.B2 analogue all-purpose input4
/35.D2 KHLWASSERSTANDS. /35.D2
analogerUniversaleingang13 /35.B5 Widerstandseingang1 /37.D2 PWMAusgang6(Bank2) /38.D2 PWMAusgang6(Bank2)
A A16a 24VTankgeber A16a Tankgeber A16a pressure accumulatorbrakeA700D
+M A16a Getriebebertemperatur A16a Hydraulikltempertur A17a Lfter A17b Lfterumkehr A
+H3 +H3 +H3 =M A700D.AI11.1 +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
A16a.24V A16a.UI14 A16a.UI4 X2 63 A16a.UI13 A16a.RI1 A17a.PWM6 A17b.PWM6
X1 37 X1 23 X1 7 A700D.X2 X1 22 X1 46 X1 19 X1 19
63
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1
37
22
19
19
7
23
46
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
B B
W160 +WL016 RD
W160 +WL016 BU
W160 +WL017 RD
X28.B
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
X28.S
1
B25.X
3
1
1 3
1
gn vi B19.X B13.X +H3
1
1 1 B14.X Y50.AF2
1
B25 +K6 1 B8.X Y13.X 1
1
C Q B19 P B13 +F3 1 1 +H3 C
B14 T Y13 Y50
sw ge 2 2 C
B8 0
B19.X B13.X 2 2
2 4
2
2
+K6 2 Y13.X Y50.AF2
B25.X
2
2
B8.X +H3
2
BK 1.5Q
B13a..X2
BK 1.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1Q
2
X28.S
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
D D
B13SteckverbindungSuperseal
X28.B
2
W160 +WL016 BK
W160 +WL017 BU
B13a.X
1
1
forbidden.
BK 1.5Q
B13a
L544L554
2
B13a.X
2
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3

65
32
62
47
61
61
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A700D.X2 A16a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1
X1 65 X1 32 X2 62 X1 47 X1 61 X1 61
E E
WH 1Q
A16a.GND A16a.24V =M A700D.AI11.2 A16a.RI1 A17a.GND_PWM6 A17b.GND_PWM6
+H3 +H3 +M +H3 +H3 +H3
A16a MasseTankgeber A16a D pressure accumulator A700D
brake KHLWASSERSTANDS. A16a Hydraulikltempertur A17a MasseLfter A17b MasseLfterumkehr
=M+M/34.D2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/35.D5 Masse /35.E2 Supply24V SIGNAL /35.B5 Widerstandseingang2 /37.D5 Masse /38.D5 Masse
CAN: CAN: MOTORECU CAN: CAN: CAN:
2
INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODUL1 B13a..X2 INPUTMODUL1 OUTPUTMODUL1 OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURE Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 22
WerkBischofshofenGmbH VENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL,BRAKEACCUMULATOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A OUTPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 ENGINEECU INPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 A

CAN: CAN: CAN: VACUUM CAN: CAN: CAN:
/93.E2
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input1 /86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input3
/91.D2 PWMOutput5(bank
A700D AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION /86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input6 /91.D2 PWMOutput7(bank /91.D2 PWMAusgang8(bank
A17b emergency steering A16a PRESSURENLPCheck A16a PRESSURENLP A16a LFD A17b LFD A17b LFD/FLOATPOSITION
+M
A +H3 A +H3 A A700D.TI1 +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
A17b.PWM5 A16a.UI1 A16a.UI3 X2 60 A16a.UI6 A17b.PWM7 A17b.PWM8
X1 18 X1 4 X1 6 A700D.X2 X1 19 X1 20 X1 21
60
A17b.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
6
18
19
20
21
/19.C4
WH 1Q
B B
WH 1.5Q
Kl.30.F08
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+K6
30
X1.B
X1.S
RD 25Q
30
WH 1Q
88 86
C +H4 C
K11
1
B3a.X B3.X B4.X_1 B28.X Y20.JPT Y21.JPT
1
C C 1 1 1 1
+V1 +V1
s s +H +K Y20 Y21
88a 85 +H4 +H5

UP UP
B4 P B28 P
B3a B3 0 0
+ + 0 2 2
0 0 2 2
B A B A Y20.JPT Y21.JPT
2
B3a.X B3.X B4.X_1 B28.X
2
BK 1.5Q
WH 25Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
D D
+H3
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
33
34
A16a.X1 A16a.X1
forbidden.
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
X1 33 X1 34
A16a.24V A16a.24V
1 +H3
A16a VccNLPCheck A16a VccNLP
+H4
/86.E2 SUPPLY24V /86.E2 SUPPLY24V

M
M8 CAN: CAN:
0 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1
E 2 E
Kl.15
60
59
60
62
63
A17b.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
46
X1 60 X1 59 X1 60 A700D.X2 X1 62 X1 63
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17b.GND_PWM5 A16a.GND A16a.GND X2 46 A17b.GND_PWM7 A17b.GND_PWM8

GNDVIAEARTHSTRIP
/56.E2
+H3 +H3 +H3 A700D.TI1.GND +H3 +H3
EARTHemergency steering GNDNLPCheck GNDNLP +M EARTHLFD EARTHLFD
A17b A16a A16a A17b A17b
/91.D5 EARTH /86.D5 EARTH /86.D5 EARTH A700D AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION /91.D5 EARTH /91.D5 EARTH
/93.E2
CAN: CAN: CAN: VACUUM CAN: CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 ENGINEECU OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATION Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 23
WerkBischofshofenGmbH RIDECONTROL ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODUL2 INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODUL1 MOTORECU INPUTMODUL1 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2

CAN: CAN: CAN: UNTERDRUCK CAN: CAN: CAN:
A =M+M/34.E2 A
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang5(Bank2) =H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input1
=H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input3 A700D LUFTFILTERVERSCHM. =H+H/35.D2analogue all-purpose =H+H/38.D2
input6 PWMAusgang7(Bank2)=H+H/38.D2 PWMAusgang8(Bank2)
A17b Notlenkung A16a pressureNLPCheck A16a DruckNLP +M A16a LFD A17b LFD A17b
LFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
+H3 +H3 +H3 =M A700D.TI1 +H3 +H3 +H3
=H A17b.PWM5 A16a.UI1 A16a.UI3 X2 60 =H A16a.UI6 =H A17b.PWM7 =H A17b.PWM8
X1 18 X1 4 X1 6 A700D.X2 X1 19 X1 20 X1 21
60
A17b.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 +M A16a.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
18
19
21
6
20
+H3 +H3 +H3 =M +H3 +H3 +H3
=H =H =H =H
=K+K/4.C4
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
B B
Kl.30.F08
30
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+H4 +H5 X1.S
PROJ: 8920980_003
30
B3a.X B3.X
1
+K6
1 1 =K
+H4 +H5 +H
WH 1Q
B3a P B3 P B4.X_1
1
=H =H 1
+H4 +H4 2 2 +H
K11.X4 K11.X2 B4 P
1
1
B3a.X B3.X
2
=H 30.2 50 +H4 +H5
1
+H4 2 B28.X
K11 B4.X_1 1 +V1 +V1
2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
C +K Y20.JPT Y21.JPT C
1
+H B28 P +V1 1 +V1 1
30.1 31 Y20 Y21
K11.X3 K11.X1 2 0 0
1
1
+H4 +H4 +H B28.X 2 2

BK 1Q
2
=H =H Splice.X6 Y20.JPT Y21.JPT
2
+V1 +V1
WH 1Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 25Q
WH 1Q
=M =K
+M +K6
29
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
46
A700D.X2 X1.S
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
X2 46
29
D =K =M A700D.TI1.GND D
+K6 +M
X2.B A700D LUFTFILTERVERSCHM.GND
4
=M+M/34.E2
X2.S UNTERDRUCK
4
1 MOTORECU
forbidden.
=H +K6
+H4 =K
M8 M
WH 1Q =H =H
=H +H3 +H3
Kl.15.6
62
63
2 +H3 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
60
A17b.X1 X1 62 X1 63
X1 60 =H A17b.GND_PWM7 =H A17b.GND_PWM8
GNDberMasseband
=H A17b.GND_PWM5 +H3 +H3

E E
F1110A/RD =K+K/15.E2
+H3 MasseLFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
A17b MasseLFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
A17b
A17b MasseNotlenkung =H+H/38.D5 Masse =H+H/38.D5 Masse
=H+H/38.D5 Masse CAN: CAN:
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
CAN: OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2

OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATION Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 24
WerkBischofshofenGmbH RIDECONTROL ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2
/33.E4
/33.E4
CAN: CAN:
/87.C2 ANALOGUEuniversal /87.C2 ANALOGUEuniversal
A A16b DRIVINGLIGHT A16b HIGHBEAM A
+K2 +K2
X1.37
X1.37
A A
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
A16b.UI1 A16b.UI2
X1 4 X1 5
A16b.X1 A16b.X1
5
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
4/7 5/7 2/7 3/7 S3.X2
4 5 2 3
=K =K =K =K
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
L R 49a 56b 56a 30 56
A4.X49 A4.X49 A4.X49 A4.X49
8
K.2 K.4 K.6 K.8
B B
A4 OUTPUTMODULE2
=K CAN:
+K1 LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT HIGHBEAM /91.F2 digital output 3
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K2
S3 A17b REVERSINGLIGHT
Kl.15
hb/lbF/A +H3
R LH A17b.DO3
0 E E E 30 86 E E 30 86 X1 37
L A17b.X1 X37b
1
37
WH 1.5Q K3 K3A
WH 1.5Q
+H3
F21 10A F4 7,5A F5 7,5A V9 F2 7,5A F3 7,5A V60
RD BN BN BN BN 0 +H3
/20.E7
1
87a 87 85 87a 87 85 X37a
A A A GND A A GND
WH 1.5Q
C C
R21 R4 R5 R2 R3
Kl.58aR
L21 L4 L5 L2 L3
A18.X2
4
X2 4 GND GND GND GND GND

A18.PWM7
WH 1.5Q
=K
+K4 A
/20.E5
A18 low beam A4.X44 A4.X45 A4.X45 F.5 A4.X45 A4.X45 +H4
1
3
6
/94.E3 OUTLETA7 E.3 F.3 F.1 F.6 Splice.X7
CAN: +H
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/45.E8
5
ELECTRICKEYPAD X16.S
Kl.58aL
/20.E6
/20.E6
/27.E7
X16.B
19
16
17
18
5
/27.E5
/20.E6
D X1.S X1.S D
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
B12.1
X1.B X1.B XE14r.b

19
16
17
18
XE14l.b
Kl.49
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aR
+K6
WH 1.5Q
/27.E6
/20.E5
/20.E6
/27.E5
1
WH 1.5Q
Kl.49
Kl.58aL
forbidden.
+K4
3
+K4 X22b.S
WH 1.5Q
XE14l.a XE14r.a *
1
2
X22b.S X22b.B 1 1
3
+H1 +H1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X22b.B
2
E14l E14r
SW 1.5Q
B12.X 2 2
5
5
1
XE14l.a. XE14r.a.
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
1 1 2 3 6 5 4 3 2 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 *
2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+H3 1 1
BK 1.5Q
E +V1 +V1 E
B12 P +B1 +K3 +K3 +B2
E3 E4
2
0 E1 E8 E9 E5 XE14l.b XE14r.b
0 H17 H20 E6 H52 H15 H50 H54 H56 H57 H55 H51 H16 H53 E7 H21 H18 0
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
2 0 0
B12.X 5 4 * 7 2 1 1 2 7 4 5
2
X16.B
6
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
E3.X E4.X *
1
1
SW 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
X16.S
BK 1.5QEXTEN
EXTENSION OF THE
6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
LICENCE-PLATE LIGHTING
FOR THEITALIAN-
+K3 +K3 +H2
VERSION
XMSP1b 9 10 XMSP7a 10 XMSP1c 4 XMSP1c 5 XMSP7b 1 XMSP1c 2 1
+H4 +H2
F Splice.X8 XMSP1c 3 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCHSTOPLIGHT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 25
WerkBischofshofenGmbH LOWBEAMHIGHBEAM ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
/7.B5
/7.B5
/7.E7
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
Kl.49a.2
/36.B2ANALOGUEUniversaleingang1 /36.B2ANALOGUEUniversaleingang2
Kl.49aL.2
Kl.49aR.2
A16b DRIVINGLIGHT A16b HIGHBEAM
+K2 +K2
A16b.UI1 A16b.UI2
5 S3.X2
S3.X2
S3.X2
S3.X2
X1 4 X1 5
A16b.X1 A16b.X1
+K1
+K1
+K1
+K1
5
2/7
4
4/7
5/7
3/7
+K1 +K1 +K1
S3.X1S3.X1S3.X1
3
2
3 2 5 4 5 2 3 A4.X49 A4.X49 A4.X49 A4.X49
8
K.2 K.4 K.6 K.8
B L R 49a 56b 56a 15 56 A4 B
=K
+K2 LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT HIGHBEAM
PROJ: 8920980_003
Kl.15
+K1
S3 E E E 30 86 E E 30 86
ab
0 K3 K3a
F21 F4 F5 F2 F3
L OR
a bc
10A 7,5A 7,5A 7,5A 7,5A

RD BN BN BN BN
87a 87 85 87a 87 85
A A A GND A A GND
C C
GND GND GND GND GND

HELLA A18.X2 HELLAint

4
X2 4 A4.X44 A4.X45 A4.X45F.5 A4.X45 A4.X45

5
8JB0019333001 8JB0019333001
6
3
1
LBHID6200003 A18.PWM7 E.3 F.3 F.1 F.6 LBHID6200003
+K4
A18 Abblentlicht
/39.E4 OUTLETA7 E3.Xb +K6 +K6 +K6 +K6 E4.Xb
19
16
17
18
CAN: X1.SX1.S X1.SX1.S
2
2
5
5
+V +V
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+V ELECTRIESKEYBOARD +V
17
18
19
16
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X321a X321b
/7.E6
/5.E5
/5.E6
/7.E5
58 58
D D
Kl.58aL.1
Kl.58aR.1
Kl.49.2
Kl.49.3
54 31 54 31
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
forbidden.
5
4
4
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+V +V
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
E3.Xa E4.Xa
5
5
install3-pin intstall 3pin
58 58
socket! 5 4 3 2 =V =V 2 3 4 5 socket!
+V1 +V1
+V E3 E4 +V
X321a H15 H50 H54 H56
H57 H55 H51 H16
X321b
E 0 0 E
1 1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
E3.Xa E4.Xa
1
1
31 54 54 31
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
E3.X E4.X
1
1
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
1.5Q,1.5Q BK,BK
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
XMSP1c 4 XMSP1c 5
1
1
E3.Xb E4.Xb
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 COUNTRYSPECIFIC Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 26
WerkBischofshofenGmbH TYPE/EXECUTION ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ELECTRICKEYPAD RD 1.5Q RD,RD 1.5Q,1.5Q RD 1.5Q Kl.30.F07 ELECTRICKEYPAD INPUTMODULE2
/19.F5
CAN: RD 1.5Q Kl.30 CAN: CAN:
/39.B3
A4.X50 A4.X50
3
/94.D3 OUTLETA1 * /94.C3 FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT ANALOGUEuniversal /87.C2
A18 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT L.4 L.3 A18 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT INDICATORSIGNAL A16b
+K4 A A4 +K4 A A +K2
A =K A18.PWM1 =K =K A18.Flasher A16b.UI3 A
X1 10 86 30 X1 6 6 X1
+K2
A18.X1 A18.X1 A16b.X1
6
10
K240 +K2
V53
85 87 87a
GND
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
L.1
A4.X50
1
RD 1.5Q
B WH 1.5Q
B
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
L.8 U.3 U.4

A4.X50 A4.X51 A4.X50 A4.X58 A4.X58
11
4
OLDM.6
A4 L.11
=K M.7
+K2
V89
C C
E 30 86 30 86 30 86 A 30 86 A 30 86 49 C A
K22 K22a K22b X1.J K25 X2.J K26

F07B 10A K1 X3.J

RD V11 V12 V13 10A 10A V15 10A

RD E V14 RD E RD E
87a 87 85 87a 87 85 87a 87 85 87a 87 85 87a 87 85 49a 31

A GND
R07B GND 0 GND 0 GND GND GND
F07bKL.15
L07B
V85 V86
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
V84 V83
GND
D V87 V88 D
forbidden.
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
A4.X51 A4.X50 A4.X50 A4.X51 A4.X58
WH 1.5Q 12
WH 1.5Q 5
WH 1.5Q 6
6
WH 1.5Q 10
M.12 L.5 L.6 M.10 U.6
OLDM.1 OLDM.3
+K1
S3.X1 +K6 +K6

3
10
7
9
3 2 5 X1.S X1.S X1.S X1.S
X1.B X1.B X1.B X1.B
10
WH 1.5Q
E L R 49a 56b 56a 30 56 E
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
E4/H16RIGHTFRONT
E3/H15LEFTFRONT
E1/H18RIGHTREAR
E5/H17LEFTREAR
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
Kl.49
Kl.49
Kl.49
Kl.49
+K1
S3
0 hb/lbF/A
/25.D7
/25.E5
/25.D2
/25.E4
R LH
0
L
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 27
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPTION
HORNOPERATIONVIAPUSHBUTTONSWITCHON +K
LHCONTROLLEVER Splice.X9
ELECTRICKEYPAD ELECTRICKEYPAD
A OPT1 CAN: CAN: A
sw4
OPT3
/94.D3 OUTLETA3 /94.D3 OUTLETA4
OPT2
sw5 A18 WINDSCREENWIPER A18 WASHINGPUMPREAR
sw3
+K4 A +K4 A
=K A18.PWM3 =K A18.PWM4
X1 12 X2 1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
OUTPUTMODULE2 A18.X1 A18.X2
1
12
CAN:
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
/91.C2 PWMOutput2(Array
A17b OPTIONS
+H3 A =K
K5a.X K.12
3
2
4
B
A17b.PWM2 * B
12
X1 5 +K6 3 2 5 4 A4.X49
25
X1.S
SW 1.5Q
I 86 15 S
5
X1.B A4 A4
PROJ: 8920980_003
25
G
=K =K
WH 1.5Q +K1
WH 1.5Q
+K2 +K2
Kl.15
Kl.15
V2.X1 K5a 31b 31
1
1 6 1
0
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
0 E K5a.X 86 30 E
1
WH 1.5Q 6
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
6905155
V2 B10a B10.X1 K8
1
1
1 F20 15A F18 10A
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
+H 1
WH 1.5Q
+H BU
V59
RD
V2.X2 1/1 +H +K2
C
B10 XMSP6a 10 85 87 87a C
A A
2 R20 GND R18
B10.X2 L20 L18
1
B10a.X2 +H
1
BK 1.5Q
+H
SW 1.5Q
GND GND
*
47
A4.X44 A4.X49 A4.X44
1
9
7
X1 47 E.9 K.1 E.7 *
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17b.GND_PWM2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=K
+H3 D
D EARTHOPTIONS +H2 D
A17b
/91.C5 EARTH 5 XMSP1a
CAN:
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
OUTPUTMODULE2
forbidden.
S3.X2
*
+K1
S3
M2.X1 M2.X2 M4.X M3.X M3.X M9.X
3
3
1
4
*
1
1
1
1
1 4 3 1 1
4 3 1 1
H
1/7
0 1 + +
1
horn wsbl 31b 53 53a
swbl
M
wsbl
swbl
31b 53 53a M
bl
bl
+K1 +K4
53c
+K1 M4 +K2 M9
WH 1.5Q
M2 M 0 M3 M 0
6/7
0 1
6
E wash 0 2 0 2 E
53b
WH 1.5Q M4.X 31 M9.X

sw
sw
31
2
7/7
7
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q 2
1 M3.X
2
2
1
53
0 J 1
WH 1.5Q
J
7
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
7
WH 1.5Q
15
6
6
31b
WH 1.5Q
4 +K2 +K2 +K2 +K2
4
XMSP6a XMSP6a XMSP6a XMSP6a

S3.X1
8 5 7 1
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WINDSCREENWASHERFRONT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 28
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ANDREARHOOTER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Splice.X9
A ELEKTRICKEYPAD ELEKTRICKEYPAD A
CAN: CAN:
/39.D4 OutputA3 /39.D4 OutputA4
A18 SWindscreen wiper A18 windscreen washerrear
+K6 +K4 +K4
25
X1.S A18.PWM3 A18.PWM4
X1 12 X2 1
25
A18.X1 A18.X2
1
12
=H
+H
B10.X1 +K2 +K2
1
3
2
4
=H *
10
12
1 3 2 5 4 A4.X55 A4.X55 A4.X49
9
B +H B
I 86 15 S
B10 K.12
G
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4 A4
2 +K1 =K
B10.X2 =K K5 31b 31
+K2
1
Kl.15
+K2
Kl.15
+H 6 1
E
0 E
=H
1
30 86 86 30
BK 1.5Q
F20 K271 K8 F18
15A 10A
BU +K2 RD
V59
V44
XMSP6a 10
87a 87 85 85 87 87a A
A
BK 1.5Q
GND GND
C C
+H2
GND GND
5 XMSP1a
A4.X55 A4.X49 A4.X44
11
7
1
A4.X44
9
* +K2 K.1 E.7 *

E.9
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
D D
+K2 +K2 +K2
S3
+K1
* M3.X
M3.X * M3.X M9.X
1
0
4
M2.X1 M2.X2 M4.X
1
1
3
4
1
1 4 3 1 1
1/7 4 3 1 1
H
+
forbidden.
+
1
wsbl
swbl
31b 53 53a M
bl
31b 53 53a M +K4
wsbl
swbl
bl M9
+K2
53c
6/7 +K1 M4 M
M2 M 0 M3 0
6
2
2
M9.X
31
sw
2
53b
7/7 M4.X
2
sw
31
S3.X2
7
2
2
M3.X
2
0 J 1
1
53
E +K2 E
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
J
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
7
7
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
15
6
6
31b
+K2 +K2
4 +K2 +K2 XMSP6a XMSP6a
4
7 1
S3.X1
XMSP6a 8 XMSP6a 5
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WINDSCREENWASHERFRONT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 29
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ANDREARHOOTER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WH 1.5Q
A A
U.5
A4.X58
5
A4
=K WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT
+K2
Kl.30
Kl.15
Kl.30
Kl.15
E1 E2 E1 E2
B 30 86 B
oder oder
30 86
Kl.30 KL.15 Kl.30 KL.15
F31A K31A F31B
PROJ: 8920980_003
V16 K31B
10A 10A V17
RD E1 A E2 E1 A E2 RD E1 A E2 E1 A E2
87a 87 85
A A 87a 87 85
R31A R31B
GND GND
L31A L31B
C C
GND GND
A18.X2
5
X2 5
=K A18.PWM8 A4.X46 A4.X46 A4.X46 A4.X46
8
+K4 A G.3 G.4 G.7 G.8
A18 WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
/94.E3 OUTLETA8
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD +K4 4 A4.46.4 +K4 8 A4.46.8
D X22a.B X22a.B D
4
+K2 +K2
1
X22a.S X22a.S
4
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
forbidden.
E10.X E10a..X E10b.X E11.X E11a.X E11b.X

1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
+K3 +K3 +K3 +K3

E10 E10a +K3 E11 E11a +K3
E10b E11b
E 2 2 0 2 2 2 0 2 E
E10.X E10a..X E10b.X E11.X E11a.X E11b.X
2
2
2
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
+K3 +K2 +K3 +K2
XMSP7a 5 XMSP7a 6 XMSP6.18 1 XMSP7a 7 XMSP7a 8 XMSP6.18 2
OPTIONXENON OPTIONXENON
WORKINGPROJECTOR WORKINGPROJECTOR
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTCABIN Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 30
WerkBischofshofenGmbH XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OLE3 Verb. 1 =K+K2A4.X58:7
A4.X58
8
U.8
A4
A =K WORKINGPROJECTORREARAMREAR A
WH 1.5Q
+K2
Kl.30
Kl.15
Kl.30
Kl.15
E1 E2 E1 E2 V32C
oder 30 86 oder
Kl.30 KL.15 Kl.30 KL.15
F32A K32A F32B
V18
10A 10A 30 86
B RD E1 A E2 E1 A E2 RD E1 A E2 E1 A E2 B
87a 87 85
A A K32B
PROJ: 8920980_003
V19
R32A GND R32B
87a 87 85
L32A L32B
GND
X58
GND GND
/32.A7
C C
A4.X46 A4.X46 A4.X46 A4.X46
10
G.5 G.6 G.9 G.10
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
+K6 +K6
12
13
14
11
X1.S X1.S X1.S X1.S
X1.B X1.B
11
13
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
D D
+H +H
3
1
X16.S X16.S
X16.B X16.B
1
3
forbidden.
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
A18.X2
6
X2 6
=K A18.PWM9 E16.X E17.X
1
1
+K4 A 1 1
+H1
A18 WORKINGPROJECTORREAR
/94.E3 OUTLETA9 E16 E17
CAN:
E ELECTRICKEYPAD 2 2 E
E16.X E17.X
2
2
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+H +H
X16.B X16.B
2
4
X16.S X16.S
2
4
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
+H2 +H2
F XMSP1a 2 XMSP1a 3 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WORKINGPROJECTORREARREAR Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 31
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+K2
A4.X58
WH 1.5Q
U7
A4
A =K WORKINGPROJECTORREARAMCABROOF A
+K2
X58
0
Kl.30
Kl.15
Kl.30
Kl.15
V33C
/31.C8
E1 E2 E1 E2
oder 30 86 oder
Kl.30 KL.15 Kl.30 KL.15
F33A K33A F33B
V20
10A 10A 30 86
B RD E1 A E2 E1 A E2 RD E1 A E2 E1 A E2 B
87a 87 85
A A K33B
PROJ: 8920980_003
V21
R33A GND R33B
87a 87 85
L33A L33B
GND
GND GND
C C
A4.X46 A4.X46 A4.X46 A4.X46

1
WH 2Q 12
11
G.1 G.2 G.11 G.12
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
10
X22a.B X22a.B X22a.B X22a.B
7
9
WORKINGPROJECTOR X22a.S X22a.S WORKINGPROJECTOR WORKINGPROJECTOR X22a.S X22a.S WORKINGPROJECTOR
7
10
SIMPLE DOUBLE SIMPLE DOUBLE
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K =K
+K3 +K3 +K3 +K3
D X26.B X27.B X28.B X29.B D
1
1
X26.S X27.S X26a.S X28.S X29.S X28a.S
1
1
SW 1.5Q
+K3 +K3
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
forbidden.
E12.X E12a.X E12.b.X E13.X E13a.X E13.b.X

1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
+K3 +K3 +K3 +K3 +K3 +K3
E12 E12a E12.b E13 E13a E13.b
2 2 2 2 2 2
E E12.X E12a.X E12.b.X E13.X E13a.X E13.b.X E
2
2
SW 1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K3 +K3 +K3 +K3 +K3

2
2
X26.S X27.S X26a.S X28.S X29.S X28a.S
X26.B X27.B X28.B X29.B
2
2
=K =K
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
+K3 +K3 +K3 +K3
F XMSP7a 3 XMSP7a 4 XMSP7a 1 XMSP7a 2 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WORKINGPROJECTORREARCABIN Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 32
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ELECTRICKEYPAD ELECTRICKEYPAD
A CAN: CAN: A
/94.D3 OUTLETA2 /94.D3 OUTLETA5
A18 WARNINGBEACON A18 REARWINDOWHEATER
+K4 A +K4 A
=K A18.PWM2 =K A18.PWM5
X1 11 OptionBACKUPALARM X2 2
A18.X1 OPTICALOPTIONALREVERSINGACTIVE A18.X2
2
11
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q BK 1.5Q =K
RD 1Q
H.4
A4.X47
4
B B
L.12 +K2 A4
12
10
A4.X50 A4.X50.12a S212.X1 S212.X2 +K2
3
1
=K
PROJ: 8920980_003
XMSP6e
Kl.15
3 10 1
+K2
A4
0
=K S212a
S212 =K
Kl.30
E 30 86
+K2 210
+K4 +K2
1 5 9 K10
E 30 86 F74 15A
S212.X1 S212.X2
9
BU V57
K9 87a 87 85
C
F25 10A A GND C
RD V58
R74
87a 87 85 L74
A GND
R25
WH 1.5Q
L25 GND
A4.X47 A4.X47
2
GND
H.1 H.2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
=K =K
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4.X55 A4.X50 A4.X50

8
10
R.8 L.9 L.10

D +K4 D
+K6 X22a.B
6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
35
36
X2.S X22a.S
6
X2.B +K3
35
36
forbidden.
=K+K4S212.X2:9
+K6 +K6 Splice.X11 WH 2.5Q
+K6 +K4
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
15
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
X1.S X22a.B
5
X22a.S
5
X1.37
X1.37
R6a.X R6b.X R12.X1

WH 1.5Q
1
1
Verb. 1 1 +K2 1
E +K3 +K3 R12 E
/25.A8
/25.A8
R6a R6b
OLE4
H22.X 0 0 0
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
2 2 2
REVERSINGLIGHT
1
R6a.X R6b.X R12.X2
1
2
2
+K3
H22
BK 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
M =K
Masse
Splice.X12 BK 2.5Q
+K3 +K2
WH 1.5Q +K2
F
OPTIONMIRRORHEATING XMSP6.13 1 XMSP6c 1 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WARNINGBEACONMIRRORAND Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 33
WerkBischofshofenGmbH REARWINDOWHEATER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RD 2.5Q RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=K =K
A T1.X A
4
C.7 O.5 S.9 S.5
BK 2.5Q
1
A4.X42 A4.X53 A4.X56 A4.X56 4 1
5
+
24V
A4 A4 A4 +K2
=K =K =K T1 +K2
12V XMSP6a
Kl.30
4
+K2 +K2 +K2 0 + +
3 2 6 5
E E E T1.X
2
3
5
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
30 86 =K =K =K =K
F30 15A F75 10A F76 10A
BU RD RD
K12
WH 1.5Q
B B
V3
A 0 A A
R30 /19.B8 R75 R76
F8Kl.58 87a 87 85
PROJ: 8920980_003
L30 L75 L76
WH 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
GND GND GND
+K4 +K4
12
X22b.S X22a.B
11
C A4.X55 A4.X53 A4.X56 A4.X56 X22b.B X22a.S C
6
12
11
R.6 * O.3 S.7 S.3 +K4
WH 1.5Q RD 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
3
XMSP6a =K =K =K
+K2
A3.X1
8
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
7 4 8
IGN +
D +K3 D
A3 RADIO
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
1
LSre LSli
W1
3 4 5 6 +K3
forbidden.
A3.X2
6
=K =K =K =K
RD 0.75Q
BK 0.75Q
BK 0.75Q
RD 0.75Q
RD<>BNRD
BK<>BN
X70.X1 X70.X2
2
+K4
1
E E
X71 1 2 +K5 1 2
+ X70 + B11l.X1 B11r.X1
1
10165605 10165605
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1 1
ELECTRICALSOCKET12V +K3 +K3
B11l B11r
CIGARETTE 2 2
LIGHTER
B11l.X2
1
24V B11r.X2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 CIGARETTELIGHTERELECTRICALSOCKET12VRADIO Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 34
WerkBischofshofenGmbH LOUDSPEAKER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
=K =K
A11.X1 A11.X1
7
X1 8 X1 7
3
A 2 4
A
23 =K A11.CAN_Low =K A11.CAN_High A
+K4 A +K4 A
5
20 30 A
13
A11 CAN_Low A11 CAN_High
10
40
A
90
100
11
0
12 MP /95.E4 CAN_Low /95.D4 CAN_High
mph check CAN: CAN:
CANBUS3
50
40
120
km/h
2
0
A13.X2
1
+K1 MAINKEYBOARD MAINKEYBOARD
1 +K1
A13 1/2 MAINKEYBOARD MAINKEYBOARD MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE
BK 1.5Q
3/
1/
4 4
T =K CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
1/1
STOP rpm
time
N /95.D4 CAN_Low /95.D4 CAN_High /85.C1 /85.C1
A11 A11 A15 A15
hours
CAN_Low CAN_High CANLOW3 CANHIGH3

+K2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +K4 A +K4 A +K2 A +K2 A
6 XMSP6a
=K A11.CAN_Low =K A11.CAN_High =K A15.CAN3L =K A15.CAN3H
B A13.X1 B
1
4
X1 4 X1 3 .CAN.X 2 .CAN.X 7
A11.X1 A11.X1 A15.CAN.X A15.CAN.X
2
4
7
=K =K =K =K +K4 +K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
=K =K =K =K
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
=K =K
13
14
A22.X1 A22.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
7
X1 8 X1 7 X1 13 X1 14
A22.CAN_Low A22.CAN_High A21.CAN1 A21.CAN1
C +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A C
A22 CAN_Low A22 CAN_High A21 CAN1_LowINPUT A21 CAN1_HighINPUT
/99.C2 CAN_Low /99.C2 CAN_High /96.C2 CAN1_Low&#5486 /96.C2 CAN1_High&#5486
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON HEAT/AIRCON HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

HEAT/AIRCON HEAT/AIRCON HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:

A4 /99.C2 CAN_Low /99.C2 CAN_High /96.C2 CAN1_LowOUT /96.C2 CAN1_HighOUT
WIRINGHARNESS CAN_Low CAN_High CAN1_LowOUT CAN1_HighOUT
=K
Kl.15
PREPARATION A A A A
+K2 COLOURGRAPHICDISPLAY
0.5Q
WH 0.5Q

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 4 X1 3 X1 16 X1 17
BK
A22.X1 A22.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
16
17
D E D
=K =K
F10 5A
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
LBN A13a.X
1
2
forbidden.
+K1
A
R10 =K =K =K =K
L10
A19.X1 A19.X1 A19.X1 A19.X1

8
3
X1 8 X1 7 X1 4 X1 3
A19.CAN_Low A19.CAN_High A19.CAN_Low A19.CAN_High
WH 0.5Q
BK 1.5Q
GND A A A A
+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
E * F.11 A19 CAN_Low A19 CAN_High A19 CAN_Low A19 CAN_High E
A4.X45 /98.D4 CAN_Low /98.D4 CAN_High /98.C4 CAN_Low /98.C4 CAN_High
11
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OPTIONSKEYBOARD OPTIONSKEYBOARD OPTIONSKEYBOARD OPTIONSKEYBOARD

WH,WH 0.5Q,0.5Q
A19.X2
8
3
+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
RD 1Q
+K2 BU 1Q
XMSP6b 2 +K2
F XMSP6c 8 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 DISPLAYUNIT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 35
WerkBischofshofenGmbH CANBUS3 ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DISPLAYCAN A11.X1 A11.X1
7
A
X1 8 X1 7 A
3
2 4
A A11.CAN_Low A11.CAN_High
23
+K4 +K4 CANCONNECTION3(C)
5
20 30 A
13
A11 CAN_Low A11 CAN_High
40
10
A
90
100
11
0
12 MP /40.C4 CAN_Low /40.C4 CAN_High
mph check
CAN: CAN:
50
2
120
40
km/h
0
A13.X2 HAUPTTASTATUR HAUPTTASTATUR
1
+K1 1
A13 1/2
+K1 HAUPTTASTATUR HAUPTTASTATUR MasterModul MasterModul
BK 1.5Q
4 3/
1/ 4
T CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
1/1
STOP rpm
time
hours N /40.C4 CAN_Low /40.C4 CAN_High /33.C1 /33.C1
+K2 A11 CAN_Low A11 CAN_High A15 CANLOW3 A15 CANHIGH3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 XMSP6a +K4 +K4 +K2 +K2
A11.CAN_Low A11.CAN_High A15.CAN3L A15.CAN3H
A13.X1
3
1
4
2
B X1 4 X1 3 .CAN.X 2 .CAN.X 7 B
A11.X1 A11.X1 A15..CAN.X A15..CAN.X
3
4
7
W156 +WL006 BU
W156 +WL006 RD
W156 +WL010 BU
W156 +WL010 RD
PROJ: 8920980_003
W156 +WL005 RD
W156 +WL005 BU
+K4 +K4
13
14
A22.X1 A22.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
7
X1 8 X1 7 X1 13 X1 14
+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
A22 CAN_Low A22 CAN_High A21 CAN1_LowIN A21 CAN1_HighIN
C /43.C2 CAN_Low /43.C2 CAN_High /41.C4 CAN1_LowIN /41.C4 CAN1_HighIN C
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:

/43.C2 CAN_Low /43.C2 CAN_High /41.C4 CAN1_LowOUT /41.D4 CAN1_HighOUT

A22 A22 A21 A21
CAN_Low CAN_High CAN1_LowOUT CAN1_HighOUT

+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
BK 0.5Q
WH 0.5Q

A4 X1 4 X1 3 X1 16 X1 17
=K A22.X1 A22.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
17
4
16
Kl.15
+K4 +K4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K2
W156 +WL045 BU
W156 +WL045 RD
W156 +WL034 BU
W156 +WL034 RD
D E D
F10
5A
LBN +K4 +K4
forbidden.
A19.X1 A19.X1 A19.X1 A19.X1
3
8
4
A X1 8 X1 7 X1 4 X1 3
A19.CAN_Low A19.CAN_High A19.CAN_Low A19.CAN_High
+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
A19 CAN_Low A19 CAN_High A19 CAN_Low A19 CAN_High

/42.C4 CAN_Low /42.C4 CAN_High /42.C4 CAN_Low /42.C4 CAN_High

CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
GND
OPTIONSTASTATUR OPTIONSTASTATUR OPTIONSTASTATUR OPTIONSTASTATUR
E E
A4.X45
11
F.11
A19.X2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
3
4
8
7
+K2 W156 +WL036 RD
XMSP6b 2 W156 +WL036 BU
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 DISPLAYUNIT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 36
WerkBischofshofenGmbH CANBUS3 ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE
CAN: CAN:
/85.C1 /85.C1
A15 CANLOW1 A15 CANHIGH1
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE1
A +K2 A +K2 A A
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
=K A15.CAN1L =K A15.CAN1H
.CAN.X 4 .CAN.X 5
A15.CAN.X A15.CAN.X
5
=K =K
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
B +K6 B
A17a.X1.43.57 A17a.X1.43.57
38
39
2
X1.S X1.S +H3 +H3
X1.B X1.B
PROJ: 8920980_003
38
39
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
CANBUS1
BU 1Q
40
54
44
58
44
58
C A700D.X2 A700D.X2 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 C
X2 40 X2 54 X1 44 X1 58 X1 44 X1 58
A700D.CAN1L.1 A700D.CAN1R A17a.CAN_Low A17a.CAN_High A16c.CAN_Low A16c.CAN_High
+M +M +H3 D +H3 +H3 D +H3
CAN1LOW CAN1RES CANlow CANhigh CANlow CANhigh

A700D A700D A17a A17a A16c A16c

/93.C6 /93.C6 /90.C5 CANlow /90.D5 CANhigh /88.C5 CANlow /88.D5 CANhigh
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:

ENGINEECU ENGINEECU OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3
ENGINEECU ENGINEECU OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3
/93.C6 /93.C6 /90.C5 CANlow /90.D5 CANhigh /88.C5 CANlow /88.D5 CANhigh
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A700D CAN1LOW A700D CAN1HIGH A17a CANlow A17a CANhigh A16c CANlow A16c CANhigh
+M +M +H3 D +H3 +H3 D +H3
D A700D.CAN1L.2 A700D.CAN1H.1 A17a.CAN_Low A17a.CAN_High A16c.CAN_Low A16c.CAN_High
D
X2 9 X2 8 X1 43 X1 57 X1 43 X1 57
A700D.X2 A700D.X2 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1
9
43
57
43
57
forbidden.
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
E E
43
57
44
58
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 +H3 +H3
X1 43 X1 57 X1 44 X1 58 A16a.X1.44 XA16a.X1.58
1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16a.CAN_Low A16a.CAN_High A16a.CAN_Low A16a.CAN_High

+H3 D +H3 +H3 D +H3
A16a CANlow(Resverb.) A16a CANhigh(Resverb.) A16a CANlow A16a CANhigh
/86.C5 CANlow /86.D5 CANhigh /86.C5 CANlow /86.D5 CANhigh
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 CANBUS1 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 37
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
WH 1.5Q
43
29
A17c.X1 A17c.X1
INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 X1 43 X1 29
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: A17c.CAN_Low A17c.CAN_Res
/87.C5 CANlow /87.D5 CANhigh /87.C5 CANlow /87.D5 CANhigh +H3 D +H3
A16b CANlow A16b CANhigh A16b CANlow(CANEm. A16b CANhigh(CANEm A17c CANlow(CANEm.CAN_Resverb.) A17c RESERVE
B +K2 D +K2 +K2 D +K2 /92.C5 CANlow /92.E2 CANMATCHINGRESISTOR B
A16b.CAN_Low A16b.CAN_High A16b.CAN_Low A16b.CAN_High CAN: CAN:
X1 44 X1 58 X1 43 X1 57 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1
44
58
43
57
OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN: CAN:
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
/92.C5 CANlow /92.D5 CANhigh
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
A17c CANlow A17c CANhigh
+H3 D +H3
A17c A17c.CAN_High
A17b..X1.43.57 A17b..X1.43.57 X1 44 X1 58
1
A15.CAN.X A15.CAN.X
6
+K +K A17c.X1 A17c.X1
44
58
C .CAN.X 3 .CAN.X 6 +K6 C
58
59
=K A15.CAN2L =K A15.CAN2H X1.S X1.S
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
+K2 A +K2 A X1.B X1.B
58
59
A15 CANLOW2 A15 CANHIGH2
/85.C1 /85.C1
CAN: CAN:
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE
44
58
A16d.X1 A16d.X1
X1 44
A16d.CAN_Low
X1 58
A16d.CAN_High
CANBUS2
+H3 D +H3
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
44
58
A16d CANlow A16d CANhigh A17b.X1 A17b.X1
/89.C5 CANlow /89.D5 CANhigh X1 44 X1 58
D CAN: CAN: A17b A17b.CAN_High D
INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 +H3 D +H3
INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 A17b CANlow A17b CANhigh
CAN: CAN: /91.C5 CANlow /91.D5 CANhigh
forbidden.
/89.C5 CANlow /89.D5 CANhigh CAN: CAN: +H3
57
A16d A16d OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 A17b.X143a A17b.X1
1
CANlow(Resverb.) CANhigh(Resverb.)
+H3 D +H3 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 X1 57
A16d.CAN_Low A16d.CAN_High CAN: CAN: A17b.CAN_High
X1 43 X1 57 /91.C5 CANlow /91.E2 CANMATCHINGRESISTOR +H3

A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A17b CANlow(CANEm. A17b CANEND A17b CANhigh(CANEm.

43
57
+H3 D +H3 /91.D5 CANhigh

A17b.CAN_Low A17b.CAN_Res CAN:
E X1 43 X1 29 OUTPUTMODULE2 E
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
A17b.X1 A17b.X1
43
29
WH 1.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K +K
A17b.X1.44 A17b.X1.58
1
ERECTIONOUTPUTMODULE3
CANEND
(JUMPER)
REMOVE!
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 CANBUS2 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 38
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYELECTRICKEYPAD SUPPLYMAINKEYBOARD
A A
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
/27.A5 F07Kl.30
E
F71 10A
RD
B
XMSP6b 1
B
A
Kl.30
+K2
R71
XMSP6b 3
L71 +K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
GND
* A4.X42 * A4.X42
4
C.4 C.6
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
C C
A11.X1 A11.X1
2
1
A18.X1 A18.X1 5 A18.X1 X1 1 X1 2
2
X1 1 X1 5 X1 2 =K A11.Kl15 =K A11.GND
=K A18.Kl15 =K A18.Kl30 =K A18.GND +K4 A +K4 A

+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A A11 +24V A11 SUPPLYEARTH
A18 INFORMATIONINPUT A18 SUPPLY A18 SUPPLYEARTH /95.D4 SUPPLY /95.D4 SUPPLYEARTH
/94.C3 INFORMATIONINPUT /94.C3 SUPPLY /94.C3 SUPPLYEARTH CAN: CAN:
CAN: CAN: CAN: MAINKEYBOARD MAINKEYBOARD
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
ELECTRICKEYPAD ELECTRICKEYPAD ELECTRICKEYPAD
D D
SUPPLYOPTIONKEYPAD SUPPLYHEAT/AIRCONKEYBOARD
forbidden.
/51.B6
/51.B6
XMSP6c 6 XMSP6c 7
+K2 +K2
Kl.15
Kl.15
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A19.X1 A19.X1 A19.X1 A22.X1 A22.X1 A22.X1

5
5
1
1
X1 1 X1 5 X1 2 X1 1 X1 2 X1 5
A19.Kl15 A19.Kl15 A19.GND A22.Kl15 A22.GND A22.Kl15
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
A19 INFORMATIONINPUT A19 SUPPLYKl.15 A19 SUPPLYEARTH A22 INFORMATIONINPUT A22 SUPPLYEARTH A22 SUPPLYKl.15
/98.C4 INFORMATIONINPUT /98.D4 SUPPLY /98.C4 SUPPLYEARTH /99.C2 INFORMATIONINPUT /99.C2 SUPPLYEARTH /99.C2 SUPPLY
F OPTIONSKEYBOARD OPTIONSKEYBOARD OPTIONSKEYBOARD HEAT/AIRCON HEAT/AIRCON HEAT/AIRCON F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYKEYPADS Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 39
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYMASTERMODULE SUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG
MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE
A CAN: CAN: CAN: A
/85.C5 /85.B5 /85.B5
A.4 A15 SIGNALGround(S A15 Receive(RXD) A15 Transmit(TXD)
A4.X40 +K2 +K2 +K2
4
A A A
=K A15.GND =K A15.RXD =K A15.TXD
A4 .COM4.X 5 .COM4.X 2 .COM4.X 3
=K A15.COM4.X A15.COM4.X A15.COM4.X
2
5
3
Kl.30
Kl.15
+K2
=K =K =K
E E
B B
F35 10A F54 5A

PROJ: 8920980_003
RD HBR
A A
R35 R54
A4
L35 L54 =K
+K2
Kl.30
GND GND
C E C
XMSP6b 9 XMSP6b 10
+K2 +K2
F26 10A
BK 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
RD
A4.X42
8
A
C.8
R26
L26
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
D D
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
forbidden.
A4.X40 A4.X40
10
A.9 A.10
RD 1.5Q RD 1.5Q
A9Kl.30
XMSP6b 4
+K2
E BK 1.5Q E
A15.X A15.X A15.X A15.X /79.C6
5
6
1
.PWR.X 1 .PWR.X 5 .PWR.X 2 .PWR.X 6

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K A15.GND =K A15.Shield =K A15.DIGIN0 =K A15.VBat

+K2 A +K2 A +K2 A +K2 A
A15 EARTH A15 HOUSINGMASTER A15 Kl.15 A15 Kl.30 *9
/85.B1 /85.C1 /85.B1 /85.C1 +K2
IMMOBILISERKl.30
G
B
I
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: X60
MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE MASTERMODULE
F
DIAGNOSTICPLUG F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYMASTER Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 40
WerkBischofshofenGmbH SUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE2 SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1
A A
A4 A4
=K =K
Kl.15
Kl.15
Kl.15
+K2 +K2
E E E
F43 5A F45 10A F44 10A

VI RD RD
B B
A A A
R43 R45 R44
PROJ: 8920980_003
L43 L45 L44

X
GND GND GND

/42.C2
C C
A4.X56 A4.X44 A4.X40

12
5
11
S.12 E.11 A.5

WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
OLE7
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6
41
Verb.
+K XMSP6b 8 XMSP6b 6 XMSP1a 6 X1.S XMSP1a 7

D Splice.X1 D
WH 1.5Q +K2 +K2 +H2 X1.B +H2
41
1
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+K6
40
forbidden.
X1.S
=H+H3A17c.X1:2,=K+K6X2.S:33
X1.B
40
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
16
30
16
30
A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1
31
31
2
2
E X1 2 X1 16 X1 30 X1 31 X1 2 X1 16 X1 30 X1 31 E
A16b.24V_logic A16b.GND_logic A16b.24V A16b.GND A16a.24V_logic A16a.GND_logic A16a.24V A16a.GND
WH 1.5Q
+K2 A +K2 A +K2 +K2 +H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16b VBatt24VLog A16b EARTHLOGIK A16b VBatt24V A16b SUPPLYEARTH A16a VBatt24VLog A16a SUPPLYGNDLOGIK A16a VBatt24V A16a SUPPLYEARTH
/87.C2 SUPPLY24V /87.D2 EARTHLOGICALPART /87.E2 SUPPLY24V /87.E2 EARTH /86.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART /86.D2 EARTHLOGICALPART /86.E2 SUPPLY24V /86.E2 EARTH
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1
X
/48.C2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1AND2 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 41
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYOutputmodule1
A A
A4
=K
Kl.15
Kl.15
+K2
Kl.15
E E
E
F47 10A F48 10A
F43 5A RD RD
VI
B B
A A
A
R43 R47 R48
PROJ: 8920980_003
L43 L47 L48

/41.B1
GND GND GND

X
C C
A4.X56 A4.X44 A4.X44
8
11
10
S.11 E.8 E.10
+K2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Splice.X2 WH 1.5Q Splice.X2.F43KL.15
/44.C2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
OLE8
Verb.
+K6 +K6 +K6

42
43
44
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1.S XMSP1a 8 X1.S XMSP1a 9 X1.S XMSP1a 10

X1.B +H2 X1.B +H2 X1.B +H2
42
43
44
1
D D
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
=K+K6X2.S:64
forbidden.
16
15
17
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1

2
3
WH 1.5Q
1
X1 2 X1 16 X1 1 X1 3 X1 15 X1 17
A17a.24V_logic A17a.GND_logic A17a.24V_B1 A17a.GND A17a.24V_B2 A17a.GND
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
E A17a VBatt24VLog A17a SUPPLYEARTHLOGICALPART A17a VBatt24VBank1 A17a SUPPLYEARTH A17a SUPPLY24VBank2 A17a SUPPLYEARTH E
/90.C1 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART /90.D1 EARTHLOGICALPART /90.B1 SUPPLY24VBANK1 /90.C1 EARTH /90.D1 SUPPLY24VBank2 /90.D1 EARTH
Kl.15

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1

/71.C1
SUPPLYLOGIC SUPPLYBANK1 SUPPLYBANK2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 42
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYOutputmodule1 SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4 Kl.15 Kl.15 A4
=K =K
Kl.15
Kl.15
A A
+K2 +K2
E E E E
F59 10A F60 10A F51 10A F52 10A

RD RD RD RD
A A A A
R59 R60 R51 R52
L59 L60 L51 L52
B B
GND GND GND GND
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X43 A4.X43 A4.X42 A4.X42
11
D.4 D.5 C.3 C.11
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
+K6 +K6 +K6 +K6

45
46
50
51
X1.S X1.S X1.S X1.S
X1.B X1.B X1.B X1.B
45
46
50
51
C C
32
34
32
34
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1
X1 32 X1 34 X1 32 X1 34
A17b.V_DO1 A17b.V_DO2 A17a.V_DO1 A17a.V_DO2
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
A17b VBattSUPPLYDO1 A17b SUPPLYSUPPLYDO A17a SUPPLYSUPPLYDO1 A17a SUPPLYSUPPLYDO2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/91.E2 SUPPLY /91.E2 SUPPLY /90.E1 SUPPLYfor digital output1 /90.E1 SUPPLYforDIGTALOUTPUT2
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
D OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 D
OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
/91.E2 digital output 1 XMSP1b 1 XMSP1b 2 /91.E2 digital output2 /90.E1 digital output1 XMSP1b 7 XMSP1b 8 /90.E1 digital output2
forbidden.
A17b 2.ASTpump1 +H2 +H2 A17b 2.ASTTRANSMISSION A17a 2.ASTJoystickzuM2/28 +H2 +H2 A17a 2.ASTpump2zuM2/14
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17b.DO1 A17b.DO2 A17a.DO1 A17a.DO2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
X1 33 X1 35 X1 33 X1 35
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1

33
35
33
35
E E
28
26
12
14
28
26
12
14
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
X1 28 X1 26 X1 12 X1 14 X1 28 X1 26 X1 12 X1 14
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17a.24V_B4 A17a.GND A17a.GND A17a.24V_B3 A17b.24V_B4 A17b.GND A17b.GND A17b.24V_B3

+H3 +H3 +H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3 +H3 A +H3 A
A17aVBatt24VBk4zuM2/33(2.AST) A17a SUPPLYEARTH A17a SUPPLYEARTH A17aVBatt24VBk3zuM2/35(2.AST) A17b VBatt24VBk4 A17b SUPPLYEARTH A17b SUPPLYEARTH A17b VBatt24VBK3
/90.E1 SUPPLY24VBank4 /90.E1 EARTH /90.C1 EARTH /90.D1 SUPPLY24VBank3 /91.E2 SUPPLY24VBank4 /91.E2 EARTH /91.C2 EARTH /91.D2 SUPPLY24VBank3
OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYBANK4 SUPPLYBANK3 SUPPLYBANK4 SUPPLYBANK3

F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1AND2 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 43
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4
A =K A
Kl.15
Kl.15
+K2
E E
F55 10A F56 10A

RD RD
A A
B R55 R56 B
L55 L56
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND GND
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2
A4.X40 A4.X43
12
6
/42.C3
C A.12 D.6 C
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Splice.X2.F43KL.15
XMSP1b 4 XMSP1b 5 XMSP1b 6

+H2 +H2 +H2
+K6 +K6
48
49
X1.S X1.S
X1.B X1.B
48
49
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
D D
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
16
15
17
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1

2
3
1
X1 2 X1 16 X1 1 X1 3 X1 15 X1 17
A17b.24V_logic A17b.GND_logic A17b.24V_B1 A17b.GND A17b.24V_B2 A17b.GND
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
E A17b VBatt24VLOGICALPART A17b VBattEARTH A17b VBatt24VBank1 A17b SUPPLYEARTH A17b VBatt24VBank2 A17b SUPPLYEARTH E
/91.C2 SUPPLY24V /91.D2 EARTHLOGICALPART /91.B2 SUPPLY24V /91.C2 EARTH /91.D2 SUPPLY24VBank2 /91.D2 EARTH
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
SUPPLYLOGIC SUPPLYBANK1 SUPPLYBANK2
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 44
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYOutputmodule2 OPTIONBackupALARMCANBESWITCHEDOFF
OUTPUTMODULE2
A4 Kl.15 Kl.15 CAN:
A4 Kl.15
=K Digitalausgang4 /91.F2 =K
A A17b +K2 A
+K2 BackupALARM
E E E
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+H3
A17b.DO4
39 X1
F61 10A F62 10A S43.X1 S43.X2 F22 10A
9
1
RD RD A17b.X1 RD
39
1 9
=K
10
A A +K4 A
R61 R62 S43 R22
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
R 0
L61 L62 L22
5 10
S43.X1 S43.X2
10
B B
OPTION&#5482
WH 1.5Q
GND GND GND
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
Rear side/ERECTIONUPbonnet
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X44
5
A4.X43 A4.X42
5
10
D.10 C.5 +K2

WH 1.5Q 1 XMSP6d
WH 1.5Q
21
22
X2.S X2.S
X2.B
21
X2.B
22
+K6 +K6
OLE9
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
C C
Verb.
H22a.X1 B16a.X1
WH 1.5Q
B16c.X1
1
1 +H1 B16.X +H5 B16b.X
1
1
+H1
1
H22a M +H5 +H5

0 B16 B16
=K+K4S43.X2:9
0
2 +H1 +H5
2 B16a.X1
2
H22a.X2 B16c.X1 B16.X B16b.X
1
2
BK 1.5Q
+K6 +K6
53
52
X1.S X1.S +K6
20
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1.S
X1.B X1.B
52
53
X1.B
20
D D
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
E200.X
9
*
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K4
WH 1.5Q
E200
2
E200.X
10
E E
B12.1
BK 1.5Q
54
A17b.X1
36
38
A17b.X1 A17b.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
54 X1
/25.D1
X1 36 X1 38
A17b.V_DO3 A17b A17b.GND_DO4
+H3 +H3 +H3

VBattDO3 VBattD04 EARTHBackup A17b +K2
A17b A17b
/91.F2 SUPPLY /91.F2 SUPPLY EARTH /91.D5 XMSP6a 9
STOPLIGHT
CAN: CAN: CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 45
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SupplyOutputmodule2 OptionBackupAlarmwhich can be switched off

OUTPUTMODUL2
A4 Kl.15 Kl.15 CAN: A4 Kl.15
A =K Digitalausgang4 =H+H/51.F2 =K A
+K2 Reserve A17b +K2 E
E E +H3
A17b.DO4 =H F22
F61 F62 39 X1
10A 10A 10A
A17b.X1
39
S43.X1 S43.X2 RD
9
RD RD
+H3 1 9
A A =H =K 10
A
+K4
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
S43
0
=K 5 10
Rckfahrwarneinrichtungoptisch +K4 S43.X1 S43.X2
10
B GND GND GND B
S43a
S2 R
Heckseitig/MontageaufMotorhaube 6905201
6002120 0
=K A4.X44
5
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X43 A4.X42
5
10
D.10 C.5 +K2

WH 1.5Q 1 XMSP6d
WH 1.5Q
+K6
21
22
X2.S X2.S
Verb. A4.X44:5
X2.B X2.B
22
21
WH 1.5Q
+H5 +K6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
B16.X
1
=H
B16c.X1 B16a.X1
WH 1.5Q
H22a.X1 +H5
1
C 1 +H1 +H5 B16b.X
1
1 1 C
+H1 =H
1
H22a M +H5 +H5
0 B16 B16
=K+K4S43.X2:9
0 0
2 =H
+H1 2 +H5 2
2
=K =K H22a.X2 B16b.X
2
2
B16c.X1 B16a.X1
+K6 +K6 +H5
53
52
X1.S X1.S =H +K6
20
B16.X
2
X1.B X1.B X1.S
52
53
+H5 X1.B
20
+K6 +K6
=K =K
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
D D
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
=H
B12.1.2
+H3 +H3 +H3
54
A17b.X1
36
38
A17b.X1 A17b.X1
X1 36 X1 38 54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4 =H
=K+K/7.D1
E =H A17b.V_DO3 =H A17b E
+H3 +H3 +H3
VBattDO3 Reserve Reserve A17b
A17b A17b Masse =H+H/51.D5
=H+H/51.F2
VersorgungfrDigitalausgang3
=H+H/51.F2
VersorgungfrDigitalausgang4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
CAN: CAN: CAN:
Bremslicht
OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 46
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+K2
+K2
A4.X40.3a
1
WH 1.5Q Kl.30a
A.3 1
A A
SUPPLYLHECUUP/CR A4.X40
OLE10
A4
RD 6Q
=K +K6
Verb.
37
Kl.30
Kl.15
Kl.30
+K2 X1.S
X1.B
37
E E E
1
F36 40A F24 10A F38 5A
=K
=K+K2K216:87
OG RD LBN
1
WH 1.5Q
B +K2.RH B
+K2
A A A
F216
R36 R24 R38
5A
PROJ: 8920980_003
L36 L24 L38 LBN 2 100mm
RD 1.5Q
GND GND GND
68
A700D.X2
X2 68
A4.X40 A4.X40 A4.X41 A700D.15
1
2
+M
A.1 A.2 +K2
B.2
A700D IGNITION
/93.B2
C XMSP6c 2 XMSP6c 3 ON C
+K3 21
+K2 ENGINEECU
S216
22
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
XMSP6c 4
RD 2.5Q
BU 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BU 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
D +K2.RH 30 D
+K6 +K6 +K6
54
55
24
21
56
57
X1.S X1.S X1.S X1.S X1.S X1.S +K2
X1.B X1.B X1.B X1.B
54
21
55
24
X1.B X1.B K216
56
57
forbidden.
0 15 31 87a 87 10022680
BK 1.5Q
10022680
RD 2.5Q
BU 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BU 2.5Q
0
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
E E
+K2
XMSP12.1 1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
15
16
A700D.X2 A700D.X2 A700D.X2 A700D.X2 A700D.X2 A700D.X2

2
3
1
X2 1 X2 15 X2 2 X2 16 X2 4 X2 3
A700D.30.1 A700D.31.2 A700D.30.2 A700D.31.3 A700D.30.3 A700D.31.1
+M +M +M +M +M +M
A700D SUPPLY30b A700D EARTH A700D SUPPLY30b A700D EARTH A700D SUPPLY30b A700D EARTH OPTIONLAGGING AUTOMATICS
/93.B2 /93.C2 /93.C2 /93.C2 /93.C2 /93.C2
PERFORMANCEPART PERFORMANCEPART PERFORMANCEPART PERFORMANCEPART ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS
ENGINEECU ENGINEECU ENGINEECU ENGINEECU ENGINEECU ENGINEECU
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 MOTORCONTROLAUTOMATICRUNOUT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 47
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYOutputmodul3
A4
=K
Kl.15
Kl.15
A A
+K2
CONNECTWITHA4.X56.12F43
E E
F63 10A F64 10A

RD RD
A A
R63 R64
B B
L63 L64
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND GND
/41.F1
X
A4.X41 A4.X41
10
+K2 +K2
C C
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
XMSP1d 1 XMSP1d 2 XMSP1d 3

+H2 +H2 +H2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6 +K6 +K6

33
28
29
X2.S X2.S X2.S
D D
X2.B X2.B X2.B
33
28
29
+K6 +K6 +K6
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
E E
16
15
17
A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
3
1
X1 2 X1 16 X1 1 X1 3 X1 15 X1 17
A17c.24V_logic A17c.GND_logic A17c.24V_B1 A17c.GND A17c.24V_B2 A17c.GND
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
A17c VBatt24VLOGICALPART A17c VBattEARTHLOGICALPART A17c VBatt24VBank1 A17c SUPPLYEARTH A17c SUPPLY24VBank2 A17c SUPPLYEARTH
/92.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART /92.D2 EARTHLOGICALPART /92.B2 SUPPLY24VBANK1 /92.C2 EARTH /92.D2 SUPPLY24VBank2 /92.D2 EARTH
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 48
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPPLYOutputmodule3
A4 OUTPUTMODULE3
=K CAN:
Kl.15
Kl.15
A /92.C2 PWMOutput1(Bank1) A
+K2
A17c VccCUTOFFLIGHTING
+H3 A
E E A17c.PWM1
X1 4
F65 10A F66 10A

RD RD
WH 1.5Q
A
R65
A
R66
SUPPLYELECTRICKEYPAD
B
L65 L66 A4 B
=K
+K2 +K6
SUPPLYMAINKEYPAD
Kl.15
32
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND GND X2.B

E
X2.S
32
F71
10A
RD
A
WH 1.5Q
A4.X40 A4.X40
6
11
C GND C
* A4.X42 * A4.X42
6
XMSP1d 4 XMSP1d 5
C.4 C.6
12
A4.X48 A4.X48
8
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+H2 +H2
I.12
I.8
A4
=K
SUPPLYOPTIONS/KLIMATASTATUR
+K2
A18.X1.1b
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
+K6 +K6 +K4 30 86
30
31
X2.S X2.S +K2

D K246 D
X2.B X2.B
30
31
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+K6 +K6 V48
+K4 0
A18.X1.1a 87a 87 85
1
forbidden.
A18.X1
1
X1 1 V36 V37
A18.Kl15 GND
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K4 A
WH 1.5Q
A18 INFORMATIONINPUT MP MP
/52.C3 INFORMATIONINPUT
I.10
I.11
CAN:
ELECTRIESKEYBOARD
A4.X48
10
E E
14
12
28
26
A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 14 X1 12 X1 28 X1 26
A17c.24V_B3 A17c.GND A17c.24V_B4 A17c.GND
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3
A17c
/92.D2
SUPPLY24VBank3
SUPPLY24VBank3
A17c
/92.C2
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
A17c
/92.E2
SUPPLY24VBank4
SUPPLY24VBank4
A17c
/92.E2
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
OPTIONAUTOMATICLIGHTING
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CUTOFF(ABA)
OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3AUTOMATIC Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 49
WerkBischofshofenGmbH LIGHTINGSHUTDOWN ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+K2
A4.Kl.15.a
A OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 A
1
* CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
/92.C2 PWMOutput2(Bank1) /92.C2 PWMOutput3(Bank1) /92.C2 PWMOutput4(Bank1) /92.D2 PWMOutput5(Bank2)
A17c 3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17c 3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 A17c 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17c 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
A17c.PWM2 A17c.PWM3 A17c.PWM4 A17c.PWM5
WH 6Q
WH 6Q
X1 5 X1 6 X1 7 X1 18
A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1
18
B
=K B
+K2.RH
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
1 1
F209 F210
5A 10A
LBN 2 RD 2
C C
XMSP200 XMSP200 Y11a.JPT Y12a.JPT Y11b.JPT Y12b.JPT
1
1 2
+K2 +K2 +V1 1 +V1 1 +V1 1 +V1 1
Y11a Y12a Y11b Y12b

WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
Y11a.JPT Y12a.JPT Y11b.JPT Y12b.JPT
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6 +K6 +K6 +K6

54
55
56
57
D X2.S X2.S X2.S X2.S D
X2.B X2.B X2.B X2.B
54
55
56
57
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
16
30
47
48
49
50
A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1
31
2
E E
X1 2 X1 16 X1 30 X1 31 X1 47 X1 48 X1 49 X1 50
A16d.24V_logic A16d.GND_logic A16d.24V A16d.GND A17c.GND_PWM2 A17c.GND_PWM3 A17c.GND_PWM4 A17c.GND_PWM9
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3 +H3 D +H3 D +H3 D +H3 D

A16d SUPPLYEARTH A16d EARTHLOGICALPART A16d SUPPLY24V A16d SUPPLYEARTH A17cGND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17cGND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 A17cGND4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17c RESERVE
/89.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART /89.D2 EARTHLOGICALPART /89.E2 SUPPLY24V /89.E2 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH
INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYINPUTMODULE4EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 50
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4
=K
Kl.15
Kl.15
+K2
A A
/20.B2
F15.1 E E
F15 10A F9 10A

/20.C3 RD RD
F15.2
A A
/39.E3
/39.E8
F15.3 R15 R9
L15 L9
Kl.15
Kl.15
B B
GND GND
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X44 A4.X45 * A4.X45 F.10
10
E.4 F.9
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2
WH 1Q
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9 /86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input10 /87.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal /87.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal /87.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal /87.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal /87.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16a CONTROLLEVERFORWARD1 A16a CONTROLLEVERBACKWARD1 A16b CONTROLLEVERFORWARD2 A16b CONTROLLEVERBACKWARD2 A16b CONTROLLEVEROption1 A16b CONTROLLEVEROption2 A16b CONTROLLEVEROption3
C +H3 A +H3 A +K2 A +K2 A +K2 A +K2 A +K2 A C
A16a.UI9 A16a.UI10 A16b.UI5 A16b.UI6 A16b.UI9 A16b.UI10 A16b.UI11
X1 8 X1 9 X1 18 X1 19 X1 8 X1 9 X1 10
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 5 XMSP6c A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1
9
18
19
10
WH 1Q
+K2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+K
Splice.X3
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6 +K6
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
22
23
X1.B X1.B
D D
X1.S X1.S
22
23
+K6 +K6 A16b.X1.9a A16b.X2.9+10b A16b.X2.9+10b A16b.X1.10a
1
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
2
WH 1Q +K2 +K2 +K2 +K2
forbidden.
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
10
S222.X1 S222.X2
6
5 6 10
0
S222
OPT1 10
E sw4 +K4 E
OPT3 1 7 2 8 9
10
12
S2.X
11
sw5
4
9
S222.X1 S222.X2
1
9
OPT2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
4 2 5 3 1 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 sw3
VNR
+K4
S2
COMFORTCONTROLVIA1<>5
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
0 3CONTROLCIRCUITVIA1<>5AND6<>2
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 INFOASSEMBLYINSTRUCTIONS!
LHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS
OLE5 Verb. 1 =K+K4S222.X2:9
F =K+K4S222.X2:10 F
OLE6 Verb. 1
Datum 26.03.200716:16
Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0
LHCONTROLLEVER 51
WerkBischofshofenGmbH SWITCHCOMFORTCONTROL3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2

/86.E2 SUPPLY24V /86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input8 /87.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal /87.E2 SUPPLY24V /86.F2 SUPPLY24V /86.E2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input16 /87.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal /87.E2 SUPPLY24V
A A16a 24VInchPotentiometer1A16a InchPotentiometer1 A16b InchPotentiometer2 A16b 24VInchPotentiometer2 A16a 24Vthrottle transmitter1 A16a throttle transmitter1 A16b throttle transmitter2 A16b 24Vthrottle transmitter2 A
+H3 +H3 A +K2 A +K2 +H3 +H3 +K2 A +K2
A16a.24V A16a.UI8 A16b.UI7 A16b.24V A16a.24V A16a.UI16 A16b.UI8 A16b.24V
X1 35 X1 21 X1 20 X1 34 X1 39 X1 25 X1 21 X1 35
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1
35
21
20
34
39
25
21
35
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
B 1 3 1 3 B
+K6 +K6
PROJ: 8920980_003
12
14
15
X2.B X2.B
11
X2.S X2.S
12
11
14
15
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
2 2
C C
R1.X R5.X
4
6
1
1
1 4 6 1 4 6
3 3
+ signal signal
+ + signal signal
+
+K6 +K6
R1 R5

2 5 2 5
R1.X R5.X
2
2
5
5
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
D D
2 2
13
16
forbidden.
X2.S X2.S
X2.B X2.B
13
16
+K6 +K6
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
E 1 3 1 3 E
63
62
A16a.X1 A16b.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
67
63
X1 63 X1 62 A16a.X1 A16b.X1
A16a.GND A16b.GND X1 67 X1 63
+H3 +K2 A16a.GND A16b.GND
A16a EARTHInchPot.1 A16b EARTHInchPot.2 +H3 +K2
/86.D5 EARTH /87.D5 EARTH A16a EARTHthrottle transmitter1 A16b EARTHthrottler transmitter
CAN: CAN: /86.E5 EARTH /87.D5 EARTH
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE2 CAN: CAN:
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 ANGLESENSORINCH/GASPEDAL Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 52
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A /90.C1 PWMOutput12(Bank3) /90.C1 PWMOutput10(Bank3) /90.C1 PWMOutput11(Bank3) /90.C1 PWMOutput9(Bank3) /91.C2 PWMOutput1(Bank /90.D1 PWMOutput13(Bank4) /90.D1 PWMOutput14(Bank4) /90.D1 PWMOutput8(Bank2) A
A17a Modulation A17a cruising range2 A17a cruising range3 A17a cruising range1 A17b OVERSPEEDPROTECTION A17a oil engine1 A17a oil engine2 A17a Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
A17a.PWM12 A17a.PWM10 A17a.PWM11 A17a.PWM9 A17b.PWM1 A17a.PWM13 A17a.PWM14 A17a.PWM8
X1 11 X1 9 X1 10 X1 8 X1 4 X1 22 X1 23 X1 21
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1
4
11
10
22
23
21
B B
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
C C
Y16.JPT YEP1.DT YEP2.DT Y57.DT
1
Y6.X
A
D
1 1 1 1
B
+H +F3 +F3 +F3

A B C D Y16 YEP1 YEP2 Y57

+F3 MO1 Y6.2 Y6.3 Y6.1

Y6 2 2 2 2
Y16.JPT YEP1.DT YEP2.DT Y57.DT
2
0
E F G H
Y6.X
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F
E
D D
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
E E
53
52
50
46
64
65
63
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1
51
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 53 X1 51 X1 52 X1 50 X1 46 X1 64 X1 65 X1 63
A17a.GND_PWM12 A17a.GND_PWM10 A17a.GND_PWM11 A17a.GND_PWM9 A17b.GND_PWM1 A17a.GND_PWM13 A17a.GND_PWM14 A17a.GND_PWM8
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 D +H3 D +H3 +H3 +H3
A17a EARTHModulation A17a EARTHTRAVELRANGES2 A17a EARTHTRAVELRANGES3 A17a EARTHTRAVELRANGES1 A17b EARTHoverspeed A17a EARTHoil engine1 A17a EARTHoil engine2 A17a Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1
/90.C5 EARTH /90.C5 EARTH /90.C5 EARTH /90.C5 EARTH /91.C5 EARTH /90.D5 EARTH /90.E5 EARTH /90.D5 EARTH
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 TRAVELRANGESSWIVELANGLEHYDROMOTORS Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 53
WerkBischofshofenGmbH OVERSPEEDPROTECTION ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1

A /90.D1 PWMOutput15(Bank4) /90.E1 PWMOutput16(Bank4) /91.C2 PWMOutput9(Bank /91.C2 PWMOutput10(Ban /91.C2 PWMOutput3(Bank /91.C2 PWMOutput4(Bank /86.C2 ANALOGUEOutput2 /90.D1 PWMOutput7(Bank2) A
A17a TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD A17a TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD A17b TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2 A17b TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2BACKWARD A17b SWIVELANGLEtravel pump1 A17b SWIVELANGLEtravel pump2 A16a HIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP A17a BUZZER
+H3 A +H3 +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A
A17a.PWM15 A17a.PWM16 A17b.PWM9 A17b.PWM10 A17b.PWM3 A17b.PWM4 A16a.UI2 A17a.PWM7
X1 24 X1 25 X1 8 X1 9 X1 6 X1 7 X1 5 X1 20
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A16a.X1 A17a.X1
5
24
25
20
WH 1Q
B B
+K6
PROJ: 8920980_003
26
X1.B
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X1.S
26
BU 1Q
WH 1Q
1
C C
H40.X1
1
+
Y2.DT Y3.DT Y2a.DT Y3a.DT Y15.JPT Y15a.JPT B45.X
3 +K2
1
1
B H40
1 1 1 1 1 1
+H +H +H +H +H +H
Y2 Y3 Y2a Y3a Y15 Y15a s 0
H40.X2
1
+H4
0 0 0 0 0 0 B45 IP
2 2 2 2 2 2 +
0
Y2.DT Y3.DT Y2a.DT Y3a.DT Y15.JPT Y15a.JPT C A
2
BK 1Q
B45.X
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
1
+K6
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
20
RD 1Q
X2.S
forbidden.
X2.B
20
+K6
BK 1Q
E E
66
67
50
48
49
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A16a.X1
51
41
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
62
X1 66 X1 67 X1 50 X1 51 X1 48 X1 49 X1 41 A17a.X1
A17a.GND_PWM15 A17a.GNDPWM16 A17b.GND_PWM9 A17b.GND_PWM10 A17b.GND_PWM3 A17b.GND_PWM4 A16a.24V X1 62
+H3 +H3 +H3 D +H3 +H3 D +H3 D +H3 D A17a.GND_PWM7
A17a EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD A17a EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD A17b EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump
A17b EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump
A17b EARTHtravel pump A17b EARTHSWIVELANGLE A16a HIGHPRESSUREtravel pump +H3
/90.E5 EARTH /90.E5 EARTH /91.C5 EARTH /91.C5 EARTH /91.C5 EARTH /91.C5 EARTH /86.B5 SUPPLY24V A17a EARTHBUZZER
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: /90.D5 EARTH
OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE1 CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 TRAVELDIRECTIONSHYDRAULICPUMPBUZZER Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 54
WerkBischofshofenGmbH PRESSUREHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPTIONGEROTORSTEERING OPTIONFUELPREHEATING
CAN: CAN: CAN: Kl.30 Kl.15
A4 A4
A /90.F1 SUPPLYfor digital output4 /90.F1 digital output4 /91.D2 PWMOutput15(Ban A
A17a supply for digital output 4via.A4 A17a back up alarm .OPTICAL A17b VccMVGEROTORSTEERING =K =K
+H3 +H3 +H3 A
+K2 E +K2 E
A17a.V_DO4 A17a.DO4 A17b.PWM15
X1 38 X1 39 X1 24
F34 20A F14 15A
A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17b.X1
38
39
24
YE BU
A A
R34 R14
L34 L14
WH 1.5Q
B B
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
GND GND
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X42 A4.X44
1
9
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
1 XMSP6.14
+K6
RD 2.5Q
+K2
10
X2.B
X2.S
10
C C
Y63.JPT
1
=B 1 =B 1 1
+B1 +B1
+H3
H58 H59
Y63
2 2 0 2 1
WH 1.5Q
WH 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
+H2
Y63.JPT
2
S204
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A4.X43
8
forbidden.
WH 2.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2 E
2
1
F49 10A
RD +M
R13
54
66
E A17a.X1 A17b.X1 E
T
A X1 54 X1 66 0
R49 A17a.GND_DO4 A17b.GND_PWM15
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+H3 +H3
L49 A17a EARTHback up alarm.OPTICAL A17b EARTHGEROTORSTEERING M10
0
M
/90.D5 EARTH /91.E5 EARTH
CAN: CAN:
GND OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2
Kl.15
OPTIONBACKUPALARMVISUALREDFLASHING OPTIONREFUELLINGPUMP
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 BACKUPALARMGEROTORSTEERING Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 55
WerkBischofshofenGmbH DIESELPREHEATING ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CAN: CAN: CAN:
/90.C1 PWMOutput3(Bank1) /90.C1 PWMOutput4(Bank1) /90.D1 PWMOutput5(Bank2)
A17a BUCKETRETURNTODIG A17a LIFTKICKOUT A17a FLOATPOSITION
A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A A
A17a.PWM3 A17a.PWM4 A17a.PWM5
INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 X1 6 X1 7 X1 18
CAN: CAN: CAN: A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1
18
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input5 /86.F2 SUPPLY24V /86.F2 SUPPLY24V
A16a FLOATPOSITION A16a 24VBUCKETRETURNTODIG A16a 24VLIFTKICKOUT
+H3 A +H3 +H3
A16a.UI5 A16a.24V A16a.24V
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
X1 18 X1 36 X1 38 A17a.X1.6a
1
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 +H3
18
36
38
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
B B
+K6
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1Q
34
35
36
+K6 B17.X X1.B
27
X1.B B17.B X1.S
34
35
36
WH 1.5Q
X1.S +V
27
OPTION
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
BUCKETRETURNTODIGVIA
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHAMLHCONTROLLEVER
B32.X
1
C C
5
1
X33.X
1
1
B15.X B17.X_1 1 3 5
+K4 1 1
B32 P + +
1
OPT1
+V3 +V sw4
1 +K4
+V1
0 OPT3
X33 Y9 Y17 Y18
B15 B17 sw5 Y9a
OPT2
0 0
sw3 0
B32.X 0
2
2 X33.X 2 4 6
2 2
3 3
6
B15.X B17.X_1
2
2
2
3
3
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
D D
F.7
BK 1.5Q
A4.X45
7
*
WH 1Q
+V +K6
32
33
31
forbidden.
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
B17.B X1.S
3
A4
=K B17.X X1.B
32
31
33
2
3
+K2
Kl.15
E
F11
WH 1Q
10A BK 1Q
/23.E6
RD
+H3
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
A17a.X1.48a
1
E E
A
R11
Kl.15
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L11
66
10
64
48
49
60
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1 A17a.X1
11
GND X1 11 X1 66 X1 10 X1 64 X1 48 X1 49 X1 60
A16a.UI12 A16a.GND A16a.UI11 A16a.GND A17a.GND_PWM3 A17a.GND_PWM4 A17a.GND_PWM5
+H3 A +H3 +H3 A +H3 +H3 D +H3 D +H3
A16a BUCKETRETURNTODIG A16a BUCKETRETURNTODIG A16a LIFTKICKOUT A16a LIFTKICKOUT A17a EARTHBUCKETRETURNTODIG A17a EARTHLIFTKICKOUT A17a EARTHFLOATPOSITION
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input12 /86.E5 EARTH /86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input11 /86.D5 EARTH /90.C5 EARTH /90.C5 EARTH /90.D5 EARTH
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
F INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE1 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 FLOATPOSITIONBUCKETRETURNTODIG Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 56
WerkBischofshofenGmbH LIFTKICKOUT ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE2

CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
/91.C2 PWMOutput11(Bank /91.C2 PWMOutput12(Bank /92.C2 PWMOutput9(Bank3) /92.C2 PWMOutput10(Bank3) /87.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A A17b Additional equipment1 A17b Additional equipment2 A17c RESERVE A17c RESERVE OUTPUTMODULE1 A16b alarm buzzer A
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A CAN: +K2 A
A17b.PWM11 A17b.PWM12 A17c.PWM9 A17c.PWM10 /90.C1 PWMOutput2(Bank1) A16b.UI12
X1 10 X1 11 X1 8 X1 9 A17a AHS X1 11
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 +H3 A A16b.X1
9
10
11
11
A17a.PWM2
WH 1.5Q
X1 5
A17a.X1
5
+K2 1 X1.B.64
1
B V100 B
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+H
+K6
WH 1.5Q
63
0 X1.S
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
1
X1.B
63
1
WH 1.5Q
+K6
+H
1
A17.X2
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
C C
* *
1
Y11.JPT Y12.JPT Y11a.JPT Y12a.JPT Y14.JPT S23.X1 S23.X2 1
9
+V1
1
1
+V 1 +V 1 +V 1 +V 1 +H 1 5 9 Y53
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
Y11 Y12 Y11a Y12a Y14
0 1 0
+K4 2
0 0 0 0 0 S23a
2 2 2 2 2 S23
2
0
Y11.JPT Y12.JPT Y11a.JPT Y12a.JPT Y14.JPT 0
2
2
1 10
BK 1.5Q
S23.X1 S23.X2
10
BK 1.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
D
A17.X2
70mm D
2
+K2 +H
2 XMSP6.12
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+K6
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
64
X1.B
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
X1.S
64
+H
=K+K4S23.X2:9
X1.B.65
1
BK 1.5Q
E E
+K2
1
52
53
52
47
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17c.X1 A17c.X1 A17a.X1 XMSP6.12
51
Verb.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 52 X1 53 X1 52 X1 51 X1 47
A17b.GND_PWM11 A17b.GND_PWM12 A17c.GND_PWM11 A17c.GND_PWM10 A17a.GND_PWM2
OLE23
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 D
A17b EARTHAdditional equipment A17b EARTHAdditional equipment A17c RESERVE A17c RESERVE A17a EARTHAHS
/91.C5 EARTH /91.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /90.C5 EARTH
F2210AX44/5
OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE1
SEEASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS!
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT123AND4 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 57
WerkBischofshofenGmbH QUICKCHANGEDEVICE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL1

CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
A =H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang11(Bank3) =H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang12(Bank3) =H+H/38.B2 PWMOutput2(Bank1) =H+H/37.B2 PWMAusgang2(Bank1) A
A17b Zusatzausrstung1 A17b Zusatzausrstung2 A17b Squick change device A17a AHS
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 SpeisungKlimaanlage
=H A17b.PWM11 =H A17b.PWM12 =H A17b.PWM2 =H A17a.PWM2
X1 10 X1 11 X1 5 X1 5
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17a.X1 A4
5
11
10
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 =K
Kl.30
Kl.15
=H =H =H =H +K2
B B
F19a F19
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
20A 10A
ge rt
PROJ: 8920980_003
=V
+V +V +V1 +H GND GND
C C
Y11.JPT Y12.JPT Y53.JPT Y14.JPT
1
1
+V 1 +V 1 +V1 1 +H 1
A4.X41 A4.X45
12
Y11 Y12 Y53 Y14
B.5 * F.12 XMSP6a 2
0 0 0 0 +K2
2 2 2 2
Y11.JPT Y12.JPT Y53.JPT Y14.JPT
2
+V +V +V1 +H
=V
RD 2.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
D D
forbidden.
/25.F1
+K4 +K4 +K4
A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
3
1
2
X1 1 X1 3 X1 2
=H =H =H =H
A21.Kl30 A21.Kl15 A21.GND

+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
+K4 +K4 +K4
52
53
47
47
A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17a.X1 Klemme30 Klemme15 AnspeisungMasse
X1 52 X1 53 X1 47 X1 47 A21 A21 A21
/41.B4 Versorgung /41.B4 Klemme15 /41.B4 AnspeisungMasse
E =H A17b.GND_PWM11 =H A17b.GND_PWM12 =H A17b.GND_PWM2 =H A17a.GND_PWM2 E
CAN: CAN: CAN:
+H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
A17bMasseZusatzausrstung1 A17bMasseZusatzausrstung2 A17b GNDQuick change device A17a MasseAHS
=H+H/38.C5 Masse =H+H/38.C5 Masse =H+H/38.B5 MGND =H+H/37.B5 Masse
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:

OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL1
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT12 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 58
WerkBischofshofenGmbH QUICKCHANGEDEVICE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPTIONWORKINGBASKET
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
A CAN: CAN: A
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
/88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input4 /88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
+K
A16c basket functionMode1 A16c basket functionMode2 X51.S 1/1
Kl.15 +H3 A +H3 A
X51.B
1
A4 A16c.UI4 A16c.UI9
=K X1 7 X1 8
E A16c.X1 A16c.X1
8
+K2
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
K208
=K *
F50 10A
RD +K2.RH
86 87 87a
+K6 +K6
B A X2.B X2.B B
8
WH 1.5Q
R50
X2.S X2.S K208
8
L50 +K6
PROJ: 8920980_003
7
X2.S
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
85 30
X2.B
7
GND WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
* A4.X43
2
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+H
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
X48.B
1
WH 1.5Q
C X48.S C
1
+K6 +K6
3
X2.S X2.S X2.S
WH 1.5Q
X2.B X2.B X2.B
3
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
*
S210.X1 S210.X2
5
9
1
1 5 9
+K4 21 +K4 21
+K4 +H2
210 S213 S214
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
S210 XMSP1.e 4 22 22
D 0 D
3 10 +K6
Splice.X30
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
S210.X1 S210.X2
3
10
forbidden.
WH 1.5Q
+K6 +H
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
2
X2.S X48.S
X2.B X48.B
2
6
+K6
=K+K4S210.X2:10
=K+K4S210.X2:9
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Y65.JPT Y66.JPT Y67.JPT
1
1
E +V1 1 +V1 1 +V1 1 E
Y65 Y66 Y67
25
A16c.X1 A16c.X1
6
0 0 0
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
2 2 2 X1 6 X1 25
Y65.JPT Y66.JPT Y67.JPT A16c.UI3 A16c.UI16
2
2
1
BK 1.5Q
+H3 +H3
basket functionNotOFF1 basket functionNotOFF2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A16c A16c
Verb.
Verb.
/88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose input3 /88.E1 ANALOGUEall-purpose input16

CAN: CAN:
OLE19
OLE20
+H2 +H2 +H2

F XMSP1.e 1 XMSP1.e 2 XMSP1.e 3 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 FUNCTIONWORKINGBASKET Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 59
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPTIONPROPORTIONALCONTROL3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4
A /89.F2 SUPPLY24V /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input1 /89.D5 EARTH /89.C5 SUPPLY5V /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input4 /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input3 /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input11 /89.D5 EARTH A
A16d capacitiveJoystick sensor A16d capacitiveJoystick sensor A16d capacitive Joysticksensor A16d RollerRockerCap A16d CONTROL5V A16d OUTPUTHall sensor1 A16d OUTPUTHallsensor2 A16d GNDRockerRollerCap
+H3 +H3 A +H3 +H3 D +H3 A +H3 A +H3 A +H3
A16d.24VV A16d.UI1 A16d.GND A16d.5V A16d.UI4 A16d.UI3 A16d.UI11 A16d.GND
X1 36 X1 4 X1 59 X1 50 X1 7 X1 6 X1 10 X1 54
A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1 A16d.X1
10
36
59
50
54
INPUTMODUL4 INPUTMODUL4
CAN: CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input2 /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
A16d 3.CONTROLCIRCUITAktiv A16d OPTION
+H3 A +H3 A
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A16d.UI2 A16d.UI9
B X1 5 X1 8
B
A16d.X1 A16d.X1
8
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K
Splice.X70
C 2 2 C
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
BK 1Q
A4
=K
Kl.15
+K2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
/6.B2
F15.1 E
F15
10A 1
/6.C3
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
BK 1Q
F15.2 RD
FUNKTIONFNR F15.3
A
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
D D
A4.X44
E.4
SW1
6
1
INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODUL1 INPUTMODUL2 INPUTMODUL2 S2a.X2
forbidden.
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:

=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUEUniversale=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16a JOYSTICK FORWARD1 A16a JOYSTICKREVERSE1
/50.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16b JOYSTICKFORWARD2
/50.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16b JOYSTICK REVERSE2
4 2 5 3 1 7 9 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 HALL SENSOR
+H3 +H3 +K2 +K2
A16a.UI9
X1 8
A16a.UI10
X1 9
A16b.UI5
X1 18
A16b.UI6
X1 19
+K4
VNR
1.and2.
A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 S2a
WH 1Q
+H3 +H3 +K2 +K2

WH 1Q
WH 1Q
0
S020mA
Vcc24V
NC NO
GND
+K6 +K6
SW1
COM
FNR CAPACITIVE
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
X1.B X1.B
E JOYSTICK SENSOR E
C
X1.S X1.S
+K6 +K6
WH 1Q
Vcc5V
Vcc5V
GND
GND
Out
Out
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
cap.sensor Hallsensors+SW1
S2.X1 feed24V feed5V
Ulow(V)Umid(V)Uhigh(V)
state off1,4....1,6mAnot active Sensor10,5052,524,54
state on2,9....3,6mAactive Sensor20,5562,5214,539
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 60
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
OPTIONCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER A
WH 1Q WH 1Q
WH,WH 1Q,1Q
+K2
Kl.15
B 1 B
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 6Q
BK 1Q
=K =K
+K2.RH +K2.RH +K2
XMSP201
2
1
B213.X
S213.X1 S213.X2 1
9
*
1
C 1 1 9 30 85 =V + BN
C
+K2 10 +K2 +V2
+V1 K213 B213
F213
S213
BK BU
7,5A 0
HBR 2 0 0 S 2 3
5 10 87a 87 86 B213.X B213.X
3
S213.X1 S213.X2
10
*
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
=K
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
XMSP201
WH,WH 1Q,1Q
XMSP201 4
D 1 +K2 D
WH 1Q
forbidden.
WH 1Q WH 1Q WH 1Q
Y68.JPT
1
E 1 E
+V1
Y68
0
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
2
Y68.JPT
2
BK 1Q
=K
+K2
F
XMSP201 3
F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 61
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/68.E8
A HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM A
/96.B2 SWITCHHIGH&# /96.C2 compressor clutch /96.D2 SENSOR_ambient temp. /96.D2 SENSOR_ambient temp. /96.D2 SUNSENSOR+ /96.D2 SUNSENSOR
A4 A21 A21 compressor clutch A21 SENSOR_ambient temp. A21 SENSOR_ambient temp A21 SUNSENSOR+ A21 SUNSENSOR
Kl.15
SWITCHHIGH&#
=K +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
Kl.30
Kl.15
+K2 A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME
X1 5 X1 10 X1 27 X1 26 X1 29 X1 28
A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
10
27
26
29
28
E E
WH 2.5Q
WH 1Q
F19A 20A F19 10A
GE RD
B B
RD 0.75Q
BU 0.75Q
+K6
60
61
A A
X1.S X1.S
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
R19A R19
X1.B X1.B
60
61
L19A L19
WH 2.5Q
WH 1Q
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
GND GND
B27.X +K4 +K4
6
3 1 X22b.S X22b.S
C C
+H L N H +K6 X22b.B X22b.B
6
1
A4.X41 A4.X45 B27 P X2.S
12
5
+K2 * XMSP6a 2 18bar

X2.B
1
B.5 F.12 +K2
4 2
RD 0.75Q
BU 0.75Q
B27.X
2
4
RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 2.5Q
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1Q
D D
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
+K6 +K6 B39.X
1
X2.B
62
53
X1.B XB39 B42.X
1
forbidden.
X2.S 1
1
X1.S 1
+K1
WH 0.75Q
62
+K6
53
B39 C B42
WH 2.5Q
0 0
2
WH 1.5Q
/62.E4
2
2
XB39
B42.X
2
B39.X
2
A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
3
2
1
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
E E
X1 1 X1 3 X1 2 Y22.X
1
A21.Kl30 A21.Kl15 A21.GND 1

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +M

CLAMP30 CLAMP15 A21 SUPPLYEARTH Y22 REMOVEWIRE JUMPERXB39WHEN
Kl.15
A21 A21
/96.B2 SUPPLY /96.B2 CLAMP15 /96.B2 SUPPLYEARTH MOUNTING B39!
0
CAN: CAN: CAN:
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/68.E2
/62.D2
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
OPTIONAIR CONDITIONING AUTOMATIC
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 62
WerkBischofshofenGmbH AMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEAT-/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEAT-/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
/41.B4SchalterHochNiederdruck /41.C4 SchalterMitteldruck /41.C4 Kompressorkupplung /41.D4 Sensor_ambient temp.+ /41.D4 Sensor_ambient temp. /41.D4 Fhler_Innenr.1+ /41.D4 Fhler_Innenr.1 /41.E4 Sonnensensor+ /41.E4 Sonnensensor
A21SchalterHochNiederdruck A21 SchalterMitteldruck A21 Kompressorkupplung A21 Sensor_ambient temp.+ A21 Sensor_ambient temp. A21 Fhler_Innenr.1+ A21 Fhler_Innenr.1 A21 Sonnensensor+ A21 Sonnensensor
+K4 +K4 +K4 +K4 +K4 +K4 +K4 +K4 +K4
A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME A21.PMES A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME A21.PME
X1 5 X1 6 X1 10 X1 27 X1 26 X1 21 X1 20 X1 29 X1 28
A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1 A21.X1
10
27
21
28
6
26
20
29
+K4 +K4 +K4
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
B B
+K6 +K6
W156 +WL039 RD
W156 +WL039 BU
60
61
X1.S X1.S
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1Q
61
60
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+H +H
B27.X B27.X
3
3 1 +K6
W156 +WL038 RD
W156 +WL038 BU
W156 +WL037 RD
W156 +WL037 BU
3
2
C +H +K6 X2.S X2.S C
1
B27 X2.S X2.B X2.B
3
2
X2.B
1
P
+K6
4 2
B27.X B27.X
4
W160 +WL040 RD
W160 +WL040 BU
+H +H
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=H
+H
D Splice.X4 +K1 D
B39.X B40.X B42.X
1
=H 1 1 1
+K6 +K1
WH 1Q
B39 C B40 C B42

forbidden.
2 2 2
B39.X B40.X B42.X
2
2
=M +K1
62
+M
Y22.X
X1.S
62
+K6 =M 1
+M
Y22
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/24.E7
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 63
WerkBischofshofenGmbH AMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

24VFAN GND FAN Logic output(010V) diagnosticsFAN Sensor1+(icing) Sensor1(icing) Sensor2+(icing) Sensor2(icing)
A21a 24VFAN A21a GND FAN A21a Logic output(010V) A21a diagnosticsFAN A21a Sensor1+(icing) A21a Sensor1(icing) A21a Sensor2+(icing) A21a Sensor2(icing)
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
A21a.28 A21a.42 A21a.2 A21a.16 A21a.35 A21a.36 A21a.37 A21a.38
X2 28 X2 42 X2 2 X2 16 X2 35 X2 36 X2 37 X2 38
A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2
16
42
28
35
36
37
38
B B
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
1 1
+K4 +K4
forbidden.
B26 C B26a C
M5.X
2
6
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 2 2
+K4
E M5 M E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FANMOTOR
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 MOTOR AND Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 64
WerkBischofshofenGmbH SENSORICEUPPROTECTION ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
MasseVMC1 VrefVMC1 VMC1counter clockwise rotation GNDVMC2 VrefVMC2 VMC2counter clockwise rotation
A21a MasseVMC1 A21a VrefVMC1 A21a VMC1counter clockwise rotation A21a GNDVMC2 A21a VrefVMC2 A21a VMC2 counter clockwise rotation
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
A21a.6 A21a.5 A21a.4 A21a.11 A21a.10 A21a.9
X2 6 X2 5 X2 4 X2 11 X2 10 X2 9
6
9
11
10
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
B VMC1potentiometer tap VMC1clockwise rotation VMC2potentiometer tap VMC2clockwise rotation
B
A21a VMC1potentiometer tap A21a VMC1clockwise rotation A21a VMC2potentiometer tap A21a VMC2clockwise rotation
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.7 A21a.3 A21a.12 A21a.8

X2 7 X2 3 X2 12 X2 8
A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2
12
7
8
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
forbidden.
M11.X M14.X
3
6
1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4 +K4
M11 M M14 M
WATERVALVEVMC1 URECIRCULATED AIR FLAP VMC2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 WATERVALVEVMC1 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 65
WerkBischofshofenGmbH RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAPVMC2 ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

GND VMC3 VrefVMC3 VMC3counter clockwise rotation GNDVMC4 VrefVMC4 VMC4counter-clockwise rotation
A21a GND VMC3 A21a VrefVMC3 A21a VMC3counter clockwise rotation A21a GNDVMC4 A21a VrefVMC4 A21a VMC4counter-clockwise rotation
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
A21a.20 A21a.19 A21a.18 A21a.25 A21a.24 A21a.23
X2 20 X2 19 X2 18 X2 25 X2 24 X2 23
19
18
20
25
24
23
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
B VMC3potentiometer tap VMC3clockwise rotation VMC4potentiometer tap VMC4clockwise rotation
B
A21a VMC3potentiometer tap A21a VMC3clockwise rotation A21a VMC4potentiometer tap A21a VMC4clockwise rotation
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.21 A21a.17 A21a.26 A21a.22

X2 21 X2 17 X2 26 X2 22
A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2
17
22
21
26
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
forbidden.
M15.X
2
M16.X
1
6
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
E E
+K4 +K4
M M
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
M15 M16
FOOTFLAPVMC3 MIDDLEFLAPVMC4
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 FOOTFLAPVMC3 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 66
WerkBischofshofenGmbH MIDDLEFLAPVMC4 ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM

GNDVMC5 VrefVMC5 VMC5counter clockwise rotation temp.sensor+(air cond. aut.) temp.sensor(air cond. aut.)
A21a GND VMC5 A21a VrefVMC5 A21a VMC5counter clockwise rotation A21a temp.sensor+(air cond. aut.) A21a temp.sensor(air cond. aut.)
+K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A +K4 A
A21a.33 A21a.32 A21a.31 A21a.39 A21a.40
X2 33 X2 32 X2 31 X2 39 X2 40
A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2 A21a.X2
32
33
31
39
40
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
B CAN: CAN:
B
VMC5potentiometer tap VMC5clockwise rotation
A21a VMC5potentiometer tap A21a VMC5clockwise rotation
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K4 A +K4 A
A21a.34 A21a.30
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
X2 34 X2 30
A21a.X2 A21a.X2
34
30
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
C C
+K4
2
1
X75.S
X75.B
1
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
D D
forbidden.
M17.X
2
1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
+K4
E B40 C E
0
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4
M17 M
HEADFLAPVMC5
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 HEADFLAPVMC5 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 67
WerkBischofshofenGmbH TEMPERATURESENSORAUTOMATICAIRCONDITIONING ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
C
E
B
D
A
FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung, tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
Zustand
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten. forbidden. PROJ: 8920980_003
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
nderung
1
1
A21
/96.C2
+K4
Datum
CAN:
A21.X1
WH 1.5Q
A
X1 8
8
FAN_interior.
A21.PME
FAN_interior.2+
Name
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
WH 2.5Q
Ausgabe
2
2
=K
A4
+K2
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
F13
*
WH 2.5Q WH,WH 2.5Q,2.5Q 2
/62.E4
E
Kl.15
Kl.15
BU
15A
GND
A4.X56
R13
L13
3
3
=K
A4
+K2
V32
0
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
K244
MP
4
4
I.1
87a
A4.X48
2 I.2
I.3 3
87
30
MP
A4.X48
V33
4
I.4
85
86
GND
A4.X48
V50
5
5
WH 2.5Q
VENTILATORCONDENSERINTEGRATED
6
6
=K
A4
+K2
0
70Watt
V34
+H3
1,5Ohm
M13
0
K245
MP
X2.B
X2.S
M13.X
+K6
A4.X48
WH 2.5Q WH 2.5Q I.7

XMSP6c
+K2
X2.S
X2.B
M13.X
+K6
A
BK 2.5Q BK 2.5Q A 50 50 7
M
87a
A4.X48
9
C
52 52 C WH 2.5Q WH 2.5Q 5 I.5

B
B 51 51 I.9 9
87
30
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
MP
A4.X48
V35
7
7
6
I.6
85
86
GND
A4.X48
8920980
V49
460901000003
Ort
WH 2.5Q
Anlage
/62.A4
Kl.15
8
8
003
von
68 Blatt
114
F
C
E
B
D
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RETROFITKITCONDENSERFAN
A A
Kl.15
WH 1.5Q
A4
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
=K
E
+K2
F13 15A +K2 A4.X48. A4.X48.
6
BU *
X45.B
I.9
I.6
A =K
R13 +K2.RH A4
L13 =K
B +K2 B
30 86
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
GND * X45.S
1
30
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
K245
* =K
2 +K2.
WH 1.5Q
A4.X56a 0
K248
V49
87a 87 85
10008761 0
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
15 31 87a 87 V34 V35
2
X45.S
GND
+K
10022680
1
MP MP X1.S.61a
I.7
I.5
X1.B
61
C C
WH 1.5Q
A4.X48. A4.X48.
7
5
X45.B
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
WH 1.5Q
CAN:
/62.C2 Kompressorkupplung
1
A21 Kompressorkupplung
+K4
3 1
1
1
A21.PME
X1 10 X2.S.50 X2.S.51 +H
A21.X1
10
X2.B.50 X2.B.51 B27
1
1
+K4
+K6 P
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K2 4 2
D D
WH 1.5Q
2 XMSP.20 2
B27.X.2
+H
M13.X
B
A B
=H
+K 1,5Ohm
forbidden.
Splice.X4 70Watt
WH 1.5Q
=H
+K6 LOCATE SPLICE +H3a M
CLOSE TOX2.S:1!
1
X2.S
X2.B
M13
1
+K6 0
ONLY USE WITH FLUFF FILTER OPERATION! C +K6

M13.X X2.B* 53a
C
BK 1.5Q
X2.S* 53a
E E
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
X2.S.52
=M
+M
Y22.X
1
=M 1
+M
Y22
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 VENTILATORCONDENSERRETROFITKIT Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 69
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIAGNOSTICPLUGDIESELENGINE
A A
ENGINEECU ENGINEECU ENGINEECU
EARTH RECEIVE EMIT
/93.D6 /93.D6 /93.D6
DIAGNOSIS
A700D DIAGNOSIS A700D A700D DIAGNOSIS
+M +M +M
DIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
A700D.GND A700D.RXD A700D.TXD
X2 38 X2 37 X2 36
A700D.X2 X.M7a.S 1/2 2/2 X.RS232.B
2
5
3
37
A700D.X2 A700D.X2
38
36
+K2 +K
B B
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
BK 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
forbidden.
* * * =K
+M +K4
C
D
G
B
E
F
H
+K4
I
22
12
X60a A21.XB
11
3
2
1
A21.XB
*29
E 10290843 0 E
*9
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 DIAGNOSTICPLUGMOTORCONTROL Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 70
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ANDAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3

A4 Kl.15 CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
A =K /87.F2 SUPPLY24V /87.E2 ANALOGUEUniversal /88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose input1 /88.E1 SUPPLY24V A
A16b VCCJOYSTICKSTEERING A16b JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR1 A16c JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2 A16c JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2re
+K2
E +K2 +K2 +H3 A +H3
A16b.24V A16b.UI16 A16c.UI1 A16c.24VDO1
X1 36 X1 25 X1 4 X1 33
F46 10A
A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1
4
36
25
33
RD
X56/11F34/5A
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
A
R46
L46 +K6
65
66
X2.B
B B
X2.S
65
66
GND
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
/42.E1
A4.X44
12
Kl.15
BK1 1Q
BK2 1Q
BK4 1Q
BK5 1Q
XMSP6.10 1 XMSP6.11 1
+K2 +K2
B202.X B202.X
5
1
C 1 2 4 5
C
+ signal signal
+
GY
OG
WH
RD
+K4
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
B202
BN
BK

LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
3 6
B202.X B202.X
6
64
63
62
61
D X2.S X2.S X2.S X2.S D
BK3 1Q
BK6 1Q
X2.B X2.B X2.B X2.B
62
64
63
61
+K6 +K6 +K6 +K6
forbidden.
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
67
X2.S
X2.B
67
+K6
BK 1.5Q
E E
16
30
67
67
A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16b.X1 A16c.X1
31
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 2 X1 16 X1 30 X1 31 X1 67 X1 67
A16c.24V_logic A16c.GND_logic A16c.24V A16c.GND A16b.GND A16c.GND
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3 +K2 +H3
A16c SUPPLYEARTH A16c EARTHLOGICALPART A16c SUPPLY24V A16c SUPPLYEARTH A16b GNDJOYSTICKSTEERING A16cJOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2re
/88.C1 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART /88.D1 EARTHLOGICALPART /88.E1 SUPPLY24V /88.E1 EARTH /87.E5 EARTH /88.E5 EARTH
INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE3
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 71
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2

A /88.C1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input2 /88.F1 SUPPLY24V /88.F1 SUPPLY24V /91.D2 PWMOutput13(Bank /91.D2 PWMOutput14(Bank /91.E2 PWMOutput16(Bank A
A16c JoystickPRESSUREstandard steering1 A16c 24VJoystick activation A16c 24VJoystickARMREST A17b JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT A17b JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT A17b SavetyMVJoy
+H3 A +H3 +H3 +H3 A +H3 A +H3
A16c.UI2 A16c.24VV A16c.24V A17b.PWM13 A17b.PWM14 A17b.PWM16
X1 5 X1 36 X1 37 X1 22 X1 23 X1 25
A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
22
36
37
23
25
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
B +K6 B
68
X2.B
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X2.S
PROJ: 8920980_003
68
+K6
60
X2.B
X2.S
60
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK7 1Q
BK9 1Q
C C
1
B201.X B202.X B200.X Y51.AF2 Y52.AF2
1
7 1
C + Y64.JPT
1
1 1
s +K4 BN
1
+H3 +K4 +H3 +H3 +H3

P S202 Y64
B201 U B200 Y51 Y52
0 B +
A
0 0 BK BU
0 2 0 2
0
2
8 S 2 3
B201.X B202.X B200.X B200.X Y51.AF2 Y52.AF2 Y64.JPT
2
8
3
BK8 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
BK10 1Q
BK11 1Q
D D
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
59
69
70
forbidden.
X2.S X2.S
X2.B X2.B
59
69
70
+K6 +K6 +K6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
E E
64
38
22
23
65
64
65
67
A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 64 X1 38 X1 22 X1 23 X1 65 X1 64 X1 65 X1 67
A16c.GND A16c.24V A16c.UI13 A16c.UI14 A16c.GND A17b.GND_PWM13 A17b.GND_PWM14 A17b.GNDPWM16
+H3 +H3 +H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3
A16c PRESSUREstandard steering1 A16c VccPRESSUREstandard steering1 A16c Joystick activation A16c JoystickARMREST A16c EARTHJoystick armrest A17b EARTHJOYSTICKSTEERING A17b EARTHJOYSTICKSTEERING A17b GNDSavetyMVJoy
/88.D5 EARTH /88.F1 SUPPLY24V /88.D1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input13 /88.D1 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input14 /88.E5 EARTH /91.D5 EARTH /91.E5 EARTH /91.E5 EARTH
INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 INPUTMODULE3 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 JOYSTICKSTEERING Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 72
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3

A A4 Kl.15 CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: A
=K =K+K/49.F2 Supply24V =K+K/49.E2 6 =H+H3/58.E1
analogueall-purpose Input16 Supply24V =H+H3/58.C1 analogueuniversal input1
+K2 A16b24VJoystick activation A16b Joystick steeringtransmitter1 A16c VccJoystick steeringsensor2ree A16c Joystick steeringsensor2re
E +K2 +K2 +H3 +H3 A
=K A16b.24V =K A16b.UI16 A16c.24VDO1 A16c.UI1
F46 X1 36 X1 25 X1 33 X1 4
10A A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1
4
36
25
33
RD +K2 +K2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X56/11F3475A
A
=K
66
65
X2.B
B X2.S B
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
66
65
=H+H/19.E1 GND +K6
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X44
12
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
+K2
=K
Kl.15.2
BK1 1Q
BK2 1Q
XMSP6.10 1 XMSP6.11 1
BK5 1Q
BK4 1Q
+K2 +K2
=K =K
5
1
4
1 2 4 5
+ signal signal
+
C =K C
WH
WH
RD
RD
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+K4
S202
B_JOYSTICK
BN
BN

3 6
6
64
63
62
61
X2.S X2.S X2.S X2.S
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK3 1Q
BK 1Q BK6 1Q
X2.B X2.B X2.B X2.B
64
62
61
63
D
+K6 D
BK 1Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
67
X2.S
X2.B
67
+K6
BK 1.5Q
16
30
31
67
67
A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16b.X1 A16c.X1
2
X1 2 X1 16 X1 30 X1 31 X1 67 X1 67
E A16c.24V_logic A16c.GND_logic A16c.24V A16c.GND A16b.GND A16c.GND E
+H3 A +H3 A +H3 +H3 +K2 +H3
A16c A Feed GND A16c Feed GNDLogic part A16c Feed24V A16c FeedGND A16b GNDJoystick steeringleft A16c GNDJoystick steeringSensor2re
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=H+H3/58.C1 Supply 24VLogic part =H+H3/58.D1 GNDLogic part =H+H3/58.E1 Supply24V =H+H3/58.E1 MGND =K+K/49.E5 MGND =H+H3/58.E5 MGND
INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL2 INPUTMODUL3
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 73
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2

A CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: A
=H+H3/58.C1 analogueuniversal-input22 =H+H3/58.D1 A16c
aanalogueuniversal-input155 =H+H3/58.F1 Supply24V =H+H3/58.F1 Supply24V =H+H/51.D2 PWMOutput13(Bank4) =H+H/51.D2 PWMOutput14(Bank4) =H+H/51.E2 PWMOutput16(Bank4)
A17b Joystick steering right A17b Reserve
+H3 JJoystickpressurestandard
A16c JJoystickpressurestandard steering11 steering22 A16c 224VJoystick activation A16c 24VJoystickArmrest A17b Joystick steering left
+H3 A A +H3 +H3 +H3 A +H3 A
+H3
A16c.UI2 A16c.UI15 A16c.24VV A16c.24V A17b.PWM13 A17b.PWM14 A17b.PWM16
X1 5 X1 24 X1 36 X1 37 X1 22 X1 23 X1 25
A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
24
37
22
36
23
25
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
1
1
1
Reserve
B +H3 B
B201a Servostat
68
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
P 26bar X2.B
0 X2.S
68
PROJ: 8920980_003
2 +K6
2
2
+H3
WH 1Q
Splice.X11
BK 1Q
1
60
C X2.B C
1
1
=K + 1 1
1
X2.S 1
+H3
60
BN
+K6 +K4 +H3 +H3 Y64
Y51 Y52
B200
BK 1Q
YVENTIL_2 0
0 BK BU
0 2 0 2 2
S 2 3
2
3
2
7
7
+K4
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
S202
0
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
8
8
D D
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1Q
69
70
X2.S
forbidden.
X2.B
69
70
+K6
59
X2.S
X2.B
59
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
+K6
WH 1.5Q
22
23
65
64
65
67
A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A16c.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1 A17b.X1
X1 22 X1 23 X1 65 X1 64 X1 65 X1 67
E A16c.UI13 A16c.UI14 A16c.GND A17b.GND_PWM13 A17b.GND_PWM14 A17b.GNDPWM16 E
A +H3 A +H3
+H3 JoystickArmrest +H3 +H3 +H3 Reserve
A16c Joystick activation A16c A16c GNDJoystick armrest A17b GNDJoystick steeringleft MasseGNDJoystick steeringright
A17b A17b
=H+H3/58.D1 1analogueall-purpose Input13=H+H3/58.D1 aanalogueuniversal input14 =H+H3/58.E5 =H+H/51.E5 MGND
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
3 MGND =H+H/51.D5 MGND =H+H/51.E5 MGND

INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 INPUTMODUL3 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2 OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000

Datum 26.03.200716:16 JOYSTICKSTEERING Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 74
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
OUTPUTMODUL2 Kl.15
CAN: A4
Digitaloutput4 /75.F2 =K
BackupALARM A17b +K2 E
+H3
A17b.DO4
39 X1
F23 10A
A17b.X1
39
RD
A
R23
B B
OLE23
L23
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
Verb.
GND
REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORGROENEVELD
1
A4.X41
1
+K2 NOT USED
=K+K2X52.B:2
C WH 1.5Q
Rckfahrs. C
B16.X
1
1
+H5
B16
X52.B
0
+K2
2
B16.X RD
2
WH 1.5Q 1 BU
2 YE
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K2
XMSP6.22 1
D D
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
E E
54
A17b.X1
54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+H3
MASSEBackup&# A17b
MASSE /75.D5
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORGROENEVELD Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 75
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
C
E
B
D
A
Zustand
nderung
1
1
Datum
Name
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
Ausgabe
2
2
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
3
3
MONITOR
OLE25
OLE24
Verb.
Verb.
4
4
1
1
=K
A4
+K2
OG
WH
F73
PK
RT 1
1
ELECTRONICS
E
A
Kl.15
BN
+K2
3A
VT
BK
GND
+K2
A4.X41.6
5
5
R73
L73
XMSP6.21
REARAREAMONITORING
REARAREAMONITORING
BERMONITORANDCAMERA
6
6
REARAREAMONITORINGVIAMONITORANDCAMERA
CAMERA
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
7
7
8920980
460901000003
Ort
Anlage
8
8
003
von
76 Blatt
114
F
C
E
B
D
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CAN: CAN:
36
A17a.X1 /87.E2 SUPPLY24V /87.E2 SUPPLY24V
X1 36 A16b VCCLEVELcentral l. s. A16b VCCDISTRIBUTORcen. l. s.
A17a.V_DO3 +K2 +K2
A +H3 A16b.24V A16b.24V A
A4 A17a SUPPLYSUPPLYDO3 X1 33 X1 32
/90.F1 SUPPLYfordigital output3 A16b.X1 A16b.X1
=K
32
33
Kl.15
CAN:
+K2
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE1
E
RD 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
CAN:
/90.F1 digital output3
A17a VCCcentral lubrication unit.MVPUMP
F53 10A +H3
RD 1 1
A17a.DO3
X1 37 +K6 +K6
43
40
B A X2.S X2.S B
A17a.X1
37
R53
X2.B X2.B
43
40
L53
PROJ: 8920980_003
RD 0.5Q
GND
RD 1Q
A4.X41
9
+K2
B.9 2 2
WH 1.5Q
+H5 +V1
WH 1.5Q
X31 X43
A
C C
BN
BN
1 4
1
+K6 +
47
X1.S B44 1 2
M B43
+H5
X1.B
47
M6 4 3
0 S
WH 1.5Q
2 3 3 2
BK
BK
BU
BU
M6.X
2
3
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X31 X43
C
B
B
D D
BU 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BU 1Q
BK 1Q
forbidden.
2 2 2 2
BK 1.5Q
+K6 +K6 +K6 +K6
44
45
42
X2.B X2.B X2.B X2.B
41
X2.S X2.S X2.S X2.S
42
44
45
41
BU 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1 1 1 1
40
A17a.X1
22
60
56
59
X1 40 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1 A16b.X1
A17a.GND_DO3 X1 22 X1 60 X1 56 X1 59
+H3 A16b.UI13 A16b.GND A16b.FI2 A16b.GND
A17a GNDcentral lubrication systemMVPUMP +K2 A +K2 +K2 +K2
/90.F1 EARTH A16b Sig.LEVELcentr A16b GNDLEVEL centr A16b Sig.DISTRIBUTOR centr. A16b GNDDISTRIBUTOR centr.
CAN: /87.D2 ANALOGUEUniversale /87.D5 EARTH /87.D5 frequency input2 /87.D5 EARTH
OUTPUTMODULE1 CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
F INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 INPUTMODULE2 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMLIEBHERR Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 77
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE1 OPTIONGROENEVELD INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE2

CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
A /90.C1 PWMOutput1(Bank1) CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM /86.D5 frequency input2 /86.D5 frequency input1 /87.D5 frequency input1 A
A17a PARKINGBRAKE A16a drive rotation speed A16a SPEEDhydro motor1 A16b SPEEDhydro motor
+H3 A +H3 +H3 +K2
A17a.PWM1 A4 A16a.FI2 A16a.FI1 A16b.FI1
X1 4 =K +K4 X1 56 X1 55 X1 55
A17a.X1 A204 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16b.X1
4
+K2
56
55
55
Kl.15
A17.aX1a
1
+H3 E
RD 1Q
1
WH 1.5Q
AUTOMATIC
F12 10A GREASING
SYSTEM
B RD B
GREASING
WH 1.5Q
+H3 MODE
+K6
17
Splice.X10 A X2.S
PROJ: 8920980_003
R12:
RD 1Q
1 1 X2.B
RD 1Q
17
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
L12
4 3 2 1
GND 4 3 *2 *1
RD 1Q
+H3 A204.X
1
2
2
4
3
2
1
X50.S X50.S
WH 1.5Q
*
X50.B A4.X56
1
2
+H3 +K2 WH 1.5Q

C C
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
Y10.JPT B1.X B2.X B2a.X
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
1
1
+K6 1 +F3 1 +F3 1 +F3 1
Y10
B1 B2 B2a
0 0 0 0
2 +K6 25 2 2 2
26
27
Y10.JPT X2.S +K2 B1.X B2.X B2a.X
2
2
X2.B 1 XMSP63
25
26
27
WH 1.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BU 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
D D
2
BU 1Q
BU 1Q
BK 1.5Q
+K6
forbidden.
18
A205.X B203.X X2.B
3
8
1
1
3 1 6 2 4 5 7 8 1
1 X2.S
+V1 1
18
B203 P
+H3
BU 1Q
A205
2
0 B203.X
2
1
E
Groeneveld E
TwinPump
46
70
69
69
A17a.X1 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 A16b.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1 46 X1 70 X1 69 X1 69
A17a.GND_PWM1 A16a.GND_FI2 A16a.GND_FI1 A16b.GND_FI1
+H3 D +H3 +H3 +K2
A17a EARTHPARKINGBRAKE A16a EARTHoutput speed A16a SPEEDhydro motor1 A16b EARTHSPEEDhydro m.
/90.C5 EARTH /86.E5 EARTHfrequency input2 /86.E5 EARTHfrequency input1 /87.E5 EARTHfrequency input
CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE1 INPUTMODULE2
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 PARKINGBRAKESPEEDSENSOR Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 78
WerkBischofshofenGmbH CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
=K+K2A9.X:1
INGITIONLOCKWITHTRANSPONDERCOIL S1.X1.8PINNINGOUT OLE12 Verb. 1 =K+K2A9.X:2
WITHOLE12CONNECT
+K4 WH 2.5Q
A S1.X1.8a +K6 A
1
X1.S
1
5
WH 2.5Q
10 5 6 8 9
WH 2.5Q
58 15 15 50a 50a
Verb.
P 0 12
S1
+H3
OLE11
24
A16a.X1
+K2 30 30 X1 24
=H A16a.UI15
A4.X56a:4 1 2
1
A4.X56:4PINNINGOUT S1.X2 S1.X3 +H3
1
WITHOLE11CONNECT RD 2.5Q A16a Kl50a
=H+H/37.D2
igniton lockS1.X1:6
ANALOGUEuniversal-input15
B A4.X56 A4.X57 CAN: B
GNDMP6CABIN
T.3
S.4 INPUTMODULE1
F26A4.X40:9
A4 Kl.15.X
PROJ: 8920980_003
=K 1
+K2 E
Kl.15
F29
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
30 86 25A
K01 WH
(1) dashboard V1
(2) antenna A
/40.E5
(3) igniton switch
/19.A1
(4) mother 87 85
(5) key
Kl.30
C 1 XMSP12.2 C
GND
A9Kl.30
A9Kl.15
+K2
Kl.30.X 1 XMSP12
1
RD 1.5Q
WH 2.5Q
BK 1.5Q
Master-Key
A9.X
=K Kl.30 11 RD 1.5Q
+K2 11 WH 2.5Q
Kl.15 14
A9 14 BK 1.5Q
GND 13
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Operation-Key 13 WH 2.5Q
1
3 1 WH 2.5Q
D Relais1 3 D
5
2 WH 2.5Q
2 WH 2.5Q
Relais2 4
6 4
forbidden.
8 WH 1Q A4
8 WH 1Q
10 =K
Kl.15
Relais3
12 10 +K2
7 /5.B2
Relais4 F15.1 E
9
F15
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
10A
/5.C3 F15.2 RD
E A E
F15.3
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
10pinPLUG GND
NOTin use!
WH 1Q
1
A4.X44
4
4 2 5 3 1 6 8 7 9 10 11 12
A4.X44a:4 E.4
1
ELECTRONICSIMMOBILISER +K4 VNR
+K2
S2
OPTION 1 Verb. OLE13
A4.X44:4PINNINGOUT
F =K+K2A9.X:8 WITHOLE13CONNECT F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 ELECTRONICIMMOBILISER Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 79
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F810AKl.58A4.X57/4
PRESELECTORCLOCK
A4
A =K A4 A
+K2 E
=K
+K2 E
120 min
F39 5A F40 20A
BN YE
OLE15
P
A A
R39 R40
Verb.
L39 L40
X4
1
2
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
+K4
1
GND GND
B B
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
RD 1Q
=K+K4X4:1
A4.X41
4
A4.X41
7
PROJ: 8920980_003
RD 1Q =K+K4X4:11 1 Verb. OLE14 =K =K

WH 2Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
+K2 +K2
XMSP6.16 2 XMSP6.16 3
C C
RD,RD 2.5Q,2.5Q RD 2.5Q

=K+K2A4.X52:7 1 Verb. OLE16

A4.X52 A4.X52
8
7
XMSP6.16 4 BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q

Kl.30 +K2
A4
BK 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
=K
E
+K2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X2/1
85 87 87a
D F42 10A M15.X D
1
WH 2.5Q
=B+B2OLE22:1
RD 1
V46 K243 +
A +B2 M
forbidden.
R42 B.X6 +H1
2
3
4
5
6
1
86 30
M15
L42
WH 2.5Q
0
1
DBW2010
A.X1
2
+B2
M15.X
Verb.
GND
2 BK 1.5Q
1 WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
OLE17
A4.X41 A4.X52
12
E +K2 E
C.X1
1 OR =K+K2OLE17:1
OLE22 Verb. 1
NOZZLESTICKPREHEATER =K
WITHCABLE(OR)CONNECT!
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4
+B2
X5
A21.X1
4
OLE18 Verb. 1 =B+B2X5:1 RD 1.5Q X1 4
BK 1.5Q 1 A21.PME
=K
WH 1.5Q 2 +K4 A
3 A21AUXILIARYHEATER
BK 1.5Q /46.B2 AUXILIARYHEATER
X223.B
4 CAN:
+K2
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q PLUGCONNECTION

+K2 BK 1.5Q 1 FUELPREHEATING
F XMSP6.16 1 2 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 AUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 80
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PRESELECTORCLOCK
Kl.30 Kl.30
A4 A4
F810AKl.58A4.X57/4
A =K =K A
120 min +K2
E
+K2
E
P F39 5A F40 20A

BN YE
A A
R39 R40
X3
1
2
12
4
11
+K4 L39 L40
/19.F7
BK,BK 1Q,1Q
B B
GND GND
X
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X41 A4.X41
7
+K2 +K2
RD 1Q
WH 2Q
BK 1Q RD 2.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
C XMSP6.15 1 C
+K2
BK 2.5Q
+B2
12
X12.ST2
11
3
4
9
THERMO90
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X13.ST3
X11.ST1
D D
+B2
WH 1.5Q =K+K4A21.X1:4 1 Verb. OLE21
4
WITHCABLE(SW)CONNECT!
forbidden.
E E
A21.X1
4
X1 4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21.PME
+K4 A
A21 AUXILIARYHEATER
/96.B2 AUXILIARYHEATER
CAN:
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 AUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 81
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4 Kl.15
=K
A A
+K2 E
F14 15A PLUGCONNECTION

BU AUXILIARYHEATER
DBW2010
A
R14
L14 X223.S 1/2 2/2
+K2
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
GND
B B
=K
X44
1
+K2
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
Kl.30.Xa
1 RD 6Q WH 2.5Q WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=K
+K2.RH
1 87a 87 86 87a 87 86
0 0
C F208 C
20A K227 K228
YE 2 +K2 +K2
30 85 30 85
RD 2.5Q WH 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
D D
RD 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
forbidden.
BK 2.5Q
R10.X
4
1
1 2 3 4
E E
R10
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
TON+50:OFF+10
+K6 +K6
XMSP6.19 1 1 XMSP6.20
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 DIESELPREHEATINGCOLDWEATHERKIT40 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 82
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
C
E
B
D
A
Zustand
nderung
1
1
Datum
Name
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
Ausgabe
2
2
lbhhae0
+H5.
S15*
DonningerJ.
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
XMSP4.1*
+H.
BK 95Q BK 95Q
1
1
3
3
+B1.
G1*
F01*
100A
+H5.
RD 25Q

+
1
BK 95Q
+B1.
G2*
4
4
0
M8*
+H4.

+
*
M
1
RD 95Q
5
5
M1*
+M. RD,RD 95Q,25Q
M
31
30
*
50
+H4.
K11*
F03*
+H5.
200A
K11*.X4
K11*.X3
RD 25Q RD 25Q WH 25Q

1
1 1
30.1
30.2 50
31
RD 25Q
6
6
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40
+M.
G3*
3
W
+H5.
K04*
F02*
100A
+H.
B+
B
*
RD 25Q RD,RD 25Q,6Q RD 25Q

1
D+
30.1
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
30.2 50
31
7
7
8920980
F07*
+H5.
RD
10A
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESCOLDWEATHERKIT40C
F07*.X1
RD 6Q
1
1
460901000003
Ort
Anlage
8
8
003
von
83 Blatt
114
F
C
E
B
D
A
F
C
E
B
D
A
Zustand
nderung
1
1
Datum
Name
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
Ausgabe
2
2
lbhhae0
+H5
S15*
DonningerJ.
+H
XMSP4.1*
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
BK 95Q BK 95Q
1
1
3
3
G1*
+B1
+H5
F01*
100A
RD 25Q

+
1
BK 95Q
G2*
+B1
4
4
0
M8*
+H4

+
*
XMSP10*
+M
1
M
1
RD 95Q
BK 95Q
M1*
5
5
+M RD,RD 25Q,95Q
M
*
31
30
50
+H4
K11*
+H5
F03*
200A
RD 25Q RD 25Q WH 25Q

1
2
88
88a
86
85
RD 25Q
6
6
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586
G3*
3+M
W
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586
+H5
K04*
F02*
100A
+H
B+
RD 25Q RD,RD 6Q,25Q RD 25Q

1
D+
*
30.1
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
30.2 50
31
7
7
8920980
+H5
F07*
RD
10A
F07*.X1
RD 6Q
1
1
460901000003
Ort
Anlage
8
8
003
von
84 Blatt
114
F
C
E
B
D
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
PMEMASTERGENERALOUTLAYONANDOUTLETS
=K A15 ModuleNr.:
+K2 Module name: PME_MASTER
B B
Phys.Adr. Sheet EA Description Plug Pin Phys.Adr. Sheet EA Description Plug Pin
PROJ: 8920980_003
COM4 1
A15.GND /40.E1 EARTH .PWR.X 1 A15.DCD DataCarrierDetec
COM4 2
A15.DIGIN0 /40.E3 Kl.15 .PWR.X 2 A15.RXD /40.A7 Receive(RXD)
COM4 3
A15.DIGIN1 DIGITAL1 .PWR.X 3 A15.TXD /40.A8 Transmit(TXD)
COM4 4
A15.DIGIN2 DIGITAL2 .PWR.X 4 A15.DTR DataDerminalRead
A15.GND SIGNALGround(S COM4 5
A15.Shield /40.E2 HOUSINGMASTER .PWR.X 5 /40.A6
A15.n.c. NOTUSED COM4 6
A15.VBat /40.E4 Kl.30 .PWR.X 6
A15.RTS Requesttosend(R COM4 7
A15.CAN4L CANLOW4 CAN 1 8
A15.CTS Cleartosend(CTS COM4
A15.CAN3L /35.B6 CANLOW3 CAN 2 NOTUSED 9
A15.n.c. COM4
A15.CAN2L /38.C3 CANLOW2 CAN 3
C CAN 4 A15.TXD+ TransmitData+ LAN1 1 C
A15.CAN1L /37.A4 CANLOW1 TransmitData
CAN 5 A15.TXD LAN1 2
A15.CAN1H /37.A5 CANHIGH1 ReceiveData+
CAN 6 A15.RXD+ LAN1 3
A15.CAN2H /38.C4 CANHIGH2 NOTUSED
A15.n.c. LAN1 4
A15.CAN3H /35.B7 CANHIGH3 CAN 7

A15.n.c. NOTUSED
CAN 8 LAN1 5
A15.CAN4H CANHIGH4 A15.RXD ReceiveData LAN1 6
A15.DCD DataCarrierDetec COM1 1 A15.n.c. NOTUSED LAN1 7

A15.RXD Receive(RXD) COM1 2 A15.n.c. NOTUSED LAN1 8
A15.TXD Transmit(TXD) COM1 3 TransmitData+
A15.TXD+ LAN2 1
A15.DTR DataDerminalRead COM1 4 TransmitData
A15.TXD LAN2 2
A15.GND SIGNALGround(S COM1 5 ReceiveData+
A15.RXD+ LAN2 3
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A15.n.c. NOTUSED COM1 6 NOTUSED

A15.n.c. LAN2 4
A15.n.c. NOTUSED LAN2 5
D A15.CTS Cleartosend(CTS COM1 8 D
A15.RXD ReceiveData LAN2 6
A15.n.c. NOTUSED COM1 9 NOTUSED
A15.n.c. LAN2 7
A15.DCD DataCarrierDetec COM2 1 NOTUSED
A15.n.c. LAN2 8
A15.RXD Receive(RXD) COM2 2
forbidden.
A15.TXD Transmit(TXD) COM2 3 TransmitData+ LAN3 1

A15.TXD+
A15.DTR DataDerminalRead COM2 4 TransmitData LAN3 2
A15.TXD
A15.GND SIGNALGround(S COM2 5 ReceiveData+ LAN3 3
A15.RXD+
A15.n.c. NOTUSED COM2 6 NOTUSED LAN3 4
A15.n.c.
COM2 7
A15.RTS Requesttosend(R A15.n.c. NOTUSED LAN3 5

A15.CTS Cleartosend(CTS COM2 8 LAN3 6

A15.RXD ReceiveData
A15.n.c. NOTUSED COM2 9 LAN3 7
A15.n.c. NOTUSED
A15.n.c. NOTUSED LAN3 8
A15.DCD DataCarrierDetec COM3 1
E A15.RXD Receive(RXD) COM3 2 E
A15.TXD Transmit(TXD) COM3 3
A15.DTR DataDerminalRead COM3 4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A15.GND SIGNALGround(S COM3 5

A15.CTS Cleartosend(CTS COM3 8
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYMASTER Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 85
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
A A
INPUTMODULE1ONANDOUTLETS
A16a ModuleNr.:
B +H3 Module name: PME1_INPUT MODULE B
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16a.24V RESERVE X1 1 A16a.24V /54.F7 HIGHPRESSUREtravel pump X1 41

A16a.24V_logic /41.E5 VBatt24VLog X1 2 A16a RESERVE X1 42
A16a.GND RESERVE X1 3 A16a.CAN_Low /37.E2 CANlow(Resverb.) X1 43
A16a.UI1 /23.A3 PRESSURENLPCheck X1 4 A16a.CAN_Low /37.E4 CANlow X1 44
A16a.UI2 /54.A7 HIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP X1 5 A16a.GND RESERVE X1 45
A16a.UI3 /23.A4 PRESSURENLP X1 6 A16a.RI1 /21.A6 Hydraulic oil temperature X1 46
A16a.UI4 /21.A3 PRESSUREPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE X1 7 A16a.RI1 /21.F6 Hydraulic oil temperature X1 47
C
A16a.UI9 /51.C1 CONTROLLEVERVOR1 X1 8 A16a.RI2 RESERVE X1 48 C
A16a.UI10 /51.C2 CONTROLLEVERREVERSE1 X1 9 A16a.RI2 RESERVE X1 49
A16a.UI11 /56.F4 LIFTKICKOUT X1 10 A16a.5V RESERVE X1 50
A16a.UI12 /56.F2 BUCKETRETURNTODIG X1 11 A16a.5V RESERVE X1 51

A16a.GND RESERVE X1 12 A16a.5V RESERVE X1 52

A16a RESERVE X1 13 A16a.5V RESERVE X1 53

A16a.24V RESERVE X1 14 A16a.GND RESERVE X1 54
A16a.24V RESERVE X1 15 A16a.FI1 /78.A7 SPEEDhydro motor1 X1 55
A16a.GND_logic /41.E6 SUPPLYGNDLOGIK X1 16 A16a.FI2 /78.A6 Drive rotation speed X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16a.GND RESERVE X1 17 A16a.CAN_High /37.E3 CANhigh(Resverb.) X1 57

A16a.UI5 /56.A1 FLOATPOSITION X1 18 A16a.CAN_High /37.E5 CANhigh X1 58
D A16a.UI6 /23.A6 LFD X1 19 A16a.GND /23.E3 GNDNLPCheck X1 59 D
A16a.UI7 QUICKCHANGEDEVICE X1 20 A16a.GND /23.E4 GNDNLP X1 60
A16a.UI8 /52.A2 InchPotentiometer1 X1 21 A16a.GND /21.F2 GNDPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE X1 61
A16a.UI13 /21.A5 Transmission overtemperature X1 22 A16a.GND HIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP X1 62
forbidden.
A16a.UI14 /21.A2 TANKSENSOR X1 23 A16a.GND /52.F2 EARTHInchPotentiometer1 X1 63

A16a.UI15 /19.B6 Kl50a X1 24 A16a.GND /56.F5 LIFTKICKOUT X1 64
A16a.UI16 /52.A6 Throttle transmitter1 X1 25 A16a.GND /21.F1 EARTHTANKSENSOR X1 65

A16a.GND RESERVE X1 26 A16a.GND /56.F3 X1 66
BUCKETRETURNTODIG
EARTHThrottle transmitter1
A16a RESERVE X1 27 A16a.GND /52.F6 X1 67

A16a.24V RESERVE X1 28 A16a.GND RESERVE X1 68
A16a.CAN_Res CANENDWITHPIN43verb. X1 29 A16a.GND_FI1 /78.F7 SPEEDhydro motor1 X1 69
E
A16a.24V /41.E7 VBatt24V X1 30 A16a.GND_FI2 /78.F6 EARTHOutput speed X1 70 E
A16a.GND /41.E8 SUPPLYEARTH X1 31
A16a.24V /21.F3 VccPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16a.24V /23.E4 VccNLPCheck X1 33

A16a.24V /23.E5 VccNLP X1 34
A16a.24V /52.A1 24VInchPotentiometer1 X1 35
A16a.24V /56.A2 24VBUCKETRETURNTODIG X1 36
A16a.24V /21.A1 24VTANKSENSOR X1 37
A16a.24V /56.A4 24VLIFTKICKOUT X1 38
A16a.24V /52.A5 24VThrottle transmitter1 X1 39
A16a.GND RESERVE X1 40
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE1 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 86
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
A A
INPUTMODULE2ONANDOUTLETS
A16b ModuleNr.:
B +K2 Module name: PME1_INPUTMODULE B
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16b.24V RESERVE X1 1 A16b.24V RESERVE X1 41

A16b.24V_logic /41.E1 VBatt24VLog X1 2 A16b RESERVE X1 42
A16b.GND RESERVE X1 3 A16b.CAN_Low /38.B5 CANlow(CANEm. X1 43
A16b.UI1 /25.A5 DRIVINGLIGHT X1 4 A16b.CAN_Low /38.B3 CANlow X1 44
A16b.UI2 /25.A7 HIGHBEAM X1 5 A16b.GND RESERVE X1 45
A16b.UI3 /27.A8 INDICATORSIGNAL X1 6 A16b.RI1 RESERVE X1 46
A16b.UI4 RESERVE X1 7 A16b.RI1 RESERVE X1 47
C
A16b.UI9 /51.C6 CONTROLLEVER Option1 X1 8 A16b.RI2 RESERVE X1 48 C
A16b.UI10 /51.C6 CONTROLLEVEROption2 X1 9 A16b.RI2 RESERVE X1 49
A16b.UI11 /51.C8 CONTROLLEVEROption3 X1 10 A16b.5V RESERVE X1 50
A16b.UI12 /57.A6 Warning buzzer X1 11 A16b.5V RESERVE X1 51

A16b.GND RESERVE X1 12 A16b.5V RESERVE X1 52

A16b RESERVE X1 13 A16b.5V RESERVE X1 53

A16b.24V RESERVE X1 14 A16b.GND RESERVE X1 54
A16b.24V RESERVE X1 15 A16b.FI1 /78.A8 SPEEDhydro motor X1 55
A16b.GND_logic /41.E2 EARTHLOGIK X1 16 A16b.FI2 /77.F7 Sig.DISTRIBUTORcentral lubrication system X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16b.GND RESERVE X1 17 A16b.CAN_High /38.B6 CANhigh(CANEm X1 57

A16b.UI5 /51.C3 CONTROLLEVERFORWARD2 X1 18 A16b.CAN_High /38.B4 CANhigh X1 58
D A16b.UI6 /51.C4 CONTROLLEVERREVERSE2 X1 19 A16b.GND /77.F8 GNDDISTRIBUTORcentral lubrication system X1 59 D
A16b.UI7 /52.A3 InchPotentimeter2 X1 20 A16b.GND /77.F5 GNDLEVELcentral lubrication system X1 60
A16b.UI8 /52.A7 Throttle transmitter2 X1 21 A16b.GND RESERVE X1 61
A16b.UI13 /77.F4 Sig.LEVELZentr X1 22 A16b.GND /52.F3 EARTHInchPotentiometer2 X1 62
Diesel particulate filter
forbidden.
A16b.UI14 X1 23 A16b.GND /52.F7 EARTHThrottle transmitter X1 63

A16b.UI15 Diesel particulate filter X1 24 A16b.GND RESERVE X1 64
A16b.UI16 /71.A6 JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR1 X1 25 A16b.GND EARTHJoystick& X1 65

A16b.GND RESERVE X1 26 A16b.GND X1 66
RESERVE
A16b RESERVE X1 27 A16b.GND /71.F6 GNDJOYSTICKSTEERING X1 67

A16b.24V RESERVE X1 28 A16b.GND RESERVE X1 68
A16b.CAN_Res CANEND X1 29 A16b.GND_FI1 /78.F8 EARTHSPEEDHy X1 69
E
A16b.24V /41.E3 VBatt24V X1 30 A16b.GND_FI2 RESERVE X1 70 E
A16b.GND /41.E4 SUPPLYEARTH X1 31
A16b.24V /77.A7 VCCDISTRIBUTORCentral lubrictaion system X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16b.24V /77.A4 VCCLEVELCentral lubrication system X1 33

A16b.24V /52.A4 24VInchPotentiometer2 X1 34
A16b.24V /52.A8 24VThrottler transmitter2 X1 35
A16b.24V /71.A5 VCCJOYSTICKSTEERING X1 36
A16b.24V RESERVE X1 37
A16b.GND RESERVE X1 40
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 87
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
A A
INPUTMODULE3ON/OUTLETS
A16c Module Nr.:

B +H3 Module name: PME1_INPUTMODULE B
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16c.24V NOTUSED! X1 1 A16c.24V NOTUSED! X1 41

A16c.24V_logic /71.F1 SUPPLYEARTH X1 2 A16c NOTUSED! X1 42
A16c.GND NOT USED! X1 3 A16c.CAN_Low /37.D6 CANlow X1 43
A16c.UI1 /71.A7 JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2right X1 4 A16c.CAN_Low /37.C6 CANlow X1 44
A16c.UI2 /72.A2 JoystickPRESSUREstandard steering1 X1 5 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 45
A16c.UI3 /59.F7 Basket functionNotOFF1 X1 6 A16c.RI1 NOTUSED! X1 46
A16c.UI4 /59.A2 Basket functionModus1 X1 7 A16c.RI1 NOTUSED! X1 47
C
A16c.UI9 /59.A3 Basket functionModus2 X1 8 A16c.RI2 NOTUSED! X1 48 C
A16c.UI10 NOTUSED! X1 9 A16c.RI2 NOTUSED! X1 49
A16c.UI11 NOTUSED! X1 10 A16c.5V NOTUSED! X1 50
A16c.UI12 NOTUSED! X1 11 A16c.5V NOTUSED! X1 51

A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 12 A16c.5V NOTUSED! X1 52

A16c NOTUSED! X1 13 A16c.5V NOTUSED! X1 53

A16c.24V NOTUSED! X1 14 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 54
A16c.24V NOTUSED! X1 15 A16c.FI1 NOTUSED! X1 55
A16c.GND_logic /71.F2 EARTHLOGICALPART X1 16 A16c.FI2 NOTUSED! X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 17 A16c.CAN_High /37.D7 CANhigh X1 57

A16c.UI5 NOTUSED! X1 18 A16c.CAN_High /37.C7 CANhigh X1 58
D A16c.UI6 NOTUSED! X1 19 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 59 D
A16c.UI7 NOTUSED! X1 20 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 60
A16c.UI8 NOTUSED! X1 21 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 61
A16c.UI13 /72.F3 Joystick activation X1 22 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 62
forbidden.
A16c.UI14 /72.F4 JoystickARMREST X1 23 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 63

A16c.UI15 RESERVE X1 24 A16c.GND /72.F1 PRESSUREstandard steering1 X1 64
A16c.UI16 /59.F8 basket functionNotOFF2 X1 25 A16c.GND /72.F5 EARTHJoystick armrest X1 65

A16c.GND SUPPLYEARTH X1 26 A16c.GND X1 66
NOTUSED!
A16c NOTUSED! X1 27 A16c.GND /71.F7 JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2re X1 67

A16c.24V NOTUSED! X1 28 A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 68
A16c.CAN_Res CANENDWITHPIN43conn. X1 29 A16c.GND_FI1 NOTUSED! X1 69
E
A16c.24V /71.F3 SUPPLY24V X1 30 A16c.GND_FI2 NOTUSED! X1 70 E
A16c.GND /71.F4 SUPPLYEARTH X1 31
A16c.24VV_DO1 VbattSUPPLYDO1 X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16c.24VDO1 /71.A8 JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2right X1 33

A16c.24V NOTUSED! X1 34
A16c.24VV /72.A3 24VJoystick activation X1 36
A16c.24V /72.A4 24VJoystickARMREST X1 37
A16c.24V /72.F2 VccPRESSUREstandard steering1 X1 38
A16c.GND NOTUSED! X1 40
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 88
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
INPUTMODULE4ON/OUTLETS
A16d ModuleNr.:
B +H3 Module name: PME1_OUTPUTMODULE B
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16d.24V NOTUSED! X1 1 A16d.24V NOTUSED! X1 41

A16d.24V_logic /50.E1 SUPPLYEARTH X1 2 A16d NOTUSED! X1 42
A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 3 A16d.CAN_Low /38.D1 CANlow(Resconn.) X1 43
A16d.UI1 /60.A2 capacitive Joystick sensor X1 4 A16d.CAN_Low /38.D1 CANlow X1 44
A16d.UI2 /60.B7 3.CONTROLCIRCUITActive X1 5 A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 45
A16d.UI3 /60.A5 OUTPUTHall sensor1 X1 6 A16d.RI1 NOTUSED! X1 46
A16d.UI4 /60.A4 CONTROL5V X1 7 A16d.RI1 NOTUSED! X1 47
C
A16d.UI9 /60.B7 OPTION X1 8 A16d.RI2 NOTUSED! X1 48 C
A16d.UI10 NOTUSED! X1 9 A16d.RI2 NOTUSED! X1 49
A16d.UI11 /60.A6 OUTPUTHall sensor2 X1 10 A16d.5V /60.A3 RollerRockerCap X1 50
A16d.UI12 NOTUSED! X1 11 A16d.5V NOTUSED! X1 51

A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 12 A16d.5V NOTUSED! X1 52

A16d NOTUSED! X1 13 A16d.5V NOTUSED! X1 53

A16d.24V NOTUSED! X1 14 A16d.GND /60.A8 GNDRockerRollerCap X1 54
A16d.24V NOTUSED! X1 15 A16d.FI1 NOTUSED! X1 55
A16d.GND_logic /50.E2 EARTHLOGICALPART X1 16 A16d.FI2 NOTUSED! X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 17 A16d.CAN_High /38.D2 CANhigh(Resverb.) X1 57

A16d.UI5 NOTUSED! X1 18 A16d.CAN_High /38.D2 CANhigh X1 58
D A16d.UI6 NOTUSED! X1 19 A16d.GND /60.A3 capacitive Joystick sensor X1 59 D
A16d.UI7 NOTUSED! X1 20 A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 60
forbidden.


A16d.GND SUPPLYEARTH X1 26 A16d.GND X1 66
NOTUSED!
A16d NOTUSED! X1 27 A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 67

A16d.24V NOTUSED! X1 28 A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 68
A16d.CAN_Res WITHPIN43conn. X1 29 A16d.GND_FI1 NOTUSED! X1 69
E
A16d.24V /50.E3 SUPPLY24V X1 30 A16d.GND_FI2 NOTUSED! X1 70 E
A16d.GND /50.E4 SUPPLYEARTH X1 31
A16d.24VV_DO1 VbattDO1 X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16d.24VDO1 NOTUSED! X1 33
A16d.24V NOTUSED! X1 34
A16d.24VV /60.A1 capacitive Joystick sensor X1 36
A16d.GND NOTUSED! X1 40
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 89
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
A A
OUTPUTMODULE1ON/OUTLETS
A17a ModuleNr.:
PROJ: 8920980_003
A17a.24V_B1 /42.E4 VBatt24VBank1 X1 1 A17a.24V RESERVE X1 41

A17a.24V_logic /42.E1 VBatt24VLog X1 2 A17a.24V RESERVE X1 42
A17a.GND /42.E5 SUPPLYEARTH X1 3 A17a.CAN_Low /37.D4 CANlow X1 43
A17a.PWM1 /78.A1 PARKINGBRAKE X1 4 A17a.CAN_Low /37.C4 CANlow X1 44
A17a.PWM2 /57.A5 AHS X1 5 A17a.GND_DO2 RESERVE X1 45
A17a.PWM3 /56.A6 BUCKETRETURNTODIG X1 6 A17a.GND_PWM1 /78.F1 EARTHPARKINGBRAKE X1 46
A17a.PWM4 /56.A7 LIFTKICKOUT X1 7 A17a.GND_PWM2 /57.F5 EARTHAHS X1 47
C
A17a.PWM9 /53.A4 cruising range1 X1 8 A17a.GND_PWM3 /56.F6 EARTHBUCKETRETURNTODIG X1 48 C
A17a.PWM10 /53.A2 cruising range2 X1 9 A17a.GND_PWM4 /56.F7 EARTHLIFTKICKOUT X1 49
A17a.PWM11 /53.A3 cruising range3 X1 10 A17a.GND_PWM9 /53.F4 EARTHTRAVELRANGES1 X1 50
A17a.PWM12 /53.A1 Modulation X1 11 A17a.GND_PWM10 /53.F2 EARTHTRAVELRANGES2 X1 51

A17a.GND /43.E3 SUPPLYEARTH X1 12 A17a.GND_PWM11 /53.F3 EARTHTRAVELRANGES3 X1 52

A17a.24V_logic RESERVE X1 13 A17a.GND_PWM12 /53.F1 EARTHModulation X1 53

A17a.24V_B3 /43.E4 VBatt24VBk3zuM2/35(2.AST) X1 14 A17a.GND_DO4 /55.E2 EARTHBack alarmOPTICAL X1 54
A17a.24V_B2 /42.E7 SUPPLY24VBank2 X1 15 A17a.FI1 RESERVE X1 55
A17a.GND_logic /42.E2 SUPPLYEARTHLOGICALPART X1 16 A17a.FI2 RESERVE X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17a.GND /42.E7 SUPPLYEARTH X1 17 A17a.CAN_High /37.D5 CANhigh X1 57

A17a.PWM5 /56.A8 FLOATPOSITION X1 18 A17a.CAN_High /37.C5 CANhigh X1 58
D A17a.PWM6 /21.A7 VENTILATOR X1 19 A17a.GND RESERVE X1 59 D
A17a.PWM7 /54.A8 BUZZER X1 20 A17a.GND_PWM5 /56.F8 EARTHFLOATPOSITION X1 60
A17a.PWM8 /53.A8 Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1 X1 21 A17a.GND_PWM6 /21.F7 EARTHVENTILATOR X1 61
A17a.PWM13 /53.A6 oil engine1 X1 22 A17a.GND_PWM7 /54.F8 EARTHBUZZER X1 62
oil engine2
forbidden.
A17a.PWM14 /53.A7 X1 23 A17a.GND_PWM8 /53.F8 Swivel angle limitation,oil engine1 X1 63

A17a.PWM15 /54.A1 TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD X1 24 A17a.GND_PWM13 /53.F6 EARTHOil engine1 X1 64
A17a.PWM16 /54.A2 TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD X1 25 A17a.GND_PWM14 /53.F7 EARTHOil engine2 X1 65

A17a.GND /43.E2 SUPPLYEARTH X1 26 A17a.GND_PWM15 /54.F1 X1 66
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD
A17a.GND_logic RESERVE X1 27 A17a.GNDPWM16 /54.F2 EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD X1 67

A17a.24V_B4 /43.E1 VBatt24VBk4zuM2/33(2.AST) X1 28 A17a.GND RESERVE X1 68
A17a.CAN_Res CANENDWITHPIN43verb. X1 29 A17a.GND_FI1 RESERVE X1 69
E
A17a.24V RESERVE X1 30 A17a.GND_FI2 RESERVE X1 70 E
A17a.GND_DO1 RESERVE X1 31
A17a.V_DO1 /43.D5 SUPPLYSUPPLYDO1 X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17a.DO1 /43.D5 2.ASTJoystickzuM2/28 X1 33

A17a.V_DO2 /43.D8 SUPPLYSUPPLYDO2 X1 34
A17a.DO2 /43.D8 2.ASTPump2zuM2/14 X1 35
A17a.V_DO3 /77.A3 SUPPLYSUPPLYDO3 X1 36
A17a.DO3 /77.B3 VCCcentral lubrication systemMVPUMP X1 37
A17a.V_DO4 /55.A1 Supplydigital output4A4 X1 38
A17a.DO4 /55.A2 Back alarmOPTICAL X1 39
A17a.GND_DO3 /77.F3 GNDcentral lubrication systemMVPUMP X1 40
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYOUTPUTMODULE1 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 90
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
A A
A17b ModuleNr.:
PROJ: 8920980_003
A17b.24V_B1 /44.E4 VBatt24VBank1 X1 1 A17b.24V RESERVE X1 41

A17b.24V_logic /44.E1 VBatt24VLOGICALPART X1 2 A17b.24V RESERVE X1 42
A17b.GND /44.E5 SUPPLYEARTH X1 3 A17b.CAN_Low /38.E5 CANlow(CANEm. X1 43
A17b.PWM1 /53.A5 OVERSPEEDPROTECTION X1 4 A17b /38.D5 CANlow X1 44
A17b.PWM2 /28.B1 OPTIONS X1 5 A17b.GND_DO2 RESERVE X1 45
A17b.PWM3 /54.A5 SWIVELANGLEtravel pump1 X1 6 A17b.GND_PWM1 /53.F5 EARTHover rotation speed X1 46
A17b.PWM4 /54.A6 SWIVELANGLEtravel pump2 X1 7 A17b.GND_PWM2 /28.D1 EARTHOPTIONS X1 47
C
A17b.PWM9 /54.A3 TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2 X1 8 A17b.GND_PWM3 /54.F5 EARTHtravel pump X1 48 C
A17b.PWM10 /54.A4 TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2BACKWARD X1 9 A17b.GND_PWM4 /54.F6 EARTHSWIVELANGLE X1 49
A17b.PWM11 /57.A1 Additional equipment1 X1 10 A17b.GND_PWM9 /54.F3 EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTION X1 50
A17b.PWM12 /57.A2 Additional equipment2 X1 11 A17b.GND_PWM10 /54.F4 EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTION X1 51

A17b.GND /43.E7 SUPPLYEARTH X1 12 A17b.GND_PWM11 /57.F1 EARTHAdditional equipment X1 52

A17b.24V_logic RESERVE X1 13 A17b.GND_PWM12 /57.F2 EARTHAdditional equipment X1 53

A17b.24V_B3 /43.E8 VBatt24VBK3 X1 14 A17b.GND_DO4 /45.F5 EARTHBackup X1 54
A17b.24V_B2 /44.E7 VBatt24VBank2 X1 15 A17b.FI1 RESERVE X1 55
A17b.GND_logic /44.E2 VBattEARTH X1 16 A17b.FI2 RESERVE X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17b.GND /44.E7 SUPPLYEARTH X1 17 A17b.CAN_High /38.E8 CANhigh(CANEm. X1 57

A17b.PWM5 /23.A2 Emergency steering X1 18 A17b.CAN_High /38.D6 CANhigh X1 58
D A17b.PWM6 /21.A8 FANREVERSAL X1 19 A17b.GND RESERVE X1 59 D
A17b.PWM7 /23.A7 LFD X1 20 A17b.GND_PWM5 /23.E2 EARTHemergency steering X1 60
A17b.PWM8 /23.A8 LFD/FLOATPOSITION X1 21 A17b.GND_PWM6 /21.F8 EARTHFANREVERSAL X1 61
A17b.PWM13 /72.A6 JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT X1 22 A17b.GND_PWM7 /23.E7 EARTHLFD X1 62
forbidden.
A17b.PWM14 /72.A7 JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT X1 23 A17b.GND_PWM8 /23.E8 EARTHLFD X1 63

A17b.PWM15 /55.A4 VccMVGEROTORSTEERING X1 24 A17b.GND_PWM13 /72.F6 EARTHJOYSTICKSTEERING X1 64
A17b.PWM16 /72.A8 SavetyMVJoy X1 25 A17b.GND_PWM14 /72.F7 EARTHJOYSTICKSTEERING X1 65

A17b.GND /43.E6 SUPPLYEARTH X1 26 A17b.GND_PWM15 /55.E4 X1 66
EARTHGEROTORSTEERING
A17b.GND_logic RESERVE X1 27 A17b.GNDPWM16 /72.F8 GNDSavetyMVJoy X1 67

A17b.24V_B4 /43.E5 VBatt24VBk4 X1 28 A17b.GND RESERVE X1 68
A17b.CAN_Res /38.E6 CANEND X1 29 A17b.GND_FI1 RESERVE X1 69
E
A17b.24V RESERVE X1 30 A17b.GND_FI2 RESERVE X1 70 E
A17b.GND_DO1 RESERVE X1 31
A17b.V_DO1 /43.D1 VBattSUPPLYDO1 X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17b.DO1 /43.D1 2.ASTPump1 X1 33

A17b.V_DO2 /43.D4 SUPPLYSUPPLYDO X1 34
A17b.DO2 /43.D4 2.ASTTRANSMISSION X1 35
A17b.V_DO3 /45.F1 VBattDO3 X1 36
A17b.DO3 /25.B8 REVERSINGLIGHT X1 37
A17b /45.F2 VBattD04 X1 38
A17b.DO4 /45.A5 BackupALARM X1 39
A17b.GND_DO3 RESERVE X1 40
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 91
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE2
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
INPUTMODULE1
A A
A17c ModuleNr.:
PROJ: 8920980_003
A17c.24V_B1 /48.F3 VBatt24VBank1 X1 1 A17c.24V RESERVE X1 41

A17c.24V_logic /48.F1 VBatt24VLOGICALPART X1 2 A17c.24V RESERVE X1 42
A17c.GND /48.F5 SUPPLYEARTH X1 3 A17c.CAN_Low /38.B7 CANlow(CANEm.CAN_Resconn.) X1 43
A17c.PWM1 /49.A7 VccCUTOFFLIGHTING X1 4 A17c /38.B7 CANlow X1 44
A17c.PWM2 /50.A5 3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 X1 5 A17c.GND_DO2 RESERVE X1 45
A17c.PWM3 /50.A6 3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 X1 6 A17c.GND_PWM1 GNDCUTOFFLIGHTING X1 46
A17c.PWM4 /50.A7 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 X1 7 A17c.GND_PWM2 /50.E5 GND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 X1 47
C
A17c.PWM9 /57.A3 RESERVE X1 8 A17c.GND_PWM3 /50.E6 GND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 X1 48 C
A17c.PWM10 /57.A4 RESERVE X1 9 A17c.GND_PWM4 /50.E7 GND4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 X1 49
A17c.PWM11 RESERVE X1 10 A17c.GND_PWM9 /50.E8 RESERVE X1 50
A17c.PWM12 RESERVE X1 11 A17c.GND_PWM10 /57.F4 RESERVE X1 51

A17c.GND /49.F2 SUPPLYEARTH X1 12 A17c.GND_PWM11 /57.F3 RESERVE X1 52

A17c.24V_logic RESERVE X1 13 A17c.GND_PWM12 RESERVE X1 53

A17c.24V_B3 /49.F1 SUPPLY24VBank3 X1 14 A17c.GND_DO4 RESERVE X1 54
A17c.24V_B2 /48.F6 SUPPLY24VBank2 X1 15 A17c.FI1 RESERVE X1 55
A17c.GND_logic /48.F2 VBattEARTHLOGICALPART X1 16 A17c.FI2 RESERVE X1 56
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17c.GND /48.F7 SUPPLYEARTH X1 17 A17c.CAN_High CANhigh(CANEm.CAN_Resconn.) X1 57

A17c.PWM5 /50.A8 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 X1 18 A17c.CAN_High /38.B8 CANhigh X1 58
D A17c.PWM6 RESERVE X1 19 A17c.GND RESERVE X1 59 D
A17c.PWM7 RESERVE X1 20 A17c.GND_PWM5 GND4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 X1 60
A17c.PWM8 RESERVE X1 21 A17c.GND_PWM6 RESERVE X1 61
forbidden.


A17c.GND /49.F4 SUPPLYEARTH X1 26 A17c.GND_PWM15 X1 66
RESERVE
A17c.GND_logic RESERVE X1 27 A17c.GNDPWM16 RESERVE X1 67

A17c.24V_B4 /49.F3 SUPPLY24VBank4 X1 28 A17c.GND RESERVE X1 68
A17c.CAN_Res /38.B8 RESERVE X1 29 A17c.GND_FI1 RESERVE X1 69
E
A17c.24V RESERVE X1 30 A17c.GND_FI2 RESERVE X1 70 E
A17c.GND_DO1 RESERVE X1 31
A17c.V_DO1 VBattSUPPLYDO1 X1 32
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17c.DO1 RESERVE X1 33
A17c VBattSUPPLYD04 X1 38
A17c.GND_DO3 RESERVE X1 40
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 92
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
LHECUUP/CRGENERALOUTLAYONANDOUTLETS
+M
A700D LHECUUPCREXT
B B
Phys.Addr. Type Sheet Description Plug PIN Phys.Addr. Type Sheet Description Plug PIN
PROJ: 8920980_003
A700D.50 ENGINE STARTING X2 66 A700D.DO5.GND RESERVE X2 12

A700D.15 /47.C6 IGNITION ON X2 68 A700D.DO6 FANVALVE SELECTION X2 27
A700D.30.1 /47.F1 SUPPLY30b PERFORMANCEPART X2 1 A700D.DO6.GND FANVALVE EARTH X2 26
A700D.30.2 /47.F3 SUPPLY30b PERFORMANCEPART X2 2 A700D.DO10 FEHLERLAMPE (LowSide) X2 14
A700D.30.3 /47.F5 SUPPLY30b ELECTRONICS X2 4 A700D.DO11 CONTROL PREHEAT X2 28
A700D.31.2 /47.F2 EARTH PERFORMANCEPART X2 15 A700D.DO12 RESERVE (LowSide) X2 42
A700D.31.3 /47.F4 EARTH PERFORMANCEPART X2 16
A700D.FO SPEED SIGNAL X2 56
A700D.31.1 /47.F6 EARTH ELECTRONICS X2 3
C A700D.CAN1.H.2 CAN1HIGH X2 40 C
A700D.DI5 RESERVE X2 67 A700D.CAN1R /37.C3 CAN1RES X2 9
A700D.DI6 RESERVE X2 69 A700D.CAN1L.1 /37.C2 CAN1LOW X2 8
A700D.DI7 RESERVE X2 70 A700D.CAN1H.1 /37.D3 CAN1HIGH X2 54

A700D.AI9.1 GASPEDALCHANNEL1 SUPPLY X2 35 A700D.CAN1L.2 /37.D2 CAN1LOW X2 10

A700D.AI9.2 GASPEDALCHANNEL1 SIGNAL X2 34 A700D.CAN1.GND CAN1GND EARTH X2 45

A700D.AI9.GND GASPEDALCHANNEL1 EARTH X2 33 A700D.CAN2H.2 CAN2HIGH X2 41
A700D.AI10.1 GASPEDALCHANNEL2 SUPPLY X2 49 A700D.CAN2L.1 CAN2LOW X2 23
A700D.AI10.2 GASPEDALCHANNEL2 SIGNAL X2 48 A700D.CAN2R X2 22
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
CAN2RES
A700D.AI10.GND GASPEDALCHANNEL2 EARTH X2 47 A700D.CAN2H.1 X2 55
CAN2HIGH
D D
A700D.AI11.1 /21.A4 COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR VCC X2 63 A700D.CAN2L.2 CAN2LOW X2 24
A700D.AI11.2 /21.F4 COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL X2 62 A700D.CAN2.GND CAN2GND X2 59
A700D.AI11.GND EARTH X2 61 A700D.TXD /70.A3 DIAGNOSIS EMIT X2 36
forbidden.
FUEL X2 7 A700D.RXD /70.A2 DIAGNOSIS RECEIVE X2 37

A700D.AL1.REF1 WATERFUEL
A700D.AI1.05V WATERFUEL FUEL X2 6 A700D.GND /70.A1 DIAGNOSIS EARTH X2 38
A700D.AI1.GND WATERFUEL FUEL X2 5 A700D.LSB1 SUPPLY X2 50
A700D.AI2.REF1 COOLINGWATER LEVEL X2 21 A700D.LSB2 SIGNAL X2 51

A700D.AI2.05V COOLINGWATER LEVEL X2 20 A700D.GND EARTH X2 52

A700D.AI2.GND COOLINGWATER LEVEL X2 19 A700D.FREI1 NC X2 17
A700D.FREI2 X2 18
E A700D.TI1 /23.A5 AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM X2 60 NC E
A700D.FREI3 X2 29
A700D.TI1.GND /23.F5 AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM X2 46 NC
A700D.FREI4 NC X2 30
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A700D.DO1 D+ GENERATOR X2 53
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT X2 64 A700D.FREI7 NC X2 43
A700D.DI2 /19.B5 HEATERFLANGE
A700D.DO2 /19.B6 HEATERFLANGE SELECTION X2 39 A700D.FREI11 NC X2 44
A700D.DI3 FREE X2 65 A700D.FREI5 NC X2 31
A700D.DO3 SOLENOIDVALVE FUEL X2 25 A700D.FREI6 NC X2 57
A700D.DO4 ENGINEBRAKE SELECTION X2 11 A700D.FREI8 NC X2 58
A700D.DO5 RESERVE X2 13 A700D.FREI9 X2 32
F
NC F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 93
WerkBischofshofenGmbH ENGINESIDE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
ELECTRICKEYPAD
B B
=K
+K4
ELECTRICKEYPAD
PROJ: 8920980_003
A18 10278758
Phys.Addr. TYPE Sheet Description PLUG PIN
A18.Kl15 A /39.D2 INFORMATIONINPUT INFORMATIONINPUT X1 1

A18.GND A /39.D4 SUPPLYEARTH SUPPLYEARTH X1 2
A18.CAN_High A CAN_High CAN_High X1 3
A18.CAN_Low A CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 4
C C
A18.Kl30 A /39.D3 SUPPLY SUPPLY X1 5
A18.Flasher A /27.A7 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT X1 6


A18.CAN_RES. A CAN_RES. MATCHINGRESISTOR X1 9
A18.PWM1 A /27.A1 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT OUTLETA1 X1 10
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A18.PWM2 A /33.A3 WARNINGBEACON OUTLETA2 X1 11

A18.PWM3 A /28.A6 WINDSCREENWIPER OUTLETA3 X1 12
D D
A18.PWM4 A /28.A7 WASHINGPUMPREAR OUTLETA4 X2 1
A18.PWM5 A /33.A7 REARWINDOWHEATER OUTLETA5 X2 2
forbidden.
A18.PWM6 A /20.A7 PARKINGLIGHT OUTLETA6 X2 3

A18.PWM7 A /25.D1 Abblentlicht OUTLETA7 X2 4
A18.PWM8 A /30.D1 WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT
OUTLETA8 X2 5
A18.PWM9 A /31.E1 WORKINGPROJECTORREAR

OUTLETA9 X2 6
ELECTRICKEYPAD
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYELECTRICKEYPAD Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 94
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
PROJ: 8920980_003
C C
=K
+K4
MAINKEYPAD
A11 10278781
TYPE Sheet Description PLUG

Phys.Addr. PIN
A11.Kl15 A /39.D5 +24V SUPPLY X1 1

A11.CAN_High A /35.B5 CAN_High CAN_High X1 3
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A11.CAN_Low A /35.B4 CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 4

D D
A11.Kl15 A 24V SUPPLY X1 5
A11.GND A SUPPLYEARTH SUPPLYEARTH X1 6
forbidden.
A11.CAN_High A /35.A5 CAN_High CAN_High X1 7

A11.CAN_Low A /35.A4 CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 8
A11.CAN_RES. A CAN_Abschlusswid. MATCHINGRESISTOR X1 9

A11.Res. A RESERVE RESERVE X1 10

A11.Res. A RESERVE RESERVE X1 11
E A11.Res. A RESERVE RESERVE X1 12 E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYMAINKEYPAD Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 95
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
ELECTRICKEYPAD
B B
=K ELECTRICKEYPAD
+K4
10278758
PROJ: 8920980_003
A18
Phys.Addr. TYPE Sheet Description PLUG PIN
A18.Kl15 A /39.D2 INFORMATIONINPUT INFORMATIONINPUT X1 1

C
A18.Kl30 A /39.D3 SUPPLY SUPPLY X1 5
C
A18.Flasher A /27.A7 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT X1 6



A18.PWM1 A /27.A1 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT OUTLETA1 X1 10
A /33.A3 OUTLETA2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A18.PWM2 WARNINGBEACON X1 11
A18.PWM3 A /28.A6 WINDSCREENWIPER OUTLETA3 X1 12
D D
A18.PWM4 A /28.A7 WASHINGPUMPREAR OUTLETA4 X2 1
A18.PWM5 A /33.A7 REARWINDOWHEATER OUTLETA5 X2 2
forbidden.
A18.PWM6 A /20.A7 PARKINGLIGHT OUTLETA6 X2 3

A18.PWM7 A /25.D1 Low beam OUTLETA7 X2 4
A18.PWM8 A /30.D1 WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT OUTLETA8 X2 5
A /31.E1 OUTLETA9
WORKINGPROJECTORREAR
A18.PWM9 X2 6
ELECTRICKEYPAD
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYELECTRICKEYPAD Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 94
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMSYSTEMSIDE
B B
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a ModuleNr.:
+K4 Module name: HEAT-/ AIR CONDITIONING (INSTALLATION)
Phys.Adr. Sheet EA BDescription PLUG Pin Phys.Adr. Sheet EA Description Plug Pin
A21a.1 not used not used 1 A21a.25 /66.A5 GroundVMC4 GroundVMC4 25

A21a.2 /64.B3 logic output(010V) logic output(010V) 2 A21a.26 /66.B6 VMC4potentiometer tap VMC4potentiometer tap 26
C
A21a.3 /65.B3 VMC1clockwise rotation VMC1clockwise rotation 3 A21a.27 not used not used 27 C
A21a.4 /65.A3 VMC1counter clockwise rotation VMC1counter clockwise rotation 4 A21a.28 /64.B1 24Vfan 24Vfan 28
A21a.5 /65.A2 VrefVMC1 VrefVMC1 5 A21a.29 not used not used 29
A21a.6 /65.A1 GNDVMC1 GNDVMC1 6 A21a.30 /67.B3 VMC5clockwise rotation VMC5clockwise rotation 30
A21a.7 /65.B2 VMC1Potentiometer tap VMC1Potentiometer tap 7 A21a.31 /67.A4 VMC5counter clockwise rotation VMC5counter clockwise rotation 31
A21a.8 /65.B7 VMC2clockwise rotation VMC2clockwise rotation 8 A21a.32 /67.A3 VrefVMC5 VrefVMC5 32
A21a.9 /65.A7 VMC2counter clockwise rotation VMC2counter clockwise rotation 9 A21a.33 /67.A2 GroundVMC5 GroundVMC5 33
A21a.10 /65.A6 VrefVMC2 VrefVMC2 10 A21a.34 /67.B2 VMC5potentiometer tap VMC5potentiometer tap 34
A21a.11 /65.A5 GroundVMC2 GroundVMC2 11 A21a.35 /64.B5 Sensor1+(icing) Sensor1+(icing) 35
A21a.12 /65.B6 VMC2 potentiometer tap VMC2potentiometer tap 12 A21a.36 /64.B6 Sensor1(icing) Sensor1(icing) 36
not used not used Sensor2+(icing) Sensor2+(icing)
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21a.13 13 A21a.37 /64.B7 37

A21a.14 not used not used 14 A21a.38 /64.B8 Sensor2(icing) Sensor2(icing) 38
D A21a.15 not used not used 15 A21a.39 /67.A6 Temp.Sensor+(air cond. autom.) Temp.Sensor+(air cond. autom.) 39 D
A21a.16 /64.B4 diagnosefan diagnosefan 16 A21a.40 /67.A7 Temp.Sensor(air cond. autom.) Temp.Sensor(air cond. autom.) 40
A21a.41 not used not used 41
A21a.17 /66.B3 VMC3clockwise rotation VMC3clockwise rotation 17
A21a.42 /64.B2 Ground FAN Ground FAN 42
VMC3counter clockwise rotation VMC3counter clockwise rotation
forbidden.
A21a.18 /66.A3 18
A21a.19 /66.A2 VrefVMC3 VrefVMC3 19
A21a.20 /66.A1 GroundVMC3 GroundVMC3 20
A21a.21 /66.B2 VMC3potentiometer tap VMC3potentiometer tap 21
A21a.22 /66.B7 VMC4clockwise rotation VMC4clockwise rotation 22
VMC4counter clockwise rotation VMC4counter clockwise rotation

A21a.23 /66.A7 23
A21a.24 /66.A6 VrefVMC4 VrefVMC4 24
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 97
WerkBischofshofenGmbH SYSTEMSIDE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K4
OPTIONKEYPAD
A19 10278759
Phys.Addr. TYPE SHEET BDESCRIPTION PLUG PIN

C C
A19.Kl15 A /39.F2 INFORMATIONINPUT INFORMATIONINPUT X1 1
A19.GND A /39.F4 SUPPLYEARTH SUPPLYEARTH X1 2
A19.CAN_High A /35.E7 CAN_High CAN_High X1 3

A19.CAN_Low A /35.E6 CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 4

A19.Kl15 A /39.F3 SUPPLYKl.15 SUPPLY X1 5

A19.c. A n.c n.c X1 6
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A19.CAN_High A /35.E5 CAN_High CAN_High X1 7

D A19.CAN_Low A /35.E4 CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 8 D
A19.PWM1 A n.c. n.c. X1 10
forbidden.
A19.PWM2 A n.c. n.c. X1 11

A19.PWM3 A n.c. n.c. X1 12
A19.PWM4 A n.c. n.c. X2 1



E
A19.PWM7 A n.c. n.c. X2 4 E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYOPTIONKEYPAD Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 98
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
+K4
A22 10278759
PROJ: 8920980_003
Phys.Addr. TYPE SHEET BDESCRIPTION PLUG PIN
A22.Kl15 A /39.F5 INFORMATIONINPUT INFORMATIONINPUT X1 1

A22.GND A /39.F7 SUPPLYEARTH SUPPLYEARTH X1 2
A22.CAN_High A /35.D5 CAN_High CAN_High X1 3
A22.CAN_Low A /35.D4 CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 4
C
A22.Kl15 A /39.F8 SUPPLYKl.15 SUPPLY X1 5 C
A22.c. A n.c n.c X1 6
A22.CAN_High A /35.C5 CAN_High CAN_High X1 7

A22.CAN_Low A /35.C4 CAN_Low CAN_Low X1 8

A22.PWM1 A n.c. n.c. X1 10
A22.PWM2 A n.c. n.c. X1 11
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A22.PWM3 A n.c. n.c. X1 12

D A22.PWM4 A n.c. n.c. X2 1 D

forbidden.

A22.PWM8 A n.c. n.c. X2 5 CANAIR COND. KEYPAD
E E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYAIRCONDITIONINGKEYPAD Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 99
WerkBischofshofenGmbH FLAPCONTROL ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
240.00
PROJ: 8920980_003
F1 10A F31a 10A F14 15A F45 10A F56 10A F67 10A F27 10A
... WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT FUELPREHEATING INPUTMODULE2 OUTPUTMODULE2BANK2 OUTPUTMODULE3 PROFILELIGHT/
.................................. Vcc K11/50,Y50,Y20,Y21 VccDO1 PARKINGLIGHT
F2 7,5A F31b 10A F15 10A F46 10A F57 10A F68 10A F28 10A
HIGHBEAMLEFT WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT LHCONTROLLEVERVNR INPUTMODULE3 ... OUTPUTMODULE3 WEIGHINGDEVICE
Erreg.G3,SIMULATIOND+ VccJOYSTICKSTEERING ... VccDO2 ...
F3 7,5A F32a 10A F18 10A F47 10A F58 10A F69 10A F30 15A
HIGHBEAMRIGHT WORKINGPROJECTORLEFT Windscreen wiper motor OUTPUTMODULE1BANK1 ... OUTPUTMODULE3 VccVOLTAGECONVERTER
C REARHATCH washing p. backdust filter check Y10,Y14,Y9,Y17 ... VccDO3 (RADIO,12Vplug.) C
F4 7,5A F32b 10A F19 10A F48 10A F59 10A F70 10A F34 20A
LOWBEAMLEFT WORKINGPROJECTORRIGHT HEAT/AIRCond. system.Kl.15 OUTPUTMODULE1BANK2 OUTPUTMODULE2DO1 OUTPUTMODULE3 REFUELLINGPUMP
REARHATCH Y18,Y13,H40,Y57* OPM1YEP1,YEP2,Y2,Y3 VccDO4

F5 7,5A F33a 10A F20 15A F49 10A F60 10A F71 10A F35 10A
LOWBEAMRIGHT WORKINGPROJECTORLEFT* WIPER,WASHINGPUMP VccDO4 OUTPUTMODULE2DO2 VccKEYPADSKl.15 VccMASTERKl.30
CABROOF frontHORN RFWEOPTICALred flashing li. OPM1MO1,Y6.1.2.3

130.00
F6 3A F33b 10A F21 10A F50 10A F61 10A F72 F38 5A
BOUNDARY/PARKINGLIGHT WORKINGPROJECTORRIGHT* LOWBEAM ... OUTPUTMODULE2DO3 ... LHECUUP/CR
LEFT CABROOF HIGHBEAM ... E1,E5back off lights ... VccController
F7 3A F29 25A F9 10A F22 7,5A F51 10A F62 10A F73 F39 5A
BOUNDARY/PARKINGLIGHT Ignition lock release PUSHBUTTONSWITCHLHCONTROLLEVERR Switch lighting OUTPUTMODULE1DO1 OUTPUTMODULE2DO4 ... UhrAUXILIARYHEATER
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
RIGHT AIRCON/OPTIONKEYPAD STOPLIGHT OUTPUTModul2Y51,Y52 B16BackupALARM ...
F07b 10A F75 10A F10 5A F23 5A F52 10A F63 10A F74 15A F40 20A
D Flashing function RADIOKl.58 DISPLAYUNIT PuritecPARTICLEFILTER OUTPUTMODULE1DO2 OUTPUTMODULE3 REARWINDOWHEATER VCCAUXILIARYHEATERKl.30 D
12VELECTRICALSOCKET ... REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR OPM2Y2a,Y3a,Y11,Y12 VccBANK1 MIRRORHEATING* ...
F8 15A F76 10A F11 10A F24 10A F53 10A F64 10A F19A 20A F41 20A
compressor seat*,(RADIO) RADIOKl.30 PRESSURESWITCH IGNITIONON OUTPUTMODULE1DO3 OUTPUTMODULE3 HEAT/AIRCOND.SYS.Kl.30 Dust particle filter .
CIGARETTELIGHTER(X70) B32,B28,B3,B3a ENGINEECU Y62central lubrication sys.LH VccBANK2 ...
forbidden.
F8A 10A F12 10A F43 5A F54 5A F65 10A F25 10A F42
Interior lighting Groeneveldcentr. lubr. system LogicINPUT1+2 Kl.15MASTER OUTPUTMODULE3 WARNINGBEACON ...
ClockAUXILIARYHEATER ... LogicOUTPUT1+2 ... VccBANK3 ...
F13 15A F44 10A F55 10A F66 10A F26 10A
M11VENTILATORCONDENSER INPUTMODULE1 OUTPUTMODULE2BANK1 OUTPUTMODULE3 DIAGNOSTICPLUG
KL.30
... Vcc Y16,Y53,Y15,Y15a VccBANK4 IMMOBILISERKAT

S1 F36 40A
F17 40A F16 40A A14.B1LHECUUP/CR
A14.B2LHECUUP/CR
... ...
F37
LEDTEST ... ... ...
E KL.15 ... 8922717_002 E
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 GENERALOUTLAYPROTECTIVEFOIL Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 100
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
C
E
B
D
A
Zustand
nderung
1
1
Datum
Name
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
Ausgabe
2
2
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
3
3
4
4
5
5
ENGINE
6
6
ELECTRICALDIAGRAMDIESELENGINE4AND6CYLINDER
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
7
7
WITHENGINEECU
8920980
D936A6ANDD934A6
460901000003
Ort
Anlage
8
8
von003
101 Blatt
114
F
C
E
B
D
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
&#5199
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
ENGINEECU
A A
AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR
+M /107.C5
B708 1 M710<>Y22
ENGINESIDE VEHICLESIDE
1
X1
R710<>R701
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
GENERATOR
/105.B3
B B
D+
+M
G700<>G3
PROJ: 8920980_003
INJECTIONPUMP
STARTER
C C
+M /109.B3 +M /109.B4 +M /109.B6 +M /110.B3 +M /110.B4 +M /110.B6
Y711 X1 Y712 X1 Y713 X1 Y714 X1 Y715 X1 Y716 X1
+M /105.B6
50
M700<>M1
CHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/107.C7
1
D D
B707
+M
forbidden.
/108.B2
SPEED
1
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
B711
+M
/106.B2
1
1 2 3
B703
+M
B710
/108.B7
E 3 E
n1 PHASESENSOR /106.C7
+M
1
B713
+M
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WATERDETECTOR
B709
1
/107.C3
B701 1 +M
/108.B4
SPEED
+M /106.B5 TEMPERATURESENSORFUEL
n
1
OILPRESSURE
B712
=M
+M
1 2 3
F F
n2
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 STANDBY Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 102
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH AM6CYLINDERENGINE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
Zustand nderung Datum Name 27.03.2007 09:42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
C
E
B
D
A
Zustand
3
3
nderung
n1
2
2
1
1
1
1
SPEED
n2
Datum
SPEED
n
/109.B3 /109.B4 /109.B6
+M +M +M
Name
Y711 X1 Y712 X1 Y713 X1
PHASESENSOR
+M
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
/108.B2
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
Ausgabe
1
OILPRESSURE
TEMPERATURESENSORFUEL
B711
+M /108.B4
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
B712 1
+M +M +M +M
2
2
/107.C7 /106.B2 /106.B5 /108.B7

B707 1 +M /107.C3 B703 1 B701 1 B713 1
lbhhae0
B709 1 +M
DonningerJ.
INJECTIONPUMP16
/107.C5
B708 1
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
Y714 X1 Y715 X1Y716 X1
+M /110.B3 +M /110.B4 +M /110.B6
B710 3
/106.C7
+M
3
3
&#5199
R710
R710<>R701
14 28 42 56 70
R710
WATERDETECTOR
13 27 41 55 69
12 26 40 54 68
X1
11 25 39 53 67
10 24 38 52 66
9 23 37 51 65
8 22 36 50 64
ENGINEPLUG
4
4
7 21 35 49 63
6 20 34 48 62
+M 5 19 33 47 61
1
X700.S 4 18 32 46 60
M710
3 17 31 45 59
1
X700.B 2 16 30 44 58
M710<>Y22
1 15 29 43 57
+M
WL700
M710
1
WH 1.94
ENGINEECU
G700
+M
5
5
+M 14 28 42 56 70
D+
13 27 41 55 69
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
X700.B
12 26 40 54 68
/105.B3
11 25 39 53 67
2
X700.S
10 24 38 52 66
+M 9 23 37 51 65
8 22 36 50 64
G700
G700<>G3
GENERATOR
7 21 35 49 63
VEHICLEPLUG
6 20 34 48 62
5 19 33 47 61
4 18 32 46 60
GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS
3 17 31 45 59
2 16 30 44 58
1 15 29 43 57
+M
1
6
6
X701.S
1
X701.B
STARTER
+M
M700
M700
+M
M700<>M1
WL701 WH 1.94
50
/105.B6
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
7
7
8920980
460901000003
Ort
Anlage
8
8
von003
Blatt
114
103
F
C
E
B
D
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
+M
A700C.6
Phys.Addr. Typ Sheet Description Plug PIN Phys.Addr. Type Sheet Description Plug PIN
A700C.AI3.REF2 A /106.E5 OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SUPPLY(5V) X1 63 A700C.INDEX.GND /108.E6 phase sensor GND X1 42
A700C.AI3 A /106.E4 OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SIGNAL(0,54,5V) X1 49 A700C.FI1 RESERVE NC X1 24
A700C.AI3.GND A /106.E4 OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER GND X1 35 A700C.FI1.GND RESERVE NC X1 23
A700C.AI4.REF2 A RESERVE NC X1 62 A700C.FI2 RESERVE NC X1 25
A700C.AI4 A RESERVE NC X1 48 A700C.FI2.GND RESERVE NC X1 26
B B
A700C.AI4.GND A RESERVE NC X1 34 A700C.DI1 D /105.E2 DynamoD+ Ubat X1 64
A700C.AI5.REF3 A /106.E3 Air intake pressure transmitter SUPPLY(5V) X1 61
A700C.DO9 D /105.E7 Starting motor.KL50 Activation(UBat) X1 29
PROJ: 8920980_003
A700C.AI5 A /106.E2 Air intake pressure transmitter SIGNAL(0,54,5V) X1 47

A700C.DI9 D RESERVE NC X1 66
A700C.AI5.GND A /106.E1 Air intake pressure transmitter GND X1 33 A700C.DO13 D RESERVE NC X1 67
A700C.AI6.REF3 A RESERVE NC X1 60 A700C.POWER.PS1 RESERVE NC X1 43
A700C.AI6 A RESERVE NC X1 46 A700C.DI8 D RESERVE NC X1 65
A700C.AI6.GND A RESERVE NC X1 32 A700C.DO8 D RESERVE NC X1 14
A700C.AI7.REF4 A RESERVE NC X1 59 A700C.DO8.GND D RESERVE NC X1 28
A700C.AI7 A RESERVE NC X1 45 A700C.DO7 D RESERVE NC X1 13
C A700C.AI7.GND A RESERVE NC X1 31 A700C.DO7.GND D RESERVE NC X1 27 C
A700C.AI8.REF4 A RESERVE NC X1 58 A700C.CURR1.HIGH RESERVE NC X1 9
A700C.AI8 A RESERVE NC X1 44 A700C.CURR1.LOW RESERVE NC X1 10
A700C.CURR2.HIGH RESERVE NC X1 11
A700C.AI8.GND A RESERVE NC X1 30
A700C.TI2 A /107.E7 Air intakte temp. transmitter SIGNAL X1 50 A700C.CURR2.LOW RESERVE NC X1 12
A700C.TI2.GND A /107.E6 Air intake temp. transmitter GND X1 36 A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1 /109.E2 EPCYLINDER1 PWM(+) X1 22
A Coolant temp. transmitter SIGNAL X1 51 A700C.A1.LOW.MV1 /109.E3 EPCYLINDER1 PWM(GND) X1 8
A700C.TI3 /107.E5
A700C.TI3.GND A /107.E4 Coolant temp. transmitter GND X1 37 A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2 /109.E4 EPCYLINDER2 PWM(+) X1 21
Fuel temp. transmitter
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A700C.TI4 A /107.E3 SIGNAL X1 52 A700C.A2.LOW.MV2 /109.E4 EPCYLINDER2 PWM(GND) X1 7

A700C.TI4.GND A /107.E2 Fuel temp. transmitter GND X1 38 A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3 /109.E5 EPCYLINDER3 PWM(+) X1 20
D D
A700C.POWER.PS1 /106.E7 water detector SUPPLY(UBat) X1 57 A700C.A3.LOW.MV3 /109.E6 EP CYLINDER3 PWM(GND) X1 6
A700C.TI5 /106.E7 water detector SIGNAL X1 53 A700C.A4.HIGH.MV4 RESERVE NC X1 19
water detector GND X1 39 A700C.A4.LOW.MV4 RESERVE NC X1 5
A700C.TI5.GND /106.E6
forbidden.
Speed sensor1 SUPPLY(12V) X1 A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5 /110.E2 EPZYLINDER4 PWM(+) X1 18

A700C.POWER.SPEED1 /108.E3 69
A700C.B1.LOW.MV5 /110.E3 EPZYLINDER4 PWM(GND) X1 4
A700C.SPEED1 /108.E2 Speed sensor1 SIGNAL X1 55
Speed sensor1 GND X1 A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6 /110.E4 EPZYLINDER5 PWM(+) X1 17
A700C.SPEED1.GND /108.E1 41
Speed sensor2 SUPPLY(12V)

A700C.POWER.SPEED2 /108.E5 X1 68 A700C.B2.LOW.MV6 /110.E4 EPZYLINDER5 PWM(GND) X1 3

A700C.SPEED2 /108.E4 Speed sensor2 SIGNAL X1 54HS A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7 /110.E5 EPZYLINDER6 PWM(+) X1 16
A700C.SPEED2.GND /108.E4 Speed sensor2 GND X1 40 A700C.B3.LOW.MV7 /110.E6 EPZYLINDER6 PWM(GND) X1 2
E E
A700C.POWER.INDEX /108.E7 phase sensor SUPPLY(12V) X1 70 A700C.B4.HIGH.MV8 RESERVE NC X1 15
A700C.INDEX /108.E7 phase sensor SIGNAL X1 56 A700C.B4.LOW.MV8 RESERVE NC X1 1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
61
70
60
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
59
58
57
51
50
52
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
41
31
40
30
42
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
29
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
11
10
14
13
12
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
*70/70
153
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Ausgabe 104
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH 6CYLINDER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
VEHICLESIDE
/19.E4
B B
X
PROJ: 8920980_003
WL701 WH 1.94
+M D+ W +M D+ W +M 30 50
G700 G3~ G700 G3~ M700 M
31
B+ B B+ B
1080A 15100A 6,6kW
C C
WL700 WH AWG14
2
+M +M +M +M
X700.B X700.B X701.B X701.B
2
1
1
X700.S X700.S X701.S X701.S
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
1
2
+M +M +M +M
2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.94
WH 1.94
D D
forbidden.
64
64
29
A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1
X1 64 X1 29
A700C.DI1 A700C.DO9
E
+M D +M D E
A700C.6 DYNAMO ( Generator )D+ A700C.6 Starter.KL50
/104.B6 /104.B6
Ubat Activation(UBat)
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
MOTORECU MOTORECU
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 STARTER,GENERATOR Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 105
Datum
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE OILPRESSURE WATERDETECTOR

0,54,5bar/a 010bar/g
Q
p p +M
+M +M B710 R
B B703 U B701 U B
0,54,5V 0,54,5V 12K
GND OUT IN+ GND OUT IN+
PROJ: 8920980_003
1 2 3 1 2 3 BK BK
B703.X B701.X
1
1
2
2
3
3
3 2 1
B710.X
1
2
3
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
D D
forbidden.
33
47
35
49
63
39
53
57
A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1
61
X1 33 X1 47 X1 61 X1 35 X1 49 X1 63 X1 39 X1 53 X1 57
A700C.AI5.GND A700C.AI5 A700C.AI5.REF3 A700C.AI3.GND A700C.AI3 A700C.AI3.REF2 A700C.TI5.GND A700C.TI5 A700C.POWER.PS1
E
+M A A A +M A A A +M E
A700C.6 Charge air pressure sensor Charge air pressure sensor Charge air pressure sensor A700C.6 Oil pressure sensor Oil pressure sensor Oil pressure sensor A700C.6 WATER DETECTOR WATER DETECTOR WATER DETECTOR
/104.B2 /104.B2 /104.D2
GND SIGNAL(0,54,5V) SUPPLY(5V) GND SIGNAL(0,54,5V) Supply(5V) GND SIGNAL SUPPLY(UBat)
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 CHARGEAIRCOOLER Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 106
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH OILPRESSURESWITCH,WATERDETECTOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
FUELTEMPERATURE COOLANTTEMPERATURE CHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE

30130C 30130C 30130C
B B
+M +M +M
PROJ: 8920980_003
B709 B708 B707

R R R
1 2 1 2 1 2
B709.X B708.X B707.X
1
2
2
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
D D
forbidden.
38
52
37
36
50
A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1
51
X1 38 X1 52 X1 37 X1 51 X1 36 X1 50
A700C.TI4.GND A700C.TI4 A700C.TI3.GND A700C.TI3 A700C.TI2.GND A700C.TI2
E
+M A A +M A A +M A A E
A700C.6 FUEL TEMP. SENSOR FUEL TEMP. SENSPR A700C.6 COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR A700C.6 AIR INTAKE TEMP. Sensor AIR INTAKE TEMP. Sensor
/104.D2 /104.D2 /104.D2
GND SIGNAL GND SIGNAL GND SIGNAL
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 FUELTEMPERATURESENSOR Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 107
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH AKTIVEOSCILLATING ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 PHASESENSOR
+M n +M n +M n
B
B711 X B712 X B713 X
B
GND SIGNAL U+ GND SIGNAL U+ GND SIGNAL U+

PROJ: 8920980_003
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
B711.X B712.X B713.X
1
1
2
2
3
3
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
D D
forbidden.
55
69
40
54
68
42
56
70
A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1
41
X1 41 X1 55 X1 69 X1 40 X1 54 X1 68 X1 42 X1 56 X1 70
A700C.SPEED1.GND A700C.SPEED1 A700C.POWER.SPEED1 A700C.SPEED2.GND A700C.SPEED2 A700C.POWER.SPEED2 A700C.INDEX.GND A700C.INDEX A700C.POWER.INDEX
E
+M +M +M E
A700C.6 ENGINE SPEED Sensor1 ENGINE SPEED Sensor1 ENGINE SPEED Sensor1 A700C.6 ENGINE SPEED Sensor2 ENGINE SPEED Sensor2 ENGINE SPEED Sensor2 A700C.6 PHASE SENSOR PHASE SENSOR PHASE SENSOR
/104.E2 /104.E2 /104.B6
GND SIGNAL SUPPLY(12V) GND SIGNAL SUPPLY(12V) GND SIGNAL SUPPLY(12V)
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU MOTORECU
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1,ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2, Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 108
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH PHASESENSOR ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
INJECTIONPUMP1 INJECTIONPUMP2 INJECTIONPUMP3
B +M +M +M B
Y711 Y712 Y713
PROJ: 8920980_003
X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
D D
forbidden.
22
20
A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1
21
8
6
X1 22 X1 8 X1 21 X1 7 X1 20 X1 6
A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1 A700C.A1.LOW.MV1 A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2 A700C.A2.LOW.MV2 A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3 A700C.A3.LOW.MV3
E
+M +M +M E
A700C.6 IPCYLINDER1 IPCYLINDER1 A700C.6 IPCYLINDER2 IPCYLINDER2 A700C.6 IPCYLINDER3 IPCYLINDER3
/104.D6 /104.D6 /104.D6
PWM(+) PWM(GND) PWM(+) PWM(GND) PWM(+) PWM(GND)
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER13 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 109
Datum
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
INJECTIONPUMP4 INJECTIONPUMP5 INJECTIONPUMP6
B +M +M +M B
Y714 Y715 Y716
PROJ: 8920980_003
X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2
C C
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
D D
forbidden.
18
17
16
A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1 A700C.6.X1
4
2
X1 18 X1 4 X1 17 X1 3 X1 16 X1 2
A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5 A700C.B1.LOW.MV5 A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6 A700C.B2.LOW.MV6 A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7 A700C.B3.LOW.MV7
E
+M +M +M E
A700C.6 IPCYLINDER4 IPCYLINDER4 A700C.6 IP CYLINDER5 IPCYLINDER5 A700C.6 EPZYLINDER6 EPZYLINDER6
/104.D6 /104.E6 /104.E6
PWM(+) PWM(GND) PWM(+) PWM(GND) PWM(+) PWM(GND)
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
F F
Ersteller lbhhae0
DonningerJ. Anlage
Datum 26.03.200716:16 INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER46 Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe 110
Datum
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
&#5199
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
ENGINEECU
A AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR A
B708
1 M710<>Y22
ENGINESIDE VEHICLESIDE
1
R710<>R701
X1
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
GENERATOR
B B
G700<>G3
D+
PROJ: 8920980_003
INJECTIONPUMP14
C C
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
X1 X1 X1 X1
1
Y711 Y712 Y713 Y714

B711
n1
PHASESENSOR
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
1
B707
D D
B713
n
forbidden.
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
1
1
3 2 1
B703
1
B712 OILPRESSURESWITCH B701
3
E n2 1 2 3
B710 E
WATERDETECTOR
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
B709
50
F STARTER M700<>M1 F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 STANDBY Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 111
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH AM4CYLINDERENGINE ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
C
E
B
D
A
Zustand
3
3
nderung
2
2
1
1
1
1
n1
Datum
B711
1
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
n2
Y711
Name
Y712
X1 X1
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
Datum
Datum
Ersteller
B712
Ausgabe
1
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
OILPRESSURESWITCH
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
n
2
2
PHASESENSOR
1 1 1 1 1
B701
B707
B709
B708
B703
lbhhae0
1
B713
INJECTIONPUMP14
DonningerJ.
27.03.2007 09:42
26.03.200716:16
X1 X1
Y713
Y714
3
3
R710
&#5199
R710<>R701
14 28 42 56 70
13 27 41 55 69
12 26 40 54 68
11 25 39 53 67
WATERDETECTOR
X1
10 24 38 52 66
9 23 37 51 65
8 22 36 50 64
7 21 35 49 63
ENGINESIDE
6 20 34 48 62
4
4
5 19 33 47 61
4 18 32 46 60
3 17 31 45 59
2 16 30 44 58
M710
1 15 29 43 57
M710<>Y22
1
ENGINEECU
G700
14 28 42 56 70
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
13 27 41 55 69
5
5
D+
12 26 40 54 68
11 25 39 53 67
10 24 38 52 66
9 23 37 51 65
8 22 36 50 64
7 21 35 49 63
G700
6 20 34 48 62
VEHICLESIDE
G700<>G3
5 19 33 47 61
GENERATOR
4 18 32 46 60
3 17 31 45 59
2 16 30 44 58
GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS
1 15 29 43 57
6
6
STARTER
M700
M700<>M1
50
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
7
7
8920980
460901000003
Ort
Anlage
8
8
003
von
Blatt
114
112
F
C
E
B
D
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
+M
A700C4
Phys.Addr. Typ Sheet Description PLUG PIN Phys.Addr. Type Sheet Description Plug PIN
A700C.AI3.REF2 A OILPRESSURESWITCH SUPPLY(5V) X1 63 A700C.INDEX.GND PHASESENSOR GND X1 42

A700C.AI3 A OILPRESSURESWITCH SIGNAL(0,54,5V) X1 49 A700C.FI1 RESERVE NC X1 24
A700C.AI3.GND A OILPRESSURESWITCH GND X1 35 A700C.FI1.GND RESERVE NC X1 23
A700C.AI4.REF2 A RESERVE NC X1 62 A700C.FI2 RESERVE NC X1 25
A700C.AI4 A RESERVE NC X1 48 A700C.FI2.GND RESERVE NC X1 26
B B
A700C.AI4.GND A RESERVE NC X1 34 A700C.DI1 D GENERATORD+ Ubat X1 64
A700C.AI5.REF3 A CHARGEAIRCOOLER SUPPLY(5V) X1 61
A700C.DO9 D STARTER.KL50 SELECTION(UBat) X1 29
PROJ: 8920980_003
A700C.AI5 A CHARGEAIRCOOLER SIGNAL(0,54,5V) X1 47

A700C.DI9 D RESERVE NC X1 66
A700C.AI5.GND A CHARGEAIRCOOLER GND X1 33 A700C.DO13 D RESERVE NC X1 67
A700C.AI6.REF3 A RESERVE NC X1 60 A700C.POWER.PS1 RESERVE NC X1 43
A700C.AI6 A RESERVE NC X1 46 A700C.DI8 D RESERVE NC X1 65
A700C.AI6.GND A RESERVE NC X1 32 A700C.DO8 D RESERVE NC X1 14
A700C.AI7.REF4 A RESERVE NC X1 59 A700C.DO8.GND D RESERVE NC X1 28
A700C.AI7 A RESERVE NC X1 45 A700C.DO7 D RESERVE NC X1 13
C A700C.AI7.GND A RESERVE NC X1 31 A700C.DO7.GND D RESERVE NC X1 27 C
A700C.AI8.REF4 A RESERVE NC X1 58 A700C.CURR1.HIGH RESERVE NC X1 9
A700C.AI8 A RESERVE NC X1 44 A700C.CURR1.LOW RESERVE NC X1 10
A700C.CURR2.HIGH RESERVE NC X1 11
A700C.AI8.GND A RESERVE NC X1 30
A700C.TI2 A Charge air temperature sensor SIGNAL X1 50 A700C.CURR2.LOW RESERVE NC X1 12
A700C.TI2.GND A Charge air temperature sensor GND X1 36 A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1 EPCYLINDER1 PWM(+) X1 22

A Coolant temperature sensor SIGNAL X1 51 A700C.A1.LOW.MV1 EPCYLINDER1 PWM(GND) X1 8
A700C.TI3
A700C.TI3.GND A Coolant temperature sensor GND X1 37 A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2 EPCYLINDER2 PWM(+) X1 21
Fuel temperature sensor
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A700C.TI4 A SIGNAL X1 52 A700C.A2.LOW.MV2 EPCYLINDER2 PWM(GND) X1 7

A700C.TI4.GND A Fuel temperature sensor GND X1 38 A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3 RESERVE NC X1 20
D D
A700C.POWER.PS1 WATER SENSOR SUPPLY(UBat) X1 57 A700C.A3.LOW.MV3 RESERVE NC X1 6
A700C.TI5 WATER SENSOR SIGNAL X1 53 A700C.A4.HIGH.MV4 RESERVE NC X1 19
WATERSENSOR GND X1 39 A700C.A4.LOW.MV4 RESERVE NC X1 5
A700C.TI5.GND
forbidden.
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 SUPPLY(12V) X1 A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5 EPCYLINDER3 PWM(+) X1 18

A700C.POWER.SPEED1 69
A700C.B1.LOW.MV5 EPCYLINDER3 PWM(GND) X1 4
A700C.SPEED1 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 SIGNAL X1 55
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1 GND X1 A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6 EPCYLINDER4 PWM(+) X1 17
A700C.SPEED1.GND 41
A700C.POWER.SPEED2 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 SUPPLY(12V) X1 68 A700C.B2.LOW.MV6 EPCYLINDER4 PWM(GND) X1 3

A700C.SPEED2 ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 SIGNAL X1 54 A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7 RESERVE NC X1 16
A700C.SPEED2.GND ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2 GND X1 40 A700C.B3.LOW.MV7 RESERVE NC X1 2
E 70 E
A700C.POWER.INDEX PHASESENSOR SUPPLY(12V) X1 A700C.B4.HIGH.MV8 RESERVE NC X1 15
A700C.INDEX PHASESENSOR SIGNAL X1 56 A700C.B4.LOW.MV8 RESERVE NC X1 1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
153
61
70
60
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
59
58
57
51
50
52
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
41
31
40
30
42
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
29
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
11
10
14
13
12
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
*70/70
F F

Ausgabe lbhhae0 113
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH 4CYLINDER ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CODE CODE
= SYSTEM KIND OF EQUIPMENT CLAMP DENOTATION SIFUSES
LETTER LETTER
DIN EN613462 SIGNAL EXTRACTED OF DIN 72552
STABE S
A A COLOURS FARBEN A
U UNDER CARRIAGE A KEYPAD UNIT,BRACE UNIT,MONITOR, 15 SWITCHEDPLUSBEHINDBATTERY
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (OUTPUT IGNITION[DRIVE]SWITCH)
D REVOLVING STAGE
2 GY GREY GRAU
B APPROXIMATION,SENSOR,SWITCH
A BOOM 30 INPUTOFBATTERYPLUS,DIRECT
TACHO SENSOR,TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3 VT VIOLET VIOLETT
F CARRIAGE(CRAWLER CRANE) PRESSURE SENSOR,SWITCH,SENSOR RETURN WIRETOBATTERY,PLUS
30b
M MOTOR VIASWITCH/RELAY(SWITCHED PLUS) 5 LB LIGHTBROWN BEIGE
C CAPACITOR
E FLOURESCENT LAMP,LAMP,BULB,LIGHT FIXTURE 31 RETURN WIREFROMBATTERIE, 7,5 BN BROWN BRAUN
HEADLIGHTS,RUNNING LIGHT,HEATING MINUS/GROUNDDIRECT
B
10 RD RED ROT B
F FUSES,FI,CIRCUIT BREAKER 31b RETURN WIRETOBATTERY,MINUS/GROUND
VIASWITCH/RELAY(SWITCHEDMINUS) 15 BU BLUE BLAU
+ INSTALLATION LOCATION
PROJ: 8920980_003
G DYNAMOS,GENERATORS,BATTERIES
UNDER CARRIAGE 49 FLASHER UNIT 20 YE YELLOW GELB
H LAMPS ,ANNOUNC.
50 STARTER,STARTER CONTROL UNITDIRECT 30 GN GREEN GRN
H CAB K SWITCHING RELAY,TIME RELAY,CONTACTOR RELAY
I/OMODULE,UEAMODULE,ABVELECTRONICS, 50e50f START LOCK RELAY,INPUTOUTPUT
F VEHICLE TRANSISTOR,ELECTRONIC VALVES
52 TAG SIGNAL
S SWITCHCABINET L INDUCTORS WIRE COLOURS DIN IEC 757
M MOTORS 53,a,b,c,e,i WIPER MOTOR
C M MOTOR C
N TRANSDUCER 54 STOPLIGHT ALT COLOURS FARBEN
P BUZZER,CLAMP,SPEAKERS,CLOCK,
54g TAG SIGNAL(COMPRESSED AIR VALVE)
TACHOGRAPH,PRINTER,VOLTMETER,WATTMETER,
+ INSTALLATION LOCATION
gr GY GREY GRAU
REVOLVING STAGE / CARRIAGE Q POWER SWITCH RELAY(FOR LOAD) 55 FOG LAMP
BREAKER,MOTOR STARTER,TYRISTOR vi VT VIOLET VIOLETT

56,a,b,d HEADLIGHT
K CABIN R RESISTORS, DIODES rs PK PINK ROSA
57,a,L,R PARKING LIGHT
D CARRIAGE S SWITCH,KEYPAD( WITHOUT DISPLAY),MOUSE br BN BROWN BRAUN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
58,b,c,d,L,R LIMITATION,END,LICENSE PLATE

A CARRIGE T LSBBUS SENSOR,ANTENNA,TELEPHONE SET AND DEVICE LIGHTS rt RD RED ROT
D POWER TRANSFORMER,RECTIFIER,RADIO D
S SWITCHCABINET 61 GENERATOR CONTROL bl BU BLUE BLAU
U ISOLATOR
M MOTOR 72 ALARM SWITCH,(ALL AROUND, INDICATOR LAMP) ge YE YELLOW GELB
forbidden.
V FILTER
75 RADIO,CIGARETTE LIGHTER gn GN GREEN GRN
W COLLECTING ELECTRODE,CABLE,CABLE LOOP,INFORMATION BUS
OPTICAL FIBER, 76 SPEAKERS sw BK BLACK SCHWARZ
DUCT (RING WHEEL TRANSDUCER)

B+,B BATTERY,PLUS,MINUS or OG ORANGE ORANGE

X CONNECTOR(ELECTRICAL),PLUG,CLAMP,
TERMINAL BLOCK,TERMINAL STRIP,CONNECTION TERMINAL STRIP D+,D DYNAMO,PLUS,MINUS ws WH WHITE WEISS
E Y VALVES E
DF,DF1,DF2 DYNAMO,FIELD,FIELD1,FIELD2
Z ADD. PART
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
EXAMPLE FOR EQUIPMENT LABELING BEXAMPLE FOR SIGNAL CROSS-REFERENCE
= SYSTEM + EINSTALLATION LOCATION AKIND OF EQUIPMENT ZNUMBERING : ACONNECTION SIGNAL SFUSE or SIGNAL FUSE
= U + H K 53 : 30 30b.F390 +24V.L1
F F

Datum 26.03.200716:16 KEYOFSYMBOLS Ident.Nr. 8920980 Ort
Ausgabe lbhhae0 114
Datum
WerkBischofshofenGmbH DINEN613461DINEN613462DINEN60617 ZeichNr. 460901000003 003
Blatt
von 114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Electrical components
10.1 Electrical components

10.1.1 Electrical components in the cab
The main electrical/electronic components are located on the cab rear wall
Design
The following components are fitted on the cab rear wall:
- Fuse and relay board
- Voltage converter
- Main electronics (master)
- Input module
- Warning buzzer
- Diagnostic plug
- Optional components
The electrical and electronic components are mounted under the covering
on the cab rear wall.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Components on the rear cab wall

1 Warning buzzer H40 4 Voltage transformer T1 8 Input module 2 A16b
(behind cover) 5 Rear wiper motor M3 9 Connector X1
2 Diagnostic plug 6 Relay and fuse board A4 10 Connector X2
3 Main electronics (master) A15 7 Relay base fixing (optional)
L566 - 460 / from 14171
10.1.2 Fuse and relay board A4

(ID no. 10290014)
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Fuse and relay board A4
L580 - 459 / from 14171
F1 10 A terminal 15 reserve F47 10 A terminal 15 output module K209 Dust filter excess pressure
F2 7.5 A terminal 15 left high beam 1 bank 1 - Y9, Y10, Y14, Y17 system relay
F3 7.5 A terminal 15 right F48 10 A terminal 15 output module K228 Visual back-up alarm relay
high beam 1 bank 2 - H40, Y13, Y18, Y57 K229 Visual back-up alarm relay
F4 7.5 A terminal 15 left low beam F49 10 A terminal 15 output module K230 Automatic run-off relay
F5 7.5 A terminal 15 right low beam 1 bank 3 - YMo1, Y6.1, Y6.2, K240 Power hazard light relay
F6 3 A terminal 30 left profile light / Y6.3 Y11, Y12 K241 Reserve
parking light F50 10 A terminal 15 output module K242 Reserve
F7 3 A terminal 30 right profile light 1 bank 4 - Y2, Y3, YEP1, YEP2 K243 Reserve
/ parking light F51 10 A terminal 15 output module K244 Reserve
F07b 10 A terminal 15 hazard lights 1 DO1 supply - OP M2 - Y51, K245 Reserve
F8 15 A terminal 58 compressor Y52 K246 Reserve
seat, seat heater* F52 10 A terminal 15 output module K270 Immobiliser relay
F8a 10 A terminal 58 interior lighting, 1 DO2 supply - OP M2 - Y2a, K271 Return-to-dig relay M3
radio, cigarette lighter (X70) Y3a, Y11, Y12 R9b Alternator exciter resistance
F9 10 A terminal 15 LH control F53 10 A terminal 15 output module 220
lever button, air conditioning 1 DO3 supply Y62 central S1 Safety test button
keypad, optional keypad lubrication system V1 Extinguishing diode K01
F10 5 A terminal 15 display unit F54 5 A terminal 15 master control V2 Extinguishing diode K01/87
F11 10 A terminal 15 pressure A15 supply V3 Extinguishing diode K12
switches B32, B28, B3, B3a F55 10 A terminal 15 output module V4 Extinguishing diode K02
F12 20 A terminal 15 reserve 2 bank 1 - Y16, Y53, Y15 V5 Extinguishing diode K03
F13 20 A terminal 15 reserve F56 10 A terminal 15 output module V6 Extinguishing diode K02/87
F14 15 A terminal 15 fuel preheating 2 bank 2 - K11/50, Y50, Y20, V7 Extinguishing diode K03/87
F15 10 A terminal 15 S2 LH control Y21 V8 Extinguishing diode K5
lever; tank pipe sensor; terminal F57 10 A terminal 15 output module V9 Extinguishing diode K3
15 master; engine stop relay; 2 bank 3 - Y11, Y12 V10 Extinguishing diode K2
alternator excitation F58 10 A terminal 15 output module V11 Extinguishing diode K22
F16 40 A terminal 15 (MAXI fuse) 2 bank 4 - reserve V12 Extinguishing diode K22a
F17 40 A terminal 15 (MAXI fuse) F59 10 A terminal 15 output module V13 Extinguishing diode K22b
F18 10 A terminal 15 washer pump, 2 DO1 supply - OP M1 - YEP1, V14 Extinguishing diode K25
rear wiper motor YEP2, Y2, Y3 V15 Extinguishing diode K26
F19 10 A terminal 15 heater, B27 F60 10 A terminal 15 output module V16 Extinguishing diode K31a
air conditioning 2 DO2 supply - OP M1 - V17 Extinguishing diode K31b
F19A 20 A terminal 30 heater, air Y6.1.2.3 V18 Extinguishing diode K32a
conditioning F61 10 A terminal 15 output module V19 Extinguishing diode K32b
F20 15 A terminal 15 front wiper, 2 DO3 supply - E1, E5 V20 Extinguishing diode K33a
washer pump, horn F62 10 A terminal 15 output module V21 Extinguishing diode K33b
F21 10 A terminal 15 driving light, 2 DO4 supply - B16 V22 Extinguishing diode F9 reserve
high beam F63 10 A terminal 15 output module V23 Extinguishing diode F14
F22 7.5 A terminal 15 brake lights, 3 bank 1 - reserve preheating
switch illumination F64 10 A terminal 15 output module V24 Extinguishing diode F19 heater
F23 15 A terminal 15 reserve 3 bank 2 - reserve blower, air conditioning
F24 10 A terminal 15 ignition ON, F65 10 A terminal 15 output module V25 Extinguishing diode F72 reserve
engine ECU 3 bank 3 - reserve V29 Extinguishing diode K240/87
F25 10 A terminal 30 F66 10 A terminal 15 output module V30 Extinguishing diode K241/87
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
flashing beacon 3 bank 4 - reserve V31 Extinguishing diode K242/87

F26 10 A terminal 30 diagnostic plug F67 10 A terminal 15 output module V32 Extinguishing diode K244/87a
F27 10 A terminal 30 profile light / 3 DO1 supply V32c Reversing light blocking diode
parking light F68 10 A terminal 15 output module V33 Extinguishing diode K244/87
F28 10 A terminal 30 reserve 3 DO2 supply V33c Reversing light blocking diode
F29 25 A terminal 30 ignition starter F69 10 A terminal 15 output module V34 Extinguishing diode K245/87a
switch relief 3 DO3 supply V35 Extinguishing diode K245/87
F30 15 A terminal 30 voltage F70 10 A terminal 15 output module V36 Extinguishing diode K246/87a
converter, radio, 12 V socket 3 DO4 supply V37 Extinguishing diode K246/87
F31a 10 A terminal 30/15 working F71 10 A terminal 15 keypad supply V38 Extinguishing diode K243/87a
floodlight + double beam, F72 30 A terminal 15 reserve V39 Extinguishing diode K243/87
front left F73 10 A terminal 15 reserve V40 Extinguishing diode K228/87a
F31b 10 A terminal 30/15 working F74 15 A terminal 15 rear window V41 Extinguishing diode K228/87
floodlight + double beam, heater, heated mirror* V42 Extinguishing diode K271/87a
front right F75 10 A terminal 30 radio IGN, V43 Extinguishing diode K271/87
L566 - 460 / from 14171
F32a 10 A terminal 30/15 working terminal 58, 12 V socket V44 Extinguishing diode K271
floodlight rear left (rear hatch) F76 10 A terminal 30 radio + V45 Extinguishing diode K228
F32b 10 A terminal 30/15 working K01 Ignition starter switch relief relay V46 Extinguishing diode K243
floodlight rear right (rear hatch) terminal 15 V48 Extinguishing diode K246
F33a 10 A terminal 30/15 working K02 Starter solenoid relay* V49 Extinguishing diode K245
floodlight rear left (cab door)* K03 Engine stop relay* V50 Extinguishing diode K244
F33b 10 A terminal 30/15 working K1 Direction indicator relay V51 Extinguishing diode K242
floodlight rear right (cab door)* V52 Extinguishing diode K241
K2 Profile light, parking light relay
F34 20 A terminal 30 V53 Extinguishing diode K240
K3 Low beam / driving light relay
refuelling pump* V54 Extinguishing diode K209
F35 10 A terminal 30 master control K3a High beam relay V57 Extinguishing diode K10
supply A15 K5 Relay terminal 15 V58 Extinguishing diode K9
F36 40 A terminal 30 engine control K8 Rear windscreen wiper and V59 Extinguishing diode K8
unit supply A14 LH-ECU washer pump relay V60 Extinguishing diode K3a
(output) K9 Flashing beacon relay V81 Alternator excitation blocking
F37 40 A terminal 30 reserve K10 Mirror/rear window heater relay diode
F38 5 A terminal 30 engine control K12 Radio / 12 V socket relay V82 Alternator excitation blocking
unit supply A14 LH-ECU terminal 58 diode
(output) K22 Hazard lights relay terminal 15 V83 Direction indicator blocking
F39 20 A terminal 30 engine K22a Relay S4 H16, H18 diode
compartment lighting, auxiliary K22b Relay S4 H15, H17 V84 Direction indicator blocking
heater clock K25 John Deere (USA) hazard light diode
F40 20 A terminal 30 auxiliary relay V85 Direction indicator blocking
heater control K26 John Deere (USA) hazard light diode
F41 20 A terminal 30 reserve relay V86 Direction indicator blocking
F42 20 A terminal 30 reserve K31a Left working floodlight + double diode
F43 5 A terminal 15 input module beam relay, front left V87 Direction indicator blocking
1+2 logic K31b Right working floodlight + diode
F44 10 A terminal 15 input module 1 double beam relay, front right V88 Direction indicator blocking
supply K32a Left working floodlight + double diode
F45 10 A terminal 15 input module 2 beam relay, rear left V89 Direction indicator blocking
supply K32b Right working floodlight + diode
F46 10 A terminal 15 input module 3 double beam relay, rear right V90 Hydraulic quick change device
supply blocking diode
V99 Direction indicator blocking
diode
* Options
Basic function
The relay and fuse board houses and connects the electrical components.
The relay and fuse board does not have a control function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
However, the other electrical and electronic components are powered via the
relay and fuse board.
Working floodlight fuse function

The function of the working floodlights can be selected by plugging the fuses
F31A, F31B, F32A, F32B, F33A and F33B:
- When the fuses are plugged to terminal 30 the working floodlights work
as soon as the main switch is turned ON.
- When the fuses are plugged to terminal 15 the working floodlights only
work when the ignition is turned ON.
You can also choose a mixed function, for example by plugging the front
working floodlights to terminal 15 and the rear floodlights to terminal 30.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Fuse test
The fuses on the relay and fuse board are divided into three categories.
- Fuses for power supply from terminal 30
- Fuses for power supply from terminal 15
- Fuses to protect various functions
(e.g. low beam, profile lights / parking light)
Each fuse has an LED and can be tested by pressing the button S1.
The fuse test depends on the electrical status.
Only the fuses of the activated circuit can be tested:
- When the main switch is on (terminal 30) only the LEDs on terminal 30
power supply fuses light up when the button S1 is pressed.
- When the main ignition is on (terminal 15) the LEDs on terminal 30 and
terminal 15 power supply fuses light up when the button S1 is pressed.
- The LEDs to protect the various functions only light up when the
corresponding function is activated.
If an LED does not light up, the fuse is defective.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
10.1.3 Main electronics (master) A15

ID no. 10223177
Technical data
See section 2.1
The main electronics (master) A15 are located on the cab rear wall.
Design
Main electronics (master) A15

1 Cover fixing thread 5 Slot 2 (CF2) (optional)
2 Status display LEDs 6 Main electronics (master) A15
3 Slot 1 (CF1) for memory card 7 Green system status LED
with application software 8 Ventilation and bleeder screw
4 Memory card status LEDs 9 Cover for Compact Flash (CF)
memory card slot
Basic function
The main electronics (master) is the brain of the machine control system.
The main electronics (master) controls and monitors all connected CAN or
external modules.
The application software in the main electronics (master) strictly follows the
following time cycles:
- Fetch all input data from the CAN/external modules
- Perform all calculations in the application software with the input data;
calculate the output data
- Generate output data for connected external/CAN modules, which
convert the commands into actions (for example activating a solenoid
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
valve via one of the output modules)
Memory card
The application software is stored on the memory card in slot 1 (CF1).
1 128 MB capacity memory card
2 ID no. of memory card including current software
3 Current software INDEX
4 Production date
Each time the system is started up (ignition switched on), the application
software on the memory card in slot 1 (CF1) is tested and (if there are
changes) an update is performed.
128 MB memory card
L580 - 459 / from 14171
The data on the memory card takes priority. The system cannot be operated
without a memory card.
How the status LEDs work
Status display LEDs
Status list
LED B LED A Status Description
Green Orange
LED Directly after the main electronics (master) are switched on, an automatic
On On activation LED test is performed. The system is started.
test
The system is started and waits for all the conditions, such as the presence
Off Off Booting
of CAN modules in the system, to be met.
Flashes
(1 s on, Off Running The system is running fully in normal operation
1 s off)
Flashes
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error. The
Off (0.2 s. on, Critical
application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated.
0.2 s. off)
Flashes
CAN Download of required software to a CAN module is in progress. The appli-
(1 s on, On
download cation software has not yet been started. The machine cannot yet be operated.
1 s off)
Flashes The entire control system has been shut down due to an error with
On (0.2 s. on, ALARM ALARM priority. The application software is stopped and the machine
0.2 s. off) cannot be operated.
Flash in time The entire control system has been shut down due to a fatal error. The
FATAL
(0.2 s. on, 0.2 s. off) application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated.
Flash in time The system has been shut down due to a power down command. The
Power down
(1 s on, 1 s off) machine cannot be operated.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The system has been completely shut down. The machine cannot be
Power off
Flash alternately operated.
(1 s on, 1 s off) Flash Part of the main electronics software is being updated. The machine cannot
programming be operated until this has been completed.
Part of the MASTER's internal FLASH memory is being deleted (prior to
Off On Flash erase
reprogramming)
L566 - 460 / from 14171
How the memory card LEDs work

The LEDs show the status of and communication between the memory card
and the control unit.
- LED 1 indicates that the memory card CF1 is plugged in.
- LED 3 indicates that the memory card CF2 is plugged in.
- LED 2 lights up or flickers when the memory card CF1 is communicating
with the control unit.
- LED 4 lights up or flickers when the memory card CF2 is communicating
with the control unit.
Memory card status LEDs
How the system status LEDs work

The LED 3 lights up to signal the power supply for the main electronics
(master).
System status LED
Main electronics (master) connectors
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Main electronics (master) connectors

1 PWR_X power supply connector 7 COM1_X COM 1 connector
2 CAN_X CAN connector (unassigned)
3 LAN 1 connector (unassigned) 8 COM2_X COM 2 connector
4 LAN 2 connector (unassigned) (unassigned)
5 LAN 3 connector (unassigned) 9 COM3_X COM 3 connector
6 Main electronics (master) (unassigned)
10 COM4_X COM 4 connector
(unassigned)
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Plug assignment
6-pin Deutsch connector
1 Earth (ground) 4 Unassigned
2 Terminal 15 from fuse F54 5 Housing earth
3 Unassigned 6 Terminal 30 from fuse F35
PWR_X connector
8-pin Deutsch connector
1 CAN 4 low 5 CAN 1 high

CAN_X connector
9-pin SUB-D connector

1 Reception signal level (DCD) 5 Earth (GND)
2 Reception data (RXD) 6 Standby (DSR)
3 Transmission data (TXD) 7 Transmitter activation (RTS)
4 Terminal operational (DTR) 8 Transmission standby (CTS)
COM4_X connector 9 Incoming call (RI)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
10.1.4 Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c)

ID no. 10046435
Technical data
See section 2.1
The input modules are located under the left cab access and in the cab, and
are arranged as follows:
1 Left rear section
2 Output module 3 A17c (optional)
3 Input module 3 A16c (optional)
4 Input module 1 A16a
5 Output module 2 A17b
6 Output module 1 A17a
Input module 2 A16b in the cab on the rear wall
Module layout
Design
Input module
1 Input module 3 Connector
2 Ventilation and bleeder screw 4 Type plate
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
with Goretex membrane
The input modules have the following functions:
1 Power supply for switches and sensors
2 Converting analogue and digital signals to CAN bus messages
3 Forwarding the converted signals via CAN bus to the main electronics
(master)
The only difference between the input modules is their address.
The input modules 1 A16a and 2 A16b must be plugged in and operational
for the system to work.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Input module connector assignment
Input module connectors

1 24 V sensor supply 4 Frequency test inputs
2 CAN interface with logic supply 5 Earth
3 16 analogue universal inputs 6 5 V sensor supply
Input module 1 connector Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC

A16a.X1:
1 Spare 36 Power supply for bucket return-
2 24 V power supply, logical to-dig
unit 200 mA 37 Power supply for tank sensor
3 Spare 38 Power supply for lift kick-out
4 Emergency steering pump 39 Power supply for gas pedal
pressure test angle sensor 1
5 Spare 40 Spare
6 Emergency steering pump 41 Spare
pressure 42 Spare
7 Brake accumulator pressure 43 CAN low (CAN-E connected to
8 Control lever forward 1 CAN_Res)
9 Control lever back 1 44 CAN low
10 Lift kick-out 45 Spare
11 Bucket return-to-dig 46 Hydraulic oil temperature
12 Spare 47 Hydraulic oil temperature
13 Spare 48 Spare
14 Spare 49 Spare
15 Spare 50 Spare
16 Logical unit supply earth 51 Spare
17 Spare 52 Spare
18 Float position 53 Spare
19 Ride control (LFD) 54 Spare
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
20 Quick-change device switch 55 Variable displacement motor

21 Inch pedal angle sensor 1 speed 1
22 Transmission overheating 56 Output speed
23 Tank sensor 57 CAN high (CAN-E connected to
24 Terminal 50a CAN_Res)
25 Gas pedal angle sensor 1 58 CAN high
26 Spare 59 Spare
27 Spare 60 Spare
28 Spare 61 Spare
29 CAN end connected to pin 43 62 Spare
30 Terminal 30 power supply 63 Earth for inch pedal angle
31 Earth sensor 1
32 Power supply for service brake 64 Earth for lift kick-out
accumulator B19 65 Earth for tank sensor
L566 - 460 / from 14171
33 Spare 66 Earth for return-to-dig

34 Spare 67 Earth for gas pedal angle sensor 1
35 Power supply for inch pedal 68 Spare
angle sensor 1 69 Earth for variable displacement
motor speed 1
70 Earth for output speed
Input module 2 Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC

connector A16b.X1:
1 Spare 36 Power supply for joystick
2 24 V power supply, logical unit activation
200 mA 37 Spare
3 Spare 38 Spare
4 Driving light 39 Spare
5 High beam 40 Spare
6 Indicator signal 41 Spare
7 Spare 42 Spare
8 Control lever option 1 43 CAN low (CAN-E connected to
9 Control lever option 2 CAN_Res)
10 Control lever option 3 44 CAN low
11 Warning buzzer 45 Spare
12 Spare 46 Spare
13 Spare 47 Spare
14 Spare 48 Spare
15 Spare 49 Spare
16 Logical unit supply earth 50 Spare
17 Spare 51 Spare
18 Control lever forward 2 52 Spare
19 Control lever reverse 2 53 Spare
20 Inch pedal angle sensor 2 54 Spare
21 Gas pedal angle sensor 2 55 Variable displacement motor
22 Central lubrication system filling speed 2
level signal B44 56 Central lubrication system cycle
23 Particle filter (optional) signal B43
24 Particle filter (optional) 57 CAN high (CAN-E connected to
25 Joystick steering sensor 1 CAN_Res)
26 Spare 58 CAN high
27 Spare 59 Earth for central lubrication
28 Spare system cycles B43
29 CAN end connected to pin 43 60 Earth for central lubrication
30 24 V power supply system filling level inductive
31 Earth supply switch B44
32 Power supply for central 61 Spare
lubrication system cycles 62 Earth for inch pedal angle
inductive switch B43 sensor 2
33 Power supply for central 63 Earth for gas pedal angle
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
lubrication system filling level sensor 2

inductive switch B44 64 Spare
34 Power supply for inch pedal 65 Earth for arm rest joystick
angle sensor 2 66 Spare
35 Power supply for gas pedal 67 Earth for joystick steering, left
angle sensor 2 68 Spare
69 Earth for variable displacement
motor speed 2
70 Spare
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LED indication
LEDs behind the bleeder screw

1 Input module ventilation 3 Orange LED
opening 4 Red LED
2 Green LED
Module status display After the ignition is switched on, the following conditions may be shown:
Status Description
Module ready, waiting to receive
Green LED flashes slowly
the first message on the CAN bus
CAN bus communication active,
Green LED flickers/lights up
normal control
Error frames detected on CAN bus.
Defect on the CAN bus (e.g. wiring
Red LED flickers/lights up error, loose contact, no terminating
resistor) Normal control may not
be possible
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Addressing the input and output modules
Ventilation and bleeder opening

1 Input module ventilation opening 4 Orange LED 10s display
2 Green LED 100s display 5 Red LED 1s display
3 Button 6 5 V sensor supply
Addressing procedure A module must be addressed when it is replaced or installed.
The input modules are delivered with the default address 45.
The address is required in order to identify CAN bus messages.
- Input module (sender)
- Output module (receiver)
Addressing is performed as follows:
Connect the module
Remove the ventilation and bleeder screw
Unplug the PWR.X connector on the main electronics (master)
Press the button 3
Switch on the ignition and keep the button pressed until the LEDs
start flashing
Note: If you release the button too quickly, the module is in download mode
for the outer core (orange flashes once, red flashes once). In this case,
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
switch the module off and try again.

The flashing LEDs indicate the module number (address):
- The green LED flashes to indicate the 100s of the module number
(1x = 100, 2x = 200)
- The orange LED flashes to indicate the 10s of the module number
(1x = 10, 2x = 20)
- The red LED flashes to indicate the 1s of the module number
(1x = 1, 2x = 2)
Example: 1x green, 3x orange, 10x red = 130
All three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display.
Changing the module number (address):
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Press the button again to increase the module number by one.

Four numbers are available for each module; after the last one it starts with
the first one again.
Addressing the input modules:
Setting after
Component Address Status function
replacement
Input module 1 A16a 45 No Yes
Input module 2 A16b 46 Yes Yes
Input module 3 A16c
47 Yes No
(optional)
10.1.5 Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c)

ID no. 10046438
Technical data
See section 2.1
The output modules are located under the left cab access and are arranged
as follows:
1 Left rear section
2 Output module 3 A17c (optional)
3 Input module 3 A16c (optional)
4 Input module 1 A16a
5 Output module 2 A17b
6 Output module 1 A17a
Module layout
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Output module
L566 - 460 / from 14171
1 Output module 3 Connector

2 Ventilation and bleeder screw 4 Type plate
with Goretex membrane
The output modules have the following functions:
- Converting digital input signals (CAN bus messages) from the main
electronics (master) into analogue commands.
- Controlling the consumer units via terminal equipment.
The power supply for the terminal equipment is divided as follows:
- Activation via banks, which consist of 4 terminal devices and have a
single power source (fuse).
- Direct activation from a fuse, where individual terminal devices are
powered directly by a corresponding fuse.
- Indirect activation from a fuse, where individual terminal devices are
powered by a corresponding fuse via an upstream module. This
configuration is required for switching off outputs in safety-critical states.
Output module connector assignment
Output module connectors

1 Internal 0 Ohm jumper 6 Bank 4 power outputs (1.3 A)
2 24 V power supply 7 Bank 3 power outputs (1.3 A)
3 Logic earth connection 8 Frequency test inputs
4 Bank 1 power outputs (1.3 A) 9 Earth for power outputs
5 Bank 2 power outputs (1.3 A) 10 Positive-switching outputs (8 A)
11 CAN interface
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Output module 1 Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC

connector A17a.X1:
1 Bank 1 power supply (16 A) 30 Spare
2 24 V power supply, logical unit 31 Spare
200 mA 32 Digital 1 power supply (8 A)
3 Power earth 33 Digital 1 switching output (8 A)
4 Bank 1 power output for parking 34 Digital 2 power supply (8 A)
brake Y10 35 Digital 2 switching output (8 A)
5 Bank 1 power output for working 36 Digital 3 power supply (8 A)
hydraulics lockout Y14 37 Digital 3 switching output (8 A)
6 Bank 1 power output for bucket central lubrication M6
return-to-dig Y9 38 Digital 4 power supply (8 A)
7 Bank 1 power output for lift kick- 39 Digital 4 switching output (8 A)
L580 - 459 / from 14171
out Y17 back-up alarm H58, H59

8 Bank 3 power output for AVG 40 Earth for central lubrication M6
coupling 1 Y6.1 41 Spare
9 Bank 3 power output for AVG 42 Spare
coupling 2 Y6.2 43 CAN low input
10 Bank 3 power output for AVG 44 CAN low output
coupling 3 Y6.3 45 Spare
11 Bank 3 power output for AVG 46 Earth for parking brake Y10
modulation YMo1 47 Earth for working hydraulics
12 Power earth lockout Y14
13 24 V power supply, logical unit 48 Earth for return-to-dig Y9
200 mA (reserve) 49 Earth for lift kick-out Y17
14 Bank 3 power supply (16 A) 50 Earth for AVG coupling 1 Y6.1
15 Bank 2 power supply (16 A) 51 Earth for AVG coupling 2 Y6.2
16 Logical unit earth 52 Earth for AVG coupling 3 Y6.3
17 Power earth 53 Earth for modulation Mo1
18 Bank 2 power output for float 54 Earth for back-up alarm H58, H59
position Y18 55 Spare
19 Bank 2 power output for cooling 56 Spare
system fan Y13 57 CAN high input
20 Bank 2 power output for warning 58 CAN high output
buzzer H40 59 Spare
21 Bank 2 power output for swivel 60 Earth for float position Y18
restrictor Y57 61 Earth for fan Y13
22 Bank 4 power output for variable 62 Earth for warning buzzer H40
displacement motor 1 YEP1 63 Earth for swivel restrictor Y57
23 Bank 4 power output for variable 64 Earth for variable displacement
displacement motor 2 YEP2 motor 1 YEP 1
24 Bank 4 power output for forward 65 Earth for variable displacement
travel direction Y2 motor 2 YEP 2
25 Bank 4 power output for reverse 66 Earth for travel direction pump 1
travel direction Y3 Y2
26 Power earth 67 Earth for travel direction pump 1
27 Spare Y3
28 Bank 4 power supply (16 A) 68 Spare
29 CAN terminating resistor to 69 Spare
CAN_High 70 Spare
Output module 2 Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC

connector A17b.X1:
1 Bank 1 power supply (16 A) 36 Digital 3 power supply (8 A)
2 24 V power supply, logical unit 37 Digital 3 switching output (8 A)
200 mA reversing light
3 Power earth 38 Digital 4 power supply (8 A)
4 Bank 1 power output for 39 Digital 4 switching output (8 A)
overspeed protection Y16 back-up alarm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
5 Bank 1 power output for option 40 Power earth reserve

6 Bank 1 power output for travel 41 Power supply for 24 V sensor
pump control Y15 reserve
7 Bank 1 power output for travel 42 Power supply for 24 V sensor
pump control Y15a (L586 only) reserve
8 Bank 3 power output for forward 43 CAN low input
travel direction Y2a (L586 only) 44 CAN low output
9 Bank 3 power output for reverse 45 Power earth reserve
travel direction Y3a (L586 only) 46 Power earth for overspeed
10 Bank 3 power output for protection Y16
additional equipment 1 Y11 47 Power earth for options
11 Bank 3 power output for 48 Power earth for travel pump 1
additional equipment 2 Y12 Y15
12 Power earth 49 Power earth for travel pump 2
L566 - 460 / from 14171
13 24 V power supply, logical unit Y15a

200 mA (reserve) 50 Power earth for travel direction
14 Bank 3 power supply (16 A) pump 2 Y2a
15 Bank 2 power supply (16 A) 51 Power earth for travel direction
16 Logical unit earth pump 2 Y3a
17 Power earth 52 Power earth for additional
18 Bank 2 power output for equipment 1 Y11
emergency steering relay K11 53 Power earth for additional
19 Bank 2 power output for fan equipment 2 Y12
reversal Y50 54 Power earth for reserve back-up
20 Bank 2 power output for ride alarm
control Y20 55 Frequency input 1 reserve
21 Bank 2 power output for float 56 Frequency input 2 reserve
position Y21 57 CAN high input
22 Bank 4 power output for joystick 58 CAN high output
steering, left Y51 59 Power earth reserve
23 Bank 4 power output for joystick 60 Power earth for emergency
steering, right Y52 steering relay K11
24 Bank 4 power output for gerotor 61 Power earth for fan reversal
steering (2-in-1) Y63 Y50
25 Bank 4 power output for joystick 62 Power earth for LFD
steering safety valve Y64 63 Power earth for LFD
26 Power earth 64 Power earth for joystick
27 Logical unit earth reserve steering, left Y51
28 Bank 4 power supply (16 A) 65 Power earth for joystick
29 CAN terminating resistor to steering, right Y52
CAN_High 66 Power output for gerotor
30 Power supply for 24 V steering (2-in-1) Y63
frequency sensor reserve 67 Power output for joystick
31 Power earth reserve steering safety valve Y64
32 Digital 1 power supply (8 A) 68 Power earth reserve
33 Digital 1 switching output (8 A) 69 Earth for frequency input 1
2 pump control 1 reserve
34 Digital 2 power supply (8 A) 70 Earth for frequency input 2
35 Digital 2 switching output (8 A) reserve
2 transmission control
LED indication
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
LEDs behind the bleeder screw
L580 - 459 / from 14171
1 Output module ventilation 3 Orange LED

opening 4 Red LED
2 Green LED
Module status display After the ignition is switched on, the following conditions may be shown:
Status Description
Module ready, waiting to receive the
Green LED flashes slowly
first message on the CAN bus
CAN bus communication active,
Green LED flickers/lights up
normal control
Error frames detected on CAN bus.
Defect on the CAN bus (e.g. wiring
Red LED flickers/lights up error, loose contact, no terminating
resistor) Normal control may not be
possible
Addressing the input and output modules
Ventilation and bleeder opening

1 Output module ventilation 4 Orange LED 10s display
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
opening 5 Red LED 1s display

2 Green LED 100s display 6 5 V sensor supply
3 Button
Addressing procedure A module must be addressed when it is replaced or installed.
The output modules are delivered with the default address 21.
- Input module (sender)
- Output module (receiver)
Connect the module
Remove the ventilation and bleeder screw
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Unplug the PWR.X connector on the main electronics (master)

Press the button 3
Switch on the ignition and keep the button pressed until the LEDs start
flashing
Note: If you release the button too quickly, the module is in download mode
for the outer core (orange flashes once, red flashes once). In this case,
switch the module off and try again.
- The green LED flashes to indicate the 100s of the module number (1x =
100, 2x = 200)
- The orange LED flashes to indicate the 10s of the module number (1x =
10, 2x = 20)
- The red LED flashes to indicate the 1s of the module number (1x = 1, 2x
= 2)
Example: 1x green, 3x orange, 10x red = 130
All three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display.
Changing the module number (address):
Press the button again to increase the module number by one.
Four numbers are available for each module; after the last one it starts with
the first one again.
Addressing the input modules:
Setting after
Component Address Status function
replacement
Output module 1 A17a 22 Yes Yes
Output module 2 A17b 21 No Yes
Output module 3 A17c
23 Yes No
(optional)
10.1.6 Electrical components in the rear section

Components on the rear left of the rear section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Components on the rear left of the rear section

K04 Preglow relay F02 60 A preglow fuse
B16 Back-up alarm (optional) F07 10 A hazard warning system
F01 100 A main fuse fuse
F03 200 A emergency steering F010 5 A heating flange feedback
pump fuse fuse
L580 - 459 / from 14171
How the relay K04 works

The relay K04 controls the intake air pre-heating flange.
The preglow system is controlled by the engine electronics A700D and
depends on the following criteria:
- Coolant temperature
- Intake air temperature
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Battery installation
10.2 Battery installation

The electrical system operates at 24 volts.
Design
Battery arrangement
1 Connecting cable from fuses to 6 Earth point on machine frame
consumers 7 Connecting cable from battery
2 Fuses in the rear section (+) to the consumers
3 Connecting cable from battery to 8 Connecting cable from battery 1
main switch (+) to battery 2 (-)
4 Connecting cable from main 9 Batteries 1 and 2 in the left
switch to vehicle earth ballast weight
5 Main switch 10 Electrical consumers
The batteries are installed in the left ballast weight. The two batteries are
connected in series.
The battery main switch S1 is installed in the rear left of the engine compart-
ment and disconnects the battery circuit (-) from the vehicle earth.
The following components are powered directly by the battery.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
- M1 Starter
- G3 Alternator
- A4 Voltage converter
- F01 100 A main fuse
- F02 60 A preglow fuse
- F03 200 A fuse for emergency steering pump
- F07 10 A fuse for hazard lights
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Battery installation
10.2.1 Batteries
(ID 6002886, 613203208)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Apart from the terminals, the batteries require no maintenance during
normal operation.
Battery arrangement
1 Battery 3 Drip catcher
2 Back-ignition protection
The battery has a gas escape mechanism and is equipped with back-ignition
protection and a drip catcher.
The free channels must be sealed with dummy plugs.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
11 Transmission
11.0
Chapter contents
11 Transmission..................................................................... 11.0-1
11.0 Transmission.................................................................................11.0-1
11.1 Mechanical transmission ..............................................................11.1-1
11.2 Electronic control unit ...................................................................11.2-1

11.2.1 Main electronics (master) ...................................................11.2-1
11.2.2 Main wiring harness (including transmission) ....................11.2-4
11.2.3 Gear shifting solenoid valves .............................................11.2-5
11.2.4 Speed sensor .....................................................................11.2-6
11.3 Hydraulic control ...........................................................................11.3-1

11.3.1 Control valve block .............................................................11.3-3
11.3.2 Gear pump..........................................................................11.3-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Transmission Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service Manual Transmission
11.0 Transmission
Design
Main components of the transmission system

1 A11 control unit 4 Oil cooler
2 Transmission 5 Main electronics (master)
3 Gear pump
The transmission system consists of the gearbox including the control valve
block, the main electronics (master), the control unit A11, the hydraulic
supply system and the oil cooler.
The gearbox is elastically mounted in the rear section of the wheel loader.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The control valve block is bolted on the gearbox from above.

The main electronics (master) are located on the rear wall of the cab behind
the driver's seat. The control unit A11 is located on the panel in the right of
the cab.
The gear pump which supplies the gearbox with control and lubrication oil is
connected to the wheel drive of the engine. The oil cooler is in the cooling
system between the cab and the engine.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Mechanical transmission
11.1 Mechanical transmission

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Cross section of the transmission (note: the drive shaft 2 with the coupling 2 is shown turned upwards to make it
easier to see)
1 Transmission housing 5 Coupling 3 11 Coupling 1 lube oil duct
2 Variable displacement motor 2 6 Coupling 1 12 Coupling 3 lube oil duct
drive shaft 7 Rear axle drive shaft flange 13 Coupling 2 lube oil duct
3 Coupling 2 8 Oil strainer 14 Oil filter
4 Variable displacement motor 1 9 Power take-off shaft 15 Control valve block
drive shaft 10 Front axle drive shaft flange
L566 - 460 / from 14171
The gearbox is elastically mounted in the rear section of the wheel loader and
is driven by two variable displacement motors. The motors drive the two input
shafts 2 and 4, which transfer the torque to the coupling sets 3, 5 and 6. The
hydraulically actuated couplings consist of an inside-geared coupling cage, an
outside-geared coupling hub, discs, piston, press plate and return springs.
The outside-geared steel discs and inside-geared friction discs are arranged
alternately. The outside-geared discs are connected to the coupling cage
and the inside-geared discs are connected to the coupling hub in such a way
that they cannot twist. The hub and the friction discs turn freely with the input
shafts when the coupling is not actuated.
When the travel range is shifted, oil is directed from the solenoid valve in the
control valve block 15 through the appropriate duct to the coupling valve. As
soon as the coupling valve is actuated, oil flows through the duct to the
corresponding coupling piston. The oil pressure pushes the piston and discs
against the press plate.
When the steel and friction discs are pressed together, they connect the
coupling cage and hub so that they turn together.
When the coupling is closed, power is transmitted from the oil motor to the
output shaft. The two drive shafts to the front and rear section are connected
to the flanges of the output shaft 7 and 10.
When the coupling is open, the return springs push the coupling piston back.
The oil in front of the piston escapes through the coupling valve and holes in the
coupling piston to the oil sump. The oil sump is fitted in transmission housing 1.
A pump fitted to the engine draws the gear oil is through pipes out of the
sump. The oil strainer 8 is fitted on the intake port of the oil sump. The gear
oil is pumped back through a filter into the transmission. Some of the oil is
directed through the oil cooler. The cooled oil is pumped to the transmission
lubrication system.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
Arrangement of shafts, gears and couplings in the transmission

1 Motor 1 drive shaft 8 Variable displacement motor 2
2 Shaft 1 drive gear input
3 Coupling 3 9 Coupling 1
4 Intermediate shaft power take- 10 Intermediate shaft drive gear
off gear 11 Intermediate shaft
5 Motor 2 drive shaft 12 Variable displacement motor 1
6 Shaft 2 drive gear input
7 Coupling 2 13 Shaft 1 drive gear
14 Power take-off shaft
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
These are the basic functions of the 2plus2 transmission:

Increasing the input torque of the two variable displacement motors
Shifting gear without reducing tractive force
Increasing the speed range through 3 travel ranges
Distributing torque to the front and rear axles
L566 - 460 / from 14171
The 3 gears
1st gear
In first gear, the couplings K1 and K2 are closed. The torques from both
variable displacement motors are used to provide maximum tractive force.
Input shaft 1
The power from motor 1 is transferred directly via the input shaft 1 to the
drive gear of the intermediate shaft 3. The closed coupling K1 transfers the
torque of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4.
Input shaft 2
The power from motor 2 is transferred via the input shaft 2 to the coupling
K2 and the output gear of the input shaft 2. The power is then transferred via
the output gears of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4.
The power of both motors is accumulated in the intermediate shaft 3. The
power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
2nd gear
In 2nd gear, the coupling K1 is opened and the motor 1 pivots to 0. At the
same time, motor 2 pivots to a wider angle.
Input shaft 1
Motor 1 pivots to 0 and the coupling K1 is opened.
Input shaft 2
The power from motor 2 is transferred via the input shaft 2 to the coupling
K2 and the output gear of the input shaft 2. The power is then transferred via
The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3rd gear
In 3rd gear, the coupling K3 is closed and the coupling K2 is opened. The
full torque is transferred during shifting.
Input shaft 1
The power from motor 1 is transferred via the input shaft 1 and the coupling
K3 to the output gear of the input shaft 1. The power is then transferred via
Input shaft 2
After the coupling K3 closes, motor 2 pivots to 0 and the coupling K2 is opened.
The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Electronic control unit
11.2 Electronic control unit

11.2.1 Main electronics (master)
(ID 10223177)
For a detailed description of the main electronics (master), see section 10.1.3.
Design
The main electronics (master) are attached to the rear trim of the cab under
a plastic cover and contains a flash card with the current machine software.
Main electronics (master) Function description
Basic function
The main electronics (master) is the brain of the machine control system.
The main electronics (master) controls and monitors all connected CAN or
external modules.
The application software in the main electronics (master) strictly follows the
following time cycles:
Fetch all input data from the CAN/external modules
Perform all calculations in the application software with the input data;
calculate the output data
Generate output data for connected external/CAN modules, which
convert the commands into actions (for example activating a solenoid
valve via one of the output modules)
A laptop can be connected to the master via a serial interface.
Using the SCULI software, the service engineer can make settings, perform
diagnosis and view operating data in the main electronics.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Block diagram of transmission

1 Gas pedal 8 Output module 1 14 Motor 1 speed sensor
2 LH control lever 9 Gear shifting solenoid valves 15 Solenoid valve Y6.1
3 Input module 1 10 2plus2 gearbox 16 Solenoid valve Y6.2
4 Input module 2 11 Output speed sensor 17 Solenoid valve Y6.3
5 Main electronics (master) 12 Thermostat 18 Solenoid valve Y6.mo
6 Display unit 13 Motor 2 speed sensor
7 Control unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Selecting travel ranges

When the electrical system is turned on, travel range A1-3 is automatically
selected. The transmission remains in neutral until the parking brake is
released and the travel direction is selected. Other travel ranges can be
selected by pressing the Shift Up (1) or Shift Down (2) buttons on the
control unit A11. The selected travel range is indicated on the display.
The following travel ranges can be selected:
A2 - 3 Automatic travel range 2nd and 3rd gear
A1 - 3 Automatic travel range 1st to 3rd gear
A1 - 2 Automatic travel range 1st and 2nd gear
2 Fixed 2nd gear
1 Fixed 1st gear
T Tempomat
N Neutral
Gearshift strategy
The controller constantly monitors the speed signals and the pump and motor
positions, and selects the most suitable gear in the automatic travel ranges.
The travel ranges can be changed at any speed. If the speed is too high for
the new travel range, the controller slows the machine by changing the
current to the pump and the variable displacement motor(s). When the
speed is appropriate for the new travel range after hydrostatic braking, the
travel range automatically changes.
Control unit A14

Maximum speed Vmax
If the task in hand required a reduced maximum speed, you can reduce the
maximum speed by pressing the button 3.
This function is only available when travelling forward in fixed gears 1 and 2.
then reaches this speed at full throttle. If the Vmax button is pressed when
the machine is not moving, the minimum speed for the gear is stored.
1st gear approx. 4 km/h
2nd gear approx. 10 km/h
The Vmax function is deactivated when you press the Vmax button again or
change the travel range.
If reverse travel direction is selected, the master shifts to automatic travel
range A1-3 and the Vmax function is deactivated.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Kick-down
The kick-down function allows manual shifting to first gear. Kick-down
shifting is used in the following situations:
Slowing the machine down when approaching the pile. The kick-down
function hydrostatically brakes the machine, and it shifts down to 1st gear.
Before driving onto a steep slope, you can use the kick-down function to
shift to 1st gear.
When you select the travel direction, the machine drives off in 2nd gear. If
steep terrain prevents this, you can use the kick-down function to shift
straight to 1st gear.
When you press the lick-down button 2 on the LIEBHERR control lever 1,
the machine is automatically hydrostatically braked and is shifted down to
1st gear.
At high travel speeds, the machine automatically shifts to 2nd gear, and then
to 1st gear.
At low travel resistance, 1st gear remains selected for 10 seconds.
During acceleration, the transmission automatically shifts to 2nd gear.
While pushing into the pile, first gear remains selected as long as the
resistance is high.
In kick-down mode, the maximum travel speed is 10 km/h. Kick-down mode
can be deactivated early by pressing the travel direction switch 3.
11.2.2 Main wiring harness (including transmission)
Design
The main wiring harness is connected to the right side of the transmission
using a Cannon plug.
Basic function
The Cannon plug is water- and dust-tight. Five lugs around its circumference
prevent it from being plugged in incorrectly.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Plug for electrical transmission control
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Plug assignment
Pin Colour Function
A Red Modulation solenoid valve
B Green Coupling 2 solenoid valve
C Blue Coupling 3 solenoid valve
D Yellow Coupling 1 solenoid valve
E White Weight
11.2.3 Gear shifting solenoid valves
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The transmission control valves are actuated by four solenoid valves. These
are installed on the left of the control valve block.
2plus2 transmission control valve block

1 Solenoid valve Y6.1 3 Solenoid valve Y6.3
2 Solenoid valve Y6.2 4 Solenoid valve Y6.mo
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Once a solenoid valve is actuated, its function is triggered by applying

pressure to its associated hydraulic valve.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
11.2.4 Speed sensor

(ID 7009274)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The input and output speeds of the transmission are recorded by speed
sensors and monitored by the main electronics (master).
Speed sensors on the transmission

1 Variable displacement motor 2 3 Variable displacement motor 1
speed sensor speed sensor
2 Power take-off speed sensor
Basic function
The sensors generate an AC signal with a frequency proportional to the
speed and number of teeth of the corresponding gear. This signal is
recorded by the main electronics (master) and converted to the speed.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic control
11.3 Hydraulic control

Basic function
Diagram of the hydraulic gearbox control unit

1 Variable displacement motor 1 10 Oil cooler 18 Coupling modulation valve 1
2 Variable displacement motor 2 11 Bypass valve filter and 3
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
3 Coupling 2 12 Pressure relief valve 19 Solenoid valve Y6.3

4 Coupling 3 13 Safety valve 20 Solenoid valve Y6.1
5 Coupling 1 14 Cooler bypass valve 21 Coupling valve 3
6 Lubrication oil supply 15 Pressure reducing valve 22 Coupling valve 1
7 Gear pump 16 Modulation solenoid valve 23 Solenoid valve Y6.2
8 Filter Y6.mo 24 Coupling valve 2
9 Hydro accumulator 17 Coupling modulation valve 2 P Test connection
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic control
The gear pump 7 draws up oil from the sump via a strainer. The oil sump is
fitted in the transmission housing.
The oil is pushed through the filter 8. The bypass valve 11 protects the filter
from overload. This valve opens at a differential pressure of 4.5 bar.
The hydro accumulator 9 is charged with gear oil.
Some of the oil flows through the pressure reducing valve 15 to the four
solenoid valves. The rest of the oil flows through the gear switching pressure
relief valve 12 to the gear oil cooler 10. The pressure relief valve is set to
203 bar. The pressure relief valve is adjusted using discs. The operating
pressure of the gearbox control unit is measured at the test point P.
The pressure reducing valve 15 reduces the oil pressure for actuating the
coupling valves from 20 to 9 bar.
The bypass valve 14 protects the gear oil cooler from hydraulic overload.
This opens at a differential pressure of 4 bar. Oil not used for lubricating the
couplings flows through the lubricating oil pressure limiting valve 13 to the oil
sump. The lubrication oil pressure limiting valve opens at 4 bar.
The cooled oil is pumped to the transmission lubrication system.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic control
11.3.1 Control valve block
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Cross section of the control valve block
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic control
1 Pressure relief valve 7 Coupling valve 2 13 Coupling valve 3

2 Bypass valve filter 8 Coupling 2 solenoid valve Y6.2 14 Coupling valve 1
3 Valve piston stop 9 Modulation solenoid valve 15 Separator plate
4 Cooler bypass valve Y6.mo 16 Separator plate
5 Pressure reducing valve 10 Canon plug 17 Control valve block housing
6 Coupling modulation valve 1 11 Coupling 1 solenoid valve Y6.1
and 3 12 Coupling 3 solenoid valve Y6.3
Basic function
The control valve block directs oil to the various consumers in the
transmission. Some are hydrostatically controlled, others electrohydro-
statically. The oil pressure, cooling and lubrication are hydraulically
controlled. The couplings and the pressure modulation are electrohy-
draulically controlled.
The solenoid valves receive control impulses from the main electronics
(master). The solenoid valves open and direct the pressure oil to the valve of
the actuated coupling and control the pressure modulation.
Shifting gears The illustration here shows the two modulation valves (the sectional view of
the control valve block only shows one modulation valve).
The modulation valve 2 for coupling 2 is held in place by the plug 1. Position 3
is the solenoid valve Y6.mo for the modulation. Component 4 is the
modulation valve for coupling 1 and 3.
Pressure modulation is required for smooth gear shifting.
When a gear is selected, oil is directed to the corresponding coupling valve.
The coupling valve is actuated and the oil flows unchecked through the
modulation valve and the coupling valve into the coupling. This is called the
rapid fill phase.
During the rapid fill phase, the coupling pads should be quickly brought into
contact, but without the coupling closing. This accelerates the shifting process.
A few milliseconds after the solenoid valve shifts a gear, the modulation valve
is energised and the oil is directed via a restrictor to the coupling. The oil flow
to the coupling is metered, and the pressure in the coupling accumulates
slowly and in a controlled manner. This is called the modulation phase.
Shortly afterwards, the modulation valve is deactivated. The coupling
pressure has now exceeded the force of the coupling springs and the
coupling is closed.
The actuated variable displacement motor pivots to an angle of 0 with the
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
required speed. The variable displacement motor is then set to the correct
angle. The motor is synchronised before the torque is transferred, thus
ensuring smooth shifting.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic control
Increase in coupling pressure during gear shifting

1 Travel range preselection 3 Modulation phase
2 Rapid fill phase 4 Shifting complete
The above graph shows how the pressure changes during a gearshift. The
complete shifting operation only takes around 200 milliseconds, and can
therefore not be recorded using conventional test equipment.
11.3.2 Gear pump
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the gear pump

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
1 Snap ring 5 Bearing bushings

2 Shaft seal ring 6 Gears
3 Flange 7 Housing
The gear pump is attached to the front of the engine. It is driven at a set ratio
via the spur gear transmission of the engine.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic control
Basic function
The gear pump draws up oil from the transmission. Depending on the speed,
the oil flows from the transmission control valve block.
Pressure cut-off
A pressure relief valve in the transmission control valve block protects the
system from excess pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
12 Axles, Drive shafts
12.0
Chapter contents
12 Axles, Drive shafts ............................................................ 12.0-1
12.1 Axles L550 - L576 2plus2 ..........................................................12.1-1
12.2 Axles L580 2plus2 .....................................................................12.2-1
12.3 Drive shafts ...................................................................................12.3-1

12.3.1 Front drive shaft..................................................................12.3-1
12.3.2 Rear drive shaft ..................................................................12.3-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Axles, Drive shafts Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Axles, Drive shafts
Axles L550 - L576 2plus2
12.1 Axles L550 - L576 2plus2

L556 - 454 / from 15653; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the axle

1 Axle casing 3 Drive shaft flange
2 Self-locking differential 4 Wheel hubs
The axle consists of the differential with the tapered gear and self-locking
differential 2, as well as the planetary drive in the wheel hub 4. The wheel hub
also contains the service brake, which is a wet disc brake. The axle casing 1
contains the tapered roller bearing for the wheel hubs.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Cross-section of the wheel hub

1 Retaining pin 11 Screw for measuring wear on
2 Cover the brake discs
3 M75x1.5 grooved nut 12 Brake discs
4 O-ring 13 Ring gear
5 Wheel flange 14 Planetary gear
6 Brake piston return springs 15 Planetary carrier
7 Sealing ring 16 Sun gear shaft
8 Brake housing 17 Axle casing housing
9 Brake piston seals 18 Oil drain plug
10 Brake piston
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Sectional view of the differential

1 Half shaft 8 Axle tapered gear
2 Axle shaft housing 9 Compensation axle
3 Housing cover 10 Axle input shaft
4 Differential housing 11 Drive flange
5 Bevel gear 12 Shaft seal ring
6 Pressure rings 13 Dust protection ring
7 Compensating tapered gear
Basic function
These are the basic functions of the axle:
Increasing and transferring the drive torque
Transferring the vertical device forces to the wheels
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The gear output torque is transmitted via the drive shaft to the axle input
shaft. The torque is increased to the wheel torque by the ratio of the tapered
gear in the differential housing and that of the planetary drives in the wheel
hubs. The input speed is reduced to the wheel speed accordingly.
The vertical operating load of the machine is transmitted from the rear section
via the screwed connection to the axle casing. The axle casing transmits this
load to the wheel hubs so that the machine is supported by the wheels.

1 Axle input shaft 6 Pressure rings
2 Crown wheel 7 Compensation axle
3 Differential housing 8 Compensating tapered gear
4 Output shafts 9 Disc brakes
5 Axle tapered gear
Speed balance of the left and right wheels

When turning a corner, the left and right wheels cover different distances.
The speeds of the two wheels are then different. The correct speed for each
wheel is induced by the rolling condition.
The axle input shaft 1 determines the average speed of the two power take-
off shafts 4 via the crown wheel 2. The crown wheel drives the differential
housing 3 and thus the four facing compensation tapered gears 8 of the
differential. These rest on the tooth faces of the adjacent axle tapered gears
5 and thus drive the output shafts 4. The compensation tapered gears 8
have a balancing function and turn about their own axes to compensate for
various wheel torques. The speed reduction of one wheel is compensated by
the increased speed of the other wheel.
The spreading force is generated by the transfer of the differential torque
from the two pressure rings 6 to the compensation axles 7, which are loosely
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
guided on diagonal surfaces. It produces a load-dependent locking torque in

the disc brakes, which is always in equal proportion to the input torque. This
ratio, expressed as a percentage, is called the locking value.
Self-locking function
The disc brakes 9 on the left and right of the axle tapered gears 5 counteract
the relative movement between the axle tapered gear 5 and the differential
housing 3 with a braking force proportional to the rotary speed. This braking
torque has a blocking action and increases the torque on the side with a firm
hold on the ground. The braking torque thus compensates for the insufficient
support from the side with poor hold.
The disc brake consists of outer discs which are mounted in the differential
housing and of non-twisting inner discs linked to the axle tapered gears.
Service brake function
Sectional view of the wheel hub

1 Wheel flange 6 Screw for measuring wear on
2 Brake housing the brake discs
3 Brake piston 7 Brake piston guide pin
4 Brake piston seals 8 Brake discs
5 Brake piston return springs 9 Ring gear
10 Planetary carrier
The service brake is a wet disc brake fitted in the wheel hubs. When
pressure oil acts on the brake piston 3 the outer and inner discs 8 press
against the limit stop of the ring gear 9. The inner discs mesh with the
planetary carrier 10 so that they cannot slip. The outer discs mesh with the
brake housing 2 and remain stationary. When the discs press together, the
wheel torque is taken up by the brake housing.
When it is not actuated, the brake piston 3 is held back by the return springs 5.
The brake discs lose contact and the drag torque is minimised.
Wheel fastening
The wheels are fastened onto the flanges of the wheel hubs by wheel nuts.
They are centred by the spherical collar nuts.
Axle lubrication
The axle has a shared oil system. This means the oil chambers in the
differential and the wheel hubs are connected. Oil drain plugs are fitted on
the wheel hubs and differential housing.
The differential and the wheel hubs are always filled and the level checked
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
using the filler screw on the differential housing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Axles L580 2plus2
12.2 Axles L580 2plus2

Valid for: L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the axle

1 Self-locking differential 3 Wheel hub
2 Axle casing
The axle consists of the differential with the tapered gear and self-locking
differential 1, as well as the planetary drive in the wheel hub 3. The wheel
hub also contains the service brake, which is a wet disc brake. The axle
casing 2 contains the tapered roller bearing for the wheel hubs.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171 Copyright by 12.2-1 o f 6

MJFCIFSS
Axles L580 2plus2
Cross-section of the wheel hub

1 Ring gear 6 Sun gear 11 Axle
2 Planetary gear 7 Press plate 12 Axle casing
3 Planetary pinion / cover 8 Hub 13 Seal holder
4 Planetary bearing 10 Double seal ring with supports
5 Thrust washer and O-rings
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
12.2-2 o f 6 Copyright by L580 - 459 / from 14171

MJFCIFSS
Axles L580 2plus2

1 Groove nut 8 Seal screw 15 Pressure disc
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
2 Shims 9 Axle tapered gears 16 V sealing ring

3 Housing cover 10 Brake discs 17 Tapered gear nut
4 Differential holder 11 Central element 18 Drive flange
5 Differential housing 12 Bevel gear 19 Seal cartridge
6 Crown wheel 13 Tapered gear seal 20 O-ring
7 Pressure ring 14 Grease seal 21 Wear sleeve

MJFCIFSS
Axles L580 2plus2
Basic function
These are the basic functions of the axle:
Increasing and transferring the drive torque
Transferring the vertical device forces to the wheels
The gear output torque is transmitted via the drive shaft to the axle input
shaft. The torque is increased to the wheel torque by the ratio of the tapered
gear in the differential housing and that of the planetary drives in the wheel
hubs. The input speed is reduced to the wheel speed accordingly.
The vertical operating load of the machine is transmitted from the rear section
via the screwed connection to the axle casing. The axle casing transmits this
load to the wheel hubs so that the machine is supported by the wheels.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007

MJFCIFSS
Axles L580 2plus2
1 Axle input shaft 6 Compensating tapered gear

2 Differential housing 7 Brake discs
3 Crown wheel 8 Axle tapered gears
4 Pressure ring 9 Bevel gear
5 Compensation axle
Speed balance of the left and right wheels

When turning a corner, the left and right wheels cover different distances.
The speeds of the two wheels are then different. The correct speed for each
wheel is induced by the rolling condition.
The axle input shaft 1 determines the average speed of the two power take-
off shafts 1 via the crown wheel 3. The crown wheel drives the differential
housing 2 and thus the four facing compensation tapered gears 6 of the
differential. These rest on the tooth faces of the adjacent axle tapered gears
8 and thus drive the output shafts 1. The compensation tapered gears 6
have a balancing function and turn about their own axes to compensate for
various wheel torques. The speed reduction of one wheel is compensated by
the increased speed of the other wheel.
Self-locking function
The disc brakes 7 on the left and right of the axle tapered gears 8 counteract
the relative movement between the axle tapered gear 8 and the differential
housing 2 with a braking force proportional to the rotary speed. This braking
torque has a blocking action and increases the torque on the side with a firm
hold on the ground. The braking torque thus compensates for the insufficient
support from the side with poor hold.
The disc brake consists of outer discs which are mounted in the differential
housing and of non-twisting inner discs linked to the axle tapered gears. The
spreading force is generated by the transfer of the differential torque from
the two pressure rings 4 to the compensation axles 5, which are loosely
guided on diagonal surfaces. It produces a load-dependent locking torque in
the disc brakes, which is always in equal proportion to the input torque. This
ratio, expressed as a percentage, is called the locking value.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007

MJFCIFSS
Axles L580 2plus2
Service brake function
Sectional view of the wheel hub

1 Axle housing 4 Inner discs
2 Plug 5 Return springs
3 Retainer plate / outer discs 6 Brake piston
The service brake is a wet disc brake fitted in the axle casing. When
pressure oil acts on the brake piston 6 the outer discs 3 and inner discs 4
press against the retainer plate 3. The inner discs mesh with the axle and
turn along at high speed with the drive shaft. The outer discs 3 mesh with
the axle housing 1 and remain stationary. When the discs press together,
the wheel torque, reduced by the ratio of the planetary final drive, is taken up
by the axle housing.
When it is not actuated, the return springs 5 push back the brake piston 6.
The brake discs lose contact and the braking torque is minimised.
Wheel fastening
The wheels are fastened onto the flanges of the wheel hubs by wheel nuts
with rotating cups.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Axle lubrication
The axle has a shared oil system. This means the oil chambers in the
differential and the wheel hubs are connected. Oil filler and drain plugs are
fitted on the wheel hubs and differential housing.

MJFCIFSS
Drive shafts
12.3 Drive shafts

12.3.1 Front drive shaft
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the drive shaft

1 Flange 5 Connector tube 9 Universal joint
2 Universal joint 6 Pin driver 10 Flange
3 Shaft driver 7 Universal joint
4 Hub liner 8 Flight ring
The drive shaft has one universal joint at the output of the transmission, a uni-
versal joint at the input of the front axle and a slider to compensate the length.
Function
The drive shaft transfers the torque from the transmission to the front axle.
The universal joints at either end of the drive shaft allow it to compensate the
angle between the drive and the power take-off. The angle needs to be
compensated due to the articulated steering. The universal joint and
connector tube can be displaced axially to mesh together. This compensates
the length. Tolerances in assembly and slight movements during operation
make this necessary.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Uniformity of torque transmission

On drive shafts with simple universal joints, the connector tube between the
two universal joints rotates unevenly. This is the case whenever the
universal joint has to compensate for an angle. This occurrence is prevented
by using a double cardan shaft. The connector tube turns evenly.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Drive shafts
12.3.2 Rear drive shaft
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the drive shaft

1 Flange 4 Hub liner 7 Universal joint
2 Universal joint 5 Connector tube 8 Flange
3 Shaft driver 6 Pin driver
The drive shaft is equipped with two universal joints and a slider.
Function
The drive shaft transfers the torque from the transmission to the rear axle.
The universal joints at either end of the drive shaft allow it to compensate the
angle between the drive and the power take-off. The universal joint and
connector tube can be displaced axially to mesh together.
This compensates the length. Tolerances in assembly and slight movements
during operation make this necessary.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
13 Machine frame, Ballast
weight
13.0
Chapter contents
13 Machine frame, Ballast weight .......................................... 13.0-1
13.1 Machine frame ..............................................................................13.1-1
13.2 Articulation bearing .......................................................................13.2-1
13.3 Oscillating axle mount...................................................................13.3-1
13.4 Articulation lock.............................................................................13.4-1
13.5 Ballast weight................................................................................13.5-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Machine frame, Ballast weight Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service Manual Machine frame, Ballast weight
Machine frame
13.1 Machine frame

Design
The machine frame consists of the front section and the rear section. These
are connected by the articulation bearing.
Main components of the machine frame

1 Front section 3 Oscillating bearing 4 Articulation bearing
2 Rear section
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
The machine frame transfers the forces of the lift arms to the axles. The
frame carries all the most important components of the machine, such as the
engine, cab and transmission.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Machine frame
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Articulation bearing
13.2 Articulation bearing

Design
The articulation bearing is installed between the front and rear sections.
Location of the articulation bearing

1 Front section 2 Rear section 3 Articulation bearing
Main components of the articulation bearing

1 Pressure flange 6 Swivel bearing
2 Cylinder screw 7 Cone tension element
3 Bushing 8 Shaft seal ring
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
4 Bearing cover 9 Cylinder screw

5 Shims 10 Bearing pin
Basic function
The articulation bearing connects the front and rear sections. It allows
steering of the machine by articulating the machine frame to the left or right.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Articulation bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Oscillating bearing
13.3 Oscillating axle mount

Design
The oscillating axle mount is installed between the front and rear sections.
Location of the oscillating axle mount

1 Front section 3 Oscillating bearing 4 Oscillating axle frame
2 Rear section
Main components of the oscillating axle mount

1 Pressure flange 6 Swivel bearing
2 Cylinder screw 7 Cone tension element
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
3 Bushing 8 Shaft seal ring

4 Bearing cover 9 Cylinder screw
5 Shims 10 Bearing pin
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Oscillating bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Articulation lock
13.4 Articulation lock

Design
The articulation lock is fitted between the front and rear sections.
Articulation lock
1 Locking bar 3 Spring clip
2 Pin
Basic function
The articulation lock arrests the articulated joint of the machine. This means
the steering is blocked, for example when transporting the machine.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Articulation lock
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Ballast weight
13.5 Ballast weight

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The ballast weight consist of two parts. They are bolted on the left and right
sides on the back of the rear section.
Ballast weight layout

1 Left rear section 2 Right rear section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Ballast weight
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
14 Central lubrification system
14.0
Chapter contents
14 Central lubrification system ............................................... 14.0-1
14.1 Manual central lubrication.............................................................14.1-1
14.2 LIEBHERR automatic central lubrication system (optional) .........14.2-1

14.2.1 Central lubrication pump EP-1 ...........................................14.2-4
14.2.2 Progressive distributor MX-F..............................................14.2-5
14.2.3 Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 and operation ....14.2-8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Central lubrification system Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Central lubrification system
Manual central lubrication
14.1 Manual central lubrication

Design
Lubricating rail on the front section

1 Lift arms, top left 4 Tilt cylinder, bottom
2 Lift arms, top right 5 Right steering cylinder, base end
3 Tilt cylinder, top 6 Left steering cylinder, base end
Lubricating rail on the rear section

1 Oscillating axle frame, front 3 Right steering cylinder, rod end
2 Oscillating axle frame, rear
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Basic function
The two central lubricating rails are for lubricating points which are difficult
to access.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Manual central lubrication
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Automatic central lubrication system
14.2 LIEBHERR automatic central

lubrication system (optional)
Design
Components of the central lubrication system

1 Central lubrication pump 8 Grease fitting for manual
2 Rapid fill coupling lubrication
3 Agitator 9 Main supply line
4 Transparent reservoir 10 Main progressive distributor MX-F
5 Level sensor connection 11 Secondary progressive distributor
6 Grease fitting 12 Lubricant supply lines
7 Pressure relief valve 13 Lubrication points
The central lubrication pump is located under the left cab access.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The distributors are arranged centrally to the respective lubrication points.

The central lubrication pump and the progressive distributors provide the
specified quantity of grease to the connected lubrication points.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Overview of lubrication points

1 Central lubrication pump 3 Main progressive distributor 5 6x secondary
2 Inductive switch for 4 6x secondary progressive distributor
lubrication cycles progressive distributor
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Overview of lubrication points

1 Central lubrication pump 3 Main progressive distributor 5 6x secondary
2 Inductive switch for 4 6x secondary progressive distributor
lubrication cycles progressive distributor
Progressive lubrication
The automatic central lubrication system is a progressive system. It
lubricates progressively, i.e. all lubricating points in succession.
The main distributor is fitted with an inductive switch, which signals the
lubrication cycles to the main electronics (master).
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Overall system
The electrically powered central lubrication pump pumps the grease to the
main progressive distributor, which distributes it to the secondary progres-
sive distributors. The secondary progressive distributors pump the grease to
the lubrication points. The main electronics (master) control the lubrications
cycles and pauses of the central lubrication pump.
Safety function
The pressure relief valve on the central lubrication pump monitors lubri-
cation. If a lubrication point receives no grease from the distributor, the
progressive distributor is blocked. The pressure in the central lubricating
system increases. If the pressure rises above the permitted limit, grease
escapes from the pressure relief valve. During this time, there are no
impulses (lubrication cycles) for the main electronics (master).
L566 - 460 / from 14171
If the lubrication cycles are not performed in a specified time, the main
electronics (master) switch off the lubrication system. The driver is notified
by the flashing LEDs on the central lubrication button and a service code.
14.2.1 Central lubrication pump EP-1
Technical data
See section 2.1
Central lubrication pump EP-1

1 DC motor 7 Strainer
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2 Pump housing 8 Transfer piston

3 Cam 9 Check valve
4 Level sensor (inductive) 10 Pressure relief valve
5 Transparent reservoir 11 Pressure ring
6 Agitator
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Pump action
A DC motor 1 continually drives the cam 3 with a pressure ring 11.
The cam raises and lowers the transfer piston 8. This provides the suction and
pumping action of the transfer piston. The built-in check valve 9 prevents the
pumped medium from being sucked back out of the main supply line.
The agitator 6 pushes the lubricant out of the transparent reservoir 5 through
a strainer 7 to the pump housing 2. This eliminates air bubbles in the grease.
Checking the grease quantity

When all three LEDs on the central lubrication button light up, there is
insufficient grease. This condition is reported by the level sensor.
The reservoir is a transparent cylinder, in which the rubber stripper on the
agitator can be seen. This allows you to check the grease level.
Filling
The reservoir can be filled via the tapered grease fitting using a standard
lubrication pump or via the rapid fill coupling using the grease gun.
Safety function
The pressure relief valve 10, which is set to 280 bar, prevents excess pressure
in the line system.
14.2.2 Progressive distributor MX-F
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The progressive distributors are manufactured with variable discs. The
advantage of this is that the distributors can be extended or reduced according
to the number of lubrication points.
The flow per stroke depends on the piston diameter. The progressive
distributor needs at least three pumping elements in order to work properly.
The distributors must always be installed horizontally.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Main progressive distributor

1 Start element 4 Middle element
2 Middle element with actuator 5 Inductive switch for
piston and inductive switch for lubrication cycles
lubrication cycles 6 Inductive switch LED
3 Inductive switch housing 7 End element
Secondary progressive distributor

1 Start element (without piston) 4 Connecting line
2 Middle element with 5 Dummy plug
flow engraved 6 End element
3 Screw connection
Linkage with gears connects the elements to the distributor blocks.
O-rings are installed as seals between the elements.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Basic function
Piston positions of the progressive distributor MX-F

A - C Piston positions I - III Pistons 1 - 6 Grease duct outlets
The progressive distributors act hydraulically and distribute the lubricant in
series to each outlet.
The lubricant flows via the entrance of the distributor through all the
distributor discs to the piston I (piston position A). The piston pushes to the
left and presses the lubricant out of the left pressure chamber of the piston
to the outlet 1 (piston position B). Pistons II and III then pump the lubricant to
the outlets 2 and 3.
After piston III moves, the lubricant flows to the left side of piston I (piston
position C). The piston I pushes to the right and presses the lubricant out of
the right pressure chamber of the piston to the outlet 4.
Pistons II and III then pump the lubricant to the outlets 5 and 6.
After piston II moves, the lubricant again flows to the right side of piston I
(piston position A) and a new cycle of the progressive distributor begins.
This function is repeated as long as lubricant is pumped to the distributor.
Malfunctions
Malfunctions can occur in the lubricant lines or inside the distributor.
Malfunctions include:
Clogged lubricant lines
Twisted bearing casings
These prevent the flow of lubricant, and thus block the distributors.
When the distributor is blocked, lubricant flows out of the pressure relief
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
valve on the central lubrication pump.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
14.2.3 Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 and operation
Technical data
See section 2.1
Basic function
The central lubrication pump EP-1 is regulated by the main electronics (master).
It is operated via CAN bus from the control unit to the main electronics
(master) and output module 1 A17a.
The feedback from the grease level sensor 2 and the lubrication cycle
inductive switch 9 comes via the input module 2 A16b to the main
electronics (master).
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Central lubrication system control

1 Central lubrication pump 6Power supply from fuse F53
2 Grease level sensor 7Output module 1 A17a
3 Central lubrication button 8Input module 2 A16b
and LEDs 9Inductive switch for lubrica-
4 CAN bus connections tion cycles
5 Main electronics (master) 10 Central lubrication pump
power supply
If the ignition is switched off or the parking brake is engaged, the main
electronics (master) stop lubrication. The remaining cycles are stored and after
the engine is started or the parking brake released, lubrication is continued at
the point where it was interrupted.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Non-scheduled lubrication intensity (cycle settings)

The following settings can be made with the central lubrication button:
Press briefly for less than 2 seconds: non-schedule lubrication
Hold down for more than 2 seconds: set lubrication intensity 75%,
100%, 125%
The LEDs show the following states when the ignition is switched on.
LED 1 - 75% lubrication (light-duty operation)
LED 2 - 100% lubrication (medium-duty operation)
LED 3 - 125% lubrication (heavy-duty operation)
LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 flash & service code system fault
LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 light up grease has reached minimum level
LED 1 or 2 or 3 flashes indicates lubrication intensity during operation:
75 / 100 / 125%
Adjusting the lubrication intensity

Press the central lubrication button for more than 2 seconds to switch to
setting mode.
With each further press of the button, the mode is switch up one level; after
the highest mode it returns to the first. 75% - 100% - 125% - 75%.....
Non-scheduled lubrication
Using the central lubrication system button, you can perform non-scheduled
lubrication at any time when the ignition is switched on, even when the
parking brake is engaged (with the set lubrication and cycle time).
The pump motor switches off after the set number of cycles and the set
cycle time begins.
Lubrication sequences
A Lubrication (cycles) 2 Medium-duty lubrication 3 Heavy-duty lubrication sequence
1 Light-duty lubrication sequence sequence
Fault in the system (cycle error)

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The cycles are checked with a set time.

Each completed cycle resets this time. If there is no cycle within the set time, the
system is stopped LEDs 1, 2 and 3 flash and the service code E2017 appears.
Grease reservoir level too low

The LEDs in the central lubrication button light up if the grease supply in the
reservoir falls too low.
The all three LEDs stay on until the grease is topped up.
The driver can also check the grease level by looking at the reservoir.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Filling the reservoir

The tapered grease fitting 3 can be used to fill the reservoir.
For fast filling, the rapid filler pump 1 on coupling 2 can be used.
Fast filling with cartridge

1 Rapid filler pump 2 Quick coupling
3 Grease fitting
Grease specifications: see the section on lubricants and fuels in the mainte-
nance chapter.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
15 Covering, access
15.0
Chapter contents
15 Covering, access............................................................... 15.0-1
15.1 Coverings......................................................................................15.1-1
15.2 Cab access ...................................................................................15.2-1

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Covering, access Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service Manual Covering, access
Covering
15.1 Covering
Design
Covering components
1 Front left and right mud guards 4 Engine hood 7 Front lower covering
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
2 Cooler hood 5 Rear section 8 Plastic lid

3 Rear left and right mud guards 6 Rear lower covering
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Covering
Front mud guard

1 Front mud guard 2 Front section
The two front mud guards 1 are each fastened with three bolts to the front
section 2.
Rear mud guard

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
1 Rear right mud guard 3 Rear left mud guard

2 Rear section
The two rear mud guards 1 and 3 are each fastened with two bolts to the
access, the rear section 2 and the ballast weight.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Covering
Engine hood and rear section

1 Cooler support 4 Rear section
2 Engine hood 5 Cooler panel
3 Rear cover
The engine hood 2 is fastened to the cooler support 1 with two screws. The
hood can be lifted up with the aid of two gas-filled springs. The rear cover 3
is fastened to the rear section of the machine 4 with four bolts.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Rear lower covering

1 Rear section 3 Hinge
2 Cover
The cover 2 is fastened to the underside of the rear section 1 with four bolts
and can be opened downward via the hinge 3.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Covering
Front lower covering

1 Cover 3 Hinge
2 Rear section
The cover 1 is fastened to the underside of the rear section 2 with four bolts
and can be opened downward via the hinge 3.
Cooler hood
1 Cooler hood 3 Cooler panel
2 Cooler support
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The cooler hood 1 is fastened with one bolt each to the cooler support 2 and
the cooler panel 3.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Covering
Cover
1 Plastic lid 2 Front section
The plastic lid 1 is fastened with four bolts to the front of the front section 2.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Covering
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cab access
15.2 Cab access

The handrails on the cab access help you get in and out of the cab and
protect you from falling off.
Design
Cab access
1 Cab access 3 Cab access handrail
2 Tool box 4 Wheel box handrail
The left side of the cab access 1 is fastened to the rear section with three
bolts. The bottom rung is connected by two rubber brackets to the access. The
underside of the cab access is designed to leave space for the input and out-
put modules, and for the electric central lubrication pump (special equipment).
A toolbox 2 is welded between the steps.
The handrails 3 are each fastened to the access and wheel box with
four screws.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cab access
Access and exit aids

1 Wheel box handrail 3 Cab access handrail
2 Cab access
The cab access is fastened to the rear section with three bolts. The wheel
box handrail is fastened with two bolts each to the access and rear mud
guard. The cab access handrail is fastened to cab access with two bolts.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
16 Cab, heating, air conditioning
16.0
Chapter contents
16 Cab, heating, air conditioning............................................ 16.0-1
16.0.1 Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................16.0-1
16.1 Instrument panel ...........................................................................16.1-1

16.1.1 Display unit A13..................................................................16.1-1
16.1.2 Control units A11, A18 and A22 .........................................16.1-4
16.1.3 Main function control unit (CAN bus) A11 ..........................16.1-5
16.1.4 Air conditioning control unit (CAN bus) A22 .......................16.1-6
16.1.5 Option control unit (CAN bus) A19 .....................................16.1-6
16.1.6 Electrical control unit A18 ...................................................16.1-8
16.1.7 LIEBHERR control lever ...................................................16.1-11
16.2 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning.............................................16.2-1

16.2.1 Heating/air conditioning unit ...............................................16.2-2
16.2.2 Blower.................................................................................16.2-3
16.3 Air conditioning system.................................................................16.3-1

16.3.1 Air conditioning compressor ...............................................16.3-4
16.3.2 Condenser ..........................................................................16.3-5
16.3.3 Dryer collector unit..............................................................16.3-6
16.3.4 Pressure switch ..................................................................16.3-8
16.3.5 Evaporator ..........................................................................16.3-9
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cab, heating, air conditioning Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Cab, heating, air conditioning
16.0.1 Cab, heating and air-conditioning
Design
The cab is a safety cab which has been tested and approved according to the
ROPS/FOPS specifications. It is elastically supported on the rear section.
The cab is equipped with heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
The cab can be accessed from the left side of the machine via the steps and
the door.
The right window can be used as an exit in emergencies.
View of driver's cab

1 Radio speaker 10 Steering column adjustment lever 19 Socket/cigarette lighter
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2 Sun visor 11 Gas pedal angle sensor 20 Ashtray

3 Interior lights with switch 12 Adjustable LH control lever panel 21 Ignition switch
4 Interior mirror 13 Display unit 22 Adjustable arm rest
5 Radio compartment 14 LIEBHERR control lever 23 Mechanical service hours counter
6 Heater/ventilation/air-conditio- 15 Panel adjustment pedal 24 Diagnostic plug
ning outlet nozzles (9 in total) 16 Window opener lever 25 Glove compartment
7 Inch/brake pedal with 17 Control lever fitting for optional 26 Fuse box
angle sensor working functions 27 Drivers seat
8 Steering column switch 18 Right control panel with
9 Adjustable steering column with control units
steering wheel
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Driver's cab, outside view from right

1 Right side of cab 4 Air conditioning system
2 Fresh air filter expansion valve
3 Heating and air- 5 Heater water connections
conditioning housing 6 Valve and water valve
control motors
ROPS/FOPS strength
The driver's cab complies with the ROPS/FOPS regulations.
ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) takes into account mechanical rigidity
in the event of the machine rolling over.
FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) governs the rigidity of the cab
when object fall onto it.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Instrument panel
16.1 Instrument panel

All important operating, display and control elements are arranged ergono-
mically on the instrument panel.
The display unit 2, which indicates the operating condition of the wheel
loader, is located in the upper field of view, slightly to the right of centre.
The LH control lever is in a separate console, which can be adjusted back
and forth using a foot pedal.
The controls are arranged in the right-hand control panel.
The fuses are on the left behind the drivers seat.
Design
Instrument panel
1 Electrical control unit A18 4 Additional functions control unit
2 Main control unit CAN bus A11 CAN bus (optional) A19
3 Air conditioning control unit CAN 5 Switch for additional options
bus A22
16.1.1 Display unit A13

The display unit A13 is on the front right A pillar.
Design
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
The display unit A13 consists of:

LCD indicators
Symbol fields
Segment displays
The LCD display 21 contains segment displays for:
Clock
Service codes
Engine speed
Service hours
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Instrument panel
The LCD display 26 contains segment displays for:

Tractive force adjustment
Current travel range
Symbol fields for:
Warning messages
Travel direction
Travel ranges
Segment fields for:
Fuel supply
Engine oil pressure
Coolant temperature
Travel speed
Each symbol field is either red, yellow, green or orange.
The 9-pin plug connector for communication with the electronic controller A1
(CPU) is attached to the rear.
Display unit A13

1 Travel speed display P6 19 Air filter contamination symbol field H7
2 Emergency steering check symbol field H24 20 Preglow monitor symbol field H2
3 Emergency steering symbol field H8 21 Segment display for engine speed, time, operating
4 Brake system accumulator pressure symbol field H19 hours segment and service codes P7
5 Joystick steering symbol field H27 22 Battery charge control symbol field H6
6 Gear oil overheating symbol field H14 23 High beam symbol field H12
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
7 Forward travel direction symbol field H3 24 Direction indicator symbol field H10
8 Working hydraulics lockout symbol field H5 25 Stop symbol field H36
9 Reverse travel direction symbol field H9 26 Display for tractive force adjustment, current travel
10 Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field H23 range, fan reversal H37
11 Automatic travel range 2-3 symbol field H35 27 Overspeed protection indicator H38
12 Automatic travel range 1-3 symbol field H34 28 Fuel supply symbol field H1
13 Automatic travel range 1-2 symbol field H33 29 Fuel supply display P2
14 Fixed gear 2 symbol field H31 30 Engine overheating and coolant level symbol field H13
15 Fixed gear 1 symbol field H30 31 Coolant temperature display P3
16 Tempomat T symbol field H29 32 Engine oil pressure symbol field H4
17 Neutral position N symbol field H32 33 Engine oil pressure display P5
18 Parking brake symbol field H11
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector A13.X1 SUB-D / 9-pin male (communication with master electronics A15)
1 Earth 6 Earth
2 +24 V power supply 7 Unassigned
3 CAN bus CAN_L 8 +5 V terminal 1
4 CAN bus CAN_H 9 Indicator signal
5 +5 V power supply
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Instrument panel
16.1.2 Control units A11, A18 and A22

The control units A11, A18, A19 (optional) and A22 are fitted in the instrument
panel on the right.
Design
The controls consist of the following units:
Electric control unit A18 - controlled via digital connection
Main function control unit A11 - controlled via a CAN bus
Air conditioning control unit A22 - controlled via a CAN bus
Option control unit A19 - controlled via a CAN bus. With strip inserts to show
the various symbols.
Backlit membrane keypads with buttons (function symbol and LEDs)
Control unit A11

1 Electric control unit A18 - controlled via 21 Increase fan speed button S38
digital connection 22 Temperature down button S40
2 Hazard warning system button S4 23 Decrease fan speed button S34
3 Parking light/driving light button S6 24 Temperature up button S39
4 Flashing beacon button S9 25 Defrost button S47
5 Front/rear working floodlights button S8 26 Fresh/circulated air button S44
6 Rear window heater button S55 27 Central lubrication system button (optional) S50
7 Rear windshield wiper and washer system button S13 28 Tempomat button S29
10 Main function control unit A11 - controlled via a 29 Emergency steering button S10
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
CAN bus 30 Lift kick-out button S22

11 Parking brake button S17 31 Float position button S18
12 Ride control (LFD system) button S16 40 Air conditioning control unit A22 - controlled via a
13 Working hydraulics lockout button S19 CAN bus
14 Bucket return-to-dig button S14 41 Blower duct selector button (footwell) S41
15 Travel range up button S27 42 Blower duct selector button (head area) S43
16 Travel range down button S28 43 Blower duct selector button (middle area) S42
17 Increase tractive force button S32 44 Air conditioning ECO mode button S45
18 Reduce tractive force button S33 45 Air conditioning auto mode button S46
19 Engine speed, clock and service hours button S30 46 Spare button S??
20 Display unit brightness control button S31
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Instrument panel
Basic function
The control units operate the various machine functions.
The control units are connected via CAN bus and digitally to the main
electronics (master) A15 and the relay and fuse board A4.
The control unit A18 works as soon as the main switch is turned on (terminal
30). The buttons and switches can be programmed.
The control units A11, A19 (optional) and A22 work when the ignition is turned
on (terminal 15). The control units must be set to the correct CAN bus address.
Function test
When the ignition is turned on, all the LEDs light up for the duration of the test.
If there is a fault or failure in a module (CAN bus module) the LEDs remain lit
after the test (safety-critical condition). In this case, the system cannot be
started up.
(See section 10.1.3 on the main electronics (master) A15).
16.1.3 Main function control unit (CAN bus) A11
The main function control unit A11 is connected via CAN bus to the main
electronics (master) A15.
The main function control unit A11 works as soon as the ignition is turned on
(terminal 15).
When a button is pressed, a signal is sent via CAN bus to the main electro-
nics (master) A15.
The buttons have LEDs, which can signal the following conditions:
All three LEDs on or off button with switch function
All three LEDs only light up when the button is pressed button with
push function
The LEDs go on or off individually each time the button is pressed button
with control function
The functions of each button are described in the operating manual for each
machine: Operating the control units.
Function test
When the ignition is turned on, all the LEDs light up for the duration of the test.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
If there is a fault or failure in a module (CAN bus module) the LEDs remain lit
after the test (safety-critical condition). In this case, the system cannot be
started up.
(See section 10.1.3 on the main electronics (master) A15).
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector A11/X1 Deutsch / 12-pin male (communication with main electronics (master) A15
1 +24 V power supply F71 6 Earth (connected to pin 2)
(connected to pin 5) 7 CAN bus CAN_High 2
2 Earth (connected to pin 6) 8 CAN bus CAN_Low 2
3 CAN bus CAN_High 1 9 Terminating resistor
4 CAN bus CAN_Low 1 10 Unassigned
5 +24 V power supply (connected 11 Unassigned
to pin 1) 12 Unassigned
16.1.4 Air conditioning control unit (CAN bus) A22
The heating and air conditioning control unit A22 is connected via CAN bus
to the main electronics (master) A15.
The air conditioning control unit A22 works as soon as the ignition is turned
on (terminal 15).
nics (master) A15.
push function
Plug assignment
Connector A22/X1 Deutsch / 12-pin male (electrical function control)
1 Data input F71 7 CAN_High 2
2 Earth 8 CAN_Low 2
3 CAN_High 1 9 120 terminating resistor
4 CAN_Low 1 10 Unassigned
(terminal 15) - F09 12 Unassigned
6 Unassigned
16.1.5 Option control unit (CAN bus) A19

LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
The option control unit A19 is connected via CAN bus to the main electronics
(master) A15.
The option control unit A19 works as soon as the ignition is turned on
(terminal 15).
nics (master) A15.
push function
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Instrument panel
NOTE: when replacing or installing a new option control unit A19, it must
be addressed.
Plug assignment
1 Data input F71 7 CAN_High 2
2 Earth 8 CAN_Low 2
3 CAN_High 1 9 120 terminating resistor
4 CAN_Low 1 10 Unassigned
(terminal 15) - F09 12 Unassigned
6 Unassigned
Addressing a control unit

The control unit must be addressed after it is installed.
Connect the control unit
On the main electronics (master), unplug the PWR_X power supply
connector or remove fuses F35 and F54
Press buttons 1, 2 and 3
Switch on the ignition and keep buttons pressed until the LEDs
start flashing
The LEDs in button 1 show the 100s (1x = 100, 2x = 200)
Example: 9x LEDs in button 2, 3x LEDs in button 3 = 93
The LEDs in all three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the
number display.
Changing the address:
Press button 3 once to increase the current address number by 1.
Option control unit A19
The option control unit A19 has five selectable addresses. After you reach
the highest address by pressing button 3 the control unit returns to the
lowest address.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Addressing the control units:

Setting after Status
Component Address
replacement function
Main function control
97 No Yes
unit A11
Air conditioning control
93 No No
unit A22
Option control unit A19 94 Yes No
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Instrument panel
16.1.6 Electrical control unit A18
The electric control unit A18 is digitally connected to the relay and fuse
board A4.
When a button is pressed, a digital signal is generated and the relays or
solenoid valves are actuated.
The LEDs are arranged on the buttons as shown. In the direction of travel,
LED 1 at the front, LED 2 in the middle and LED 3 at the back.
When a function is activated, the status is shown by one or more of the LEDs.
Each button has seven function (modes), which can be set as required.
Setting the button functions

The mode can be set independently for the buttons/outputs 2 to 6.
Electrical control unit A18 Activating the mode setting

To go to the mode setting function, the following conditions must be met:
The three buttons 2, 4 and 6 must be simultaneously pressed.
The ignition (terminal 15) must be turned on and the three buttons 2, 4 and 6
pressed for at least 5 seconds.
After mode setting is activated, the LEDs in the assigned buttons should
indicate the modes currently used.
When the keypad is in mode setting mode, all outputs are deactivated
(and remain so until normal mode is restored).
The following standard settings are shown (without options):
Button Mode LED 1 LED 2 LED 3

4 - cannot
1 ON OFF OFF
be changed
2 4 ON OFF OFF
3 5 ON OFF ON
4 4 ON OFF OFF
5 3 OFF ON ON
6 1 OFF OFF ON
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Instrument panel
The following settings are possible:

Function Action when Action when
Mode Description available with terminal 15 is terminal 15 is
terminal 30 turned off turned on
Switches the output OFF when the ignition
1 is turned off, always OFF when the ignition NO OFF OFF
is turned on
Switches the output OFF when the ignition
2 is turned off, always ON when the ignition NO OFF ON
is turned on
Restore state
3 Act as normal switch to terminal 15 NO OFF when terminal 15 is
turned off
No reaction (terminal No reaction (terminal
4 Act as latching switch to terminal 30 YES
15 state remains) 30 state remains)
Switches output OFF when ignition is
turned off, function available with terminal No reaction (terminal
5 YES OFF
30, retains terminal 30 status when ignition 30 state remains)
is turned on
6 turned off, function available with terminal YES OFF ON
30, always ON ignition is turned on
Restore state
turned off, function available with terminal
7 YES OFF when terminal 15 is
30, restores switch-off state when ignition
turned off
is turned on
Press the button to switch the current mode (increase number by one,
return to lowest number after highest). The LEDs immediately indicate the
altered mode.
After a button is pressed to change the mode, the new configuration is im-
mediately stored in the EEPROM. If no button is pressed within 30 seconds
or terminal 15 is switched off, the keypad returns to normal mode.
The settings are indicated as follows:
Mode LED 1 LED 2 LED 3

1 OFF OFF ON
2 OFF ON OFF
3 OFF ON ON
4 ON OFF OFF
5 ON OFF ON
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
6 ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
1 +24 V power supply 7 CAN_High 2 (not used)
(terminal 15) - F71 8 CAN_Low 2 (not used)
2 Earth 9 120 terminating resistor
3 CAN_High 1 (not used) 10 Switching output (hazard lights)
4 CAN_Low 1 (not used) 11 Switching output
5 +24 V power supply (flashing beacon)
(terminal 30) - F07 12 Switching output
6 Digital input (flashing frequency) (windscreen wipers)
1 Switching output (rear washer 4 Switching output (low beam)

pump) 5 Switching output (front working
2 Switching output (heated rear floodlight)
window/mirror) 6 Switching output (rear
3 Switching output (parking light) working floodlight)
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Instrument panel
16.1.7 LIEBHERR control lever

The LIEBHERR control lever (LH control lever) contains the switch 5 for
preselecting the travel direction, the switch 2 for the kick-down function and
the buttons 3 and 4 for additional functions.
The LH control lever also controls the movements of the working attachment
via the lift and tilt cylinders.
It is connected to the main electronics (master) via input module 1 and input
module 2.
Design
Control lever with switch

1 LH control lever 4 Additional equipment button
2 Kick-down button 5 Travel direction switch
3 Additional equipment button
Basic function
When the electrical system is switched on, the automatic travel range A1-3
is selected and the travel drive is set to neutral N.
Both are indicated by the LC display (H34) and the symbol field N (H32).
The travel direction switch 5 must be moved to neutral N after the parking
brake is released before a travel direction can be preselected.
Switching travel direction

You can switch travel direction using the button 5 on the LH control lever.
The solenoid valves for forward and reverse travel direction can only be acti-
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
vated after the parking brake is released.

The travel direction is shifted to neutral by closing the parking brake or
shifting the travel direction switch to neutral N (middle position).
Kick-down shifting
Briefly touch the Up button 2 to trigger the command to shift to 1st gear.
The gear can shift up 10 seconds after the kick-down button is released.
Additional function buttons (optional)

If an option is installed or retrofitted, the buttons 3 and 4 can be used to
operate it.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector S2 12-pin Deutsch
1 Power supply (+) F15 7 Kick-down switching signal
2 Reverse travel direction 8 Kick-down power supply (+) F9
constant signal 9 Additional equipment power
3 Reverse travel direction supply (+) F9
switching signal 10 Additional equipment switching
4 Forward travel direction signal
switching signal 11 Additional equipment power
5 Forward travel direction supply (+) F9
constant signal 12 Additional equipment
6 Earth switching signal
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning
16.2 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning

Technical data
See section 2.1
The driver's cab is equipped with a hot water heater and an air conditio-
ning system.
Optionally, automatic air conditioning is available.
The intake air is filtered through three serviceable dry filter cartridges and
directed to the adjustable air flow nozzles in the cab through the heating/air
conditioning unit.
Design
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Heater/air conditioner
1 Fresh air filter service cover 6 Heating/air conditioning unit
2 Heater/air conditioner covering 7 Driver's cab
3 Fresh air filter (pre-filter) 8 Recirculation filter
4 Fresh air intake slots 9 Circulated air filter cover
5 Fresh air filter (fine filter)
L566 - 460 / from 14171
16.2.1 Heating/air conditioning unit

The heating/air conditioning unit is housed in the right side of the cab.
Design
Heating/air conditioning unit layout

1 Servo motor for footwell nozzles 7 Heating/air conditioning blower 12 Water valve
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
2 Servo motor for middle nozzles 8 Heating/air conditioning control 13 Head area ventilation
3 Servo motor for electronics (A21) connection
windscreen/head area nozzles 9 Fresh/recirculated air flap 14 Footwell ventilation connection
4 Flap control housing 10 Fresh/recirculated air flap 15 Middle ventilation connection
5 Heat exchanger servo motor 16 Front and side window
6 Air-conditioning evaporator 11 Water valve servo motor ventilation connection
L580 - 459 / from 14171
How the heater works

The heating and air conditioning control electronics (A21) are connected via
CAN bus to the heating/air conditioning control unit.
The heat exchanger is supplied with hot water from the engine cooling system.
It is regulated using an electrically controlled water valve.
The water valve controls the heating power.
The intake air can be controlled using the fresh/recirculated air flap.
The airflow is regulated using the various blower speed levels on the heating/
air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning is in automatic mode, the speed levels are
automatically controlled by the heating/air conditioning control electronics.
Flap control
The driver can set the flaps manually as required, using the heating/air con-
ditioning control unit.
When the air conditioning is in automatic mode, the flaps are automatically
controlled by the heating/air conditioning control electronics.
16.2.2 Blower
The blower is part of the heating and ventilation unit.
Design
The blower is a 6-speed radial fan for ventilation, heating and air condi-
tioning in the cab.
Basic function
The blower sucks air (axial intake) 4 through the fresh/recirculated air
duct and blows it out of the radial outlet 5 to the evaporator and through the
heat exchanger.
The air flow is regulated by changing the blower speed.
It is operated and regulated using the air conditioning control unit. At level 0
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
the blower is switched off. Level 6 is maximum air flow.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
16.3 Air conditioning system

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the air conditioning system

1 Expansion valve 3 Compressor (with magnetic 5 Pressure switch B27
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2 Heat exchanger in the coupling Y22) 6 Dryer collector unit

heating/air conditioning unit 4 Condenser
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic cooling function
Diagram of cooling circuit

1 Air conditioning compressor 8 Heater/air conditioning a Liquid refrigerant, high pressure
2 Magnetic coupling control electronics b Liquid/gaseous refrigerant, high pressure
3 Condenser 9 Temperature sensors c Liquid/gaseous refrigerant, low pressure
4 Fan 10 Condensation tray d Gaseous refrigerant, low pressure
5 Pressure switch 11 Evaporator
6 Dryer collector unit 12 Blower
7 Sight glass 13 Expansion valve
The air conditioning compressor 1 draws in the refrigerant in gas form and
increases its energy level (pressure and thermal energy).
The heat thus generated is transferred to the condenser 3. The heat
dissipation lowers the energy potential.
The cooled refrigerant liquefies. This change of state further reduces the
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
energy in it.
The refrigerant, which still has bubbles in it, passes into the dryer collector
unit 6, where it is filtered and dried, and then, with the bubbles removed,
through the rising pipe to the expansion valve 13 on the evaporator.
The liquid, pressurised refrigerant is sprayed through the expansion valve 13
into the depressurised evaporator 11.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
This allows the refrigerant to expand. The expansion reduces the pressure
energy in the refrigerant and very quickly cools the evaporator.
The evaporator 11 is exposed to hot air from the cab and transfers the
heat to the refrigerant. This thermal exchange cools the cab air and heats
the refrigerant.
The heated refrigerant evaporates and turns to gas. This change of state
requires additional energy from the (warm) evaporator, which further
reduces the temperature.
Temperature regulation
The temperature is regulated by the cyclical activation and deactivation of
the magnetic coupling 2 of the air conditioning compressor during operation,
or by mixing hot air from the heater, as for example in defrost mode.
The frequency of switching is controlled by the temperature sensors in the
evaporator and the program in the heating/air conditioning control elec-
tronics (see the technical data).
The temperature is also regulated at the expansion valve. The pressure and
temperature are recorded at the evaporator outlet and the injection quantity
is precisely metered.
These monitoring elements prevent the evaporator from icing up.
Defrost mode
When the windows are misted up, the cab air must be dried. This is done by
operating the air conditioning and the heater at the same time. The cab air
can absorb more moisture when it is heated. The air flowing past the cool
evaporator releases the moisture in the form of condensation.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
16.3.1 Air conditioning compressor
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Sectional view of the compressor

1 Intake connection 5 Swash plate
2 Discharge connection 6 Piston
3 Oil filler plug 7 Outlet valve
4 Magnetic coupling 8 Inlet valve
The air conditioning compressor with its magnetic coupling 4 is attached to
the engine and driven by a V-ribbed belt.
The compressor is equipped with an axial piston rotary group 6, a swash
plate 5 and flap valves.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Basic function
The refrigerant compressor acts as a pump which draws in the gaseous refri-
gerant from the evaporator, compresses it and pumps it to the condenser.
It is bidirectional, which means that the refrigerant compressor can be used
for both directions of rotation.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Functions of the compressor oil

There are the main functions of the compressor oil:
Reducing friction, wear and noise
Hydrostatic transmission of force to the various components of the air
conditioning compressor
Dissipating heat
Increasing density
Lubricating the drive components (piston, shaft seal, bearing)
Magnetic coupling
The pulley runs freely on the compressor shaft and is permanently driven by
the V-ribbed belt.
The power transmission between the pulley and the compressor shaft is
controlled by a magnetic coupling 4.
This is activated by the temperature switch in the evaporator or the pressure
switch on the dryer collector unit.
By periodic activation of the compressor, the evaporator is kept at a temp-
erature of between +1 C (uncoupling) and +4 C (coupling), this preventing
the air conditioning unit from icing up.
If the pressure rises above 24 bar or below 2 bar on the pressure side of the
compressor, it is also uncoupled.
16.3.2 Condenser
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The condenser is part of the cooling system.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Condenser with connections

1 Intake 4 Condenser
2 Outlet 5 Cleaning access cover
3 Retaining frame
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Basic function
The forced ventilation condenser directs the heat output of the refrigera-
tion circuit to the ambient air and in the process condenses the
gaseous refrigerant.
When the air conditioning system is switched on, the cooling system fan
speed is automatically increased.
16.3.3 Dryer collector unit
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The dryer collector unit is located under the left cab access.
It is connected to the outlet of the condenser and the intake of the evaporator.
Cross section of the dryer filter

1 Sight glass with indicator beads 3 Filter element
2 Rising pipe 4 Dryer granules
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Basic function
The refrigerant, which is cooled but still has bubbles in it, passes from the
condenser to the dryer collector unit.
The circulation pressure forces the refrigerant inside through the filter ele-
ment 3 and the dryer granules 4.
The bubbles are removed from the refrigerant and it passes through the
rising pipe 2 to an outlet port connected by a hose to the expansion valve of
the evaporator.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Sight glass
Sight glass
1 White filling level bead 2 Orange moisture indicator bead
The sight glass is located in the upper third of the dryer collector unit.
The sight glass has the following purposes:
Checking when filling the system
Checking the refrigerant level during operation
Checking the moisture content of the refrigerant
Checking contamination of the refrigerant circuit
Sight glass functions Checking when filling the system
When completely filling the system, it is necessary to top up with gaseous
refrigerant on the intake side when the system is switched on. When doing
this, watch the level indicator bead 1 in the sight glass. As soon as it floats on
the refrigerant to the top of the sight glass, stop adding refrigerant.
Checking the refrigerant level during operation
Once the system has been running for about five minutes (to allow the
refrigerant to distribute), the white level indicator bead should be near the top
of the sight glass. As the engine speed increases, the level rises slightly. The
refrigerant should flow through the sight glass with no visible bubbles during
operation. If gas bubbles appear, it is normally due to insufficient refrigerant in
the system.
Sometimes the refrigerant is not sufficiently condensed due to insufficient
heat extraction at the condenser (contamination), which can result in
bubbles in the sight glass.
Checking the moisture content of the refrigerant
There is a small orange indicator bead 2 in the sight glass. If it turns light
grey, there is too much moisture in the system.
In this case the system must be completely drained and evacuated. The oil
in the compressor must also be replaced. The entire dryer collector unit must
be replaced too.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Checking contamination of the refrigerant circuit

A sudden change of colour in the sight glass indicates a problem in the
system. A change in colour is normally caused by overheating in the
refrigerant circuit. This is normally due to internal or external contamination.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
16.3.4 Pressure switch

(ID 10014164)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Dryer
1 Pressure switch 2 Dryer collector unit
The pressure switch is attached to the dryer collector unit in the air conditio-
ning circuit.
Basic function
The pressure switch monitors the pressure in the cooling circuit. It deactivates
the magnetic coupling and therefore the compressor if the pressure is too low
or too high.
This prevents the compressor from running dry if there is too little refrigerant
(insufficient pressure).
Deactivation is also necessary when the pressure is too high. This prevents
damage to components in the system.
Excess pressure may be caused by:
Too much refrigerant in the circuit
Excess temperature due to a dirty condenser or defective fan control
The filter in the dryer collector unit may be very dirty
The expansion valve may be iced up (too much moisture in the refrigerant) or
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
dirty (blocked).
L580 - 459 / from 14171
16.3.5 Evaporator
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Evaporator with expansion valve

1 Hose fitting holder 3 Air conditioning system
2 Expansion valve sealing rings
4 Evaporator
The evaporator is fitted in the heater/air conditioner and is part of the refrige-
rant circuit. The heating/air conditioning unit is housed in the right side of
the cab.
Basic function
The evaporator is a heat exchanger which cools the cab air.
The pressurised refrigerant, which is cooled and liquefied by the condenser,
is sprayed through the expansion valve 2 into the evaporator 4, where there
is a vacuum.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The drop in pressure allows the refrigerant to expand. The expansion causes
a great drop in the thermal energy. The refrigerant is cooled.
The thermal energy taken from the cab air via the fins on the evaporator 4
evaporates the refrigerant.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
17 Lift arms and quick-change
device
17.0
Chapter contents
17 Lift arms and quick-change device.................................... 17.1-1
17.1 Lift arms ........................................................................................17.1-1
17.2 Pin bearing....................................................................................17.2-1

17.2.1 Standard bearing ................................................................17.2-1
17.2.2 Bucket bearing....................................................................17.2-2
17.2.3 Removing the pin bearings.................................................17.2-3
17.2.4 Changing the bushings.......................................................17.2-4
17.2.5 Assembling the bucket bearing ..........................................17.2-5
17.3 Quick change device (optional) ....................................................17.3-1

LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Lift arms and quick-change device Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Service Manual Lift arms and quick-change device
Lift arms
17.1 Lift arms

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the Z lift arms

1 Connecting link 4 Bucket return-to-dig 7 Lift cylinder
2 Linkage proximity switch 8 Bucket stops
3 Contact face for linkage 5 Tilt cylinder 9 Bucket bearing
6 Bucket arm
The lift arms are fitted on the front section of the machine. The lift arms are
designed with Z-bar kinematics. This means that the tilt cylinder, linkage and
connecting link form a Z shape. The Z shape can be seen from the right
side. Parallel load movement is not guaranteed with lift arms with Z-
kinematics. Two lift cylinders and a tilt cylinder are attached to the lift arms.
The lift arms are bolted to the front section via the bucket arm bearings and
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
the cylinder bearings on the base of the cylinder. The bearing points on the lift
arms have seals to protect them against dirt and corrosion. The lift cylinders
Z kinematics are mounted at the piston rod end on the bucket arm and at the cylinder base
end on the front section. The tilt cylinder is mounted at the piston rod end on
the linkage and at the cylinder base end on the front section.
The mechanical bucket return-to-dig device is mounted on the tilt cylinder.
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Lift arm
Basic function
Movements of the bucket arm The lift arms bear and move the attached equipment or implement.
Bucket arm movement

The bucket arm is raised or lowered by extending or retracting the
lift cylinders.
You can find details on this in the section on the working hydraulics.
Movements of the
working attachment
Bucket movement
The bucket is tilted in or out by extending or retracting the tilt cylinder.
You can find details on this in the section on the working hydraulics. LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Pin bearing
17.2 Pin bearing

17.2.1 Standard bearing
Design
The standard bearings on the lift arms have a pin bearing seal.
The following section describes the standard bearing sealing on the lift arms.
Main components of the standard bearing

1 Bucket arm 4 Welded threaded bushing 7 Pin with lug
2 Grease fitting 5 Pin fastening screw 8 Bearing bushing
3 Front section 6 Pin fixing disc 9 Radial seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Pin bearing
17.2.2 Bucket bearing
Design
Sectional view of the bucket arm bearing

1 Bucket arm 4 Welded threaded bushing 7 Pin with lug
2 Grease fitting 5 Pin fastening screw 8 Bearing bushing
3 Bucket bearing plate 6 Pin fixing disc 9 Special radial seal LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Pin bearing
Basic function
The bucket base and bushings are protected from corrosive or abrasive
material by a special radial sealing ring. If this material penetrates the
bearing it can increase wear and enlarge the play. If the bearing is loose, the
friction will cause increased wear despite lubrication.
The radial seal is installed on both sides of the bushing between the bucket
arm and bearing plates. The radial seal is held in place by the bearing pin.
The steel ring is positioned parallel to the contact faces of the bucket arm
and bearing plate and prevents the lip seal ring from being damaged by the
forces acting on the bucket bearing.
Axial clearance between the bearing journals of the bucket arm and the bearing
plate ensures that the bearing moves smoothly and is perfectly sealed.
17.2.3 Removing the pin bearings
Design
Extractor hammer
There are many ways to remove a pin. One tried-and-tested method is to
use the extractor hammer shown above. The tool is easy to make and the
pin is not damaged when removed. The extractor hammer consists of a
round rod with an M36 thread on both ends, two machined faces for an
open-ended wrench, the hammer head and two nuts. The first nut has a
flange to prevent damage to the nuts.
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Procedure
Put the machine in maintenance position 1.
Screw the round rod into the extractor thread of the pin.
Push the hammer onto the rod and tighten the nuts.
Remove the retaining screw.
Knock out the pin.
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Pin bearing
17.2.4 Changing the bushings

Welding processes This section describes how to change the bushings on the bucket bearing.
The method for other bearings is similar.
Procedure
Put the machine in maintenance position 1.
Remove the pin as described in 17.2.3.
Start the machine and drive in reverse.
Drive the machine to a suitable place for repairs.
Slightly raise the lift arms and securely support them.
Switch off the engine and pull out the key.
Turn off the battery main switch.
To make it easier to remove the steel bucket bushings, we recommend
welding several lengthways seams around the bushing. The advantage of
this is that when the bushing cools down it becomes smaller in diameter and
thus easier to push out of the hole.
Perform the welding in accordance with the safety instructions for welding
on the machine (see the operating manual).
Attach the earth lead of the welding equipment as close as possible to
the welding position.
Weld on the inside of the bushing.
Leave a distance of 10 mm between the ends of the bushing and the welds
(see illustration).
Let the bushing cool down after welding.

LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Pin bearing
Pushing out the bushing using You can push out all the bushings on the lift arms using the appropriate push-
the extraction device ing tool. Position a steel washer in the bushing, flush and slightly below centre.
Use a threaded rod and a hydraulic ram to push the bushing out of the hole.
Procedure
Assemble the hydraulic ram 1, the pusher 2, the threaded rod 3 and the
pushing washer 6 (illustrated).
Pushing tool
Fix the threaded rod with a nut.
Carefully push the bushing out of the hole.
There are two ways to fit a new bushing:
Using a press
By shrinking it using liquid nitrogen
Caution
Be very careful when handling liquid nitrogen.
If using liquid nitrogen, carefully follow the safety instructions for handling it.
! Read and follow the safety instructions.
17.2.5 Assembling the bucket bearing

LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Make sure that:

The holes in the bucket are lined up with the holes in the arm
All parts to be assembled are clean
Procedure
Prepare the pin bearing seal.
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Pin bearing
Main components of the pin bearing seal

1 Steel ring 4 Mounting screw
2 Lip seal ring 5 O-ring
3 Protection and installation ring Mz Assembly condition
Screw in the mounting screw 4. This moves the protection and installation
ring 3.
Using a screwdriver, push the lip seal ring 2 (see illustration Mz) into the
grooves of the protection and installation ring 3.
Grease the O-ring 5 well.
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Sectional view of the bucket arm bearing

1 Bucket arm 3 Pin with lug 5 Radial sealing rings
2 Bucket bearing plates 4 Retaining pin with washer
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Pin bearing
Grease the pins, bushings and holes.

Push in the pin until it is flush with the inside of the hole.
Push the pin bearing seal between the bearing arms of the bucket arm
and the bucket bearing plate.
Push in the pin until it is flush with the inside of the bucket arm.
Push the second pin bearing seal between the bearing arms of the
bucket arm and the bucket bearing plate.
Drive the pin completely through the bearing hole.
Remove the mounting screws from the sealing rings and free the sealing
lips by moving the mounting rings.
Push the bucket to the left or right using a crowbar.
Check that the axial clearance between the bearing journals of the bucket
arm and bucket bearing plate is 3.2 mm.
Secure the pin with the pin fixing screw 2 and washer 1.
The illustration shows gaps between the pin lug 4 and the disc 1, and
between the pin lug and the bushing 3. This allows the pin to move slightly,
preventing it from jamming in the fixed bearing (steel to steel).
Pin fastening
Caution
Dirt, water and other corrosive substances may wear or corrode the bearing
pin, surfaces or hole.
Wear and corrosion will irreparably damage the bearing.
! Before you install the pin bearing seal, check the maximum axial
clearance!
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Pin bearing
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Quick change device (optional)
17.3 Quick change device (optional)

Technical data
See section 2.1
The quick-change device is fitted to the lift arms of the machine. It is used for
quickly changing the various attachments on the lift arms.
The different versions are operated differently. You can find detailed opera-
ting instructions in the operating manual.
Design
Main components of the quick-change device

LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Hydraulic quick-change device 4 Hydraulic lines 7 Mechanical indicator

2 Grease fitting 5 Hydraulic cylinder 8 Cover
3 Left locking pin 6 Right locking pin
The quick change device also has brackets for attaching and holding the
working attachment.
The hydraulic lines 4 lead to the hydraulic cylinder 5 via bulkhead fittings.
The hydraulic cylinder and the locking pins are fitted in a bracket and
protected from dust and damage by a cover 8.
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L580 - 459 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171
MJFCIFSS
Quick change device (optional)
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
L556 - 454 / from 15653 L576 - 457 / from 14171
18 Equipment and accessories
18.0
Chapter contents
18 Equipment and accessories .............................................. 18.0-1
18.1 Loading bucket .............................................................................18.1-1
18.2 Forklift ...........................................................................................18.2-1
18.3 Connection sizes L550 / L556 ...................................................18.3-1

18.3.1 Buckets - direct attachment................................................18.3-2
18.3.2 Buckets - quick-change device...........................................18.3-3
18.3.3 Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment ...................18.3-4
18.4 Connection sizes L566 / L576 / L580 ........................................18.4-1

18.4.1 Buckets - direct attachment................................................18.4-2
18.4.2 Buckets - quick-change device...........................................18.4-3
18.4.3 Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment ...................18.4-4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Equipment and accessories Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Equipment and accessories
Bucket
18.1 Loading bucket

Technical data
See section 2.1
The loading bucket is one of many different attachments that can be fitted to
the lift arms.
The bucket is normally fitted directly to the lift arms. If the lift arms are fitted
with an optional quick change device, the bucket is attached to that.
The following section describes the loading bucket with teeth.
Design
The bottom cutting edge varies according to the application.
The various designs include:
Welded tooth holder with plug-in teeth
Four-section, reversible undercut blade
Bucket with teeth

1 Tooth 3 Bottom cutting edge
2 Tooth holder 4 Locking pin
The tooth 1 is plugged into the holder 2 and secured with a crosswise
locking pin 4.
The tooth holder 2 is welded to the bottom cutting edge 3.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Bucket
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Forklift
18.2 Forklift
Technical data
See section 2.1
The forklift is one of many different attachments that can be fitted to the
lift arms.
The forklift is mounted either directly on the lift arms or onto the optional
quick change device.
The following section describes the forklift with adjustable prongs.
Design
The forklift consists of the fork carrier and adjustable fork prongs.
Forklift
1 Fork carrier 2 Fork prongs
The fork prongs 2 are attached to the fork carrier 1 and are secured against
slipping with the fork lock on the upper fork hook.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Forklift
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Connection sizes
18.3 Connection sizes L550 / L556

General information:
The connection sizes provide information when fitting equipment not supplied
by Liebherr.
This is defined as any equipment not bought from Liebherr.
Note that all genuine Liebherr equipment is optimally designed for used with
the machines.
This means that equipment not supplied by Liebherr can impair the operation
of the wheel loader and the machine cannot be guaranteed to work in the
best manner.
Also, equipment not supplied by Liebherr which is poorly or inadequately
designed may damage the machine. Liebherr accepts no liability for damage
caused by equipment which it does not supply.
When fitting attachments, check that the stability described in EN 474
is maintained.
Furthermore, the maximum axle loads and total weight of the machine (see
the type plate) may not be exceeded.
Equipment not manufactured according to the Liebherr connection sizes
must be inspected and approved by the specialist department at Liebherr.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Connection sizes
18.3.1 Buckets - direct attachment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third

parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for
compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law.
All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Connection sizes
18.3.2 Buckets - quick-change device

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007

L566 - 460 / from 14171
Connection sizes
18.3.3 Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Attachment handbook
18.4 Connection sizes L566 / L576 / L580

General information:
The connection sizes provide information when fitting equipment not supplied
by Liebherr.
This is defined as any equipment not bought from Liebherr.
Note that all genuine Liebherr equipment is optimally designed for used with
the machines.
This means that equipment not supplied by Liebherr can impair the operation
of the wheel loader and the machine cannot be guaranteed to work in the
best manner.
Also, equipment not supplied by Liebherr which is poorly or inadequately
designed may damage the machine. Liebherr accepts no liability for damage
caused by equipment which it does not supply.
When fitting attachments, check that the stability described in EN 474
is maintained.
Furthermore, the maximum axle loads and total weight of the machine (see
the type plate) may not be exceeded.
Equipment not manufactured according to the Liebherr connection sizes
must be inspected and approved by the specialist department at Liebherr.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cab access
18.4.1 Buckets - direct attachment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Attachment handbook
18.4.2 Buckets - quick-change device

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007

L566 - 460 / from 14171
Cab access
18.4.3 Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
19 Service Codes, Diagnose
Chapter contents
19 Service Codes, Diagnose ................................................... 19.0-1
19.0 Malfunctions...................................................................................19.0-1
19.0.1 Service codes indicated on the display unit (A13) .................19.0-1
19.0.2 Audible and visual warning signals.......................................19.0-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Service Codes, Diagnose Service Manual
Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual Service Codes, Diagnose
Malfunctions
19.0 Malfunctions
Warning and error messages
Various faults are indicated by the corresponding symbol fields (visually) or
by display instruments on the instrument panel.
Some warning functions are accompanied by audible warning signals.
Finding and eliminating errors and malfunctions
Faults can often be traced back to incorrect operation or servicing of
the machine.
Therefore, carefully read the appropriate section of the operating
manual each time a fault occurs.
Analyse the cause of the fault and correct it immediately.
19.0.1 Service codes indicated on the display unit (A13)

The main electronics (master) monitor many of the machines functions. It
monitors for short circuits, cable rupture, external voltage and incorrect input and
output signals. In addition, the main electronics (master) continuously check the
program sequence and communication with the display unit.
Display unit
Service code display STOP indicator
If a fault occurs while you are setting up or operating the machine, it is shown on
the display unit and stored in the error memory.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Error indicator
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions
Service code display

The service codes are classed in the following groups:
CRITICAL: This is a fault which only concerns the main electronics
(master).
ERROR: This is a fault in the various electrical components or wiring.
ERROR Motor This is a fault in the various electrical components or wiring.
WARNING: This is information on the condition of the power supply,
CAN bus or diesel engine.
The following must be taken into account:
The service codes CRITICAL and ERROR are shown in segment field 1
of the display unit and stored in the service code memory.
The service codes ERROR Motor and WARNING are not shown in the
display unit but are stored in the service code memory.
A warning tone accompanies all service codes (CRITICAL and ERROR)
Effects of a fault
Every malfunction has a defined effect. This is specified in the Effect column of
the service code table.
If errors occur which can damage the machine, the entire machine is shut down.
Neutral travel direction is automatically selected and the machine coasts to a
halt.
Make a note of the service code, as it may disappear from the segment field of
the display unit when the ignition is switched off.
Analyse and rectify the fault.
List of abbreviations
LFD Liebherr ride control system
LH-ECU Liebherr engine control unit (A700D)
PWM Pulse width modulated outputs (proportional solenoid)
RAM Memory
REF Reference (comparison)
sec Seconds
t Fault time; how long a fault must be active to trigger a
service code
Ubat Battery power supply (terminal 30)
V Volts LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on
C1002 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer.
C100E has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
C101C has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
C101F has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
The entire control system
C1025 has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again
C103E has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
C104A has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
C104B has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
C104C has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

C104D has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
C104F has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
C105A has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
C105C has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
C105F has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
C106D has been shut down due to Copy software (see label) onto
The entire control system Check that the CAN modules and
C2002 has been shut down due to software board have the right ID
a critical error. Invalid CAN module type numbers
Two CAN modules with the same
module number but different serial
C200E The entire control system numbers have been detected on a
has been shut down due to CAN bus; CAN module production
a critical error. error Replace the CAN module
Check the power supply to the
The entire control system CAN module F35, check the
C200F
has been shut down due to An essential CAN module has not CAN wiring; then replace the
a critical error. reported on the CAN bus CAN module
The entire control system Check the CAN bus connection,
C2011 has been shut down due to None of the modules on a CAN line check the power supply to the
a critical error. have reported on the CAN bus modules
C2012 has been shut down due to None of the modules on a CAN line check the power supply to the
a critical error. have reported on the CAN bus modules
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
C201A has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
C202A has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
C202B has been shut down due to Data has been received on the CAN software board have the right ID
a critical error. bus from an undefined CAN module numbers
C202C has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
Check the power supply to the
The entire control system CAN modules F24, F38, F43,
C202D
has been shut down due to An essential CAN module has failed F71, check the CAN wiring; then
a critical error. on the CAN bus replace the CAN module
C2033 has been shut down due to Data has been received on the CAN software board have the right ID
a critical error. bus from an undefined CAN module numbers
C203D has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
C203E has been shut down due to All the modules on a CAN line have check the power supply to the
a critical error. failed during operation. modules
The entire control system An attempt was made to reactivate a
C2043 has been shut down due to CAN module during a timeout; this is
a critical error. not permitted Turn the ignition off and on again
Turn the ignition off and on
The entire control system again; if the problem persists,
C205A
has been shut down due to A critical error in a CAN module replace the CAN module
a critical error. caused the system to shut down. according to the error stack.
C205C
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
C205D has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
a critical error. Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer.
C205E has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists,
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
C2065 has been shut down due to A CAN download file could not be Copy software (see label) onto
a critical error. found on the boot card. the card again
C3003 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
a critical error. error contact the manufacturer.
C3009
has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system replace the main electronics
a critical error. error (master).
C300A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
C300B
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

C3023
C3024
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
C302A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
C302B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
C302C has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
C302D has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
CA002 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
CA00A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
CA00B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists,
CA01E has been shut down due to Invalid correction file found on the again; the correction file is
a critical error. boot card generated correctly.
CA024 has been shut down due to Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum
a critical error. memory. is automatically corrected.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

CA029 has been shut down due to Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum
CA02A has been shut down due to Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum
CA02B has been shut down due to Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum
CA02C has been shut down due to Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
CA047 has been shut down due to again; the correction check sum
a critical error. Invalid correction check sum is automatically corrected.
CA048 has been shut down due to again; the retain variable check
a critical error. Invalid retain value check sum sum is automatically corrected.
C205A
C205C
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions
ERROR This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E2000 No emergency steering is closed even though the engine is Check emergency steering
function not running pressure switch B3 and wiring
E2001 No emergency steering does not switch after the engine Check emergency steering
function starts pressure switch B3 and wiring
Emergency steering: Check failed
(B3a emergency steering pump
E2002
No emergency steering check pressure switch did not Check emergency steering
function switch) pressure switch B3a and wiring
Emergency steering: Emergency
E2003 No emergency steering steering pump pressure switch Check emergency steering
function check closed without check pressure switch B3a and wiring
Clean cooling system, check fan
pressure (fan speed), hydraulic
E2013
The output of the travel Hydraulic oil temperature: oil temperature switch B8 (at 20
pump is reduced temperature above 95 C C - 1112 )
Brake system accumulator
pressure symbol field H19
lights up, after 2 minutes Check accumulator pressure
E2016
warning beep sounds switch B19 (switching point 120
constantly, travel direction Brake accumulator pressure: bar), wiring, accumulator charge
cannot be selected pressure too low valve, gear pump
All three LEDs on the
control unit switch light up, Central lubrication system: electrical
E2017
central lubrication system fault at output (cable rupture) of Check distributor, grease lines
does not work grease line fault and lubrication points
Gyrator steering (2 in 1 steering):
Signal at output does not
E2018
Gyrator steering (2-in-1) correspond to the activation (fault
deactivated current) Check the wiring
Enabled options have no
E201A
function Incorrect options enabled Enable correct options
Variable displacement
motor 1 (YEP1), variable
displacement motor 2
E201B (YEP2), forward travel
direction (Y2), reverse travel
direction (Y3) have no Output module 1 / bank 4: no power
function supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F59 or wiring
E201C Output module 1 / bank 3: no power
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
No travel range function supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F60 or wiring
E201D No joystick gyrator steering Output module 2 / bank 4: no power
(2-in-1) function supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F51 or wiring
Travel direction and
additional equipment do not
E201E
work (driving only possible Output module 2 / bank 3: no power
at reduced speed) supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F52 or wiring
Parking brake, working
hydraulics lockout, bucket
E201F
return-to-dig and lift kick-out Output module 1 / bank 1: no power
do not work supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F47 or wiring
E2020 Float position and cooling Output module 1 / bank 2: no power
system fan do not work supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F48 or wiring
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Emergency steering, fan
E2022 reversal, ride control and Output module 2 / bank 2: no power
float position do not work supply. Wiring or fuse defective Check fuse F56 or wiring
Output module 1: return voltage
measured at an output (bank 3) Output module 1, check wiring to
E2023
although it is not activated - wiring or gearbox Y6.1, Y6.2, Y6.3, YMo1
No travel range function module 1 defective or check output module 1
Output module 1, check wiring to
Output module 1: return voltage variable displacement pump Y2,
E2024 measured at control output (bank 4) Y3 or wiring to variable
although it is not activated - wiring or displacement motors YEP1,
No travel direction function module 1 defective YEP2 or output module 1
Output module 2, check wiring to
Output module 2: return voltage variable displacement pump Y2a,
E2025 No travel direction and measured at an output (bank 3) Y3a or wiring to additional
additional equipment although it is not activated - wiring or equipment Y11, Y12 or output
function module 2 defective module 2
Output module 1: fault current/short
E2026 No joystick gyrator steering circuit at output 33 (bank 4,) - wiring Output module 1, check wiring to
(2-in-1) function or module 2 defective module 2 or output module 1
Back-up alarm: options incorrectly
E2046 No back-up alarm function enabled, more than one option
available enabled per output Enable correct option
Joystick steering: pressure switch Joystick steering pressure switch
E2047 check failed; fault in pressure switch B201; check wiring or input
No joystick steering function or wiring module 3
Ride control: set activation and
E2048 The ride control system Ride control: speed limits incorrectly deactivation speeds correctly
does not work set (SCULI)
E2049 Automatic lighting shutdown Faulty activation of power supply Check output module 3, wiring or
does not work terminal 15 (optional) - fault current relay K246
E204A Functions activated via Faulty activation of power supply Check output module 3, wiring or
terminal 15 do not work terminal 15 (optional) - interruption relay K246
E204B All three LEDs on the Central lubrication system: filling
control unit switch light up level low Top up central lubrication system
STOP symbol field H24 Emergency steering pump check
E3000 flashes, no emergency Emergency steering pump check pressure switch B3a; check
steering function available pressure switch: shorted to earth wiring or input module 1
STOP symbol field H8 Emergency steering pump
E3001 flashes, no emergency Emergency steering pump pressure pressure switch B3; check wiring
steering function available switch: shorted to earth or input module 1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Brake system accumulator

pressure symbol field H19
E3002 lights up, condition of the Brake accumulator pressure
service brake cannot be Brake accumulator pressure switch: switch B19; check wiring or input
detected shorted to earth module 1
Float position pressure switch
E3003 Bucket float position pressure B32; check wiring or input
No float position available switch: shorted to earth module 1
E3004 Inching angle sensor: channel 1 Inching angle sensor R1; check
None over current >20 am wiring or input module 1
Inching angle sensor R1, power
E3005 Inching angle sensor: channel 1 supply F44, check wiring or input
None undercurrent <4 am module 1
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E3006 Travel direction cannot be Travel direction switch: forwards Travel direction switch S2a;
selected signal channel 1 shorted to earth check wiring or input module 1
E3007 Travel direction cannot be Travel direction switch: reverse Travel direction switch S2a;
E3008 Lift kick-out inductive switch: shorted Lift kick-out inductive switch B17;
No lift kick-out available to earth check wiring or input module 1
Bucket return-to-dig inductive
E3009 No bucket return-to-dig Bucket return-to-dig inductive switch B15; check wiring or input
available switch: shorted to earth module 1
Fuel level cannot be
E300B detected - minimum filling Fuel level sensor: under voltage <1 Fuel level sensor B25; check
level displayed V wiring or input module 1
Fuel level cannot be
E300C detected - minimum filling Fuel level sensor B25; check
level displayed Fuel level sensor: over voltage >4 V wiring or input module 1
E300D Ignition switch: Start signal T. 50a Ignition switch S1; check wiring
Engine cannot be started shorted to earth or input module 1
E300E Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 1 Gas pedal angle sensor R5;
None over current >20 am check wiring or input module 1
Gas pedal angle sensor R5,
E300F Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 1 power supply F44, check wiring
None undercurrent <4 am or input module 1
Hydraulic oil overheating
symbol field H23 lights up,
E3010 fan running at high speed, Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
driving only possible in fixed Hydraulic oil temperature sensor: B8; check wiring or input module
gear 1 or 2 shorted to earth 1
Hydraulic oil overheating
symbol field H23 lights up,
E3011 fan running at high speed, Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
driving only possible in fixed Hydraulic oil temperature sensor: B8; check wiring or input module
gear 1 or 2 Interruption 1
E3012 Continued driving is only Variable displacement motor 1 speed sensor B2; check wiring or
possible in fixed gear 2 speed sensor: shorted to earth input module 1
E3013 Continued driving is only Variable displacement motor 1 speed sensor B2; check wiring or
possible in fixed gear 2 speed sensor: Interruption input module 1
E3014 Continued driving is only Power take-off speed sensor: Power take-off speed sensor B1;
possible in fixed gear 1 shorted to earth check wiring or input module 1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E3015 Continued driving is only Power take-off speed sensor: Power take-off speed sensor B1;
possible in fixed gear 1 Interruption check wiring or input module 1
Steering column switch S3, relay
E3016 Driving light response: shorted to K3; check wiring or input module
No driving light available earth 2
Steering column switch S3, relay
E3017 High beam response: shorted to K3a; check wiring or input
No high beam available earth module 2
E3018 Indicator signal response: input of Input module 2, check fault in
None input module shorted to earth wiring H15, H16, H17, H18
E3019 Ride control pressure switch: B28; check wiring or input
No ride control function shorted to earth module 1
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E301A Travel direction cannot be Travel direction switch: forwards Travel direction switch S2a;
E301B Travel direction cannot be Travel direction switch: reverse Travel direction switch S2a;
E301C Inching angle sensor: channel 2 Inching angle sensor R1; check
None over current >20 am wiring or input module 2
Inching angle sensor R1, check
E301D Inching angle sensor: channel 2 power supply F45, wiring or input
None undercurrent <4 am module 2
E301E Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 2 Gas pedal angle sensor R5;
None over current >20 am check wiring or input module 2
Gas pedal angle sensor R5,
E301F Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 2 check power supply F45, wiring
None undercurrent (<4 am) or input module 2
E3020 Kick-down function not Kick-down button S2b; check
available Kick-down button: shorted to earth wiring or input module 2
E3021 Option 1 button S2c; check
No option 1 function Option 1 button: shorted to earth wiring or input module 2
E3022 Option 2 button S2d; check
No option 2 function Option 2 button: shorted to earth wiring or input module 2
E3023 Warning buzzer H40; check
No warning buzzer function Warning buzzer: shorted to earth wiring or input module 2
Central lubrication system (filling Central lubrication system (filling
E3024 No central lubrication level) inductive switch: shorted to level) inductive switch B44;
function earth check wiring or input module 2
E3025 Particle filter cannot be Particle filter: input 1 electrical fault Input module 2, fault in sensor,
monitored (shorted to earth) check data logger wiring
E3026 Particle filter cannot be Particle filter input 2 electrical fault
Input module 2, fault in sensor,
monitored (shorted to earth) check data logger wiring
Joystick steering signal encoder
E3027 Joystick steering not Joystick steering signal encoder: left B202; check wiring or input
available signal over current >20 am module 2
E3028 Joystick steering not Joystick steering signal encoder: left B202; check wiring or input
available signal undercurrent <4 am module 2
E3029 Variable displacement motor 2 speed sensor B2a; check wiring
Driving is not possible speed sensor: shorted to earth or input module 2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E302A Variable displacement motor 2 speed sensor B2a; check wiring

Driving is not possible speed sensor: Interruption or input module 2
Central lubrication system
E302B Central lubrication system Central lubrication system (cycles) (cycles) inductive switch B43;
not available inductive switch: shorted to earth check wiring or input module 2
Central lubrication system
E302C Central lubrication system Central lubrication system (cycles) (cycles) inductive switch B43;
not available inductive switch: Interruption check wiring or input module 2
E302D Joystick steering not Joystick steering signal encoder: B202; check wiring or input
available right signal over current >20 am module 3
E302E Joystick steering not Joystick steering signal encoder: B202; check wiring or input
available right signal undercurrent <4 am module 3
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Joystick steering pressure switch
E302F Joystick steering not Joystick steering pressure switch: B201a; check wiring or input
available shorted to earth module 3
E3031 Basket mode - emergency Basket mode emergency off: input Input module 3, fault in sensor,
off function not available signal 1 shorted to earth check wiring
E3032 Basket mode - emergency Basket mode emergency off: input Input module 3, fault in sensor,
off function not available signal 2 shorted to earth check wiring
Basket mode function not Basket mode: input signal 1 shorted Input module 3, fault in sensor,
E3033
available to earth check wiring
Basket mode function not Basket mode: input signal 2 shorted Input module 3, fault in sensor,
E3034
available to earth check wiring
E3035 Joystick steering not Joystick steering button: shorted to Joystick steering button S202;
available earth check wiring or input module 3
Joystick steering inductive switch
E3036 Joystick steering not Joystick steering inductive switch: B200; check wiring or input
available shorted to earth module 3
E3037 Continued driving is only Gear oil temperature sensor: fault
possible in fixed gear 1 or 2 current Check output module 1 or wiring
Pump: pressure sensor shorted to Check pressure sensor BXXX
E3039
None earth and wiring
Pump: pressure sensor power Check pressure sensor BXXX
E303A
None interruption and wiring
E304F LH control lever: capacitive grip Check grip sensor, wiring or
Option not available sensor shorted to earth control unit
E3050 LH control lever: power interruption Check proximity switch, wiring or
Option not available to capacitive proximity switch control unit
E3051 LH control lever: direction Check potentiometer, wiring or
Option not available potentiometer 1 shorted to earth control unit
Option not available potentiometer 1 power interrupted control unit
Option not available potentiometer 2 shorted to earth control unit
Option not available potentiometer 2 power interrupted control unit
E3055 LH control lever: button 1 shorted to Check button 1, wiring or control
Option not available supply voltage unit
E3056 LH control lever: implausible status Check button 1, wiring or control
Option not available button signal unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E3059 LH control lever: button 2 shorted to Check button 2, wiring or control

Option not available supply voltage unit
Travel pump: pressure sensor
E305A
None detected None
Parking brake symbol field
H11 flashes, parking brake Parking brake solenoid valve
E4000
cannot be released, driving Y10; check wiring or output
not possible Parking brake: short circuit at output module 1
Parking brake symbol field
H11 flashes, parking brake Parking brake solenoid valve
E4001
cannot be released, driving Y10; check wiring or output
not possible Parking brake: interruption at output module 1
E4002 Working hydraulics lockout Working hydraulics lockout: short Working hydraulics lockout
cannot be lifted circuit at output solenoid valve Y14; check wiring
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
or output module 1
Working hydraulics lockout

E4003 Working hydraulics lockout Working hydraulics lockout: solenoid valve Y14; check wiring
cannot be lifted interruption at output or output module 1
Bucket return-to-dig solenoid
E4004 No bucket return-to-dig Bucket return-to-dig: short circuit at valve Y9; check wiring or output
available output module 1
E4006 Lift kick-out solenoid valve Y17;
No lift kick-out available Lift kick-out: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 1
Float position solenoid valve
E4008 Y18; check wiring or output
No float position available Float position: short circuit at output module 1
Fan motor proportional valve
E400A Y13; check wiring or output
Fan turns at full speed Fan: short circuit at output module 1
Fan motor proportional valve
Y13; check wiring or output
E400B
module 1, check power supply
Fan turns at full speed Fan: interruption at output F48
E400C Fan turns at full speed Fan: fault current at output Check wiring or output module 1
Fan: the measured return current at Fan motor proportional valve
E400D output does not match the output Y13; check wiring or output
Fan turns at full speed current module 1
E400E Warning buzzer: short circuit at Warning buzzer H40; check
No warning buzzer function output wiring or output module 1
Possible gearbox damage, Swivel angle restriction solenoid
E4010 coupling damage during Swivel angle restriction: short circuit valve Y57; check wiring or output
longer trips at output module 1
Possible gearbox damage, Swivel angle restriction solenoid
E4011 coupling damage during Swivel angle restriction: interruption valve Y57; check wiring or output
longer trips at output module 1
Automatic range A2-3
E4012 activated (1st gear blocked), Coupling 1 solenoid valve Y6.1;
kick-down not possible Coupling 1: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 1
Automatic range A2-3 Coupling 1 solenoid valve Y6.1;
E4013 activated (1st gear blocked), check power supply F60, wiring
kick-down not possible Coupling 1: interruption at output or output module 1
Fixed gear 1 is activated
and variable displacement
E4014
motor 1 is set to a wide Coupling 2 solenoid valve Y6.2;
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
angle to prevent overspeed Coupling 2: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 1
Coupling 2 solenoid valve Y6.2;
and variable displacement
E4015 check power supply F60, wiring
motor 1 is set to a wide
or output module 1
angle to prevent overspeed Coupling 2: interruption at output
Continued driving is only
E4016 possible in fixed gear 1 or 2 Coupling 3 solenoid valve Y6.3;
or automatic range A1-2 Coupling 3: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 1
Continued driving is only
E4017 possible in fixed gear 1 or 2 Coupling 3 solenoid valve Y6.3;
or automatic range A1-2 Coupling 3: interruption at output check wiring or output module 1
E4018 Modulation solenoid valve Y6.4;
Sudden shifting Modulation: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 1
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E4019 Modulation solenoid valve Y6.4;

Sudden shifting Modulation: interruption at output check wiring or output module 1
E401A Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- Variable displacement motor 1: short proportional valve YEP1; check
down not possible circuit at output wiring or output module 1
solenoid valve YEP1; check
E401B
Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- Variable displacement motor 1: power supply F59, wiring or
down not possible interruption at output output module 1
E401C Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- Variable displacement motor 1: fault
down not possible current at output Check wiring or output module 1
Variable displacement motor 1: the Variable displacement motor 1
E401D Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- measured return current at output proportional valve YEP1; check
down not possible does not match the output current wiring or output module 1
and variable displacement Variable displacement motor 2
E401E
motor 1 is set to a wide Variable displacement motor 2: short proportional valve YEP2; check
angle to prevent overspeed circuit at output wiring or output module 1
Fixed gear 1 is activated Variable displacement motor 2
and variable displacement solenoid valve YEP2; check
E401F
motor 1 is set to a wide Variable displacement motor 2: power supply F59, wiring or
angle to prevent overspeed interruption at output output module 1
and variable displacement Variable displacement motor 2
E4020
motor 1 is set to a wide Variable displacement motor 2: fault proportional valve YEP2; check
angle to prevent overspeed current at output wiring or output module 1
and variable displacement Variable displacement motor 2: the Variable displacement motor 2
E4021
motor 1 is set to a wide measured return current at output proportional valve YEP2; check
angle to prevent overspeed does not match the output current wiring or output module 1
Forward travel direction solenoid
E4022 Forward travel direction (pump 1): valve Y2; check wiring or output
Only reverse travel possible short circuit at output module 1
E4023 Forward travel direction (pump 1): valve Y2; check wiring or output
Only reverse travel possible interruption at output module 1
Reverse travel direction solenoid
E4024 Reverse travel direction (pump 1): valve Y3; check wiring or output
Only forward travel possible short circuit at output module 1
E4025 Reverse travel direction (pump 1): valve Y3; check wiring or output
Only forward travel possible interruption at output module 1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Overspeed protection solenoid

E4026 No rear axle brake available Overspeed protection: short circuit valve Y16; check wiring or output
at overspeed at output module 2
Overspeed protection solenoid
E4027 No rear axle brake available Overspeed protection: interruption at valve Y16; check wiring or output
at overspeed output module 2
Quick-change device solenoid
E4028 Quick change device not Quick-change device: short circuit at valve Y53; check wiring or output
Control pressure proportional
E402A Control pressure (pump 1): short valve Y15; check wiring or output
Driving is not possible circuit at output module 2
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E402B Control pressure (pump 1): valve Y15; check wiring or output
Driving is not possible interruption at output module 2
E402C Control pressure (pump 1): fault
Driving is not possible current at output Check wiring or output module 2
Control pressure (pump 1): the Control pressure proportional
E402D measured return current at output valve Y15; check wiring or output
Driving is not possible does not match the output current module 2
E402E Control pressure (pump 2): short valve Y15a; check wiring or
Driving is not possible circuit at output output module 2
E402F Control pressure (pump 2): valve Y15a; check wiring or
Driving is not possible interruption at output output module 2
E4030 Control pressure (pump 2): fault
Driving is not possible current at output Check wiring or output module 2
Control pressure (pump 2): the Control pressure proportional
E4031 measured return current at output valve Y15a; check wiring or
Driving is not possible does not match the output current output module 2
E4032 No emergency steering Emergency steering: short circuit at K11; check wiring or output
E4033 No emergency steering Emergency steering: interruption at K11; check wiring or output
E4034 Fan reversal solenoid valve Y50;
No fan reversal available Fan reversal: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 2
E4035 Fan reversal solenoid valve Y50;
No fan reversal available Fan reversal: interruption at output check wiring or output module 2
E4036 Ride control solenoid valve Y20;
No ride control available Ride control: short circuit at output check wiring or output module 2
E4037 Ride control solenoid valve Y20;
No ride control available Ride control: interruption at output check wiring or output module 2
Float position / ride control
E4038 No ride control and float Float position / ride control: short solenoid valve Y21; check wiring
position available circuit at output or output module 2
Float position / ride control
E4039 No ride control and float Float position / ride control: solenoid valve Y21; check wiring
position available interruption at output or output module 2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E403A Forward travel direction (pump 2): valve Y2a; check wiring or output
Only reverse travel possible short circuit at output module 2
E403B Forward travel direction (pump 2): valve Y2a; check wiring or output
Only reverse travel possible interruption at output module 2
E403C Reverse travel direction (pump 2): valve Y3a; check wiring or output
Only forward travel possible short circuit at output module 2
E403D Reverse travel direction (pump 2): valve Y3a; check wiring or output
Only forward travel possible interruption at output module 2
Additional equipment 1 solenoid
E403E Additional equipment 1 Additional equipment 1: short circuit valve Y11; check wiring or output
cannot be activated at output module 2
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Additional equipment 2 solenoid
E4040 Additional equipment 2 Additional equipment 2: short circuit valve Y12; check wiring or output
cannot be activated at output module 2
Joystick steering left proportional
E4042 No joystick steering Joystick steering, left: short circuit at valve Y51; check wiring or output
Joystick steering right
E4044 No joystick steering Joystick steering, right: short circuit proportional valve Y52; check
available at output wiring or output module 2
Gyrator steering solenoid valve
E4046 No Gyrator steering (2-in-1) Gyrator steering (2-in-1): short circuit Y63; check wiring or output
available at output module 2
Gyrator steering solenoid valve
E4047 No Gyrator steering (2-in-1) Gyrator steering (2-in-1): interruption Y63; check wiring or output
measured at control output bank 4 Output module 1 pin 33, check
E4048
No joystick gyrator steering although it is not activated - wiring or wiring to module 2 or output
(2-in-1) function module 2 defective module 2
Travel direction and Output module 1: return voltage
additional equipment do not measured at control output bank 3 Output module 1 pin 35, check
E404A
work (driving only possible although it is not activated - wiring or wiring to module 2 or output
at reduced speed) module 2 defective module 2
Output module 1: Central lubrication Output module 1, check wiring to
E404C No central lubrication system: fault current/short circuit - central lubrication system M6 or
function wiring or module 1 defective output module 1
Output module 1: Flashing back-up Output module 1, check wiring to
E404E No flashing back-up alarm alarm: fault current/short circuit - lamps H58, H59 or output
function wiring or module 1 defective module 1
measured at control output bank 4 Output module 2 pin 33, check
E4050
although it is not activated - wiring or wiring to module 1 or output
No travel direction function module 1 defective module 1
Output module 2: Control output Output module 2 pin 35, check
E4052 bank 3 : fault current/short circuit - wiring to module 1 or output
No travel range function wiring or module 1 defective module 1
E4054 Reversing light does not Output module 2, fault in
work Reversing light,: short circuit consumer E1, E5 or check wiring
E4056 Back-up alarm does not Output module 2, fault in
work Back-up alarm: short circuit consumer B16 or check wiring
Output module 3, fault in
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E4058 Comfort control does not Comfort control fault at output (over consumer Y11, Y12 or check
work current / short circuit) wiring
E405A Option output: electrical Electrical fault in consumer or wiring
fault at output - option does not work Check consumer or wiring
Joystick steering safety
E405B No joystick steering Joystick steering safety shutdown: shutdown solenoid valve Y64;
available short circuit at output check wiring or output module 2
Joystick steering safety
E405C No joystick steering Joystick steering safety shutdown: shutdown solenoid valve Y64;
available interruption at output check wiring or output module 2
E405D No joystick steering Joystick steering, left: undercurrent valve Y51; check wiring or output
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E405E No joystick steering Joystick steering, left: over current at valve Y51; check wiring or output
No joystick steering Joystick steering, left: discrepancy at
E405F
available output Check output module 2
E4060 No joystick steering Joystick steering, right: undercurrent proportional valve Y52; check
E4061 No joystick steering Joystick steering, right: over current proportional valve Y52; check
No joystick steering Joystick steering, right: discrepancy
E4062
available at output Output module 2
Direction 1 output signal (3rd control
E4076 circuit) - electrical fault at output
Option not available (undercurrent) Check wiring and consumers
Option not available (over current) Check wiring and consumers
Option not available (deviation) Check wiring and consumers
Option not available (short circuit) Check wiring and consumers
E407A circuit) - electrical fault at output
E407B circuit) - electrical fault at output
E407C circuit) - electrical fault at output
E407D circuit) - electrical fault at output
Direction 1 output signal (4th control
E407E circuit) - electrical fault at output
E407F circuit) - electrical fault at output
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E4086 Additional equipment 3 Additional equipment 3: electrical Check solenoid valve Y11a or
cannot be activated fault at output (surge/short circuit) wiring
E4087 Additional equipment 4 Additional equipment 4: electrical Check solenoid valve Y12a or
cannot be activated fault at output (surge/short circuit) wiring
E5022 Variable displacement motor Synchronise variable
Travel slow or impossible synchronisation complete displacement motors again
Gas pedal angle sensor R5:
check redundant signals
E5026 Engine speed cannot be (maximum current difference
changed, driving not Gas pedal angle sensor: different 10%), check power supply F44,
possible values from sensors 1 and 2 F45
Inching angle sensor R1: check
redundant signals (maximum
E5027
No inching function Inching angle sensor: different current difference 10%), check
available values from sensors 1 and 2 power supply F45
Gear oil temperature sensor Clean cooling system, check fan
Speed limited to 20 km/h, triggered: gear oil temperature pressure (fan speed), gear oil
E5028
driving only possible in 1st above 120 C, oil level too high or temperature switch B14
or 2nd gear temperature switch defective (switching point 120 C), oil level
Rear axle brake fault: rear axle
brake activated for longer than 3
E5029
seconds at a time or for more than Check rear axle brake solenoid
No immediate reaction 16 % intermittently valve Y16 for faults
Transfer gear speed sensor,
implausible signal: power take-off
E502A speed does not match variable Transfer gear speed sensor B1;
Driving only possible in 1st displacement motor speed check wiring, coupling 1 or 2 or
gear (monitoring only in 1st gear) switching pressure
Kick-down button is pressed longer
than 10 sacs. (or jammed) after
E502B ignition or pressed longer than 2
No kick-down function minutes (or jammed) in normal
available operation Check kick-down button
Inching angle sensor constantly less
E502C No inching function than 100 % for longer than 2 Clean the inch pedal so that it
available minutes (inch pedal dirty) moves properly
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Check engine oil pressure, fault

E5034 Engine oil pressure too low: Fault in in pressure sensor B701 or
Engine damage pressure sensor or wiring wiring
Travel direction selection Travel direction switch: invalid Travel direction switch S2a,
E5035
cannot be clearly detected switching condition check power supply F15 or wiring
Adjust variable adjustment motor
E5036 The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 1 control range (loosen adjusting
value balance 1 maximum current too low screw)
E5037 The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 1 control range (tighten adjusting
value balance 1 maximum current too high screw)
E5038 The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 1 control range (tighten adjusting
value balance 1 minimum current too high screw)
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
E5039 The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 1 control range (loosen adjusting
value balance 1 minimum current too low
screw)
E503A The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 2 control range (loosen adjusting
value balance 2 maximum current too low screw)
E503B The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 2 control range (tighten adjusting
value balance 2 maximum current too high screw)
E503C The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 2 control range (tighten adjusting
value balance 2 minimum current too high screw)
E503D The motor retains the old Variable displacement motor 2 control range (loosen adjusting
value balance 2 minimum current too low screw)
Driving only possible in fixed Difference between variable
E503E gear 1, kick-down not displacement motor speed 1 and Check coupling 1, check wiring
possible take-off speed in 1st gear and speed sensors B1, B2
Driving only possible in fixed
gear 1, variable
displacement motor 1 only
E503F
controls from 50 - 100 %, Difference between variable
variable displacement motor displacement motor speed 2 and Check coupling 2, check wiring
2 is at 0, coupling 2 is open take-off speed in 1st gear and speed sensors B1, B2a
Driving only possible in fixed
gear 1, variable
displacement motor 1 only
E5040
controls from 50 - 100 %, Difference between variable
variable displacement motor displacement motor speed 2 and Check coupling 2, check wiring
2 is at 0, coupling 2 is open take-off speed in 2nd gear and speed sensors B1, B2a
Automatic range A2-3 Difference between variable
E5041 deactivated (3rd gear displacement motor speed 1 and Check coupling 3, check wiring
blocked) take-off speed in 3rd gear and speed sensors B1, B2
E5042 No joystick steering Joystick steering: redundant input Input module 2, synchronise
available signals outside tolerance tolerance, check sensor signals
Joystick steering: safety shutdown
E5043 No joystick steering due to excessive discrepancies in Input module 2, synchronise
available joystick signals tolerance, check sensor signals
E5054 LH control lever: potentiometer
Option still available outside tolerance range Check wiring and potentiometer
LH control lever: function
E5055 deactivated due to excessive Check wiring, replace
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Option not available potentiometer discrepancy potentiometer

E5056 LH control lever: potentiometer Check module, wiring or
Option not available power supply too low potentiometer
Coolant temperature symbol
field (H13) flashes, STOP Clean cooling system, check fan
E6000 symbol field lights up, speed, coolant temperature
continuous warning buzzer Coolant temperature above 100 C sensor B708, thermostat in
sounds for more than 3 seconds engine
Warning buzzer sounds Clean cooling system, check fan
E6001 intermittently, engine has Charge air temperature above 75 C speed, charge air temperature
reduced power for more than 3 seconds sensor B707
Warning buzzer sounds Clean cooling system, check fan
E6002 intermittently, engine has Fuel temperature above 75 C for speed, fuel temperature sensor
reduced power more than 10 seconds B709
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Warning buzzer sounds Drain water from fuel pre-filter,
E6003 intermittently, engine has check pre-filter water detector
reduced power Water in fuel pre-filter B710
Engine oil pressure symbol Check oil level, engine oil
field (H4) lights up, STOP pressure (2 bar at 1000 rpm, 3
E6004 symbol field (H36) lights up, bar at 2100 rpm), pressure relief
continuous warning buzzer valve, engine oil pressure sensor
after 10 sec. Engine oil pressure too low B701, wiring
Replace/clean air filter, check air
E6006 Air filter contamination Air filter contamination: vacuum filter contamination vacuum
symbol field (H7) lights up switch switched switch B4, wiring
Coolant temperature symbol
field (H13) and STOP Check coolant level, check
E6008 symbol field light up, coolant level sensor B13, check
continuous warning buzzer power supply F36
sounds Coolant level too low
E600B Risk of damage to the Engine overspeed: too high while Brake machine while driving
engine driving downhill > 2500 rpm downhill
Depends on the fault. - (see
E600C Calculation error depends Always given for an additional additional code in the error
on the fault service code memory)
E600D Emergency engine shutdown: speed
Engine shuts down sensors 1 and 2 defective Check speed sensor B711, B712
Engine not running Faulty injector (pump element Check injector (pump element
E600E
smoothly solenoid) solenoid), wiring
Engine electronics detected internal Check engine control unit, check
E600F
Engine shuts down error wiring, check power supply F36
Power reduction can be triggered
by: coolant temperature, charge
E6010 air temperature, fuel
temperature, altitude
Engine has reduced power Engine power reduction active (atmospheric pressure)
Engine altitude power reduction
E6011 active (from 2250 m above sea
Engine has reduced power level) None
E6012 Calculation error depends Always given for an additional additional code in the error
on the fault service code memory)
Charge control symbol field
E6016 (H6) lights up, parking brake
cannot be released Alternator not supplying power Check alternator G3 or wiring
Calculation error, engine module
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
sent internal error code. - This is Depends on the fault. - (see

E6017
Calculation error depends shown in the display unit instead of additional code in the error
on the fault the engine service code memory)
CAN bus: display unit timeout ,
Check display unit A13 power
EA005 hardware defective, fault in CAN
supply F11 or CAN wiring
No display unit function wiring
CAN bus: air conditioning controller Check air conditioning controller
EA006 Air conditioning controller timeout, hardware defective, fault in A21 power supply F19, F19a or
does not work CAN wiring CAN wiring
CAN bus: output module 3 timeout,
EA007 Output module 3 does not hardware defective, error in CAN Check output module 3 (A17c) or
work wiring CAN wiring
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
CAN bus: input module 3 timeout,
EA008 Input module 3 does not hardware defective, error in CAN Check input module 3 (A16c) or
CAN bus: air conditioning control Check air conditioning control
EA010 Air conditioning control unit unit timeout, hardware defective, unit A22 power supply F9or CAN
does not work fault in CAN wiring wiring
CAN bus: option control unit timeout,
EA011 Option control unit does not hardware defective, fault in CAN Check option control unit A19 or
EA020 Calculation error depends Calculation error, option input additional code in the error
on the fault module 1 sent an internal error code memory)
EA021 Calculation error depends Calculation error, option output additional code in the error
on the fault module 1 sent an internal error code memory)
EA023 Calculation error depends Calculation error, option keypad additional code in the error
on the fault module sent an internal error code memory)
EA024 Calculation error depends Calculation error, main keypad additional code in the error
EA025 Calculation error depends Calculation error, display unit additional code in the error
EA026 Calculation error depends Calculation error, output module 2 additional code in the error
on the fault sent an internal error code memory)
EA027 Calculation error depends Calculation error, output module 1 additional code in the error
EA028 Calculation error depends Calculation error, input module 2 additional code in the error
EA029 Calculation error depends Calculation error, input module 1 additional code in the error
EA02A Calculation error depends Calculation error, master unit additional code in the error
Depends on the fault. - Check
EA02B Calculation error - power soppy F36 (see additional
depending on the fault CAN module calculation error code in the error memory)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

EA02C Calculation error - additional code in the error
depending on the fault General calculation error memory)
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
CAN communication was
Check the ECU A700D engine
E4976C No direct effect resynchronised
control unit
CAN driver problem in ECU
CAN communication timeout Check the ECU A700D engine
E4976D No direct effect
CAN driver problem in ECU control unit
Construction machine CAN timeout
Emergency operation: engine when requesting global process
E49638 Check cables, plugs, master
running at lower idle speed CAN bus connection problem or
master unit A15 defective
Emergency operation: engine receiving total output data
E49639 Check cables, plugs, master
Emergency operation: engine while sending messages
E4963A Check cables, plugs, master
Construction machine CAN
Emergency operation: engine passive error
E4963B Check cables, plugs, master
Construction machine CAN bus off
Emergency operation: engine
E4963C CAN bus connection problem or Check cables, plugs, master
running at lower idle speed
CAN AMET timeout while requesting
Emergency operation: engine global process
E4969C Check cables, plugs, master
CAN AMET timeout receiving total
Emergency operation: engine output data
E4969D Check cables, plugs, master
CAN AMET timeout while sending
Emergency operation: engine messages
E4969E Check cables, plugs, master
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
CAN AMET passive error

E4969F CAN bus connection problem or Check cables, plugs, master
CAN AMET bus off
E496A0 CAN bus connection problem or Check cables, plugs, master
CAN communication status CAN A
E49764 No direct effect cannot connect at 125kB
control unit
control unit
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
control unit
E49767 No direct effect cannot connect at 1MB
control unit
CAN communication status CAN B
control unit
control unit
E4976A No direct effect cannot connect at 500kB
control unit
E4976B No direct effect cannot connect at 1MB
control unit
control unit
CAN communication could not
E4976E No direct effect Master unit A15
detect actual CAN A baud rate
Input module 1
Output module 1
control unit
CAN communication could not
E4976F No direct effect Master unit A15
detect actual CAN B baud rate
Input module 1
Output module 1
Turn the ignition off and on again;
Engine cannot be started, or Internal error stack overflow
E497C8 if the problem persists, replace the
engine shut down Internal engine control unit error
ECU A700D engine control unit.
Engine cannot be started, or Internal error exception
E497C9 if the problem persists, replace the
Engine cannot be started, or Internal error program test
E497CA if the problem persists, replace the
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Engine cannot be started, or Internal error RAM test
E497CB if the problem persists, replace the
E497CC No direct effect Internal error error memory overflow if the problem persists, replace the
E497CD No direct effect Internal error computing time test if the problem persists, replace the
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
The error that occurred
E497CE Internal error error index too high if the problem persists, replace the
cannot be displayed
Engine cannot be started, or Error accessing EEPROM
E4982C if the problem persists, replace the
Engine cannot be started, or Parameter memory check sum fault
E4982D if the problem persists, replace the
Invalid parameter memory in Turn the ignition off and on again;
Engine cannot be started, or
E4982E EEPROM if the problem persists, replace the
engine shut down
Internal engine control unit error ECU A700D engine control unit.
ECU page check sum fault
E4982F No direct effect if the problem persists, replace the
Internal engine control unit error
NMI page check sum fault
E49830 No direct effect if the problem persists, replace the
Work data page check sum fault
Load collective check sum fault
Load collective structure value has Turn the ignition off and on again;
E49833 No direct effect changed if the problem persists, replace the
EEPROM does not have enough Turn the ignition off and on again;
E49834 No direct effect space for the load collective if the problem persists, replace the
E49835 No direct effect Permanent data check sum fault if the problem persists, replace the
Check the on-board circuit
E49890 Supply voltage too low (<9V) (battery, alternator, wiring,
engine shut down
connectors)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Check the on-board circuit
engine shut down
E49891 Supply voltage too high (>33V) (battery, alternator, wiring,
Communication only possible
connectors)
with diagnostic tools
Check the wiring and ECU A700D
Engine shutdown Digital output shorted to supply engine control unit
E49892 Communication only possible voltage If the problem cannot be rectified:
with diagnostic tools Defective line or component Replace the ECU A700D engine
control unit
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Check the wiring and ECU A700D
Error releasing power outputs engine control unit
Engine shutdown
E49893 Power outputs cannot be activated or If the problem cannot be rectified:
All digital outputs switched off
deactivated Replace the ECU A700D engine
control unit
Error on PS1 Check the on-board circuit
E49894 Engine control unit supply voltage (battery, alternator, wiring,
engine shut down
PS1 defective connectors) with reference to PS1
Engine shutdown 12V reference fault: voltage too low Check the on-board circuit
E49895 Communication only possible (<10V) (battery, alternator, wiring,
with diagnostic tools Defective line or component connectors) with reference to PS1
Engine shutdown 12V reference fault: voltage too high Check the on-board circuit
E49896 Communication only possible (>14V) (battery, alternator, wiring,
with diagnostic tools Defective line or component connectors) with reference to PS1
Power curve internally Offset on full-load curve New data record or replace the
E499BD
restricted Internal engine control unit error ECU A700D engine control unit
Incorrect pump code (pump code is
Injector class 3 is used as a
E499BF wrong on at least one element) Check and modify pump code
replacement
Speed recording error Check the ECU A700D wiring to
E49B4C Higher speed is used Maximum speed difference between the speed sensor and check the
transmission and odometer is too high speed sensor
Insufficient alternator voltage when
Check the wiring from the ECU
engine is not running
A700D engine control unit to the
E49BB0 No direct effect Defective wiring from engine control
alternator and check the ECU
unit to alternator, defective alternator
A700D engine control unit
or broken V belt
Excess alternator voltage when
engine is not running
or broken V belt
Insufficient alternator voltage when
engine is running
or broken V belt
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Excess alternator voltage when

engine is running
or broken V belt
Alternator voltage insufficiently
different to supply voltage
or broken V belt
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Alternator voltage excessively different
to supply voltage
or broken V belt
Exhaust gas recirculation fault
Check the wiring harness,
External exhaust gas Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
E49ED0 connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 1 not activated Output and feedback values do
not match
External exhaust gas Shorted to supply voltage
recirculation 1 not activated Output and feedback values do
not match
External exhaust gas Hardware fault Check the ECU A700D engine
E49ED2
recirculation 1 not activated Transistor status does not match control unit
feedback value
Negative control deviation Check the wiring harness,
External exhaust gas
E49ED3 Target less than actual value, connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 1 not activated
controlled PWM goes A700D engine control unit
towards minimum
Positive control deviation Check the wiring harness,
E49ED4 Target greater than actual value, connectors, EGR valve, ECU
controlled PWM goes A700D engine control unit
towards maximum
Current too high (switched off)
External exhaust gas current higher than permitted
recirculation 1 not activated minimum value although
not energised
Threshold violation when switched off
Current too low (activated state) Check the wiring harness,
E49ED6 current less than permitted connectors, EGR valve, ECU
minimum value A700D engine control unit
Threshold violation
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Current too high (activated state) Check the wiring harness,
E49ED7 current higher than permitted connectors, EGR valve, ECU
maximum value A700D engine control unit
Threshold violation
External exhaust gas EGR open without activation
E49EDB connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 1 not activated Open status is read even
without activation
External exhaust gas EGR closed without activation
E49EDC connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 1 not activated Closed status is read even
without activation
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Air flap fault
Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
E49F34 Air flap not activated connectors, air flap, ECU A700D
Output and feedback values do
engine control unit
not match
Air flap fault
Shorted to supply voltage
Output and feedback values do
engine control unit
not match
Air flap fault
Hardware fault Check the ECU A700D engine
E49F36 Air flap not activated
Transistor status does not match control unit
feedback value
Air flap fault
E49F37 Air flap not activated Target less than actual value, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D
controlled PWM goes engine control unit
towards minimum
Air flap fault
E49F38 Air flap not activated Target greater than actual value, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D
controlled PWM goes engine control unit
towards maximum
Air flap fault
current higher than permitted
minimum value although
engine control unit
not energised
Air flap fault
Current too low (activated state) Check the wiring harness,
E49F3A Air flap not activated current less than permitted connectors, air flap, ECU A700D
minimum value engine control unit
Threshold violation
Air flap fault
Current too high (activated state) Check the wiring harness,
E49F3B Air flap not activated current higher than permitted connectors, air flap, ECU A700D
maximum value engine control unit
Threshold violation
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Starter fault
E4A060 Engine cannot be started connectors, starter, ECU A700D
Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
engine control unit
Starter fault
E4A061 Engine cannot be started connectors, starter, ECU A700D
Shorted to supply voltage
engine control unit
Heating flange 1 fault Check the wiring harness,
Preglow and afterglow Short circuit to earth or cable rupture connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A18C
phases fail Output and feedback values do plug unit, external relay, ECU
not match A700D engine control unit
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Preglow and afterglow Shorted to supply voltage connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A18D
Heating flange 1 fault
Preglow and afterglow Hardware fault Check the ECU A700D engine
E4A18E
phases fail Transistor status does not match control unit
feedback status
Negative control deviation
Preglow and afterglow connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A18F Target less than actual value,
phases fail plug unit, external relay, ECU
controlled PWM goes
towards minimum
Positive control deviation
E4A190 Target greater than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards maximum
Current too high (switched off) Check the wiring harness,
Preglow and afterglow current higher than permitted connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A191
phases fail minimum value although plug unit, external relay, ECU
not energised A700D engine control unit
Current too low (activated state)
E4A192 current less than permitted
minimum value
Threshold violation
Current too high (activated state)
E4A193 current higher than permitted
maximum value
Threshold violation
No voltage in heating element
E4A197 A low level is read despite activation
the external relay has not switched
correctly
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Voltage in heating element
E4A198 A high level is read despite no
activation the external relay has not
switched correctly
Preglow and afterglow Short circuit to earth or cable rupture connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A1F0
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Preglow and afterglow Shorted to supply voltage connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A1F1
Preglow and afterglow Hardware fault Check the ECU A700D engine
E4A1F2
phases fail Transistor status does not match control unit
feedback status
E4A1F3 Target less than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards minimum
E4A1F4 Target greater than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards maximum
Preglow and afterglow current higher than permitted connectors, heating flange/glow
E4A1F5
phases fail minimum value although plug unit, external relay, ECU
not energised A700D engine control unit
E4A1F6 current less than permitted
minimum value
Threshold violation
E4A1F7 current higher than permitted
maximum value
Threshold violation
No voltage in heating element
E4A1FB A low level is read despite activation
the external relay has not
switched correctly
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Voltage in heating element
E4A1FC A high level is read despite no
activation the external relay has not
switched correctly
Turbocharger fault Check the wiring harness,
Short circuit to earth or cable rupture connectors, turbocharger solenoid
E4A254 Afterglow phase failure
Output and feedback values do valve, ECU A700D engine control
not match unit
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Shorted to supply voltage connectors, turbocharger solenoid
not match unit
Turbocharger fault
feedback status
Turbocharger fault
connectors, turbocharger solenoid
E4A257 Afterglow phase failure Target less than actual value,
valve, ECU A700D engine control
controlled PWM goes
unit
towards minimum
Turbocharger fault
E4A258 Afterglow phase failure Target greater than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
unit
towards maximum
Turbocharger fault
current higher than permitted connectors, turbocharger solenoid
minimum value although valve, ECU A700D engine control
not energised unit
Turbocharger fault
E4A25A Afterglow phase failure current less than permitted
minimum value
unit
Threshold violation
Turbocharger fault
E4A25B Afterglow phase failure current higher than permitted
maximum value
unit
Threshold violation
Short circuit to earth or cable rupture connectors, turbocharger solenoid
E4A2B8 Turbocharger is not activated
not match unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Shorted to supply voltage connectors, turbocharger solenoid
E4A2B9 Turbocharger is not activated
not match unit
Turbocharger fault
E4A2BA Turbocharger is not activated
feedback status
Turbocharger fault
E4A2BB Turbocharger is not activated Target less than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
unit
towards minimum
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect Cause Remedy
code
Turbocharger fault
E4A2BC Turbocharger is not activated Target greater than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
unit
towards maximum
Turbocharger fault
current higher than permitted connectors, turbocharger solenoid
E4A2BD Turbocharger is not activated
minimum value although not valve, ECU A700D engine control
energised unit
Turbocharger fault
E4A2BE Turbocharger is not activated current less than permitted minimum
value
unit
Threshold violation
Turbocharger fault
E4A2BF Turbocharger is not activated current higher than permitted
maximum value
unit
Threshold violation
External exhaust gas Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
E4A31C connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 2 not activated Output and feedback values do not
match
External exhaust gas Shorted to supply voltage
E4A31D connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 2 not activated Output and feedback values do not
match
External exhaust gas Hardware fault Check the ECU A700D engine
E4A31E
recirculation 2 not activated Transistor status does not match control unit
feedback value
E4A31F Target less than actual value, connectors, EGR valve, ECU
controlled PWM goes towards A700D engine control unit
minimum
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

E4A320 Target greater than actual value, connectors, EGR valve, ECU
controlled PWM goes towards A700D engine control unit
maximum
External exhaust gas current higher than permitted
E4A321 connectors, EGR valve, ECU
recirculation 2 not activated minimum value although not
energised
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Malfunctions

Service
Effect

Service Manual L550 L580 2plus2 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Service Manual L550 L580 2plus2 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

en

Dr. Hans Liebherr Strae 4

1.1 Safety regulations ...........................................................................1.1-1

1.2 Special tools for maintenance and repair work...............................1.2-1

1.1 Safety regulations

Denotes actions or circumstances which may result in damage to the machine.

2. Observance of these instructions does not exempt you from following

1.1.2 Overview of the safety regulations

1.2 Special tools for maintenance and

1.2.2 Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines

For installing and removing the

1.2.3 Special tools for hydraulic cylinders

1.2.4 Special tools for electronics

1.2.5 Special tools for axles

Description ID no. Use Remarks

3 bushing driver with guide For installing bushing,

Description ID no. Use Remarks

1.2.6 Special tools for the transmission

1.2.7 Central lubrication system

1.2.8 Special tools for the air conditioning system

1.2.9 Special tools for cab windows

2.1 Technical data ................................................................................2.1-1

2.1 Technical data

Wheel loader with Z lift arms

Description Value Unit

B Dumping height 3500 mm

Description Value Unit

Wheel loader with Z lift arms

Description Value Unit

Travel speed in travel range A2-3 0 - 40 km/h

Wheel loader with Z lift arms

Description Value Unit

Turning radius over bucket outer edge 7096 mm

Description Value Unit

Wheel loader with Z lift arms

Description Value Unit

Description Value Unit

Wheel loader with Z lift arms

FOPS cab and driver.

Description Value Unit

Turning radius over bucket outer edge 7420 mm

Description Value Unit

2.1.2 Diesel engine and pump distributor gear

Longitudinal / traverse inclinability 45 / 45

Valid for: L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 10116679

Valid for: L566 - 460 / from 14171; ID 9079516

Description Value Unit

Description Value Unit

Upper idle speed 206510 min-1

Description Value Unit

Fuel fine filter

Refuelling pump (optional)

Flow rate 50 l/min

Air filter vacuum switch

Pump distributor gear

2.1.3 Cooling system

Description Value Unit

Description Value Unit

2.1.4 Travel hydraulics

Variable displacement pump

Power L550 111 kW

Description Value Unit

Variable displacement motor 1